Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                
100% found this document useful (1 vote)
745 views

IB Physics QB

1. The document contains 20 physics questions with multiple choice answers about topics such as forces, motion, energy, waves, electricity and more. 2. Each question has one correct answer out of 4 options (A, B, C or D) and is worth 1 mark. 3. The questions test conceptual understanding of core physics principles as well as mathematical problem solving abilities.

Uploaded by

Spark Tube
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
100% found this document useful (1 vote)
745 views

IB Physics QB

1. The document contains 20 physics questions with multiple choice answers about topics such as forces, motion, energy, waves, electricity and more. 2. Each question has one correct answer out of 4 options (A, B, C or D) and is worth 1 mark. 3. The questions test conceptual understanding of core physics principles as well as mathematical problem solving abilities.

Uploaded by

Spark Tube
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 1683

1. Which of the following cont ain s one funda m e n t a l and one derive d unit?

A. amp e r e kilogr a m
B. amp e r e coulom b
C. joule newt o n
D. joule coulom b
(Tot al 1 mar k )

2. The cur r e n t , I, throu g h a resis to r is me a s u r e d with a digital am m e t e r to be


0.10 A. The unce r t ai n t y in the calcul a t e d value of I 2 will be

A. 1 %.

B. 2 %.

C. 5 %.

D. 20 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

3. A skydive r of mas s 80 kg falls vertic ally with a const a n t spee d of 50 m s –1 .


The upw a r d force acting on the skydive r is appr oxi m a t e ly

A. 0 N.

B. 80 N.

C. 800 N.

D. 4000 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1
4. Joseph runs along a long str aig h t tra ck. The varia tion of his spe e d v with
time t is show n below.

After 25 secon d s Josep h has run 200 m. Which of the following is cor r e c t at
25 secon d s ?

Ins t a n t a n e o u s Aver a g e spe e d / m


sp e e d / m s –1 s –1
A. 8 m s –1 8 m s –1
B. 8 m s –1 10 m s –1
C. 10 m s –1 8 m s –1
D. 10 m s –1 10 m s –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 2
5. A car of mas s 1000 kg accel e r a t e s on a str ai g h t , flat, horizon t a l roa d with
an accele r a t i o n
a = 0.3 m s –2 .
The driving force F on the car is oppos e d by a resis tive force of 500 N.

The net (result a n t ) force on the car is

A. 200 N.

B. 300 N.

C. 500 N.

D. 800 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 3
6. A tennis ball of mas s m moving horizon t a lly with spe e d u strike s a vertic al
tenni s racke t. The ball bounc e s back with a horizon t al spe e d v .

The mag ni t u d e of the chan g e in mom e n t u m of the ball is

A. m (u + v ).

B. m (u – v ).

C. m (v – u ).

D. zero.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

7. A brot h e r and sister take the sam e time to run up a set of step s. The siste r
has a grea t e r mas s than her brot h e r . Which of the following is corr e c t ?

Has don e the mo s t Has dev e l o p e d the


work gre a t e s t pow e r
A. brot h e r brot h e r
B. brot h e r siste r
C. siste r brot h e r
D. siste r siste r
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 4
8. A nucle a r power station prod u c e s 10 GW of elect ric al powe r . The powe r
gen e r a t e d by the nuclea r reaction s in the core of the rea c t o r is 25 GW. The
efficiency of the powe r station is

A. 15 %.

B. 35 %.

C. 40 %.

D. 60 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

9. A cyclist rides arou n d a circul a r tra ck at a unifor m spe e d. Which of the


following corr e c tly gives the net horizont a l force on the cyclist at any given
insta n t of time?

Net horiz o n t a l forc e Ne t horiz o n t a l forc e


alo n g dire c t i o n of nor m a l to dire c t i o n of
mot i o n mo t i o n
A. zero zero
B. zero non zero
C. non zero zero
D. non zero non zero
(Tot al 1 mar k )

10. A solid piece of tungs t e n melts into liquid withou t a cha n g e in tem p e r a t u r e .
Which of the following is corr ec t for the molec ul e s in the liquid pha s e
comp a r e d with the molec ul e s in the solid pha s e ?

Kin e t i c en e r g y Pot e n t i a l en e r g y
A. sam e gre a t e r
B. sam e sa m e
C. grea t e r gre a t e r
D. grea t e r sa m e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 5
11. What is the mas s of car bo n- 12 tha t cont ai n s the sam e num b e r of atom s as
14 g of silicon- 28?

A. 6 g

B. 12 g

C. 14 g

D. 24 g
(Tot al 1 mar k )

12. A heat e r of const a n t powe r heat s a liquid of mass m and specific hea t
capacity c . The grap h below shows how the tem p e r a t u r e of the liquid varies
with time.

The gra di e n t of the gra p h is k and no ene r gy is lost to the surr o u n d i n g s .


What is the powe r of the heat e r ?

A. km c

k
B. mc

mc
C. k

1
D. km c
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 6
13. A tran sv e r s e wave travels from left to right. The diagr a m below show s how,
at a particul a r insta n t of time, the displa c e m e n t of particle s in the medi u m
varies with position. Which arrow rep r e s e n t s the direc tion of the velocity of
the particle mar k e d P?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 7
14. The gra p h shows how the displa c e m e n t varies with time for an objec t
unde r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion.

Which gra p h shows how the object’s accel e r a ti o n a varies with time t ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 8
15. Light travels from air into glass as show n below.

What is the refr ac tive index of glas s?

s in P
A. s in S

s inQ
B. s in R

s in P
C. s in R

s inQ
D. s in S
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 9
16. Which of the following elect r o m a g n e t i c waves has a freq u e n c y gr e a t e r
than that of visible light?

A. Ultraviolet

B. Radio

C. Microw av e s

D. Infra r e d
(Tot al 1 mar k )

17. One elect r o nv olt is equ al to

A. 1.6 × 10 –19 C.

B. 1.6 × 10 –19 J.

C. 1.6 × 10 –19 V.

D. 1.6 × 10 –19 W.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 10
18. A batt e r y of inter n al resis t a n c e 2 Ω is conn e c t e d to an exte r n a l resist a n c e
of 10 Ω. The cur r e n t is 0.5 A.

What is the emf of the bat t e r y?

A. 1.0 V

B. 5.0 V

C. 6.0 V

D. 24.0 V
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 11
19. In the circuit below, which of the following will caus e the gre a t e s t incr e a s e
in the readi n g of the voltm e t e r ?

A. An incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e

B. An incr e a s e in light inten sity

C. A decr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e

D. A decr e a s e in light intensi ty


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 12
20. A sphe ric al plan e t of unifor m density has thr e e time s the mas s of the Eart h
and twice the aver a g e radius. The mag nit u d e of the gravit a tio n al field
str e n g t h at the surface of the Eart h is g .
What is the gravit a tion al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of the plane t ?

A. 6 g

2
g
B. 3

3
g
C. 4

3
g
D. 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

21. An elect r o n pass e s the nort h pole of a bar mag n e t as show n below.

What is the direction of the ma g n e t i c forc e on the elect r o n ?

A. Into the pag e

B. Out of the page

C. To the left

D. To the right
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 13
22. Which of the following gives the corr e c t num b e r of proton s and neut r o n s in
14
a nucleu s of car bo n- 14 ( 6 C )?

Prot o n s Ne u t r o n s
A. 8 6
B. 6 8
C. 14 6
D. 6 14
(Tot al 1 mar k )

23. A fres hly prep a r e d sam pl e cont ain s 4.0 μg of iodine- 131. After 24 days, 0. 5
μg of iodine- 131 rem ai n. The best estim a t e of the half- life of iodine- 131 is

A. 8 days.

B. 12 days.

C. 24 days.

D. 72 days.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

24. Which of the following caus e s the gre a t e s t num b e r of ioniza tion s as it
pass e s throu g h 1 cm of air?
(The total ener gy of the ionizing radia tio n is the sam e .)

A. An alpha particle

B. A bet a particle

C. A gam m a- ray

D. An X-ray
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 14
25. What is the pheno m e n o n that best explains why gre e n h o u s e gas e s absor b
infrar e d radiation?

A. Reson a n c e

B. Interf e r e n c e

C. Refrac tion

D. Diffractio n
(Tot al 1 mar k )

26. In which of the following places will the albe do be gre a t e s t ?

A. A forest

B. A gras sl a n d

C. An ocea n

D. A polar ice cap


(Tot al 1 mar k )

27. A wind tur bin e produ c e s a powe r P whe n the wind spe e d is v . Assumin g
that the efficiency of the turbi n e is const a n t , the best estim a t e for the
powe r prod u c e d when the wind spe e d beco m e s 2 v is

A. 2 P.

B. 4 P.

C. 6 P.

D. 8 P.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 15
28. A sphe ric al black body has absolut e tem p e r a t u r e T 1 . The sur r o u n di n g s are
kept at a lower absolut e tem p e r a t u r e T 2 . What is the net powe r per unit
are a lost by the body?

A. σT 1 4

B. σT 2 4

C. σ( T 1 4 – T 2 4 )

D. σ( T 1 4 + T 2 4 )
(Tot al 1 mar k )

29. The desig n of a nuclea r powe r station includ e s an elect ric a l gen e r a t o r . The
function of the gene r a t o r is to conve r t

A. nuclea r ener gy to kinetic ene r gy.

B. kinetic ener gy to ther m al ene r gy.

C. ther m al ener gy to elect ric a l ene r gy.

D. kinetic ener gy to elect ric al ene r gy.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

30. What is the unit of surfac e heat capa city?

A. J kg –1 K–1

B. J K –1

C. J m –2 K–1

D. J m –3 K–1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 16
31. Data analysis ques tion.

The photog r a p h below shows a mag nifie d imag e of a dark cent r a l disc
sur r o u n d e d by conce n t r i c dark rings. These rings wer e prod u c e d as a
res ult of interfe r e n c e of monoc h r o m a t i c light.

The gra p h below shows how the ring diam e t e r D varies with the ring
num b e r n.
The inner m o s t ring corr e s p o n d s to n = 1. The corr e s p o n d i n g dia m e t e r is
labelled in the photo g r a p h . Erro r bars for the diam e t e r D are show n.

IB Questionbank Physics 17
(a) Stat e on e piece of eviden c e tha t shows that D is not propo r tio n a l to n .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) On the gra p h above, draw the line of bes t- fit for the data points.
(2)

(c) Theory sugg e s t s that D 2 = kn .

A grap h of D 2 agains t n is show n below. Error bar s are show n for the
first and last data points only.

IB Questionbank Physics 18
(i) Using the first grap h, calcul a t e the perc e n t a g e unc e r t a i n t y in D 2 ,
of the ring n = 7.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Based on the secon d gra p h, stat e on e piec e of evide nc e that


suppo r t s the relation s hi p D 2 = kn .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Use the secon d grap h to dete r m i n e the value of the cons t a n t k,
as well as its unce r t a i n t y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 19
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 20
(iv) Stat e the unit for the const a n t k .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

32. This ques tion is abou t motion in a ma gn e t i c field.

An elect r o n, that has been accele r a t e d from rest by a pote n ti al differ e n c e


of 250 V, ent e r s a region of ma gn e t i c field of stre n g t h 0.12 T that is
direct e d into the plane of the pag e.

(a) The elect r o n’s path while in the region of mag n e ti c field is a qua r t e r
circle. Show that the

(i) spee d of the elect r o n afte r accele r a t i o n is 9.4 × 10 6 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 21
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 22
(ii) radi us of the pat h is 4.5 × 10 –4 m.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The diagr a m below shows the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n as it ent e r s
and leaves the region of ma gn e t i c field. The mag ni t u d e of the initial
mom e n t u m and of the final mom e n t u m is 8.6 × 10 –24 N s.

(i) On the diagr a m above, draw an arro w to indica t e the vector


repr e s e n t i n g the cha n g e in the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n .
(1)

(ii) Show that the magni t u d e of the cha n g e in the mom e n t u m of the
elect r o n is
1.2 × 10 –23 Ns.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 23
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 24
(iii) The time the elect r o n spe n d s in the region of mag n e ti c field is
7.4 × 10 –11 s.
Estim a t e the magni t u d e of the aver a g e force on the elect r o n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

33. This ques tion is abou t circula r motion.

A ball of mas s 0.25 kg is attac h e d to a string and is ma d e to rota t e with


cons t a n t spee d v along a horizon t al circle of radius r = 0.33 m. The string
is att ac h e d to the ceiling and make s an angle of 30° with the vertical.

(a) (i) On the diagr a m above, draw and label arrow s to


repr e s e n t the forces on the ball in the position show n.
(2)

(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r the ball is in equilibri u m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 25
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Deter m i n e the spee d of rota tio n of the ball.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

34. This ques tion is abou t a nuclea r rea c t o r .

(a) Uraniu m is used as a fuel in a small res e a r c h nucle a r rea c t o r. The


235
conce n t r a t i o n of 9 2 U in a sam pl e of ura ni u m mus t be incr e a s e d
befor e it can be used as a fuel.

235
Stat e the nam e of the proc e s s by which the conc e n t r a t i o n of 92 U is
incr e a s e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The reac t o r produ c e s 24 MW of powe r. The efficiency of the reac t o r is


32 %. In the fission of one ura ni u m- 235 nucle u s 3.2 × 10 –11 J of ene r gy
is relea s e d .

Deter m i n e the mass of ura ni u m- 235 that unde r g o e s fission in one year
in this react o r .

IB Questionbank Physics 26
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(c) Explain what would happ e n if the mode r a t o r of this reac t o r wer e to be
rem ove d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) During its nor m al oper a tio n, the following set of reac tio n s take s plac e
in the reac t o r .

1
0n  29328U  239
9 2U (I)
239 239 0
92U  9 3N p  –1 e v (II)
239 239 0
9 3 N p  9 4P u  –1e v (III)

IB Questionbank Physics 27
(i) Stat e the nam e of the proc e s s repr e s e n t e d by reac tio n (II).

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Com m e n t on the inte r n a t i o n a l implic atio n s of the prod u c t of


thes e reac tion s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 28
35. This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c oscillations .

A longit u di n al wave travels throu g h a mediu m from left to right.

Grap h 1 show s the variation with time t of the displa c e m e n t x of a particle


P in the mediu m .

Grap h 1

(a) For par ticle P,

(i) stat e how gra p h 1 shows that its oscillation s are not dam p e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) calcula t e the mag nit u d e of its maxim u m accele r a ti o n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 29
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 30
(iii) calcula t e its speed at t = 0.12 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) stat e its directio n of motion at t = 0.12 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Grap h 2 shows the variatio n with position d of the displa c e m e n t x of


particl es in the mediu m at a partic ul a r insta n t of time.

Grap h 2

Deter m i n e for the longit u di n a l wave, using gra p h 1 and gra p h 2,

IB Questionbank Physics 31
(i) the frequ e n cy.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) the spee d.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

Grap h 2 – repr o d u c e d to assist with answ e ri n g (c)(i).

(c) The diagr a m shows the equilibriu m positions of six par ticle s in the
medi u m .

IB Questionbank Physics 32
(i) On the diagr a m above, draw cros s e s to indic at e the positions of
thes e six particle s at the insta n t of time whe n the displa c e m e n t is
given by grap h 2.
(3)

(ii) On the diagr a m above, label with the lette r C a par ticl e that is at
the cent r e of a com p r e s s i o n.
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

36. This ques tion is abou t mech a ni c s and the r m a l physic s.

The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the spe e d v of a ball of mas s
0.50 kg, that has been relea s e d from rest above the Eart h’s surfa c e .

The force of air resist a n c e is not negligible. Assum e that the accel e r a t io n
of free fall is
g = 9.81 m s –2 .

(a) Stat e, witho u t any calcula tion s , how the gra p h could be use d to
dete r m i n e the dista n c e fallen.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 33
(b) (i) In the spac e below, dra w and label arrow s to rep r e s e n t
the forces on the ball at
2.0 s.

(1)

(ii) Use the grap h opposit e to show that the accel e r a t io n of the ball
at 2.0 s is appr oxi m a t e ly 4 m s –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the force of air resis t a n c e on the ball
at 2.0 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 34
(iv) Stat e and explain whet h e r the air resist a n c e on the ball at t = 5.0
s is smaller than, equal to or gre a t e r tha n the air resist a n c e at t
= 2.0 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) After 10 s the ball has fallen 190 m.

(i) Show that the sum of the pot e n ti al and kinetic ene r gi e s of the
ball has decr e a s e d by 780 J.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The specific heat capa city of the ball is 480 J kg –1 K–1 . Estim a t e
the incr e a s e in the tem p e r a t u r e of the ball.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 35
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 36
(iii) Stat e an assu m p t i o n mad e in the esti m a t e in (c)(ii).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

37. This ques tion is abou t nuclea r physics.

(a) (i) Define bindin g ener g y of a nucle u s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

239
(ii) The mas s of a nucle u s of plutoniu m ( 9 4 P u ) is 238.99 0 3 9 6 u.
Deduc e that the bindin g ene r gy per nucle on for pluto ni u m is 7.6
MeV.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 37
(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with nucle on num b e r A of the bindin g
ener gy per nucleon.

239
Plutoni u m ( 9 4 P u ) und e r g o e s nucle a r fission accor di n g to the rea c tion
given below.

239 1 91 146 1
9 4P u 0 n  3 8S r  5 6Ba x 0 n

(i) Calculat e the num b e r x of neut r o n s prod u c e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Use the grap h to estim a t e the ene r gy rele a s e d in this rea c tion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 38
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 39
(c) Stable nuclei with a mass num b e r gre a t e r tha n about 20, cont ai n mor e
neut r o n s than proton s . By refe r e n c e to the prope r ti e s of the nucle a r
force and of the elect r o s t a t i c force, sugg e s t an explan a ti o n for this
obse rv a tio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

38. This ques tion is abou t elect ri c circ uit s.

(a) Define

(i) electro m o ti v e force (emf ) of a batt e r y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) electrical resista n c e of a condu c t o r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 40
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 41
(b) A batt e r y of emf ε and negligibl e inter n al resist a n c e is conne c t e d in
series to two resisto r s . The cur r e n t in the circuit is I.

(i) Stat e an equa tio n giving the total powe r delive r e d by the batt e r y.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) The poten ti al differ e n c e acros s resisto r R 1 is V 1 and that acros s


resis to r R 2 is V 2 .
Using the law of the cons e rv a tio n of ene r gy, ded uc e the equ a tio n
below.

ε = V1 + V2

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 42
(c) The grap h shows the I-V cha r a c t e r i s ti c s of two cond uc t o r s , X and Y.

On the axes below, sketc h gra p h s to show the variatio n with pote n ti al
differ e n c e V of the resist a n c e of cond u c t o r X (label this gra p h X) and
cond u c t o r Y (label this gra p h Y).
You do not nee d to put any num b e r s on the vertical axis.

(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 43
(d) The condu c t o r s in (c) are conn e c t e d in serie s to a batt e r y of emf ε and
negligible inter n al resis t a n c e .

The powe r dissip a t e d in eac h of the two resisto r s is the sam e .

Using the grap h given in (c),

(i) det e r m i n e the emf of the batt e r y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) calcula t e the total powe r dissipa t e d in the circ uit.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 44
39. This ques tion is abou t the ene r gy bala nc e of the Ear t h.

(a) The inten sity of the Sun’s radia tio n at the position of the Eart h is
appr oxi m a t ely
1400 W m –2 .

Sugg e s t why the aver a g e powe r receive d per unit are a of the Eart h is
350 W m –2 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The diagr a m shows a simplifie d model of the ene r gy bala nc e of the
Eart h’s surfac e.
The diagr a m shows radi ation ent e ri n g or leaving the Eart h’s surfa c e
only.

The aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e is T E and


that of the atmo s p h e r e is T A = 242 K.

(i) Using the data from the diagr a m , stat e the emissivity of the
atm os p h e r e .

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 45
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 46
(ii) Show that the intensity of the radia tio n radia t e d by the
atm os p h e r e towar d s the Eart h’s surfa c e is 136 W m –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) By refer e n c e to the ene r gy bala n c e of the Eart h’s surfa c e ,


calcula t e T E .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) (i) Outline a mec h a ni s m by which part of the radia tion


radi at e d by the Eart h’s surfa c e is abso r b e d by gre e n h o u s e gas e s
in the atm os p h e r e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 47
(3)

(ii) Sugg e s t why the incomi n g solar radia tio n is not affect e d by the
mech a ni s m you outline d in (c)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Carbo n dioxide (CO 2 ) is a gre e n h o u s e gas. Stat e on e sour c e and


on e sink (object that re move s CO 2 ) of this gas.

Sourc e: ............................................................................................
..................

Sink: ................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

40. This ques tion is abou t stan di n g (station a r y) wave s.

(a) Descri b e two ways that sta n di n g waves are differ e n t from travelling
waves.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) An expe ri m e n t is car ri e d out to mea s u r e the spe e d of sound in air,

IB Questionbank Physics 48
using the appa r a t u s show n below.

A tube that is open at both ends is plac e d vertic ally in a tank of wate r ,
until the top of the tube is just at the surfa c e of the wate r . A tunin g
fork of freq u e n cy 440 Hz is soun d e d above the tube. The tube is
slowly rais e d out of the wat e r until the loudn e s s of the soun d reac h e s
a maxim u m for the first time, due to the form a tio n of a sta n di n g wave.

IB Questionbank Physics 49
(i) Explain the form a tio n of a sta n di n g wave in the tube.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Stat e the position in the tube tha t is always a node.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) The tube is raise d a little furt h e r . Explain why the loudn e s s of the
soun d is no longe r at a maxim u m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 50
(c) The tube is rais e d until the loudn e s s of the soun d rea c h e s a maxim u m
for a secon d time.
Betwe e n the two positions of maxim u m loudn e s s , the tube has bee n
raise d by 36.8 cm.
The frequ e n c y of the sound is 440 Hz. Estim a t e the spee d of sound in
air.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

41. This ques tion is abou t the Dopple r effect.

The sound emitt e d by a car’s hor n has frequ e n c y f, as me a s u r e d by the


driver. An observ e r moves towa r d s the station a r y car at const a n t spe e d and
meas u r e s the frequ e n c y of the soun d to be f ′.

(a) Explain, using a diagr a m , any differ e n c e betw e e n f ′ and f.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 51
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 52
(b) The frequ e n c y f is 3.00 × 10 2 Hz. An obse rv e r moves towa r d s the
station a r y car at a const a n t spe e d of 15.0 m s –1 . Calcula t e the
obse rv e d frequ e n cy f ′ of the sound.
The spee d of soun d in air is 3.30 ×1 0 2 m s –1 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

42. This ques tion is abou t optical resolution and accom m o d a t i o n.

A woma n is walking along a straig h t pat h, which is at right angl es to a


telep h o n e line, as show n in the diagr a m below. Two birds are perc h e d on
the line, 0.40 m apar t.

(diagra m not to scale)

The diam e t e r of the pupil of the wom a n’s eye is 2.5 mm and the aver a g e
wavele n g t h of visible light is 550 nm.

(a) Use the Rayleigh criterion to estim a t e the dista n c e D at which the
wom a n will just be able to see two sepa r a t e birds.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 53
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) The wom a n looks down at her watc h and is able to focus on it clea rly.
Explain how her eyes are able to focus on nea r object s as well as far
object s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 54
43. This ques tion is abou t the photo el e c t r i c effect.

In an experi m e n t to inves tig a t e the photoel e c t ri c effect, light of freq u e n c y f


is inciden t on the met al surface A, show n in the diagr a m below. A pote n t i al
differ e n c e is applied betw e e n A and B. The photoel e c t ri c cur r e n t is
meas u r e d by a sensitive am m e t e r . (Note: the comple t e elect ric al circ uit is
not show n.)

When the frequ e n cy of the light is reduc e d to a cert ai n value, the cur r e n t
meas u r e d by the am m e t e r beco m e s zero. Explain how Einst ei n’s
photo el e c t r i c theo ry accou n t s for this obse rv a ti o n.

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 55
44. This ques tion is abou t atomic spec t r a .

Diagr a m 1 shows some of the ene r gy levels of the hydrog e n atom. Diagr a m
2 is a rep r e s e n t a t i o n of part of the emission spec t r u m of atomic hydrog e n .
The lines show n rep r e s e n t tran si tion s involving the –3.40 eV level.

(a) Deduc e that the ene r gy of a photon of wavel e n g t h 658 nm is 1.89 eV.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 56
(b) (i) On dia g r a m 1 , dra w an arrow to show the elect r o n
tran si tion bet w e e n ene r gy levels that gives rise to the emission of
a photon of wavelen g t h 658 nm. Label this arro w with the lette r
A.
(1)

(ii) On dia g r a m 1 , draw arrow s to show the elect r o n tra n si tion s


betw e e n ene r gy levels that give rise to the emis sion of photo n s of
wavele n g t h s 488 nm, 435 nm and 411 nm.
Label thes e arro w s with the lette r s B, C and D.
(1)

(c) Explain why the lines in the emission spe ct r u m of atomic hydro g e n ,
show n in dia g r a m 2 , beco m e close r toge t h e r as the wavele n g t h of the
emitt e d photo n s decr e a s e s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

45. This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.

Iodine- 124 (I-124) is an uns t a bl e radioisot o p e with proton num b e r 53. It


unde r g o e s bet a plus decay to form an isotop e of telluriu m (Te).

(a) Stat e the reaction for the dec ay of the I-124 nuclide.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 57
(b) The grap h below show s how the activity of a sam pl e of iodine- 124
chan g e s with time.

(i) Stat e the half- life of iodine- 124

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the activity of the sam pl e at 21 days.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 58
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 59
(iii) A sam pl e of an unkno w n radioisoto p e has a half- life twice tha t of
iodine- 124 and the sam e initial activity as the sam pl e of iodine-
124. On the axes opposit e , dra w a gra p h to show how the activity
of the sam pl e would cha n g e with time.
Label this grap h X.
(1)

(iv) A secon d sam pl e of iodine- 124 has half the initial activity as the
origin al sam pl e of iodine- 124. On the axes opposit e, dra w a
grap h to show how the activity of this sam pl e would cha n g e with
time. Label this grap h Y.
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

46. This ques tion is abou t analog u e and digital stor a g e .

As part of a physics lesson, Isobel and Claire eac h make an audio recor di n g
of their teac h e r . They then comp a r e the quality of their recor di n g s . Isobel’s
reco r di n g is in analog u e form a t whe r e a s Claire’s recor di n g is digital and
stor e d on a CD.

(a) Stat e on e possible analog u e met h o d of stor a g e use d by Isobel.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The first time the reco r di n g s are playe d, their qualitie s are identic al.
Outline whet h e r the quality of eac h recor di n g is expe c t e d to rem a i n
the sam e after many uses.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 60
(c) Use the following infor m a ti o n to dete r m i n e the num b e r of bits use d in
Clair e’s digit al recor di n g.

Total time of recor di n g = 30 minut e s


Sam plin g freq u e n c y = 40 kHz
For m a t of recor di n g = Ste r e o (2 cha n n e l s )
Num b e r of bits per sam pl e = 16

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

47. This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCDs).

An imag e of the surfac e of the Eart h is recor d e d by a digital cam e r a from


an aero pl a n e. Each imag e cover s 144 km 2 of the Eart h’s surfa c e and is
reco r d e d by a squa r e CCD of are a 36 cm 2 .

(a) Calcula t e the mag nifica tio n of the syste m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The CCD cont ai n s 1.0 × 10 8 pixels. Deduc e the minim u m dista n c e
betw e e n two points on Eart h that can be resolve d by this cam e r a .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 61
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 62
(c) It is propos e d to improve the qua n t u m efficiency of the CCD. Sta t e the
effect, if any, on the resolution of the syst e m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

48. This ques tion is abou t a Schmit t trigg e r .

The diagr a m below show s a Sch mit t trigg e r circ uit bas e d on an oper a t io n a l
amplifie r (op- amp).

The outpu t of this Schmit t trigg e r is positive satu r a ti o n (+13 V) or nega tive
satu r a ti o n (–13 V).

(a) Stat e two prop e r t i e s of an ideal op- amp.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 63
(b) Deter m i n e the input value tha t will caus e the outpu t to switc h from –
13 V to +1 3 V.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Explain how a Schmit t trigg e r can be use d to res h a p e a digital puls e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 64
49. This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.

Erin is a pass e n g e r on a train making a call to a sta n d a r d fixed telep h o n e


line (“landline”) from her mobile phon e. The train move s Erin betw e e n
adjac e n t com m u ni c a t io n cells. Outline the cha n g e s , if any, tha t take place
in the

(a) cellular excha n g e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) public switch e d telep h o n e netwo r k (PSTN).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 2 mark s )

50. This ques tion is abou t lengt h contr a c ti o n and simult a n e i ty.

(a) Define proper lengt h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A space s hi p is travelling to the right at spe e d 0.75 c, thro u g h a tunn el


which is open at both ends. Obse rv e r A is sta n di n g at the cent r e of
one side of the tunn el. Obse rv e r A, for whom the tunn el is at rest,
mea s u r e s the lengt h of the tunn el to be 240 m and the lengt h of the
space s hi p to be 200 m. The diag r a m below shows this situa tion from
the pers p e c t ive of obse rv e r A.

IB Questionbank Physics 65
Observ e r B, for whom the spac e s hi p is station a r y, is sta n di n g at the
cent r e of the spac e s hi p.

(i) Calculat e the Lorent z factor, γ, for this situa tion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the lengt h of the tunn el accor di n g to obs e rv e r B.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Calculat e the lengt h of the spa c e s hi p accor di n g to obse rv e r B.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iv) Accor din g to obse rv e r A, the spa c e s hi p is compl e t e ly inside the


tunn el for a shor t time. Sta t e and explain whet h e r or not,
accor di n g to obs erv e r B, the spac e s hi p is eve r compl e t ely inside
the tunn el.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 66
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 67
(c) Two sour ce s of light are locat e d at eac h end of the tunn el. The
diagr a m below show s this situa tion from the pers p e c tiv e of obse rv e r
A.

Accordi n g to observ e r A, at the insta n t whe n obse rv e r B pas s e s


obse rv e r A, the two sour c e s of light emit a flash. Obse rv e r A see s the
two flashe s simult a n e o u s ly. Discus s whet h e r or not obse r v e r B sees
the two flashe s simult a n e o u s ly.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

51. This ques tion is abou t meso n s .

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an exch a n g e par ticle.

IB Questionbank Physics 68
.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 69
(b) In 1935, the physicist Hide ki Yukawa pre dic t e d that the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s was medi a t e d by particle s calle d
meson s . Given that the rang e of the stron g inte r a c t io n is
appr oxi m a t ely 1.5 × 10 –15 m, calcula t e a possible value for the res t
mas s of a meso n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) A meson called the pion was det e c t e d in cosmic ray reac tio n s in 1947
by Powell and Occhialini. The pion com e s in thr e e possible cha r g e
stat e s: π + , π – and π 0 The Feyn m a n diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s a
possible reac tion in which a pion particip a t e s .

Stat e and explain whet h e r the meso n prod u c e d is a π + , π – or a π 0 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 70
(d) Stat e the possible spin num b e r s of meso n s and explain your answ e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(e) Explain why, accor di n g to the qua r k model, it is not possible for a
particl e to consist of two up qua r k s only.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

52. A particle of mas s m is moving with const a n t spee d v in unifor m circul a r


motion. What is the total work done by the cent ri p e t a l force during one
revolutio n?

A. Zero

m v2
B. 2

C. mv 2

D. 2π mv 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 71
IB Questionbank Physics 72
53. Which of the following is equivale n t to the principl e of ene r gy
cons e r v a t i o n?

A. Newt o n’s first law

B. The first law of ther m o dy n a m i c s

C. Newt o n’s secon d law

D. The secon d law of ther m o d y n a m i c s


(Tot al 1 mar k )

54. An ideal gas und e r g o e s the the r m o d y n a m i c cha n g e s rep r e s e n t e d in the P –


V diagr a m below
(P → Q → R → P).

Volume / m 3
Which of the following is the net work done by the gas in a cycle?

A. 4.5 × 10 5 J

B. 3.0 × 10 5 J

C. 1.0 × 10 5 J

D. Zero
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 73
55. Light travels from air into glass as show n below.

The refr ac tive index of the glas s is

s in3 0
A. s in8 0

s in8 0
B. s in3 0

s in6 0
C. s in1 0

s in1 0
D. s in6 0
(Tot al 1 mar k )

56. The funda m e n t a l (first har m o nic) frequ e n c y for a partic ul a r orga n pipe is
330 Hz. The pipe is close d at one end but open at the othe r . What is the
frequ e n c y of its secon d har m o ni c ?

A. 110 Hz

B. 165 Hz

C. 660 Hz

D. 990 Hz
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 74
57. Light is diffract e d at a single slit. Which of the following gra p h s best
repr e s e n t s how the inten sity I of the diffrac t e d light varies with the
diffractio n angle θ?

A.

B.

C.

IB Questionbank Physics 75
D.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

58. Light of wavele n g t h λ is emitt e d by two point sour c e s . The light pass e s
thro u g h a circul a r ape r t u r e of diam e t e r b and is rec eive d by an obse rv e r .
The angul a r sep a r a t i o n of the sour c e s from the obse r v e r’ s position is θ. The
sour c e s are not resolve d by the obse rv e r . Which of the following
mat h e m a t i c al relation s hi p s applie s?

λ
A. θ < 1.22 b

λ
B. θ > 1.22 b

λ
C. θ = 1.22 b

λ
D. θ = b
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 76
59. Plane- polarize d light is incide n t nor m ally on a polariz e r which is able to
rota t e in the plane per p e n di c ul a r to the light as show n below.

In diagr a m 1, the intensity of the incide n t light is 8 W m –2 and the


tran s mi t t e d inten si ty of light is 2 W m –2 . Diagr a m 2 show s the polariz e r
rota t e d 90° from the orient a t io n in diagr a m 1. What is the new tra n s m i t t e d
inten si ty?

A. 0 W m –2

B. 2 W m –2

C. 6 W m –2

D. 8 W m –3
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 77
60. A light- dep e n d e n t resis to r (LDR) and a fixed resisto r are conne c t e d in the
poten ti al divider circuit show n below.

The voltm e t e r read s 3.0 V. Which of the following chan g e s would caus e the
readi n g on the voltm et e r to incr e a s e ?

A. Swap pi n g the positions of the LDR and the fixed resisto r

B. Incr e a si n g the resist a n c e of the fixed resis to r

C. Incr e a si n g the amou n t of light shining on the LDR

D. Decr e a s i n g the amou n t of light shining on the LDR


(Tot al 1 mar k )

61. A coil of wire has a large num b e r of turn s. It is move d relative to a fixed
mag n e ti c field. The emf gen e r a t e d will be equal to the

A. rat e of chan g e of magn e t i c flux linka g e .

B. rat e of chan g e of the magn e ti c flux throu g h the coil.

C. chan g e of mag n e t i c flux linka g e .

D. chan g e of the mag n e ti c flux thro u g h the coil.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 78
62. A sinus oid al ac powe r supply has rms voltag e V and supplie s rms cur r e n t I.
What is the maxim u m insta n t a n e o u s powe r delive r e d ?

A. 2 VI

B. 2 VI

C. VI

VI
D. 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 79
63. A positively char g e d par ticle follows a circul a r path as show n below.

Which of the following elect ric fields could have caus e d the cha r g e d
par ticl e to follow the above pat h?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 80
64. A stone is throw n from a cliff and it lands in the sea as show n below. Air
resis t a n c e is negligible.

Which of the following stat e m e n t s is corr e c t whilst the stone is in motion?

A. The vertic al compo n e n t of the stone’s displa c e m e n t is const a n t .

B. The horizont al compo n e n t of the stone’s displa c e m e n t is const a n t .

C. The vertic al compo n e n t of the stone’s velocity is const a n t .

D. The horizont al compo n e n t of the stone’s velocity is cons t a n t .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 81
65. Which of the diag r a m s below bes t rep r e s e n t s the equipot e n t i al surfa c e s
arou n d two identical point mas s e s ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 82
66. Which of the following grap h s repr e s e n t s how the total ene r gy E of an
orbitin g sat ellite varies with orbital radius r?

A.

B.

C.

IB Questionbank Physics 83
D.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

67. The diagr a m below show s a circ uit involving a photo el e c t r i c cell. Whe n UV
light is shon e onto the met al catho d e , elect r o n s are emitt e d esta blis hi n g a
photoc u r r e n t .

Which of the following chan g e s could caus e the photoc u r r e n t to stop?

A. Incr e a si n g the poten ti al differe n c e of the powe r supply.

B. Incr e a si n g the frequ e n c y of the UV light.

C. Incr e a si n g the intensity of the UV light.

D. Chan gi n g the met al surfac e to one with a smalle r work function.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 84
68. Elect r o n s are accel e r a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e V . Their
de Broglie wavel en g t h is λ. The accel e r a t i n g pote n ti al differ e n c e is
incr e a s e d to 2 V . Which of the following gives the new de Broglie
wavele n g t h ?

A. 2λ

B. 2λ

λ
C. 2

λ
D. 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

69. Which of the following ene r gy level diag r a m s bes t rep r e s e n t s the kine tic
ene r gy E K of the “elect r o n in a box” model, whe r e an elect r o n is confine d to
move in one dim en sio n ? The varia bl e n is an inte g e r (1, 2, 3, 4 etc. ).

A.

B.

IB Questionbank Physics 85
C.

D.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

70. A proton is confine d within a nucle u s. What is the orde r of ma gni t u d e of


the unce r t a i n t y in its mom e n t u m ?

A. 10 –30 Ns

B. 10 –20 Ns

C. 10 –10 Ns

D. 1 Ns
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 86
71. Differe n t nuclides spont a n e o u s ly und e r g o radioa c tive dec ay, emittin g
eithe r α, β or γ radi ation.
Which of the following cor r e c tly identifies all the emission s tha t do not
have discr e t e ener gi e s ?

A. α

B. β

C. γ

D. α and γ
(Tot al 1 mar k )

72. The half- life of a radioac tive isotop e is 10 days. What is the perc e n t a g e of
the sam pl e rem ai ni n g after 25 days?

A. 0 %

B. 18 %

C. 25 %

D. 40 %
(Tot al 1 mar k )

73. Which of the following fuels has the highe s t ene r gy density?

A. Coal

B. Gas

C. Oil

D. Uraniu m
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 87
74. The decim al num b e r 18 is rep r e s e n t e d in bina ry by a five bit digital
num b e r . Which of the following cor r e c tly identifies the least- significa n t bit
(LSB) and the most- significan t bit (MSB) of the bina ry num b e r ?

LSB MS B
A. 0 0
B. 0 1
C. 1 0
D. 1 1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

75. A CD stor e s digital inform a t io n with a serie s of bum p s (lands) and pits. The
dept h of each pit is d . Which of the following is the most appr o p ri a t e
wavele n g t h of laser light to recove r the infor m a ti o n?

d
A. 2

B. d

C. 2d

D. 4d
(Tot al 1 mar k )

76. Which of the following digital device s is least likely to use a char g e- couple d
device (CCD) in its const r u c t io n?

A. Fax machin e

B. Cam e r a

C. Watch

D. X-ray machi n e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 88
77. Data analysis ques tion.

The photog r a p h below shows a mag nifie d imag e of a dark cent r a l disc
sur r o u n d e d by conce n t r i c dark rings. These rings wer e prod u c e d as a
res ult of interfe r e n c e of monoc h r o m a t i c light.

The gra p h below shows how the ring diam e t e r D varies with the ring
num b e r n.
The inner m o s t ring corr e s p o n d s to n = 1. The corr e s p o n d i n g dia m e t e r is
labelled in the photo g r a p h . Erro r bars for the diam e t e r D are show n.

IB Questionbank Physics 89
(a) Stat e on e piece of eviden c e tha t shows that D is not propo r tio n a l to n .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) On the gra p h opposit e, dra w the line of best- fit for the data points.
(2)

(c) It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n D and n is of the form

D = cn p

whe r e c and p are const a n t s .

Explain what grap h you would plot in orde r to det e r m i n e the value of
p.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 90
1
(d) Theory sugg e s t s that p = 2 and so D 2 = kn (whe r e k = c 2 ).

A grap h of D 2 agains t n is show n below. Error bar s are show n for the
first and last data points only.

(i) Using the first grap h, calcul a t e the perc e n t a g e unc e r t a i n t y in D 2 ,


of the ring n = 7.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Based on the secon d gra p h, stat e on e piec e of evide nc e that


suppo r t s the relation s hi p D 2 = kn .

IB Questionbank Physics 91
.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Use the secon d grap h to dete r m i n e the value of the cons t a n t k,
as well as its unce r t a i n t y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(iv) Stat e the unit for the const a n t k .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

78. This ques tion is abou t a prob e in orbit.

A prob e of mas s m is in a circul a r orbit of radius r arou n d a sphe ri c al


plane t of mas s M .

IB Questionbank Physics 92
(diagra m not to scale)

IB Questionbank Physics 93
(a) Stat e why the work done by the gravit a tio n a l force durin g one full
revolution of the prob e is zero.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Deduc e for the prob e in orbit that its

GM
(i) spee d is v = r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

GM m

(ii) total ener gy is E = 2r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 94
(c) It is now requi r e d to place the prob e in anot h e r circul a r orbit furth e r
away from the plane t.
To do this, the prob e’s engin e s will be fired for a very short time.

Stat e and explain whet h e r the work done on the prob e by the engin e s
is positive, neg ative or zero.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

79. This ques tion is abou t polarizatio n.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by polariz e d light.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 95
(b) Unpola rize d light is incide n t on the surfa c e of a plastic. The angle of
inciden c e is θ.
The reflect e d light is viewe d thro u g h an analys e r whos e tra n s m i s sio n
axis is vertical.

The variatio n with θ of the inte n si ty I of the tra n s m i t t e d light is show n


in the grap h.

(i) Explain why ther e is an angle of incide n c e , for which the


inten si ty of the tran s mi t t e d light is zero.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 96
(ii) Calculat e the refr ac tive index of the plastic.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Unpola rize d light from a sour c e is split, so that the r e is a path
differ e n c e of half a wavel e n g t h betw e e n the two bea m s .

A lens brings the light to focus at point P on a scre e n . The lens does
not introd u c e any addition a l path differ e n c e .

Stat e and explain whet h e r any light would be obse rv e d at P, in the


case in which the polarize r s have their tra n s m i s sio n axes

(i) par allel.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 97
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 98
(ii) at right angles to each othe r.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

80. This ques tion is abou t ther m o dy n a m i c s .

The P–V diagr a m shows the expa n sio n of a fixed mas s of an ideal gas, from
stat e A to stat e B.

The tem p e r a t u r e of the gas in stat e A is 400 K.

(a) Calcula t e the tem p e r a t u r e of the gas in stat e B.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 99
(b) (i) Calculat e the work done by the gas in expa n di n g from
stat e A to stat e B.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the amou n t of the r m a l ene r gy tra n sf e r r e d during the


expa n sio n from stat e A to sta t e B.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The gas is isoth e r m a lly comp r e s s e d from stat e B back to stat e A.

(i) Using the P–V diagr a m axes above, dra w the variation of
pres s u r e with volum e for this isoth e r m a l comp r e s s io n.
(1)

(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r the ma gni t u d e of the the r m a l ene r gy
tran sf e r r e d in this case would be less tha n, equ al to or gre a t e r
than the ther m a l ene r gy tra n sf e r r e d in (b)(ii).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 100


..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 101


81. This ques tion is abou t circula r motion.

A ball of mas s 0.25 kg is attac h e d to a string and is ma d e to rota t e with


cons t a n t spee d v along a horizon t al circle of radius r = 0.33 m. The string
is att ac h e d to the ceiling and make s an angle of 30° with the vertical.

(a) (i) On the diagr a m above, draw and label arrow s to


repr e s e n t the forces on the ball in the position show n.
(2)

(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r the ball is in equilibri u m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 102


(b) Deter m i n e the spee d of rota tio n of the ball.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

82. This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCDs) and photon s .

(a) Stat e on e factor that affect s the resolutio n of an imag e obtain e d with
a CCD.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Stat e on e adva n t a g e of a CCD imag e, comp a r e d to an imag e on


ordina ry photo g r a p h i c film.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 103


(c) Light of inten si ty 5.3 × 10 –3 W m –2 and frequ e n c y 3.9 × 10 14 Hz is
inciden t on a pixel of a CCD. The are a of the pixel is 4.2 × 10 –12 m 2
and the quan t u m efficiency is 80 %.
The capacit a n c e of the pixel is 14 pF.

(i) Show that the num b e r of photon s incide n t on the pixel of the
CCD per secon d is 8.6 × 10 4 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Calculat e the char g e that acc u m ul a t e s in the pixel durin g a time
of 25 ms.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Dete r mi n e the poten ti al differ e n c e at the ends of the pixel.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 104


(iv) Calculat e the mom e n t u m of one of the incide n t photon s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 105


(v) Using your ans w e r to (c)(iv), estim a t e the pres s u r e exer t e d by
the photon s in (c)(i) on the pixel of the CCD.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

83. This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c oscillations .

A longit u di n al wave travels throu g h a mediu m from left to right.

Grap h 1 show s the variation with time t of the displa c e m e n t x of a particle


P in the mediu m .

Grap h 1

IB Questionbank Physics 106


(a) For par ticle P,

(i) stat e how gra p h 1 shows that its oscillation s are not dam p e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) calcula t e the mag nit u d e of its maxim u m accele r a ti o n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) calcula t e its speed at t = 0.12 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) stat e its directio n of motion at t = 0.12 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 107


(b) Grap h 2 shows the variatio n with position d of the displa c e m e n t x of
particl es in the mediu m at a partic ul a r insta n t of time.

Grap h 2

Deter m i n e for the longit u di n a l wave, using gra p h 1 and gra p h 2,

(i) the frequ e n cy.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) the spee d.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 108


Grap h 2 – repr o d u c e d to assist with answ e ri n g (c)(i).

(c) The diagr a m shows the equilibriu m positions of six par ticle s in the
medi u m .

(i) On the diagr a m above, draw cros s e s to indic at e the positions of


thes e six particle s at the insta n t of time whe n the displa c e m e n t is
given by grap h 2.
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 109


(ii) On the diagr a m above, label with the lette r C a par ticl e that is at
the cent r e of a com p r e s s i o n.
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

84. This ques tion is abou t mech a ni c s and the r m a l physic s.

The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the spe e d v of a ball of mas s
0.50 kg, that has been relea s e d from rest above the Eart h’s surfa c e .

The force of air resist a n c e is not negligible. Assum e that the accel e r a t io n
of free fall is
g = 9.81 m s –2 .

(a) Stat e, witho u t any calcula tion s , how the gra p h could be use d to
dete r m i n e the dista n c e fallen.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 110


(b) (i) In the spac e below, dra w and label arrow s to rep r e s e n t
the forces on the ball at 2.0 s.

(1)

(ii) Use the grap h opposit e to show that the accel e r a t io n of the ball
at 2.0 s is appr oxi m a t e ly 4 m s –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the force of air resis t a n c e on the ball
at 2.0 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 111


(iv) Stat e and explain whet h e r the air resist a n c e on the ball at t = 5.0
s is smaller than, equal to or gre a t e r tha n the air resist a n c e at t
= 2.0 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) After 10 s the ball has fallen 190 m.

(i) Show that the sum of the pot e n ti al and kinetic ene r gi e s of the
ball has decr e a s e d by 780 J.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The specific heat capa city of the ball is 480 J kg –1 K–1 . Estim a t e
the incr e a s e in the tem p e r a t u r e of the ball.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 112


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 113


(iii) Stat e an assu m p t i o n mad e in the esti m a t e in (c)(ii).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

85. This ques tion is abou t nuclea r physics.

(a) (i) Define bindin g ener g y of a nucle u s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

239
(ii) The mas s of a nucle u s of plutoniu m ( 9 4 P u ) is 238.99 0 3 9 6 u.
Deduc e that the bindin g ene r gy per nucle on for pluto ni u m is 7.6
MeV.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 114


(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with nucle on num b e r A of the bindin g
ener gy per nucleon.

239
Plutoni u m ( 9 4 P u ) und e r g o e s nucle a r fission accor di n g to the rea c tion
given below.

239 1 91
94Pu  0 n  3 8S r  15466Ba x 01 n

(i) Calculat e the num b e r x of neut r o n s prod u c e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Use the grap h to estim a t e the ene r gy rele a s e d in this rea c tion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 115


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 116


(c) Stable nuclei with a mass num b e r gre a t e r tha n about 20, cont ai n mor e
neut r o n s than proton s . By refe r e n c e to the prope r ti e s of the nucle a r
force and of the elect r o s t a t i c force, sugg e s t an explan a ti o n for this
obse rv a tio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

86. This ques tion is abou t qua n t u m aspe c t s of the elect r o n .

The wav efunction ψ for an elect r o n confine d to move within a “box” of


linea r size
L = 1.0 × 10 –10 m, is a stan di n g wave as show n.

IB Questionbank Physics 117


IB Questionbank Physics 118
(a) Stat e what is mea n t by a wavefu n c tio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Stat e the position nea r which this elect r o n is most likely to be found.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) Calcula t e the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) The ene r gy, in joules, of the elect r o n in a hydro g e n atom, is given by
2.1 81 0 1 8

E = n2 whe r e n is a positive inte g e r . Calcula t e the
wavelen g t h of the photo n emitt e d in a tra n si tion from the first excit e d
stat e of hydro g e n to the grou n d stat e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 119


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 120


(e) The elect r o n stays in the first excite d stat e of hydrog e n for a time of
appr oxi m a t ely
∆t = 1.0 × 10 –10 s.

(i) Dete r mi n e the unce r t a i n t y in the ene r gy of the elect r o n in the


first excit ed stat e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to your answ e r to (e)(i), why the photo n s
emitt e d in tran si tion s from the first excite d sta t e of hydro g e n to
the grou n d stat e will, in fact, have a small rang e of wavele n g t h s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 121


(f) Diagr a m 1 show s the thr e e lowes t ene r gy levels for an elect r o n in the
hydrog e n atom.

Using the ener gy axis on diagr a m 2, dra w the thr e e lowes t ene r gy
levels for the elect r o n in a box model. You do not have to put any
num b e r s on the vertical axis.
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

87. This ques tion is abou t elect ri c circ uit s.

(a) Define

(i) electro m o ti v e force (emf ) of a batt e r y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) electrical resista n c e of a condu c t o r .

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 122


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) A batt e r y of emf ε and negligibl e inter n al res ista n c e is conne c t e d in


series to two resisto r s .
The cur r e n t in the circuit is I.

(i) Stat e an equa tio n giving the total powe r delive r e d by the batt e r y.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) The poten ti al differ e n c e acros s resisto r R 1 is V 1 and that acros s


resis to r R 2 is V 2 .
Using the law of the cons e rv a tio n of ene r gy, ded uc e the equ a tio n
below.

ε = V1 + V2

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 123


(c) The grap h shows the I-V cha r a c t e r i s ti c s of two cond uc t o r s , X and Y.

On the axes below, sketc h gra p h s to show the variatio n with pote n ti al
differ e n c e V of the resist a n c e of cond u c t o r X (label this gra p h X) and
cond u c t o r Y (label this gra p h Y).
You do not nee d to put any num b e r s on the vertical axis.

(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 124


(d) The condu c t o r s in (c) are conn e c t e d in serie s to a bat t e r y of emf ε and
negligible inter n al resis t a n c e .

The powe r dissip a t e d in eac h of the two resisto r s is the sam e .

Using the grap h given in (c),

(i) det e r m i n e the emf of the batt e r y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) calcula t e the total powe r dissipa t e d in the circ uit.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 125


88. This ques tion is abou t the ene r gy bala nc e of the Ear t h.

(a) The inten sity of the Sun’s radia tio n at the position of the Eart h is
appr oxi m a t ely
1400 W m –2 .

Sugg e s t why the aver a g e powe r receive d per unit are a of the Eart h is
350 W m –2 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The diagr a m shows a simplifie d model of the ene r gy bala nc e of the
Eart h’s surfac e.
The diagr a m shows radi ation ent e ri n g or leaving the Eart h’s surfa c e
only.

The aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e is T E and


that of the atmo s p h e r e is T A = 242 K.

(i) Using the data from the diagr a m , stat e the emissivity of the
atm os p h e r e .

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 126


..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 127


(ii) Show that the intensity of the radia tio n radia t e d by the
atm os p h e r e towar d s the Eart h’s surfa c e is 136 W m –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) By refer e n c e to the ene r gy bala n c e of the Eart h’s surfa c e ,


calcula t e T E .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) (i) Outline a mec h a ni s m by which part of the radia tion


radi at e d by the Eart h’s surfa c e is abso r b e d by gre e n h o u s e gas e s
in the atm os p h e r e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 128


(3)

(ii) Sugg e s t why the incomi n g solar radia tio n is not affect e d by the
mech a ni s m you outline d in (c)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Carbo n dioxide (CO 2 ) is a gre e n h o u s e gas. Stat e on e sour c e and


on e sink (object that re move s CO 2 ) of this gas.

Sourc e: ............................................................................................
..................

Sink: ................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

89. This ques tion is abou t motion in a ma gn e t i c field and elect r o m a g n e t i c


inductio n

An elect r o n, that has been accele r a t e d from rest by a pote n ti al differ e n c e


of 250 V, ent e r s a region of ma gn e t i c field of stre n g t h 0.12 T that is
direct e d into the plane of the pag e.

IB Questionbank Physics 129


(a) The elect r o n’s path while in the region of mag n e ti c field is a qua r t e r
circle. Show that the

(i) spee d of the elect r o n afte r accele r a t i o n is 9.4 × 10 6 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 130


(ii) radi us of the pat h is 4.5 × 10 –4 m.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) time the elect r o n spen d s in the region of ma g n e ti c field is 7.5 ×


10 –11 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The diagr a m below shows the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n as it ent e r s
and leaves the region of ma gn e t i c field. The mag ni t u d e of the initial
mom e n t u m and of the final mom e n t u m is 8.6 × 10 –24 Ns.

(i) On the diagr a m above, draw an arro w to indica t e the vector


repr e s e n t i n g the cha n g e in the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n .
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 131


(ii) Show that the magni t u d e of the cha n g e in the mom e n t u m of the
elect r o n is
1.2 × 10 –23 Ns.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Estim a t e the magni t u d e of the aver a g e force on the elect r o n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) A squa r e loop of condu c ti n g wire is place d nea r a str ai g h t wire


car ryin g a const a n t curr e n t I. The wire is in the sam e plan e as the
loop.

The loop is mad e to move with const a n t spe e d v towa r d s the wire.

IB Questionbank Physics 132


(i) Explain, by refer e n c e to Far a d a y’s and Lenz’s laws of
elect r o m a g n e t i c inductio n, why work must be done on the loop.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Sugg e s t what beco m e s of the work done on the loop.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

90. This ques tion is abou t som e of the plane t s in the solar syste m .

Four of the plane t s in the solar syste m are Mars, Venus, Jupite r and
Nept u n e .

(a) List thes e plane t s in orde r of incre a si n g dista n c e from the Sun.

(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 133


(b) List thes e plane t s in orde r of decr e a si n g diam e t e r .

(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

91. This ques tion is abou t the Hert zs p r u n g–R u s s e ll (HR) diagr a m and using it
to det e r m i n e some prop e r t i e s of sta r s.

The diagr a m below show s the grid of an HR diagr a m , on which the


position s of select e d star s are show n. (L S = luminosity of the Sun.)

(a) (i) Draw a circle arou n d the sta r s that are red giant s.
Label this circle R.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 134


(ii) Draw a circle arou n d the sta r s that are white dwarfs. Label this
circle W.
(1)

(iii) Draw a line throu g h the sta r s tha t are main sequ e n c e sta r s.
(1)

(b) Explain, witho u t doing any calcul a tion, how astro n o m e r s can dedu c e
that star B has a large r diam e t e r tha n sta r A.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Using the following dat a and inform a ti o n from the HR diagr a m , show
that star A is at a dista n c e of abou t 800 pc from Eart h.

Appa r e n t brigh t n e s s of the Sun =


3 –2
1.4 × 10 W m
Appa r e n t brigh t n e s s of sta r A = 4.9 ×
–9 –2
10 Wm
Mea n dista n c e of Sun from Eart h =
1.0 AU
1 pc = 2.1 × 10 5 AU

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 135


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 136


(d) Explain why the dista n c e of sta r A from Eart h canno t be det e r m i n e d
by the met ho d of stellar par allax.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

92. This ques tion is abou t cosmology.

(a) Stat e how the obser v e d red- shift of many galaxies is explaine d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Explain how the cos mic micro w a v e backg r o u n d (CMB) radia tio n is
consis t e n t with the Big Bang model.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) Calcula t e the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e whe n the peak wavel e n g t h
of the CMB was equal to the wavel e n g t h of red light (7.0 × 10 –7 m).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 137


(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 138


93. This ques tion is abou t the main sequ e n c e sta r Khad (Phi Orionis).

The luminosity of Khad is 2.0 × 10 4 L S , whe r e L S is the luminosity of the


Sun.

(a) Assumin g that the expon e n t n in the mas s–lumi no si ty relation is 3.5,
show that the mass of Khad is about 17 solar mas s e s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Outline the likely evolution of the sta r Khad afte r it leave s the main
sequ e n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

94. This ques tion is abou t Hubbl e’s law and the age of the unive r s e .

IB Questionbank Physics 139


(a) (i) Stat e Hubbl e’s law.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 140


(ii) Stat e why Hubbl e’s law cannot be use d to det e r m i n e the dista n c e
from Eart h to near by galaxie s, suc h as Andro m e d a .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

1
(b) (i) Show that H 0 is an esti m a t e of the age of the
univer s e, wher e H 0 is the Hubbl e const a n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Assumi n g H 0 = 80 km s –1 M pc –1 , estim a t e the age of the


univer s e in secon d s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

95. This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.

In orde r to test a tem po r a r y radio com m u ni c a ti o n link, an audio signal is


broa d c a s t using amplit u d e modul a tio n (AM). The powe r spect r u m of the
res ulti ng carri e r wave is show n below.

IB Questionbank Physics 141


IB Questionbank Physics 142
(a) Use the inform a t io n in the powe r spec t r u m to det e r m i n e the

(i) frequ e n c y of the carri e r wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) frequ e n c y of the audio signal.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) ban d wi d t h of this signal.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) (i) Disting ui s h betw e e n AM and frequ e n c y modul a tio n


(FM).

AM: .................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

FM: ..................................................................................................
.................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Outline on e advan t a g e and on e disa dv a n t a g e of using FM as


oppos e d to AM for the tra n s m i s sio n.

Advant a g e : ......................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

Disadva n t a g e : .................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 143


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 144


96. This ques tion is abou t data tran s m i s sio n syste m s .

The block diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s an elect r o nic syste m , S 1 , which


conver t s an analog u e input signal into a serial digital outpu t signal rea dy
for tran s m i s sio n. It involves thre e sepa r a t e syste m blocks labelle d A, B and
C.

(a) Stat e whet h e r the signal betw e e n block A and block B is analog u e ,
digital or multiplex e d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Stat e the function of syste m block A.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) A similar syste m , S 2 , is bas e d on the sam e syste m blocks as S 1 , but


has fewer signal lines betw e e n block B and block C, as show n below.

Explain what differ e n c e s , if any, the r e are betw e e n S 1 and S 2 with


res p e c t to the maxim u m quality of the rep r o d u c t io n of the analog u e
signal after tran s m i s sio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 145


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) The serial digit al outp u t signal is tra n s m i t t e d using an optic al fibre
link. The atte n u a t i o n per unit lengt h of the optic al fibre is –4 dB km –1 .

(i) Define atten u a tio n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) The input powe r to the fibre optic cable is 100 mW and the
outp u t powe r at the end of the cable is 1 mW. Dete r m i n e the
lengt h of the cable.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Stat e two proce s s e s that mus t take place in orde r for this digital
signal to be tran s m i t t e d over a very long dist a n c e .

1. .....................................................................................................
..................

2. .....................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 146


97. This ques tion is abou t satellit es .

A geos t a t io n a r y satellite is used by one count r y to broa d c a s t infor m a ti o n to


a differ e n t count r y.

(a) Stat e which part of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spe ct r u m is use d for this type
of com m u ni c a t i o n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 147


(b) Explain two disadv a n t a g e s of using a polar satellite for this type of
com m u ni c a t io n, when comp a r e d with using a geost a tio n a r y satellite.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) Outline on e possible ethic al issue associa t e d with this broa d c a s t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

98. This ques tion is abou t a Schmit t trigg e r .

The diagr a m below show s a Sch mit t trigg e r circ uit bas e d on an oper a t io n a l
amplifie r (op- amp).

IB Questionbank Physics 148


The outpu t of this Schmit t trigg e r is positive satu r a ti o n (+13 V) or nega tive
satu r a ti o n (–13 V).

IB Questionbank Physics 149


(a) Stat e two prop e r t i e s of an ideal op- amp.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Deter m i n e the input value tha t will caus e the outpu t to switc h from –
13 V to +1 3 V.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Explain how a Schmit t trigg e r can be use d to res h a p e a digital puls e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 150


(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 151


99. This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.

Erin is a pass e n g e r on a train making a call to a sta n d a r d fixed telep h o n e


line (“landline”) from her mobile phon e. The train move s Erin betw e e n
adjac e n t com m u ni c a t io n cells. Outline the cha n g e s , if any, tha t take place
in the

(a) cellular excha n g e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) public switch e d telep h o n e netwo r k (PSTN).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 2 mark s )

10 0 . This ques tion is abou t dispe r sio n.

(a) Stat e an appr oxi m a t e value for the wavele n g t h of visible light.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Descri b e what is mean t by dispe r si o n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 152


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 153


(c) A nar r o w bea m , consisti n g of a mixtu r e of red and blue light, is
inciden t upon a rect a n g u l a r glass block. The nor m al to the incide n t
surfac e is show n.

On the diag r a m above, dra w labelle d lines to show the pat h s of the
red and blue bea m s , as they pass thro u g h the glass block and out to
the air on the othe r side.
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

10 1 . This ques tion is abou t a convex lens.

The diagr a m below, draw n to scale, shows a small object O plac e d in front
of a thin convex (conver gi n g) lens. The focal points of the lens are show n,
labelled F. The lens is repr e s e n t e d by the straig h t line XY.

IB Questionbank Physics 154


(a) (i) Define the ter m focal point .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) On the diagr a m above, cons t r u c t the pat hs of two rays in orde r to
locat e the position of the imag e form e d by the lens. Label the
imag e I.
(3)

(iii) Explain whet h e r the imag e is real or virtual.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) A conver gi n g lens, of focal lengt h 5.0 cm, is use d as a simple


magnifying glass to view an object of lengt h 0.80 cm. The obse rv e r’s
eye is very close to the lens. The image is form e d at the nea r point (25
cm).

(i) Dete r mi n e the dista n c e of the objec t from the lens.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 155


(ii) Dete r mi n e the lengt h of the imag e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

10 2 . This ques tion is abou t using a diffra c tio n gra tin g to view the emission
spect r u m of sodiu m.

Light from a sodiu m disch a r g e tube is incide n t nor m a lly upon a diffra ctio n
gratin g having 8.00 × 10 5 lines per met r e . The spec t r u m cont ai n s a doubl e
yellow line of wavelen g t h s 589 nm and 590 nm.

(a) Deter m i n e the angul a r sepa r a t i o n of the two lines whe n viewe d in the
secon d order spect r u m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 156


(b) Stat e why it is mor e difficult to obse rv e the doubl e yellow line whe n
viewe d in the first orde r spect r u m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

10 3 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.

Elect r o n s are accel e r a t e d thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e of 25 kV and strike


a molybd e n u m targ e t .
The res ulti n g X-ray spect r u m is show n below.

The accel e r a t i n g pot en ti al differ e n c e is cha n g e d to 15 kV.

(a) Calcula t e the minim u m wavele n g t h of the X-rays produ c e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 157


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) On the gra p h above, sketc h the X-ray spect r u m that would be
prod u c e d .
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 158


10 4 . This ques tion is abou t wedg e film inte rfe r e n c e .

One flat, glass slide is place d at an angle on top of a secon d identic al slide.
The slides are in cont a c t along one short edge and are sepa r a t e d at the
othe r edge by a thin piece of pape r, as show n below.

(diagra m not to scale)

A thin wedg e of air of variabl e thickn e s s , t , is tra p p e d betw e e n the two


slides. The arr a n g e m e n t is viewe d nor m a lly from above, using light of
wavele n g t h 590 nm. The glass plate s are coat e d, so that reflection only
takes place at the botto m surfa c e of the top plat e and the top surfa c e of the
botto m plate.

A series of str aig h t bright and dark fringe s , equally sepa r a t e d and par allel
to the shor t edge of the slides, is see n.

(a) Deduc e that the thickn e s s of the air wedg e t that gives rise to a brigh t
1
fringe, is given by 2 t = (m + 2 )λ.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 159


(b) The lengt h of the air wedg e , L , is 8.2 cm. The bright fringe s are each
sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e of 1.2 mm. Calcula t e the thickn e s s of the
pape r.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

10 5 . This ques tion is abou t lengt h contr a c ti o n and simult a n e i ty.

(a) Define proper lengt h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A space s hi p is travelling to the right at spe e d 0.75 c, thro u g h a tunn el


which is open at both ends. Obse rv e r A is sta n di n g at the cent r e of
one side of the tunn el. Obse rv e r A, for whom the tunn el is at rest,
mea s u r e s the lengt h of the tunn el to be 240 m and the lengt h of the
space s hi p to be 200 m. The diag r a m below shows this situa tion from
the pers p e c t ive of obse rv e r A.

IB Questionbank Physics 160


Observ e r B, for whom the spac e s hi p is station a r y, is sta n di n g at the
cent r e of the spac e s hi p.

IB Questionbank Physics 161


(i) Calculat e the Lorent z factor, γ, for this situa tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the lengt h of the tunn el accor di n g to obs e rv e r B.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Calculat e the lengt h of the spa c e s hi p accor di n g to obse rv e r B.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iv) Accor din g to obse rv e r A, the spa c e s hi p is compl e t e ly inside the


tunn el for a shor t time. Sta t e and explain whet h e r or not,
accor di n g to obs erv e r B, the spac e s hi p is eve r compl e t ely inside
the tunn el.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 162


(c) Two sour ce s of light are locat e d at eac h end of the tunn el. The
diagr a m below show s this situa tion from the pers p e c tiv e of obse rv e r
A.

Accordi n g to observ e r A, at the insta n t whe n obse rv e r B pas s e s


obse rv e r A, the two sour c e s of light emit a flash. Obse rv e r A see s the
two flashe s simult a n e o u s ly. Discus s whet h e r or not obse r v e r B sees
the two flashe s simult a n e o u s ly.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 163


10 6 . This ques tion is abou t relative velocitie s and ene r gy at rela tivistic spe e d s .

Two identic al rocket s are moving along the sam e str ai g h t line as viewe d
from Eart h.
Rocket 1 is moving away from the Eart h at spe e d 0.80 c rela tiv e to the
Eart h and rocket 2 is moving away from rocke t 1 at spe e d 0.60 c relat iv e
to rock e t 1 .

(a) Calcula t e the velocity of rocke t 2 rela tive to the Eart h, using the

(i) Galilean tran sfo r m a t i o n equ a tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) relativistic tran sfo r m a t i o n equ a tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Comm e n t on your ans w e r s in (a).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 164


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 165


(c) The rest mas s of rocke t 1 is 1.0 × 10 3 kg. Dete r mi n e the relat ivi s t i c
kinetic ener gy of rocke t 1, as me a s u r e d by an obs e rv e r on Eart h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

10 7 . This ques tion is abou t the Michels o n–Mo rl ey expe ri m e n t .

The diagr a m below show s the ess e n ti al feat u r e s of the app a r a t u s used in
the Michelso n–Mo rl ey experi m e n t .

IB Questionbank Physics 166


(a) Stat e and explain how this appa r a t u s was use d to try to mea s u r e the
spee d of the Eart h relative to the ethe r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) Stat e the res ult of this expe ri m e n t and explain how this res ult
suppo r t s the special theo ry of relativity.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 167


10 8 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l red- shift.

Two identic al laser s are situa t e d on the surfa c e of the Eart h. One is
direct e d horizon t ally towa r d s obse rv e r A, who me a s u r e s the frequ e n c y to
be 4.62 × 10 14 Hz. The othe r is dire c t e d vertic ally upw a r d s towa r d s
obse rv e r B, who is at a height of 1.00 × 10 2 m

(a) (i) Stat e how the freq u e n c y as mea s u r e d by obs e rv e r B


comp a r e s with the freq u e n c y as mea s u r e d by obse rv e r A.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the differ e n c e in freq u e n c y bet w e e n the lase r light as


meas u r e d by obse rv e r s A and B.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Stat e on e assu m p ti o n tha t you ma d e in (a)(ii).

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 168


.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 169


(b) The laser s are now place d on a spa c e s hi p, which is acc el e r a t i n g
upw a r d s at a const a n t rate of 9.81 m s –2 , far away from any othe r
mas s e s as shown below. The dista n c e of obse rv e r D from the lase r is
1.00 × 10 2 m. Obse rv e r C is at the botto m of the spa c e s hi p.

Explain, with refer e n c e to the equivale n c e principle, the frequ e n ci e s


mea s u r e d by observ e r s C and D, as comp a r e d to obse rv e r s A and B.

.........................................................................................................................
.............

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 170


10 9 . This ques tion is abou t soun d inte nsi ty levels.

As part of a safety inspec tion of a new factory, a data logge r mea s u r e s the
inten si ty of the soun d s gen e r a t e d by the mac hi n e s . The soun d inten sity
levels nee d to be within acce p t a bl e limits.

(a) Define intensit y and intensit y level .

Inten sit y: .................................................................................................


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Inten sit y
level: ...............................................................................................
..............

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The data logge r is moved betw e e n five differ e n t location s in the
factory (A → E).
The readi n g s are show n below.

Rea di n g on dat a log g e r /


Loca t i o n
mW m –2
A 302
B 158
C 891
D 413
E 524

(i) Dete r mi n e the intensi ty level at the noisies t location.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 171


.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 172


(ii) Using your ans w e r to (b)(i), discus s whe t h e r or not it is
nece s s a r y for the mac hin e ope r a t o r s to use ear prot e c t o r s whe n
workin g in this factory.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) One possibl e effect on hea ri n g of long- ter m expos u r e to noise is


tinnitu s . Outline what is me a n t by tinnitu s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

11 0 . This ques tion is abou t medic al imagin g.

A patie n t is susp e c t e d of having a parti al blocka g e in his intes ti n e as it


leads away from his stom a c h . Possible me dic al imagi n g tech ni q u e s includ e
X-ray photo g r a p h y, ultr a s o u n d and the use of an endos c o p e .

(a) When prod u ci n g the X-ray photo g r a p h , the dose is kept to a minim u m
by a tech ni q u e called enh a n c e m e n t .

(i) Outline why the dos e nee d s to be kept to a minim u m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 173


..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 174


(ii) Describ e on e possible enha n c e m e n t tech ni q u e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Discus s any extr a proc e d u r e s that are nee d e d to get an


app r o p r i a t e imag e of the inte s tin e in this situa tion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) A succe s sf ul ultr a s o u n d scan relies on cha n g e s of acous tic impe d a n c e


arou n d the struc t u r e being imag e d .

(i) Define acous tic impe d a n c e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Stat e the SI unit in which it is me a s u r e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 175


(iii) Explain, in ter m s of acous tic impe d a n c e , why gel nee d s to be
applied on the surfac e of the skin befor e the ultra s o u n d scan.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The blocka g e is cut out and re mov e d in a proc e d u r e which involves a
laser and an endos co p e .

(i) Outline how it is possible to use a lase r as a scalpel (knife).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) By refer r i n g to the role playe d by optic fibre s, disc us s how an


endos co p e is used in this situa tion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 176


IB Questionbank Physics 177
11 1 . This ques tion is abou t radiation in me dicin e.

A nucle a r stres s test is used to inves tig a t e the blood flow within a patie n t’s
hea r t durin g exer cis e.

The radioisot o p e thalliu m- 201 is inject e d into the patie n t’s blood and a
gam m a- ray det ec t o r is then use d to recor d its distrib u tio n within the hea r t
muscle.

The following infor m a t io n about this proc e d u r e is availabl e.

Mass of patien t = 75 kg
Dose equivale n t for a nucle a r stre s s test = 25 mSv

(a) The quality factor of the ga m m a- rays is 1. Dete r m i n e the ene r gy


absor b e d by the patien t as a res ult of the thallium injection.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Sugg e s t whet h e r you would expe c t the ene r gy calcula t e d in (a) to
res ult in a significan t incre a s e in the patie n t’s tem p e r a t u r e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 178


(c) On aver a g e , 1 in every 1000 patie n t s who und e r t a k e a nucle a r str e s s
test go on to develop canc e r as a result of the radioa c tive dos e that
they received durin g the test.

(i) By refer r i n g to the conc e p t of bala n c e d risk, outline why the test
may still be of benefit to the patie n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The hospit al tech nicia n who admini st e r s the test could also
receive an incr e a s e d dos e.
Outline how film badg e s are use d to prot e c t tec hni ci a n s from
receiving exces sive dos es of radia tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

11 2 . This ques tion is abou t meso n s .

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an exch a n g e par ticle.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 179


(b) In 1935, the physicist Hide ki Yukawa pre dic t e d that the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s was medi a t e d by particle s calle d
meson s . Given that the rang e of the stron g inte r a c t io n is
appr oxi m a t ely 1.5 × 10 –15 m, calcula t e a possible value for the res t
mas s of a meso n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) A meson called the pion was det e c t e d in cosmic ray reac tio n s in 1947
by Powell and Occhialini. The pion com e s in thre e possibl e cha r g e
stat e s: π + , π – and π 0 The Feyn m a n diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s a
possible reac tion in which a pion particip a t e s .

Stat e and explain whet h e r the meso n prod u c e d is a π + , π – or π 0 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 180


(d) Stat e the possible spin num b e r s of meso n s and explain your answ e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(e) Explain why, accor di n g to the qua r k model, it is not possible for a
particl e to consist of two up qua r k s only.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 181


11 3 . This ques tion is abou t accel er a ti n g par ticle s.

The diagr a m below show s the basic struc t u r e of a cyclotr o n.

Char g e d particle s are emitt e d from a sour c e at the cent r e . They move in a
vacuu m throu g h two D-shap e d cavitie s or “dee s”. Ther e is a unifor m
mag n e ti c field direc t e d into the pag e, within the region of the dee s.

(a) Outline why the voltag e applie d acros s the dee s must cha n g e polarity
every half revolutio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 182


(b) Show that the frequ e n c y, f, of the applied pote n ti al differ e n c e is given
by the expr e s sio n

qB
f = 2 πm

whe r e

q = char g e of particle
m = mas s of particle
B = mag n e t i c field stre n g t h .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Stat e two disadv a n t a g e s of using a cyclotr o n rath e r tha n a


synch r o t r o n to accel e r a t e particle s.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) Explain why it is nece s s a r y to acc ele r a t e particl e s to high spee d s in


orde r to crea t e new par ticl e s of large mass.

IB Questionbank Physics 183


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 184


(e) High ene r gy particles are used to prob e the nucle u s. Explain why
alph a particle s would give bett e r resolution tha n proton s moving at
the sam e spee d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

11 4 . This ques tion is abou t ener gy and cons e rv a tio n laws.

Two proton s moving at the sam e spe e d in opposit e direc tio n s, collide with
each othe r produ ci n g thr e e proto n s and an anti- proton, as show n below.

p + p →p + p + p + p

(a) Calcula t e the minim u m possibl e kinetic ene r gy of on e of the colliding


proto n s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 185


(b) Explain why the following rea c tion is not possible, even if the colliding
particl es have enou g h ene r gy.

p + n →p + p + p

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

11 5 . This ques tion is abou t cosmology and string s .

(a) The bindin g ener gy of a helium nucle u s is abou t 28 MeV. Calcula t e


the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e above which helium nuclei could not
have exist e d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Stat e two fund a m e n t a l differ e n c e s betw e e n the sta n d a r d model and
the theo ry of string s.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 186


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 187


11 6 . Which of the following will red uc e ran do m erro r s in an expe ri m e n t ?

A. Using an instr u m e n t having a gre a t e r precision

B. Checkin g the calibr a ti o n of the inst r u m e n t use d

C. Checkin g for zero erro r on the instr u m e n t use d

D. Repe a ti n g readi n g s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

11 7 . A body accele r a t e s from rest with a unifor m accele r a t i o n a for a time t . The
unce r t ai n t y in a is 8 % and the unc e r t a i n t y in t is 4 %. The unc e r t a i n t y in
the spee d is

A. 32 %.

B. 12 %.

C. 8 %.

D. 2 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

11 8 . Which of the following lists two scala r qua n ti tie s ?

A. emf, mom e n t u m

B. emf, weigh t

C. impuls e, kinetic ener gy

D. magn e t i c flux, kinetic ener gy


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 188


11 9 . The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the acc el e r a t io n a of an objec t.

Which of the following is the cha n g e in velocity of the object in the time
interv al 0 to 4 s?

A. –8 m s –1

B. –4 m s –1

C. +4 m s –1

D. +8 m s –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 189


12 0 . A car accele r a t e s from rest. The accele r a t i o n incr e a s e s with time. Which
grap h shows the variatio n with time t of the spe e d v of the car?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

12 1 . Which of the following is the condition for a body to be in tra n sl a tio n a l


equilibriu m ?

A. The result a n t force on the body in any direc tio n is zero.

B. The velocity of the body in any direc tion is zero.

C. No exte r n al force is acting on the body.

D. No work is done on the body.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 190


12 2 . A stone attac h e d to a string is moving in a horizon t a l circle. The const a n t
spee d of the stone is v .
The diagr a m below show s the ston e in two differ e n t positions , X and Y.

Which of the following shows the direc tio n of the cha n g e of velocity of the
ston e when moving from position X to position Y?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 191


12 3 . The gra p h shows the variation with force F of the exte nsio n s of a sprin g.

The work done in chan gi n g the exte n sion of the sprin g from 3.0 cm to 6.0
cm is

A. 15 N cm.

B. 30 N cm.

C. 45 N cm.

D. 60 N cm.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

12 4 . The ener gy of the molec ul e s of an ideal gas is

A. ther m al only.

B. ther m al and pote n ti al.

C. poten ti al and kinetic.

D. kinetic only.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 192


12 5 . Oil with volum e V has specific heat capa city c at tem p e r a t u r e T . The
density of oil is ρ.
Which of the following is the the r m a l capa ci ty of the oil?

A. ρcV

cV
B. ρ

C. ρcVT

cV
D. ρT
(Tot al 1 mar k )

12 6 . The volum e of an ideal gas in a cont ai n e r is incre a s e d at const a n t


tem p e r a t u r e . Which of the following sta t e m e n t s is/ar e cor r e c t abou t the
molecul e s of the gas?

I. Their spee d rem ai n s const a n t .

II. The frequ e n cy of collisions of molec ul e s with unit are a of the


cont ai n e r wall decr e a s e s .

III. The force betw e e n the m dec r e a s e s .

A. I only

B. I and II only

C. I and III only

D. II and III only


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 193


12 7 . A particle oscillat es with simple har m o ni c motion with period T .

At time t = 0, the particl e has its maxim u m displ ac e m e n t . Which gra p h


shows the variation with time t of the kinetic ene r gy E k of the par ticle?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 194


12 8 . An object is und e r g oi n g simple har m o nic motion with light dam pi n g. The
natu r al frequ e n c y of oscillation of the objec t is f 0 . A periodic force of
frequ e n c y f is applied to the object. Which of the following gra p h s best
shows how the amplit u d e a of oscillation of the object varie s with f?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 195


12 9 . The gra p h shows meas u r e m e n t s of the heigh t h of sea level at differe n t
times t in the Bay of Fundy.

Which of the following gives the app r oxi m a t e am plit u d e and period of the
tides?

Amplit u d e Peri o d
A. 6.5 m 6 hour s
B. 13 m 12 hour s
C. 6.5 m 12 hour s
D. 13 m 6 hour s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 196


λ
13 0 . Two waves meet at a point. The waves have a path differ e n c e of 4 . The
phas e differe n c e betw e e n the waves is

π
A. 8 rad.

π
B. 4 rad.

π
C. 2 rad.

D. π rad.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

13 1 . Two elect r o d e s , sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e d , in a vacuu m are maint ai n e d at a


cons t a n t pote n ti al differ e n c e . An elect r o n, accel e r a t e d from one elect r o d e
to the other , gains kinetic ener gy E k . The dist a n c e betw e e n the elect r o d e s
1
is now chan g e d to 3 d .

What is the gain in kinetic ener gy of an elect r o n that is accele r a t e d from


one elect r o d e to the other ?

Ek
A. 3

B. Ek

C. 3 Ek

D. 9 Ek
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 197


13 2 . The gra p h shows the I–V char a c t e r i s ti c s of two resisto r s .

When resisto r s X and Y are conn e c t e d in serie s, the cur r e n t in the resisto r s
is 2.0 A. What is the resist a n c e of the serie s com bin a tio n of X and Y?

A. 7.0 Ω

B. 1.3 Ω

C. 1.1 Ω

D. 0.14 Ω
(Tot al 1 mar k )

13 3 . The definition of the amp e r e refe r s to the

A. num b e r of elect r o n s passin g a given point per secon d.

B. force betw e e n par allel cur r e n t- car ryin g condu c t o r s .

C. powe r dissip at e d per unit resist a n c e .

D. amou n t of char g e tran sf e r r e d per secon d.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 198


13 4 . A space c r af t travels away from Eart h in a strai g h t line with its motor s shut
down. At one insta n t the spee d of the spac e c r a f t is 5.4 km s –1 . After a time
of 600 s, the spee d is 5.1 km s –1 . The aver a g e gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h
acting on the spac e c r af t during this time inte rv al is

A. 5.0 × 10 –4 N kg –1

B. 3.0 × 10 –2 N kg –1

C. 5.0 × 10 –1 N kg –1

D. 30 N kg –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

13 5 . Two isol ated point char g e s , –7 μC and +2 μC, are at a fixed dist a n c e apa r t .
At which point is it possible for the elect ric field str e n g t h to be zero?

(not to scale)
(Tot al 1 mar k )

13 6 . A long str ai g h t wire carri es an elect ric cur r e n t per p e n di c ul a r ly out of the
pap e r . Which of the following repr e s e n t s the ma gn e t i c field patt e r n due to
the curr e n t ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 199


13 7 . Which nucleon s in a nucleu s are involve d in the Coulom b inte r a c ti o n and
the stron g short- ran g e nuclea r inte r a c ti o n?

Coul o m b int er a c t i o n Str o n g sh or t- ran g e


int e r a c t i o n
A. proton s proto n s , neut r o n s
B. proton s neut r o n s
C. proton s proto n s
D. proton s , neut r o n s neut r o n s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

13 8 . Two sam pl e s of radioa ctiv e subs t a n c e s X and Y have the sam e initial
activity. The half- life of X is T and the half- life of Y is 3 T . After a time of 3 T
the ratio

a c t ivit of
y s u b s t a n cX
e
a c t ivit of
y s u b s t a n cY
e is

A. 8.

B. 4.

1
C. 4.

1
D. 8.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 200


13 9 . The nuclea r equ atio n below is an exa m pl e of the tra ns m u t a t i o n of mer c u r y
into gold.

2
1H  18909H g  197
7 9 Au + X

The particle X is a

A. gam m a- ray photon.

B. heliu m nucleu s .

C. proto n.

D. neut r o n.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

14 0 . The Sank ey diag r a m of a fossil- fuelled powe r station is show n below.

Which of the following bes t identifies the the r m a l ene r gy rem ov e d by wat e r
and the useful elect ric al ener gy outpu t of the station?

Ther m a l en er g y Us e f u l el e c t r i c a l en e r g y
re m o v e d out p u t
A. 2 1
B. 2 3
C. 3 1
D. 1 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 201


14 1 . World ener gy resou r c e s include coal, nucle a r fuel and geot h e r m a l ene r gy.
Which of the following lists thes e resou r c e s in orde r of pri m a r y ene r gy use
in the world?

A. nuclea r , geot h e r m a l , coal

B. nuclea r , coal, geot h e r m a l

C. coal, geot h e r m a l , nuclea r

D. coal, nucle a r , geot h e r m a l


(Tot al 1 mar k )

14 2 . Which of the following proce s s e s leads to the produ c tio n of a nucle u s of


plutoni u m- 239 from a nucleu s of ura ni u m- 238?

A. Neut r o n capt u r e by uraniu m nucle u s

B. Radioa ctive decay of uraniu m nucle u s

C. Elect r o n capt u r e by uraniu m nucle u s

D. Nucle a r fission of urani u m nucle u s


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 202


14 3 . Wate r is cont ai n e d in a tidal basin behin d a dam. The wat e r has a dept h h
at high tide and zero at low tide, as show n in the diagr a m .

The gravit a tion al pote n ti al ene r gy of the wate r stor e d in the basin betw e e n
a high tide and a low tide is propo r tio n a l to

A. h.

B. h.

C. h 2.

D. h 3.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 203


14 4 . Surfac e X has a tem p e r a t u r e T X and emissivity ε x . Surfa c e Y has a
tem p e r a t u r e T Y and emis sivity ε y . The two surfa c e s emit radi a tion at the
sam e rat e.

TX
What is the ratio TY ?

1
εy 4
 
ε 
A.  x 

1
εx 4
 
εy 
B.  

4
εy 
 
ε 
C.  x 

4
εX 
 
 εy 
D.  
(Tot al 1 mar k )

14 5 . Large area s of rainfor e s t s are cut down and bur n e d every year. The result
of thes e actions is

A. red uc e d albed o.

B. red uc e d car bo n fixation.

C. incr e a s e d evapo r a t io n rat e.

D. incr e a s e d mas s of atmos p h e r i c met h a n e .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 204


14 6 . Data analysis ques tion.

The spee d v of waves on the surfa c e of dee p wate r dep e n d s only on the
wavele n g t h λ of the waves. The dat a gath e r e d from a par tic ul a r region of
the Atlantic Ocea n are plott e d below.

The unce r t a i n t y in the speed v is ±0. 3 0 m s –1 and the unc e r t a i n t y in λ is too


small to be show n on the diagr a m .

(a) Stat e, with refer e n c e to the gra p h,

(i) why v is not directly propo r tio n a l to λ.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) the value of v for λ = 39 m.

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 205


..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 206


(b) It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n v and λ is of the form

v = a λ

whe r e a is a const a n t . To test the validity of this hypot h e s i s, values of


v 2 agains t λ are plott e d below.

(i) Use your answ e r to (a)(ii) to show that the absolut e unce r t a i n t y
in v 2 for a wavele n g t h of 39 m is ±5 m 2 s –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The absolut e uncer t a i n t y in v 2 for a wavele n g t h of 2.5 m is ±1 m 2


s –2 . Using this value and the value in (b)(i), const r u c t error bars
for v 2 at the dat a points for

IB Questionbank Physics 207


λ = 2.5 m and 39 m.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 208


(iii) Stat e why the plott e d dat a in (b)(ii) sugg e s t that it is likely that v
is propo r tio n al to λ.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iv) Use the grap h above to det e r m i n e the cons t a n t a .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

k
(v) Theory shows that a = 2 π . Dete r mi n e a value for k .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 209


14 7 . This ques tion is abou t kine m a t i c s.

Lucy stan d s on the edg e of a vertic al cliff and throw s a ston e vertic ally
upwa r d s .

The stone leaves her han d with a spe e d of 15 m s –1 at the insta n t her hand
is 80 m above the surfac e of the sea. Air resist a n c e is negligibl e and the
accele r a ti o n of free fall is 10 m s –2 .

(a) Calcula t e the maxim u m heigh t rea c h e d by the ston e as me a s u r e d from


the point wher e it is throw n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 210


(b) Deter m i n e the time for the stone to rea c h the surfa c e of the sea afte r
leaving Lucy’s hand.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

14 8 . This ques tion is abou t inter n al ene r gy and the r m a l ene r gy (hea t).

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n inter n a l ene r gy and the r m a l ene r gy.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Descri b e, with refer e n c e to the ene r gy of the molec ul e s , the


differ e n c e in inter n al ener gy of a piec e of iron and the inter n al ene r gy
of an ideal gas.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 211


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 212


(c) A piece of iron is place d in a kiln until it rea c h e s the tem p e r a t u r e θ of
the kiln. The iron is then quickly tra n sf e r r e d to wat e r held in a
ther m ally insulat e d cont ai n e r . The wat e r is stirr e d until it rea c h e s a
ste a dy tem p e r a t u r e . The following data are availa bl e.

Ther m al capa city of the piece of iron = 60 J


K–1
Ther m al capa city of the wate r = 2.0 ×
10 3 J K –1
Initial tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r = 16 °C
Final tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r = 45 °C

The ther m al capa ci ty of the cont ai n e r and insula tion is negligible.

(i) Stat e an expr e s s io n, in ter m s of θ and the above dat a, for the
ene r gy tran sf e r of the iron in cooling from the tem p e r a t u r e of the
kiln to the final tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the incre a s e in inte r n a l ene r gy of the wat e r as the iron
cools in the wat e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Use your answ e r s to (c)(i) and (c)(ii) to det e r m i n e θ.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 213


14 9 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion (SHM) and a wave in a
string.

(a) By refer e n c e to simple har m o ni c motion, stat e wha t is mea n t by


amplit u d e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A liquid is cont ain e d in a U-tube.

Dia g r a m 1 Dia gr a m 2

The pres s u r e on the liquid in one side of the tube is incr e a s e d so tha t
the liquid is displac e d as show n in diag r a m 2. Whe n the pres s u r e is
sudd e nly relea s e d the liquid oscillat e s .
The dam pi n g of the oscillation s is small.

(i) Describ e what is mea n t by da m pi n g.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 214


(ii) The displac e m e n t of the liquid surfa c e from its equilibri u m
position is x . The accele r a ti o n a of the liquid in the tube is given
by the expr e s si o n

2g
 x
a = l

wher e g is the accele r a t io n of free fall and l is the total lengt h of


the liquid colum n.
The total lengt h of the liquid colum n in the tube is 0.32 m.
Dete r mi n e the period of oscillation.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) A wave is travelling along a strin g. The string can be modelle d as a


single line of particles and each particl e execu t e s simple har m o ni c
motion. The period of oscillation of the particle s is 0.80 s.

The grap h shows the displa c e m e n t y of par t of the string at time t = 0.


The dist an c e along the string is d.

IB Questionbank Physics 215


(i) On the grap h, draw an arro w to show the dire c tion of motion of
par ticl e P at the point mark e d on the string.
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the mag nit u d e of the velocity of particle P.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(iii) Show that the spee d of the wave is 5.0 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iv) On the grap h above, label with the lette r X the position of

IB Questionbank Physics 216


par ticl e P at t = 0.40 s.
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

15 0 . This ques tion is abou t unified atomic mass unit and a nucle a r rea c tio n.

(a) Define the ter m unified atomic mas s unit .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 217


(b) The mas s of a nucleu s of rut h e rf o r di u m- 254 is 254.1 0 0 1 u. Calcula t e
the mas s in GeV c –2 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) In 1919, Ruthe r fo r d produ c e d the first artificial nucle a r tra n s m u t a t i o n


by bomb a r di n g nitrog e n with α-par ticle s. The rea c tion is repr e s e n t e d
by the following equ atio n.

14
α+ 7N  187 O + X

(i) Identify X.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) The following dat a are availa bl e for the rea c tio n.

Rest mass of α = 3.742 8 GeV c –2


14
Rest mass of 7N = 13.09 4 2 GeV c –2
17
Rest mass of 8O + X = 16.83 8 3 GeV c –2

The initial kinetic ene r gy of the α-par ticle is 7.68 MeV.


Dete r mi n e the sum of the kinetic ene r gi e s of the oxyge n nucle u s
and X. (Assu m e that the nitrog e n nucle u s is station a r y.)

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 218


(d) The reac tion in (c) prod u c e s oxyge n (O-17). Othe r isotop e s of oxyge n
includ e O-19 which is radioa c tive with a half- life of 30 s.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by the ter m isotop e s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Define the ter m radioactiv e half- life .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(e) A nucleu s of the isotop e O-19 dec ays to a stable nucle u s of fluorin e.
The half- life of O-19 is 30 s. At time t = 0, a sam pl e of O-19 cont ai n s a
larg e num b e r N 0 nuclei of O-19.

On the grid below, draw a gra p h to show the variation with time t of
the num b e r N of O-19 nuclei rem ai ni n g in the sam pl e . You should
conside r a time of t = 0 to t = 120 s.

IB Questionbank Physics 219


(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

15 1 . This ques tion is abou t power prod u c tio n and global war mi n g.

(a) In any cyclical proc es s design e d to continu o u s ly conve r t the r m a l


ener gy to work, some ene r gy is always deg r a d e d . Explain what is
mea n t by degr a d e d ener gy.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A nuclea r powe r station uses ura ni u m- 235 (U- 235) as fuel. Outline the

(i) proce s s e s and ener gy chan g e s that occur thro u g h which the r m a l
ene r gy is produ c e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 220


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 221


(ii) role of the heat exch a n g e r of the rea c t o r and the tur bi n e in the
gen e r a t io n of elect ric al ene r gy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Identify on e proce s s in the powe r station whe r e ene r gy is degr a d e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) The maxim u m powe r outp u t of the Drax coal- fired powe r station in the
UK is 4.0 GW. Dete r mi n e the minim u m mas s of pur e U-235 that would
be requir e d by a nuclea r powe r sta tion to provide the sam e maxim u m
annu al ener gy outpu t as the Drax powe r station.

Ener gy density of U-235 = 82 TJ kg –1


1 year = 3.2 × 10 7 s

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 222


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 223


(e) The Drax powe r station produ c e s an enor m o u s amou n t of carbo n
dioxide, a gas classified as a gre e n h o u s e gas. Outline, with refe r e n c e
to the vibratio n al beh aviou r of molec ul e s of car bo n dioxide, wha t is
mea n t by a gre e n h o u s e gas.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(f) It has bee n sugg e s t e d that the prod u c tio n of gre e n h o u s e gas e s by
coal- fired powe r station s has incre a s e d global war mi n g . One piec e of
eviden c e to suppo r t this sugg e s ti o n is the incre a s e in sea- level due to
an incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of the ocea n s . Over the past 100 yea rs it is
sugg e s t e d that sea- levels have rise n by 6.4 × 10 –2 m due to volum e
expan si o n.

Using the following dat a, det e r m i n e the aver a g e rise in tem p e r a t u r e


in the top levels of the ocea n s in the last 100 years.

Mean dept h of ocea n s that is affect e d by global war mi n g =


4.0 × 10 2 m
Coefficien t of volum e expa n sio n of sea wat e r =
5.1 × 10 –5 K–1

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 224


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 18 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 225


15 2 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c cha r g e .

(a) A plastic rod XY is held at end X. The end Y is rubb e d with a piec e of
cloth and, as a res ult, the end Y beco m e s elect ric ally cha r g e d .

The proce d u r e is now rep e a t e d using a coppe r rod and it is found tha t
the copp e r rod rem ai n s elect ric ally neut r a l. Explain thes e
obse rv a tio n s in ter m s of the prop e r ti e s of cond u c t o r s and insulat o r s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)

IB Questionbank Physics 226


(b) Two plastic rods each have a positive char g e + q situa t e d at one end.
The rods are arr a n g e d as show n.

Assum e that the char g e at the end of eac h rod beha v e s as a point
char g e . Draw, in the shad e d are a on the diagr a m , the elect ric field
patt e r n due to the two cha r g e s .
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

15 3 . This ques tion is abou t power and efficie ncy.

A bus is travelling at a const a n t spe e d of 6.2 m s –1 along a section of road


that is incline d at an angle of 6.0° to the horizont al.

IB Questionbank Physics 227


(a) (i) The bus is rep r e s e n t e d by the black dot show n below.
Draw a labelled sketc h to rep r e s e n t the force s acting on the bus.

(4)

(ii) Stat e the value of the rat e of cha n g e of mom e n t u m of the bus.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The total outp u t powe r of the engin e of the bus is 70 kW and the
efficiency of the engin e is 35 %. Calcula t e the input powe r to the
engin e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) The mas s of the bus is 8.5 × 10 3 kg. Dete r mi n e the rat e of incr e a s e of
gravit atio n al poten ti al ene r gy of the bus.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 228


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Using your ans w e r to (c) and the dat a in (b), estim a t e the magni t u d e
of the resistive forces acting on the bus.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(e) The engin e of the bus sudd e nly stops workin g.

(i) Dete r mi n e the mag nit u d e of the net force opposin g the motion of
the bus at the inst an t at which the engin e stops.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Discus s, with refer e n c e to the air resis t a n c e , the cha n g e in the
net force as the bus slows down.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 229


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 17 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 230


15 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e .

(a) A resis to r of resist a n c e 1.5 Ω is mad e from copp e r wire of radi us 0 .18
mm. The resistivity of coppe r is 1.7 × 10 –8 Ω m. Dete r m i n e the lengt h
of copp e r wire used to make the resisto r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The man uf a c t u r e r of the resisto r in (a) gua r a n t e e s tha t the resist a n c e
is within 10 % of 1.5 Ω , provide d tha t the powe r dissipa tio n in the
resisto r does not exce e d 1.0 W.

(i) Sugg e s t why the resist a n c e of the resis to r mi ght be gre a t e r tha n
1.65 Ω if the powe r dissipa tion in the resisto r is gre a t e r tha n 1.0
W.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Show that, for a powe r dissipa tio n of 1.0 W, the curr e n t in a
resis to r of resist a n c e 1.5 Ω is 0.82 A.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics 231
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 232


(iii) The 1.5 Ω resisto r is conne c t e d in series with a varia bl e resis to r
and batt e r y of emf 6.0 V and inte rnal resist a n c e 1.8 Ω.

Estim a t e the resist a n c e R of the variabl e resisto r that will limit


the curr e n t to 0.82 A.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

15 5 . This ques tion is abou t stan di n g (station a r y) wave s.

The diagr a m repr e s e n t s a stan di n g wave of wavele n g t h λ set up on a string


of lengt h L .

The string is fixed at both ends.

(a) For this stan di n g wave

IB Questionbank Physics 233


(i) stat e the relation s hi p betw e e n λ and L.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) label, on the diag r a m , two antino d e s wher e the string is


vibratin g in phas e. Label the antinod e s with the lette r A.
(2)

(b) The stan di n g wave has wavele n g t h λ and frequ e n c y f. Sta t e and
explain, with res p e c t to a sta n di n g wave, what is rep r e s e n t e d by the
prod u c t f λ.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

15 6 . This ques tion is abou t the eye and resolution.

A stud e n t meas u r e s the aper t u r e of the iris of one of her eyes as 2.0 mm in
sunligh t and 7.0 mm in moonligh t. The inten sity at her eye of sunlight is
106 times grea t e r than the inte n si ty of moonlig h t.

(a) (i) Dete r mi n e the following ratio.

p ow e ro f lig h te n t e r in tgh ee yein s u n lig h t


p o w e rof lig h te n t e r in tgh ee yein m o o n lig h t

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 234


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 235


(ii) Sugg e s t why your answ e r in (a)(i) indica t e s that the cha n g e in
diam e t e r of the iris is not the princip al mec h a ni s m by which the
eye is able to adjus t to differ e n t light inte n sitie s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) (i) Stat e the Rayleigh crite rion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to the Rayleig h crite rio n, whe t h e r the
ability of the eye to resolve the imag e of two object s is gre a t e r in
sunligh t or in moonligh t.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 236


(c) Outline the differ e n t functions of the rods and the cones on the retin a
of the eye in their res po n s e to sunligh t and to moonligh t.

Rods: .......................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Cones: .....................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

15 7 . This ques tion is abou t the photo el e c t r i c effect.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the photo el e c t r i c effect.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 237


(b) Light of frequ e n cy 8.7 × 10 14 Hz is incide n t on the surfa c e of a met al
in a photocell.
The surf ac e area of the met al is 9.0 × 10 –6 m 2 and the inte n sity of the
light is
1.1 × 10 –3 W m –2 .

(i) Deduc e that the maxim u m possible photo el e c t r i c cur r e n t in the


photoc ell is 2.7 nA.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of photo el e c t r o n s rele a s e d from the


met al surfac e is 1.2 eV. Calcula t e the value of the work function
of the met al.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

15 8 . This ques tion is abou t the de Broglie hypot h e si s .

(a) Stat e the de Broglie hypot h e si s.

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 238


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 239


(b) Deter m i n e the de Broglie wavele n g t h of a proto n tha t has bee n
accel e r a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differe n c e of 1.2 kV.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) Explain why a precis e knowle d g e of the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the


proto n implies that its position cannot be obs e rv e d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

15 9 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.

13
Nitrog e n- 13 ( 7 N ) is an isotop e that is use d in medic al diagn osi s. The dec ay
cons t a n t of nitrog e n- 13 is 1.2 × 10 –3 s –1 .

(a) (i) Define decay cons ta n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 240


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 241


(ii) A sam pl e of nitrog e n- 13 has an initial activity of 800 Bq. The
sam pl e canno t be use d for diagno s ti c pur po s e s if its activity
beco m e s less than 150 Bq. Dete r m i n e the time it take s for the
activity of the sam pl e to fall to 150 Bq.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) (i) Calculat e the half- life of nitrog e n- 13

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Outline how the half- life of a sam pl e of nitrog e n- 13 can be


meas u r e d in a labor a t o r y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 242


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 243


(c) Nitro g e n- 13 und e r g o e s β + dec ay. Outline the expe ri m e n t a l evide nc e
that sugg e s t s anot h e r particle, the neut ri n o, is also emitt e d in the
decay.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

16 0 . This ques tion is abou t digital sam plin g.

(a) A comp a c t disc stor e s music in digit al form. The music is sam pl e d at a
frequ e n c y of 44.1 kHz. Each sa m pl e consis t s of two 16- bit wor ds.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by digital form.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) The disc stor e s music that takes one hour for playba c k.
Dete r mi n e the minim u m num b e r of bits that are stor e d on the
disc.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 244


..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 245


(b) A pag e from a book has 45 lines of writing. Eac h line of the book has,
on aver a g e , 65 lett e r s and spa c e s . The text of the book is to be stor e d
on comp a c t disc whe r e eac h lette r or spac e on a line is rep r e s e n t e d by
an eight- bit num b e r . Deter m i n e the num b e r of pag e s of text tha t can
be stor e d on a comp a c t disc simila r to that in (a).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

16 1 . This ques tion is abou t a digital cam e r a .

(a) By refer e n c e to what is mea n t by a pixel, desc ri b e the struc t u r e of a


char g e- couple d device (CCD).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) The CCD in a cam e r a has an are a of 16 cm 2 and is divide d into 5.6
meg a pix els.
The cam e r a is used to take a photog r a p h with a linea r ma gnific a tion
of 0.030.

(i) Calculat e the sepa r a t i o n of pixels on the CCD.

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 246


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 247


(ii) Dete r mi n e the minim u m sepa r a ti o n of two point s on an object
such that they may be see n sepa r a t e ly on the imag e. Diffrac tio n
effect s at the lens may be ignor e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

16 2 . This ques tion is abou t an oper a tio n a l amplifier (op- amp) circuit.

The circuit diagr a m is for a non- inver tin g amplifie r.

The oper a ti o n al amplifier is ideal.

Calculat e the

(a) gain of the amplifier circuit.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 248


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 249


(b) input pote n ti al V IN at which the amplifier satu r a t e s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

16 3 . This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.

Describ e the role of the cellula r exch a n g e durin g the making of a call from
a mobile phon e.

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 250


16 4 . This ques tion is abou t relativity.

Carri e is in a spac es hi p that is travelling towa r d s a sta r in a str ai g h t- line at


cons t a n t velocity as obse rv e d by Pete r . Pete r is at rest relative to the sta r.

(a) Car ri e meas u r e s her spac e s hi p to have a lengt h of 100 m. Pete r


mea s u r e s Carrie’s spac es hi p to have a lengt h of 91 m.

(i) Explain why Carrie mea s u r e s the prop e r lengt h of the spa c e s hi p.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Show that Carri e travels at a spe e d of appr oxi m a t e l y 0.4 c


relative to Pete r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Accordi n g to Carri e, it take s the sta r ten year s to rea c h her. Using
your ans w e r to (a)(ii), calcula t e the dist a n c e to the sta r as mea s u r e d
by Peter .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 251


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 252


(c) Accordi n g to Pete r, as Carrie pas s e s the sta r she send s a radio signal.
Deter m i n e the time, as mea s u r e d by Carri e, for the mes s a g e to reac h
Pete r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 253


16 5 . This ques tion is abou t a light clock.

Describ e the principle of a light clock.

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 2 mark s )

16 6 . This ques tion is abou t qua r k s.

The quar k cont e n t of a π + meso n includ e s an up qua r k.

The Feyn m a n diagr a m repr e s e n t s the decay of a π + meso n.

IB Questionbank Physics 254


(a) Identify the par ticles labelle d A and B.

A: .............................................................................................................
....................

B: .............................................................................................................
....................
(2)

(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to their prop e r t i e s , two differ e n c e s betw e e n a


photon and a W boson.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) The appr oxi m a t e rang e of the weak inte r a c ti o n is 10 –18 m. Dete r mi n e ,
in kg, the likely mass of the W boson.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

16 7 . This ques tion is abou t stra n g e n e s s .

(a) Outline two prop e r t i e s of str a n g e n e s s .

1. .............................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 255


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 256


(b) The following particle inte r a c ti o n is propos e d .

p + π – → K– + π +

In this inter a c ti o n, char g e is cons e r v e d .

Stat e, in ter m s of baryo n and stra n g e n e s s cons e rv a t i o n, whet h e r the


inter a c ti o n is possible.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

16 8 . This ques tion is abou t the prope r ti e s of a sta r.

(a) Descri b e what is mean t by a

(i) cons t ella tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) stellar clust e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 257


(b) Some dat a for the variabl e sta r Betelg e u s e are given below.

Avera g e absolut e ma gni t u d e = –5.1


Avera g e appa r e n t mag nit u d e = + 0.60
Avera g e appa r e n t brigh t n e s s = 1.6 × 10 –7 W m –2
Radius = 790 solar radii

The luminosity of the Sun is 3.8 × 10 26 W and it has a surfa c e


tem p e r a t u r e of 5700 K.

(i) Show that the dista n c e from Eart h to Betelge u s e is about 4.0 ×
10 18 m.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Dete r mi n e , in ter m s of the luminosity of the Sun, the luminosity


of Betelg e u s e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Calculat e the surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of Betelg e u s e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 258


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) On the Hertzs p r u n g–R u s s e ll diagr a m above,

(i) label the position of Betelg e u s e with the lette r B.


(1)

(ii) sketc h the position of main sequ e n c e star s.


(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 259


(d) Some star s, such as Betelg e u s e , are in combi n a tio n with a comp a nio n
sta r formin g a spect r o s c o pi c bina ry syste m . Descri b e and explain the
char a c t e r i s ti c s of a spect r o s c o pi c bina ry syste m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

16 9 . A force F is applied to a body moving along a str ai g h t line. A resis tive force
f acts on the body.
Both forces act along the sam e straig h t line as the motion of the body. The
rat e of chan g e of mom e n t u m of the body is equal to

A. F – f.

B. F.

C. F + f.

D. f.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 260


17 0 . The diagr a m below show s a unifor m elect ri c field of str e n g t h E. The field is
in a vacuu m .

An elect r o n ente r s the field with a velocity v in the dire c tion show n. The
elect r o n is moving in the plan e of the pape r . The path followe d by the
elect r o n will be

A. par a b olic.

B. in the directio n of E.

C. in the directio n of v .

D. circul a r.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

17 1 . A space c r af t moves from point X to point Y in the gravit a tion a l field of


Eart h. At point X, the gravit a tion a l pote n ti al is –14 MJ kg –1 . At point Y, the
gravit a tion al poten t i al is –2 MJ kg –1 . Which of the following desc ri b e s the
direction of the motion of the spac e c r a f t rela tive to Eart h and the cha n g e in
gravit a tion al poten t i al?

Dire c t i o n of Chan g e in gravit a t i o n a l


Moti o n pot e n t i a l
A. towa r d s Eart h +1 2 MJ kg –1
B. towa r d s Eart h –12 MJ kg –1
C. away from Eart h +1 2 MJ kg –1
D. away from Eart h –12 MJ kg –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 261


17 2 . A space c r af t is in orbit at a dista n c e r from the cent r e of the Eart h. The
engine of the space c r af t is fired and it moves to a new orbit of radi us 2 r.
Which of the following desc ri b e s the varia tio n s in kine tic ene r gy and total
ene r gy of the space c r af t ?

Kin e t i c Tot al en e r g y
en e r g y
A. decr e a s e incr e a s e
B. decr e a s e decr e a s e
C. incr e a s e incr e a s e
D. incr e a s e decr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

17 3 . The volum e of an ideal gas in a cont ai n e r is incre a s e d at const a n t


tem p e r a t u r e . Which of the following sta t e m e n t s is/ar e cor r e c t abou t the
molecul e s of the gas?

I. Their spee d rem ai n s const a n t .

II. The frequ e n cy of collisions of molec ul e s with unit are a of the


cont ai n e r wall decr e a s e s .

III. The force betw e e n the m dec r e a s e s .

A. I only

B. I and II only

C. I and III only

D. II and III only


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 262


17 4 . During an adiab a tic expa n sio n, a gas does 50 J of work agains t the
sur r o u n di n g s . It is then cooled at cons t a n t volum e by removing 20 J of
ene r gy from the gas. The mag nit u d e of the total cha n g e in inte r n a l ene r gy
of the gas is

A. 70 J.

B. 50 J.

C. 30 J.

D. 20 J.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

17 5 . The diagr a m shows the pres s u r e volum e relations hi p for a fixed mas s of an
ideal gas that unde r g o e s a cycle XYZ.

In which part(s) of the cycle is exte r n a l work done on the gas?

A. Y → Z only

B. Y → Z and Z → X only

C. X → Y and Z → X only

D. X → Y only
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 263


17 6 . A string vibrat e s with fund a m e n t a l frequ e n c y f. The wavele n g t h of the
soun d produ c e d in air is λ. Which of the following cor r e c tly gives the
frequ e n c y of vibration of the fourt h har m o ni c of the string and the
wavele n g t h of the sound in air?

Freq u e n c y Wave l e n g t h
f λ
A.
2 4

B. 4 f 4λ

f
C. 4λ
2
λ
D. 4 f
4
(Tot al 1 mar k )

17 7 . A rada r spee d gun is used to me a s u r e the spee d of a car. The car is moving
with spee d v away from the gun.

The rada r emits microw av e s of frequ e n c y f and spe e d c . Which of the


following is the frequ e n cy of the microw a v e s mea s u r e d at the gun afte r
reflection by the car?

 2v 
 f
A. f +  c 

v 
 f
B. f + c 

 2v 
 f
C. f –  c 

v 
 f
D. f – c 
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 264


17 8 . An optically active subs t a n c e

A. compl et ely absor b s polariz e d light.

B. unpol arize s polarized light.

C. polarize s unpola riz e d light.

D. rotat e s the plane of polariz a tion.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

17 9 . The diagr a m below show s two identic al filame n t lamps sepa r a t e d by a


small dista n c e. Light from the lamps is incide n t on a nar r o w slit behin d a
gree n filter. The slit is par allel to the filame n t of eac h lamp.
A photog r a p h is taken of the lamps throu g h the slit. The imag e s of the
filam e n t s on the photog r a p h are just resolve d.

The gre e n filter is replac e d by a red filter and the n by a violet filter. For
each filter a photog r a p h is take n of the lamps throu g h the slit. Which of the
following corr e c tly describ e s the resolution of the imag e s using a red and
using a violet filter?

Red filt er Viol e t filt e r


A. resolve d resolve d
B. resolve d not resolve d
C. not resolve d resolve d
D. not resolve d not resolve d
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 265


18 0 . Two resis to r s , of resis t a n c e R 1 and R 2 , are conn e c t e d in serie s with a cell of
emf ε and negligibl e inter n al resist a n c e .

Which expr e s si o n gives the pote n ti al differe n c e acros s the resis to r of


resis t a n c e R 1 ?

 R1 
 ε
A.  R1 R 2 

 R1 R 2 
 ε
B.  R1 

 R2 
 ε
C.  R1 R 2 

 R1 R 2 
 ε
D.  R2 
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 266


18 1 . The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the mag n e t i c flux φ thro u g h a
coil that is rotati n g in a unifor m magn e t i c field.

The mag ni t u d e of the emf induc e d acros s the ends of the coil is maxim u m
at time(s)

A. t 1 and t 3 .

B. t 2 and t 4 .

C. t 3 only.

D. t 4 only.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

18 2 . The rms cur r e n t ratin g of an elect ric hea t e r is 4 A. What direc t cur r e n t
would produ c e the sam e powe r dissipa tio n in the elect ric hea t e r ?

4
A
A. 2

B. 4 A

C. 4 2A

D. 8 A
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 267


18 3 . Two sam pl e s of radioa ctiv e subs t a n c e s X and Y have the sam e initial
activity. The half- life of X is T and the half- life of Y is 3 T . After a time of 3 T
the ratio

a c t ivit of
y s u b s t a n cX
e
a c t ivit of
y s u b s t a n cY
e is

A. 8.

B. 4.

1
C. 4.

1
D. 8.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

18 4 . In a fission reaction, the total mas s and the total binding ene r gy befor e the
reaction are M i and E i res p e c t ively, whe r e the binding ene r gy is define d as
a positive quan tity. After the rea c tion the total mas s is M f and the total
bindin g ener gy is E f . Which of the following corr e c tly comp a r e s the total
mas s e s and the total binding ene r gi e s ?

Total ma s s Total bindi n g


en e r g y
A. Mf > Mi Ef < Ei
B. Mf > Mi Ef > Ei
C. Mf < Mi Ef < Ei
D. Mf < Mi Ef > Ei
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 268


18 5 . Monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t on a met al surf ac e and elect r o n s are
relea s e d . The intensi ty of the incide n t light is incre a s e d . What cha n g e s , if
any, occur in the rat e of emission of elect r o n s and the kinetic ene r gy of the
emitt e d elect r o n s ?

Rat e of emi s s i o n of Kin e t i c en e r g y of th e


el e c t r o n s e m i t t e d el e c t r o n s
A. incr e a s e incr e a s e
B. decr e a s e no cha n g e
C. decr e a s e incr e a s e
D. incr e a s e no cha n g e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

18 6 . An elect r o n is confine d to move in one dim e n sio n in a box of lengt h L .


Which of the following gives the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n in its lowes t
ene r gy stat e?

h
A. 4L

h
B. 2L

h
C. L

2h
D. L
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 269


18 7 . The diagr a m below show s som e of the ene r gy levels availa ble to an
elect r o n in a caesiu m atom.

Photon s of ener gy 0.9 eV pass thro u g h a sa m pl e of low pres s u r e caesiu m


vapou r . Which of the following gives the ene r gy tra n si tion of the elect r o n
when a photon is abso r b e d ?

A. From –3.9 eV to 0

B. From –2.5 eV to –1.6 eV

C. From –1.6 eV to –2.5 eV

D. From 0 to –3.9 eV
(Tot al 1 mar k )

18 8 . The mag ni t u d e of the unce r t a i n t y in the position of a par ticle is equal to the
de Broglie wavel en g t h of the particl e. Which of the following is the
minim u m unce r t a i n t y in the mom e n t u m p of the par ticle?

p
A. 4π


B. p

h
C. p

p
D. h
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 270


18 9 . Which of the following provide s evide n c e for the qua n tiz a tio n of nucle a r
ene r gy levels?

I. Alpha particle s have discr e t e value s of kinetic ene r gi e s

II. Gam m a- ray photo n s have discr e t e ene r gi e s

III. Atomic line emission spec t r a

A. I only

B. II only

C. I and II only

D. I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )

19 0 . A radioac tive subs t a n c e S has a dec ay const a n t λ S , subs t a n c e T has a dec ay


cons t a n t λ T . Initially, a sam pl e of S cont ai n s N S nuclei and a sa m pl e of T
cont ai n s N T nuclei. The initial activity of both sam pl e s is the sam e .

NS
The ratio N T is

A. 1

λS
B. λT

λT
C. λS

D. λSλT
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 271


19 1 . Which of the following desc ri b e s the role of the atmos p h e r e in the
gree n h o u s e effect?

A. The atm os p h e r e is tran s p a r e n t to all solar radia tio n.

B. The atm os p h e r e absor b s infrar e d radia tio n from the grou n d.

C. The atm os p h e r e scat t e r s red light more tha n blue light.

D. Clouds in the atmos p h e r e preve n t abso r p t io n of infra r e d radia tion.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

19 2 . What is the value of the bina ry num b e r 1100 1 in decim al nota tion?

A. 50

B. 38

C. 25

D. 19
(Tot al 1 mar k )

19 3 . A CCD cam e r a is used to capt u r e the image of a paintin g. The are a of the
paintin g is 2.0 m 2 and the are a of the imag e is 50 mm 2 . Which of the
following is the linear mag nific a tion of the imag e ?

A. 2.5 × 10 –5

B. 5.0 × 10 –3

C. 2.0 × 10 2

D. 4.0 × 10 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 272


19 4 . An analog u e signal is sam pl e d at time inte rval s t . Each sam pl e is conve r t e d
to a digital num b e r having n bits. What is the total num b e r of bits produ c e d
in a time T ?

nT
A. t

nt
B. T

C. ntT

n
D. Tt
(Tot al 1 mar k )

19 5 . Data analysis ques tion.

The spee d v of waves on the surfa c e of dee p wate r dep e n d s only on the
wavele n g t h λ of the waves. The dat a gath e r e d from a par tic ul a r region of
the Atlantic Ocea n are plott e d below.

The unce r t a i n t y in the speed v is ±0. 3 0 m s –1 and the unc e r t a i n t y in λ is too


small to be show n on the diagr a m .

IB Questionbank Physics 273


(a) Draw a best- fit line for the data.
(1)

(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to the line you have dra w n in (a),

(i) why v is not directly propo r tio n a l to λ.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) the value of v for λ = 39 m.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n v and λ is of the form

v = a λ

whe r e a is a const a n t . To test the validity of this hypot h e s i s, values of


v 2 agains t λ are plott e d below.

IB Questionbank Physics 274


(i) Use your answ e r to (b)(ii) to show tha t the absolut e unc e r t a i n t y
in v 2 for a wavele n g t h of 39 m is ±5 m 2 s –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The absolut e uncer t a i n t y in v 2 for a wavele n g t h of 2.5 m is ±1 m 2


s –2 . Using this value and the value in (c)(i), const r u c t error bar s
for v 2 at the dat a points for
λ = 2.5 m and 39 m.
(1)

(iii) Stat e why the plott e d dat a in (c)(ii) sugg e s t tha t it is likely tha t v
is propo r tio n al to λ.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iv) Use the grap h above to det e r m i n e the cons t a n t a .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 275


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 276


k
(v) Theory shows that a = 2 π . Dete r mi n e a value for k .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

19 6 . This ques tion is abou t kine m a t i c s.

Lucy stan d s on the edg e of a vertic al cliff and throw s a ston e vertic ally
upwa r d s .

The stone leaves her han d with a spe e d of 15 m s –1 at the insta n t her hand
is 80 m above the surfac e of the sea. Air resist a n c e is negligibl e and the
accele r a ti o n of free fall is 10 m s –2 .

(a) Calcula t e the maxim u m heigh t rea c h e d by the ston e as me a s u r e d from


the point wher e it is throw n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 277


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 278


(b) Deter m i n e the time for the stone to rea c h the surfa c e of the sea afte r
leaving Lucy’s hand.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

19 7 . This ques tion is abou t inter n al ene r gy and the r m a l ene r gy (hea t).

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n inter n a l ene r gy and the r m a l ene r gy.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) A piece of iron is place d in a kiln until it rea c h e s the tem p e r a t u r e θ of


the kiln. The iron is then quickly tra n sf e r r e d to wat e r held in a
ther m ally insulat e d cont ai n e r . The wat e r is stirr e d until it rea c h e s a
ste a dy tem p e r a t u r e . The following data are availa bl e.

Ther m al capa city of the piece of iron = 60 J

IB Questionbank Physics 279


K–1
Ther m al capa city of the wate r = 2.0 ×
10 3 J K –1
Initial tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r = 16 °C
Final tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r = 45 °C

The ther m al capa ci ty of the cont ai n e r and insula tion is negligible.

IB Questionbank Physics 280


(i) Stat e an expr e s s io n, in ter m s of θ and the above dat a, for the
ene r gy tran sf e r of the iron in cooling from the tem p e r a t u r e of the
kiln to the final tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the incre a s e in inte r n a l ene r gy of the wat e r as the iron
cools in the wat e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Use your answ e r s to (b)(i) and (b)(ii) to det e r m i n e θ.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

19 8 . This ques tion is abou t the unified atomic mass unit and a nucle a r rea c tio n.

(a) Define the ter m unified atomic mas s unit .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The mas s of a nucleu s of rut h e rf o r di u m- 254 is 254.1 0 0 1 u. Calcula t e


the mas s in GeV c –2 .

IB Questionbank Physics 281


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 282


(c) In 1919, Ruthe r fo r d produ c e d the first artificial nucle a r tra n s m u t a t i o n
by bomb a r di n g nitrog e n with α-par ticle s. The rea c tion is repr e s e n t e d
by the following equ atio n.

14 17
α+ 7N  8O + X

(i) Identify X.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) The following dat a are availa bl e for the rea c tio n.

Rest mass of α = 3.742 8 GeV c –2


14
Rest mass of 7N = 13.09 4 2 GeV c –2
17
Rest mass of 8O + X = 16.83 8 3 GeV c –2

The initial kinetic ene r gy of the α-par ticle is 7.68 MeV.


Dete r mi n e the sum of the kinetic ene r gi e s of the oxyge n nucle u s
and X. (Assu m e that the nitrog e n nucle u s is station a r y.)

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 283


19 9 . This ques tion is abou t chan g e s of stat e of a gas.

(a) A cylinde r fitted with a piston cont ai ns 0.23 mol of heliu m gas.

The following data are availa ble for the heliu m with the piston in the
position show n.

Volume = 5.2 × 10 –3 m 3
Press u r e = 1.0 × 10 5 Pa
Temp e r a t u r e = 290 K

(i) Use the dat a to calcula t e a value for the univer s a l gas const a n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Stat e the assu m p t io n mad e in the calcul a tio n in (a)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The gas is now comp r e s s e d isothe r m a lly by the piston so that the
volum e of the gas is red uc e d . Explain why the comp r e s s i o n must be
car ri e d out slowly.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 284


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 285


(c) After the comp r e s s i o n, the gas is now allowe d to expa n d adia b a ti c a lly
to its original volum e. Use the first law of the r m o dy n a m i c s to explain
whet h e r the final tem p e r a t u r e will be less tha n, equal to or gre a t e r
than 290 K.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

20 0 . This ques tion is abou t the emf induc e d in a coil.

(a) Define magn e t i c flux .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 286


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 287


(b) A coil is rotat e d at const a n t spee d in a region of unifor m ma g n e ti c
field.

The grap h shows the variatio n with time t of the emf ε induc e d in the
coil for one cycle of rota tio n.

(i) On the grap h label, with the lette r T, a time at which the flux
linkag e in the coil is a maxim u m .
(1)

(ii) Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the rat e of cha n g e of flux at t = 4.0
ms. Explain your answ e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Calculat e the root me a n squ a r e value of the induc e d emf.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 288


..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

20 1 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c cha r g e and resis t a n c e .

(a) A plastic rod XY is held at end X. The end Y is rubb e d with a piec e of
cloth and, as a res ult, the end Y beco m e s elect ric ally cha r g e d .

The proce d u r e is now rep e a t e d using a coppe r rod and it is found tha t
the copp e r rod rem ai n s elect ric ally neut r a l. Explain thes e
obse rv a tio n s in ter m s of the prop e r ti e s of cond u c t o r s and insulat o r s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)

IB Questionbank Physics 289


(b) Two plastic rods each have a positive char g e + q situa t e d at one end.
The rods are arr a n g e d as show n.

Assum e that the char g e at the end of eac h rod beha v e s as a point
char g e . Draw, in the shad e d are a on the diagr a m

(i) the elect ric field patt e r n due to the two cha r g e s .
(2)

(ii) a line to repr e s e n t an equipot e n ti a l surfa c e. Label the line with


the lett e r V.
(1)

(c) A resis to r of resist a n c e 1.5 Ω is mad e from copp e r wire of radi us 0 .18
mm. The resistivity of coppe r is 1.7 × 10 –8 Ω m. Dete r m i n e the lengt h
of copp e r wire used to make the resisto r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 290


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 291


(d) The man uf a c t u r e r of the resisto r in (c) gua r a n t e e s tha t the resist a n c e
is within 10 % of 1.5 Ω , provide d tha t the powe r dissipa tio n in the
resisto r does not exce e d 1.0 W.

(i) Sugg e s t why the resist a n c e of the resis to r might be gre a t e r tha n
1.65 Ω if the powe r dissipa tion in the resisto r is gre a t e r tha n 1.0
W.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Show that, for a powe r dissipa tio n of 1.0 W, the curr e n t in a
resis to r of resist a n c e 1.5 Ω is 0.82 A.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 292


(iii) The 1.5 Ω resisto r is conn e c t e d in seri es with a varia bl e resis to r
and batt e r y of emf 6.0 V and inte r n a l resist a n c e 1.8 Ω.

Estim a t e the resist a n c e R of the variabl e resisto r that will limit


the curr e n t to
0.82 A.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

20 2 . This ques tion is abou t orbit al motion.

(a) A satellite, of mass m , is in orbit about Eart h at a dista n c e r from the


cent r e of Eart h. Deduc e that the kinetic ene r gy E K of the sat ellite is
equal to half the magni t u d e of the pote n ti al ene r gy E P of the satellite.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 293


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 294


(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with dist a n c e r of the Eart h’s
gravit atio n al poten ti al V .
Values of V for r < R , whe r e R is the radius of Eart h, are not show n.

The satellite in (a) has a mas s of 8.2 × 10 2 kg and it is in orbit at a


dista n c e of 1.0 × 10 7 m from the cent r e of Eart h. Using data from the
grap h and your ans w e r to (a), calcula t e for the satellite

(i) its total ene r gy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) its orbit al spee d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 295


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 296


(iii) the ener gy it mus t gain to move to an orbit a dista n c e 2.0 × 10 7
m from the cent r e of the Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

20 3 . This ques tion is abou t power prod u c tio n and global war mi n g.

(a) In any cyclical proc es s design e d to continu o u s ly conve r t the r m a l


ener gy to work, some ene r gy is always deg r a d e d . Explain what is
mea n t by degr a d e d ener gy.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A nuclea r powe r station uses ura ni u m- 235 (U- 235) as fuel. Outline the

(i) proce s s e s and ener gy chan g e s that occur thro u g h which the r m a l
ene r gy is produ c e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 297


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(ii) role of the heat exch a n g e r of the rea c t o r and the tur bi n e in the
gen e r a t io n of elect ric al ene r gy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Identify on e proce s s in the powe r station whe r e ene r gy is degr a d e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) The maxim u m powe r outp u t of the Drax coal- fired powe r station in the
UK is 4.0 GW. Dete r mi n e the minim u m mas s of pur e U-235 that would
be requir e d by a nuclea r powe r sta tion to provide the sam e maxim u m
annu al ener gy outpu t as the Drax powe r station.

IB Questionbank Physics 298


Ener gy density of U-235 = 82 TJ kg –1
1 year = 3.2 × 10 7 s

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 299


(e) It has bee n sugg e s t e d that the prod u c tio n of gre e n h o u s e gas e s by
coal- fired powe r station s has incre a s e d global war mi n g . One piec e of
eviden c e to suppo r t this sugg e s ti o n is the incre a s e in sea- level due to
an incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of the ocea n s . Over the past 100 yea rs it is
sugg e s t e d that sea- levels have rise n by 6.4 × 10 –2 m due to volum e
expan si o n.

Using the following dat a, det e r m i n e the aver a g e rise in tem p e r a t u r e


in the top levels of the ocea n s in the last 100 years.

Mean dept h of ocea n s that is affect e d by global war mi n g =


4.0 × 10 2 m
Coefficien t of volum e expa n sio n of sea wat e r =
5.1 × 10 –5 K–1

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

20 4 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device (CCD).

(a) Stat e two advan t a g e s of storing infor m a ti o n in a digit al form rat h e r


than an analog u e form.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 300


.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 301


(b) A CCD is effectively a silicon chip that is divide d into small are a s
called pixels.
Each pixel is provide d with elect r o d e s . Outline how light incide n t on a
pixel prod u c e s a chan g e in pote n t i al differ e n c e acros s the pixel.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Light of frequ e n cy 7.2 × 10 14 Hz and inte n si ty 1.6 mW m –2 is incide n t


on a pixel for a time of 18 ms. The are a of the pixel is 2.0 × 10 –10 m 2
and its capacit a n c e is 12 pF. The res ultin g cha n g e in pote n ti al
differ e n c e acros s the pixel is 10 μV.

(i) Deduc e that the num b e r of photo n s incide n t on the pixel is 1.2 ×
10 4 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the quan t u m efficiency of the pixel.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 302


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

20 5 . This ques tion is abou t power and efficie ncy.

A bus is travelling at a const a n t spe e d of 6.2 m s –1 along a section of road


that is incline d at an angle of 6.0° to the horizont al.

(a) (i) The bus is rep r e s e n t e d by the black dot show n below.
Draw a labelled sketc h to rep r e s e n t the force s acting on the bus.

(4)

(ii) Stat e the value of the rat e of cha n g e of mom e n t u m of the bus.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 303


(b) The total outp u t powe r of the engin e of the bus is 70 kW and the
efficiency of the engin e is 35 %. Calcula t e the input powe r to the
engin e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 304


(c) The mas s of the bus is 8.5 × 10 3 kg. Dete r mi n e the rat e of incr e a s e of
gravit atio n al poten ti al ene r gy of the bus.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Using your ans w e r to (c) and the dat a in (b), estim a t e the magni t u d e
of the resistive forces acting on the bus.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 305


20 6 . This ques tion is abou t photo el e c t r i c effect and de Broglie wavele n g t h .

The diagr a m is a rep r e s e n t a t i o n of appa r a t u s use d to study the


photo el e c t r i c effect.

Light from the monoc h r o m a t i c sour c e is incide n t on a catho d e plac e d in an


evacu a t e d tube.
A variable voltag e supply is conn e c t e d betw e e n anod e and catho d e and the
photo el e c t r i c cur r e n t is regis t e r e d by the micro a m m e t e r . The sketc h gra p h
shows how the photoel e c t ri c cur r e n t I varies with the pote n ti al differe n c e
V betw e e n anod e and catho d e for two sour c e s of light, A and B, of differ e n t
frequ e n ci e s and intensi ti es.

IB Questionbank Physics 306


(a) Explain with refer e n c e to the Einst ei n model, which gra p h, A or B,
corr es p o n d s to the light with the gre a t e r frequ e n c y.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) The frequ e n c y of the light that prod u c e s gra p h A is 8.8 × 10 14 Hz. The
magni t u d e of V A is 1.6 V.

(i) Stat e the value of the maxim u m ene r gy, in eV, of the elec t r o n s
emitt e d from the catho d e .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the work function, in eV, of the surfa c e of the catho d e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 307


..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 308


(c) The frequ e n c y of the incide n t light is incr e a s e d but the inte n sity
rem ai n s const a n t .
Explain why this incr e a s e in frequ e n c y res ult s in a cha n g e to the
maxim u m photo el e c t r i c cur r e n t (satu r a ti o n cur r e n t ) .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) The elect r o n s emitt e d from the photo- catho d e have an associa t e d de
Broglie wavele n g t h .
Descri b e what is mean t by the de Broglie wavele n g t h .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

20 7 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion (SHM), wave motion and
polarization.

(a) By refer e n c e to simple har m o ni c motion, stat e wha t is mea n t by


amplit u d e.

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 309


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 310


(b) A liquid is cont ain e d in a U-tube.

Dia g r a m 1 Dia gr a m 2

The pres s u r e on the liquid in one side of the tube is incr e a s e d so tha t
the liquid is displac e d as show n in diag r a m 2. Whe n the pres s u r e is
sudd e nly relea s e d the liquid oscillat e s .
The dam pi n g of the oscillation s is small.

(i) Describ e what is mea n t by da m pi n g.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The displac e m e n t of the liquid surfa c e from its equilibri u m


position is x . The accele r a ti o n a of the liquid in the tube is given
by the expr e s si o n

2g
 x
a = l

wher e g is the accele r a t io n of free fall and l is the total lengt h of


the liquid colum n.
Explain, with refer e n c e to the motion of the liquid, the
significan c e of the minus sign.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 311


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) The total lengt h of the liquid colum n in the tube is 0.32 m.
Dete r mi n e the period of oscillation.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) A wave is travelling along a strin g. The string can be modelle d as a


single line of particles and each particl e execu t e s simple har m o ni c
motion. The period of oscillation of the particle s is 0.80 s.

The grap h shows the displa c e m e n t y of par t of the string at time t = 0.


The dist an c e along the string is d.

IB Questionbank Physics 312


(i) On the grap h, draw an arro w to show the dire c tion of motion of
par ticl e P at the point mark e d on the string.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 313


(ii) Dete r mi n e the mag nit u d e of the velocity of particle P.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(iii) Show that the spee d of the wave is 5.0 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iv) On the grap h above, label with the lette r X the position of
par ticl e P at t = 0.40 s.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 314


(d) The string in (c) is fixed at both ends and is mad e to vibra t e in a
vertical plane in its first har m o ni c.

(i) Describ e how the stan di n g wave in the string gives rise to the
first har m o ni c.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Outline how a travelling wave in a string can be use d to desc rib e
the nat u r e of polarize d light.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 315


(e) James is weari n g polarize d sungl a s s e s and views the sunlight
reflect e d from the smoot h surf ac e of a lake.

The angle θ is the angle betw e e n the surfa c e of the lake and Jame s’s
line of sight.
Calcula t e the value of θ at which the reflec t e d sunlight from the
surfac e is minimize d.
The refra ctive index of the wate r is 1.3.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 25 mark s )

20 8 . This ques tion is abou t the prope r ti e s of a sta r.

(a) Descri b e what is mean t by a

(i) cons t ella tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 316


(ii) stellar clust e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 317


(b) Some dat a for the variabl e sta r Betelg e u s e are given below.

Avera g e absolut e ma gni t u d e = –5.1


Avera g e appa r e n t mag nit u d e = + 0.60
Avera g e appa r e n t brigh t n e s s = 1.6 × 10 –7 W m –2
Radius = 790 solar radii

The luminosity of the Sun is 3.8 × 10 26 W and it has a surfa c e


tem p e r a t u r e of 5700 K.

(i) Show that the dista n c e from Eart h to Betelge u s e is about 4.0 ×
10 18 m.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Dete r mi n e , in ter m s of the luminosity of the Sun, the luminosity


of Betelg e u s e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Calculat e the surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of Betelg e u s e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 318


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) On the Hertzs p r u n g–R u s s e ll diagr a m above,

(i) label the position of Betelg e u s e with the lette r B.


(1)

(ii) sketc h Betelge u s e’s likely evolution a r y path.


(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 319


(d) Some star s, such as Betelg e u s e , are in combi n a tio n with a comp a nio n
sta r formin g a spect r o s c o pi c bina ry syste m . Descri b e and explain the
char a c t e r i s ti c s of a spect r o s c o pi c bina ry syste m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

20 9 . This ques tion is abou t the density of the unive r s e .

(a) Explain, with refer e n c e to the possible fate of the unive r s e , the
significan c e of the critical density of matt e r in the univer s e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 320


(b) Sugg e s t on e reas o n why it is difficult to estim a t e the density of mat t e r
in the univer s e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

21 0 . This ques tion is abou t the evolution of sta r s.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the

(i) Chan d r a s e k h a r limit.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Oppe n h ei m e r –Volkoff limit.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 321


(b) Sugg e s t how your ans w e r s in (a) can be use d to pre dic t the fate of a
main sequ e n c e star.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

21 1 . This ques tion is abou t the Hubbl e cons t a n t .

(a) Outline the mea s u r e m e n t s that mus t be take n in orde r to dete r m i n e a


value for the Hubbl e const a n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 322


(b) One esti m a t e of the Hubbl e const a n t is 60 km s –1 Mpc –1 . Cygnus A is a
radio galaxy at a dist an c e of 6.0 × 10 8 ly from Eart h. Calcula t e , in km
s –1 , the rece s sio n al spee d of Cygnus A rela tive to the Eart h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

21 2 . This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.

(a) Outline what is mean t by the modula tio n of a wave.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The frequ e n c y spect r u m of the signal from a radio tra n s m i t t e r is


show n below.

IB Questionbank Physics 323


(i) Stat e the nam e of this form of radio tra n s m i s sio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Stat e the frequ e n c y of the car rie r wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Dete r mi n e the band wi d t h of this signal.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

21 3 . This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.

Describ e the role of the cellula r exch a n g e durin g the making of a call from
a mobile phon e.

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 324


IB Questionbank Physics 325
21 4 . This ques tion is abou t the tran s m i s s io n of signals.

The signal from a micro p h o n e is amplified and the n tra ns m i t t e d to a dista n t


receive r.
The variation with time t of the amplified signal befor e tran s m i s si o n is
show n below.

(a) The amplified signal is tran s m i t t e d using a coaxial cable as illust r a t e d .

On the axes below, sketc h the wavefor m of the signal at point X afte r
tran s m i s sio n along the coaxial cable.

(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 326


(b) A secon d tran s m i s sio n syste m , as show n below, uses a cable
cont ai nin g many sepa r a t e fibre s (multi- core optic cable).

(i) Sugg e s t why a multi- core optic cable is requi r e d rath e r tha n a
single- core optic fibre.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Stat e what circuit s should be includ e d in the tra n s m i s sio n syste m
so that a single- core optic fibre may be use d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 327


(c) The receive d signal of the secon d tra n s m i s s io n syste m is show n below.

Calcula t e the

(i) minim u m num b e r of outp u t bits of the ADC.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) sam plin g frequ e n c y of the ADC.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(d) Stat e on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dva n t a g e of the coaxial cable


tran s m i s sio n as comp a r e d with the fibre optic cable.

Advant a g e : ..............................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Disadv a n t a g e : .........................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 328


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

21 5 . This ques tion is abou t signal powe r and atte n u a t i o n.

An optic fibre in a telep h o n e syste m has lengt h 48 km. The noise powe r in
the optic fibre is
2.5 × 10 –18 W.

(a) The signal- to- noise ratio is not to fall below 25 dB. Show that the
minim u m signal power in the fibre is 7.9 × 10 –16 W.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The att e n u a t i o n per unit lengt h of the signal in the fibre is 2.7 dB km –
1
. Use the data in (a) to dete r m i n e the powe r of the input signal to the
fibre so that the signal- to- noise ratio does not fall below 25 dB.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 329


21 6 . This ques tion is abou t an oper a tio n a l amplifier (op- amp) circuit.

The diagr a m shows an incom pl e t e circ uit.

The oper a ti o n al amplifier is ideal.

(a) On the incom pl e t e diag r a m above, desig n a circ uit for a non- inver tin g
amplifier.
(2)

(b) Calcula t e the

(i) gain of the amplifier circuit.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) input poten ti al V IN at which the amplifie r satu r a t e s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 330


(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 331


21 7 . This ques tion is abou t prope r ti e s of elect r o m a g n e t i c waves.

(a) Stat e two prop e r t i e s that are com m o n to all elect r o m a g n e t i c waves.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A single lens is used to form a mag nifie d real imag e of an objec t.
Explain, with refer e n c e to the dispe r sio n of light, why the imag e has
colour e d edg e s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Outline why a clear sky is blue in colour.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 332


21 8 . This ques tion is abou t a conve r gi n g lens.

(a) Define angular magnificatio n .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A thin conver gi n g lens of focal lengt h 4.5 cm is to be use d as a


magnifying glass.
The obse rv e r places the lens close to her eye. The leas t dista n c e of
distinct vision is 24 cm.

(i) Show that the dista n c e of the object from the lens is 3.8 cm.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the ang ul a r ma g nific a tio n prod u c e d by the lens.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 333


.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 334


(c) Sugg e s t two reas o n s why, for high mag nifica tion s , a combin a tio n of
lens e s is used rath e r than a single lens.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

21 9 . This ques tion is abou t interf e r e n c e of light.

Two coher e n t nar r o w bea m s of light pass throu g h two identic al evac u a t e d
tubes, as show n below.

The two coher e n t nar r o w beam s are brou g h t to a focus at point P on a


scre e n .

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by cohe r e n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to the wavele n g t h , the condition tha t must be
satisfied for a brigh t fringe to be form e d on the scre e n at point P.

IB Questionbank Physics 335


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 336


(c) Air is allowe d to ent e r gra d u a lly into one of the evac u a t e d tube s . The
bright n e s s of the light at point P is see n to decr e a s e and the n incr e a s e
again repe a t e d ly.

(i) Stat e the effect on the wavele n g t h of the light in the evac u a t e d
tube as the air is introd u c e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Sugg e s t why ther e is a variatio n in the bright n e s s of the light at


point P.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

22 0 . This ques tion is abou t X-ray diffrac tion.

An X-ray tube fitted with a coppe r targ e t emits radia tion with a
char a c t e r i s ti c wavele n g t h of 1.54 × 10 –10 m.

(a) Explain why the char a c t e r i s t ic wavele n g t h is dep e n d e n t on the tar g e t


mat e ri al.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 337


(b) The X-ray bea m is inciden t on a sodiu m chloride cryst al. The minim u m
angle θ at which the X-rays of wavele n g t h 1.54 × 10 –10 m reinforc e
const r u c t iv ely when scat t e r e d from a plane of atom s in the cryst al is
15.9°, as show n below.

(i) Calculat e the dista n c e d betw e e n neigh b o u r i n g plan e s of atom s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Dete r mi n e any othe r values of θ at which maxim u m inten sity


occu r s for the X-ray bea m scatt e r e d from the cryst al.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 338


(c) Stat e why it is pref er a bl e to mea s u r e mor e than one angle θ in orde r
to det e r m i n e the spacin g of the plan e s of atom s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

22 1 . This ques tion is abou t relativity.

Carri e is in a spac es hi p that is travelling towa r d s a sta r in a str ai g h t- line at


cons t a n t velocity as obse rv e d by Pete r . Pete r is at rest relative to the sta r.

(a) Car ri e meas u r e s her spac e s hi p to have a lengt h of 100 m. Pete r


mea s u r e s Carrie’s spac es hi p to have a lengt h of 91 m.

(i) Explain why Carrie mea s u r e s the prop e r lengt h of the spa c e s hi p.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Show that Carri e travels at a spe e d of appr oxi m a t e l y 0.4 c


relative to Pete r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 339


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Accordi n g to Carri e, it take s the sta r ten year s to rea c h her. Using
your ans w e r to (a)(ii), calcula t e the dist a n c e to the sta r as mea s u r e d
by Peter .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) Accordi n g to Pete r, as Carrie pas s e s the sta r she send s a radio signal.
Deter m i n e the time, as mea s u r e d by Carri e, for the mes s a g e to reac h
Pete r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 340


(d) Car ri e and Louise, two obse rv e r s in a spa c e s hi p, view a light sour c e
place d close to Car rie. When the spac e s hi p is travelling at a const a n t
velocity, they both mea s u r e the frequ e n c y of the light sour c e and
obtain identic al values.

The mag ni t u d e of the velocity of the spac e s hi p incre a s e s .

Stat e and explain any chan g e s to the freq u e n c y of the light sourc e , as
mea s u r e d by Louis e, that occur during the accel e r a t io n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

22 2 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic mec h a ni c s .

(a) Calcula t e the pote n ti al differe n c e thro u g h which a proto n, sta r ti n g


from rest, mus t be accel e r a t e d for its mas s–e n e r g y to be equ al to
thr e e times its rest mas s- ene r gy.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 341


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 342


(b) Calcula t e the mom e n t u m of the proto n afte r accel e r a ti o n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

22 3 . This ques tion is abou t the Michels o n–Mo rl ey expe ri m e n t .

(a) (i) Outline the pur po s e of the expe ri m e n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Stat e and explain why Michelso n and Morley rota t e d the
app a r a t u s throu g h 90°.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 343


..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 344


(b) Stat e and explain the signific a n c e of the res ul t of the expe ri m e n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

22 4 . This ques tion is abou t spac e ti m e .

(a) Descri b e what is mean t by spa c e ti m e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Stat e the shap e of the pat h in spac e ti m e of a body

(i) moving at cons t a n t velocity.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 345


(ii) orbitin g the Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 346


(c) Explain how spac eti m e is use d to desc ri b e the gravit a tio n a l attr a c ti o n
betw e e n Eart h and a satellite orbitin g the Eart h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

22 5 . This ques tion is abou t heari n g.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the

(i) inten si ty I of a sound wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) thre s h ol d inten sity I 0 of hea ri n g.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 347


(b) A pneu m a t i c drill prod u c e s noise of inten sity level 98 dB at the ear of
a worke r.

(i) Calculat e the intensi ty of the noise at the ear.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The intensity level at which discomfo r t is felt is 108 dB. Seve r al
pneu m a t i c drills, each one produ ci n g an inte n si ty level of noise of
98 dB at the ear, are being used at the sam e time. Dete r m i n e the
num b e r of pne u m a t i c drills that must be in use befor e the
work e r , who has no hea ri n g prot e c tio n, expe ri e n c e s disco mfor t.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 348


22 6 . This ques tion is abou t ultr as o u n d .

The diagr a m shows part of a cross- section thro u g h the leg of a patie n t who
is unde r g oi n g an ultr as o u n d scan.

Data for the spee d c of ultr a s o u n d in differ e n t media are show n below,
toget h e r with values for the acous tic impe d a n c e Z .

c / m s –1 Z / kg m –2 s –1
air 3.3 × 10 2 4.3 × 10 2
gel 1.5 × 10 3 1.5 × 10 6
muscl e 1.5 × 10 3 1.4 × 10 6
bone 4.1 × 10 3 7.8 × 10 6

(a) Use the data from the table to calcula t e a value for the density of
bone.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The fraction F of the inten si ty of an ultr a s o u n d wave reflect e d at the


boun d a r y betw e e n two media having acous tic impe d a n c e s Z 1 and Z 2 is
given by the following equ a tio n.

IB Questionbank Physics 349


(Z 1  Z 2 ) 2
2
F = ( Z 1 Z 2 )

IB Questionbank Physics 350


Deter m i n e the fraction F for the boun d a r y betw e e n

(i) air and muscle.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) gel and muscl e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Use your answ e r s in (b) to explain the nee d for a gel on the patie n t’s
skin.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 351


22 7 . Outline the princi ples of the prod u c tio n of an imag e using comp u t e d
tomog r a p h y (CT).

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 5 mark s )

22 8 . This ques tion is abou t radiation expos u r e .

(a) A radiation worke r is accide n t a lly expos e d to a sourc e of radia tio n.


Stat e why it is easier to mea s u r e the expos u r e rath e r tha n the
absor b e d dose for the worke r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 352


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 353


(b) Expos u r e to γ-radiation may be mea s u r e d using a small met al can. The
can cont ai n s
3.6 × 10 –3 g of dry air at atmos p h e r i c pres s u r e . A met al wire,
insulat e d from the can, is situa t e d along the axis of the can, as show n
below.

A pot en ti al differ e n c e is applied betw e e n the can and the cent r a l wire.
The can is expos e d to γ-radia tio n for a time of 90 s. During this time,
the sensitive am m e t e r recor d s a cur r e n t of 4.8 × 10 –7 A.

(i) Dete r mi n e the expos u r e prod u c e d by the γ-radia tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The ener gy req ui r e d to produ c e one ion- pair in air is 34 eV.
Dete r mi n e the rat e, in watts, of deposition of ene r gy in the air in
the can.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 354


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 355


22 9 . This ques tion is abou t qua r k s.

The quar k cont e n t of a π + meso n includ e s an up qua r k.

The Feyn m a n diagr a m repr e s e n t s the decay of a π + meso n.

(a) Identify the par ticles labelle d A and B.

A: .............................................................................................................
....................

B: .............................................................................................................
....................
(2)

(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to their prop e r t i e s , two differ e n c e s betw e e n a


photon and a W boson.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) The appr oxi m a t e rang e of the weak inte r a c ti o n is 10 –18 m. Dete r mi n e ,
in kg, the likely mass of the W boson.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 356


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 357


23 0 . This ques tion is abou t a synch r o t r o n .

(a) Stat e and explain how the particle s in a sync h r o t r o n bea m are
accel e r a t e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) In a synch r o t r o n , bea m s of proton s and antipr o t o n s attain ene r gi e s of


1400 GeV.
The radius of the synch r o t r o n is 4.9 km.

(i) The mag n e t i c field stre n g t h in the synch r o t r o n is 0.95 T.


Dete r mi n e , statin g any assu m p t i o n s you make, the mas s of a
proton in the bea m.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 358


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 359


(ii) Outline why, even at the very high ene r gi e s of this par ticle bea m ,
the collisions are unlikely to lead to the cre a tion of a single
unbou n d quar k.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Outline two ben efits of inter n a ti o n a l coope r a ti o n in the const r u c t i o n


and use of high- ener gy particle accele r a t o r s .

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

23 1 . This ques tion is abou t stra n g e n e s s .

(a) Outline two prop e r t i e s of str a n g e n e s s .

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 360


2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 361


(b) The following particle inte r a c ti o n is propos e d .

p + π – → K– + π +

In this inter a c ti o n, char g e is cons e r v e d .

Stat e, in ter m s of baryo n and stra n g e n e s s cons e rv a t i o n, whet h e r the


inter a c ti o n is possible.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

23 2 . This ques tion is abou t deep inelas tic scat t e r i n g.

(a) Outline what is mean t by dee p inelas ti c scatt e r i n g.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to asym p t o ti c free do m , why dee p inelas tic
scat t e r i n g experi m e n t s indica t e tha t qua r k s beh av e as free particl e s
within a nucleo n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 362


(2)
(Tota l 3 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 363


23 3 . This ques tion is abou t conditions in the early unive r s e .

At one mom e n t in the early unive r s e the aver a g e particle ene r gy was 500
keV.
Nucleosy n t h e s i s is thou g h t to have bee n the domin a n t mec h a ni s m for
par ticl e inter a c ti o n at this time.

(a) Show that the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e at which nucleosy n t h e s i s


occur r e d is
4 × 10 9 K.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Nucleo syn t h e s i s was only domin a n t for a shor t time in the early
univer s e . Explain why the time was shor t and why nucleosy n t h e s i s did
not re- occur.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

23 4 . The best esti m a t e for the time it take s light to cross the nucle u s of the
hydro g e n atom is

IB Questionbank Physics 364


A. 10 –23 s.

B. 10 –20 s.

C. 10 –15 s.

D. 10 –7 s.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 365


23 5 . The lengt h of each side of a suga r cube is mea s u r e d as 10 mm with an
unce r t ai n t y of ±2 mm.
Which of the following is the absolut e unce r t a i n t y in the volum e of the
suga r cube?

A. ±6 mm 3

B. ±8 mm 3

C. ±4 0 0 mm 3

D. ±6 0 0 mm 3
(Tot al 1 mar k )

23 6 . The time taken for a stone drop p e d from res t to fall vertic ally thro u g h 16 m
is 2.0 s. Based on thes e meas u r e m e n t s , wha t is the bes t estim a t e for the
accele r a ti o n of free fall?

A. 4.0 m s –2

B. 8.0 m s –2

C. 9.8 m s –2

D. 10 m s –2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

23 7 . A woode n block is sliding down an incline d plane at const a n t spe e d. The


mag ni t u d e of the friction al force betw e e n the block and the plan e is equ al
to

A. zero.

B. the mag nit u d e of the weigh t of the block.

C. the mag nit u d e of the compo n e n t of weight of the block par allel to the
plan e.

D. the mag nit u d e of the compo n e n t of the nor m al rea c tio n par allel to the
plan e.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 366


23 8 . Which of the following is a corr e c t stat e m e n t of New to n’s secon d law of
motion?

A. A force acting on a body is propo r tio n a l to the mas s of the body.

B. The rate of chan g e of mom e n t u m of a body is equ al to the net exte r n a l


force acting on the body.

C. The mom e n t u m of a body is propo r tio n a l to the net exte r n a l force


acting on the body.

D. A force acting on a body is propo r tio n a l to the accele r a ti o n of the


body.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

23 9 . A ball of weigh t W is travelling horizon t ally towa r d s a vertic al wall. It


strikes the wall and rebo u n d s horizon t ally. The cha n g e in the mag nit u d e of
the mom e n t u m of the ball is ∆p. Which of the following is the mag nit u d e of
the impuls e that the ball impa r t s to the wall?

A. W + ∆p

B. W – ∆p

C. W

D. ∆p
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 367


24 0 . Two object s unde r g o an inelas tic collision. Which of the following is corr e c t
in resp e c t of both the cons e r v a ti o n of mom e n t u m and the cons e r v a ti o n of
total ener gy of the syste m ?

Mo m e n t u m Tot al en e r g y
A. cons e r v e d not cons e rv e d
B. cons e r v e d cons e r v e d
C. not cons e rv e d not cons e rv e d
D. not cons e rv e d cons e r v e d
(Tot al 1 mar k )

24 1 . A particle P is moving anti- clockwis e with const a n t spe e d in a horizont a l


circle.

Which diagr a m corr e c tly shows the direc tio n of the velocity v and
accele r a ti o n a of the par ticle P in the position show n?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 368


24 2 . Two object s are in ther m al cont a c t with eac h othe r . Which of the following
will det er m i n e the directio n of the tra n sf e r of the r m a l ene r gy betw e e n the
bodies?

A. The mas s of each body

B. The area of cont a ct betw e e n the bodies

C. The specific heat cap acity of eac h body

D. The tem p e r a t u r e of each body


(Tot al 1 mar k )

24 3 . The mole is define d as

1
A. 1 2 the mas s of an atom of the isotop e car bo n- 12.

B. the amou n t of a subst a n c e that cont ai n s as many ele m e n t a r y entitie s


as the num b e r of atom s in 12 g of the isotop e carbo n- 12.

C. the mas s of one atom of the isotop e car bo n- 12.

D. the amou n t of a subst a n c e that cont ai n s as many nuclei as the num b e r


of nuclei in 12 g of the isotop e carbo n- 12.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 369


24 4 . A gas is cont ai n e d in a cylinde r by a piston.

The gas is comp r e s s e d rapidly by moving the piston in the direc tio n show n.
The best explan a ti o n for the resul tin g incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of the gas is
that the molec ul e s of the gas gain kinetic ene r gy

A. from the moving piston.

B. by colliding more frequ e n tly with each othe r.

C. by being pus h e d close r toge t h e r .

D. by colliding more frequ e n tly with the walls of the cylinde r .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 370


24 5 . The gra p h shows how the velocity v of an objec t und e r g oi n g simple
har m o ni c motion varies with time t for one compl e t e period of oscillation.

Which of the following sketc h gra p h s bes t shows how the total ene r gy E of
the object varies with t ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 371


24 6 . A force that varies sinus oid ally is applied to a syste m that is lightly
dam p e d . Which of the following mus t be true of the force for reson a n c e to
occu r?

A. It mus t always be in anti- pha s e with the oscillations of the syst e m .

B. Its directio n must always be in the direc tio n of motion of the


oscillations of the syste m .

C. Its frequ e n c y mus t be equ al to the freq u e n c y of oscillation of the


syste m .

D. Its amplit u d e mus t be equ al to the amplit u d e of oscillation of the


syste m .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

24 7 . Which of the following is a value of wavele n g t h tha t is found in the visible


region of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m ?

A. 4 × 10 –5 m

B. 4 × 10 –7 m

C. 4 × 10 –9 m

D. 4 × 10 –11 m
(Tot al 1 mar k )

24 8 . Two waves meet at a point in spac e. Which of the following prope r ti e s


always add toget h e r ?

A. Displac e m e n t

B. Amplitud e

C. Spee d

D. Freq u e n c y
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 372


24 9 . A point char g e of magni t u d e 2.0 μC is move d betw e e n two points X and Y.
Point X is at a poten ti al of +6. 0 V and point Y is at a pote n ti al of +9. 0 V.
The gain in poten ti al ene r gy of the point cha r g e is

A. 0.20 μJ.

B. 1.5 μJ.

C. 6.0 μJ.

D. 30 μJ.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

25 0 . A resisto r of resis t a n c e 12 Ω is conne c t e d in serie s with a cell of negligibl e


inter n al resist a n c e . The powe r dissipa t e d in the resisto r is P. The resist o r is
repl ac e d with a resis to r of resist a n c e 3.0 Ω. What is the powe r dissip a t e d in
this resisto r ?

A. 0.25 P

B. P

C. 2.0 P

D. 4.0 P
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 373


25 1 . The elect r o m o t ive force (emf) of a cell is define d as

A. the powe r supplie d by the cell per unit curr e n t from the cell.

B. the force that the cell provide s to drive elect r o n s roun d a circuit.

C. the ene r gy supplied by the cell per unit cur r e n t from the cell.

D. the poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the ter mi n a l s of the cell.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

25 2 . The weight of an object of mas s 1 kg at the surfa c e of Mars is about 4 N.


The radius of Mars is about half the radius of Eart h. Which of the following
is the best estim a t e of the ratio below?

m a s so f M a r s
m a s sof E a r t h

A. 0.1

B. 0.2

C. 5

D. 10
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 374


25 3 . Three positive point char g e s of equ al mag ni t u d e are held at the corn e r s X,
Y and Z of a right- angled trian gl e . The point P is at the midpoin t of XY.
Which of the arrow s shows the dire c tion of the elec t ri c field at point P?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 375


25 4 . An elect r o n travelling in the direc tion show n by the arro w X, ent e r s a
region of unifor m mag n e ti c field. It leave s the region of field in the
direction show n by the arrow Y.

The direction of the mag n e t i c field is

A. in the directio n of X.

B. into the plane of the pap e r .

C. in the opposit e direc tio n to X.

D. out of the plane of the pap e r .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

25 5 . Emission and abso r p ti o n spect r a provide evide nc e for

A. the nuclea r model of the atom.

B. nat u r al radioac tivity.

C. the existe n c e of isotop e s.

D. the existe n c e of atomic ene r gy levels.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 376


25 6 . Which of the following is true in resp e c t of both the Coulom b inte r a c ti o n
and the stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s in an atom?

Coul o m b int er a c t i o n Str o n g int e r a c t i o n


exi s t s bet w e e n exi s t s bet w e e n
A. proto n s only neut r o n s only
B. both proto n s and neut r o n s only
neut r o n s
C. proto n s only both proto n s and
neut r o n s
D. both proto n s and both proto n s and
neut r o n s neut r o n s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

25 7 . Which of the following cor r e c tly identifies the thr e e particle s emitt e d in the
45 45
decay of the nucle u s 2 0 Ca into a nucle u s of 2 1S c ?

A. α, β–, γ

B. β –, γ, v

C. α, γ, v

D. α, β–, v
(Tot al 1 mar k )

25 8 . The nuclea r reactio n

2
1H  31 H  4 1
2 H e 0 n

is an exam pl e of

A. nuclea r fission.

B. radioac tive decay.

C. nuclea r fusion.

D. artificial tran s m u t a t i o n .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 377


25 9 . Degr a d e d ene r gy is ener gy that is

A. stor e d in the Ear t h’s atmo s p h e r e .

B. availabl e from non- rene w a bl e ene r gy sour c e s .

C. conve r t e d into work in a cyclical proc e s s.

D. no longer available for the perfor m a n c e of useful work.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

26 0 . Which of the following cor r e c tly desc ri b e s both the role of the mode r a t o r
and of the cont r ol rods in a nucle a r reac t o r ?

Mod er a t o r Con tr o l rod s


A. slows down the maint ai n a const a n t rat e of
neut r o n s fission
B. cools down the react o r extr a c t the r m a l ene r gy
C. cools down the react o r maint ai n a const a n t rat e of
fission
D. slows down the extr a c t the r m a l ene r gy
neut r o n s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

26 1 . Which of the following cor r e c tly shows the ene r gy chan g e in a photovolt aic
cell and in a solar heati n g pan el?

Phot o v o l t a i c cell Sol ar he a t i n g


pan e l
A. solar → elect ric al solar → the r m a l
B. elect ric al → solar → elect ric al
ther m al
C. solar → elect ric al elect ric al →
the r m a l
D. elect ric al → solar → the r m a l
ther m al
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 378


26 2 . The albedo for the ocea n s is lowe r tha n that for glacie r s. This is bec a u s e ,
comp a r e d to ice, sea wat e r

A. has a grea t e r density.

B. has a grea t e r specific heat capa ci ty.

C. has a grea t e r coefficien t of volum e expa n sio n.

D. absor b s a grea t e r amou n t of radia tive powe r.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

26 3 . Which of the following is most likely to red uc e the enh a n c e d gre e n h o u s e


effect?

A. Replace the use of gas- fired powe r station s with oil-fired powe r
stations

B. Replace coal- fired powe r station s with nucle a r powe r stations

C. Incr e a s e the use of all non- rene w a b l e ene r gy sourc e s

D. Decr e a s e the efficiency of powe r produ c tio n


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 379


26 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e .

The gra p h shows the variation with tem p e r a t u r e T of the resist a n c e R of an


elect ric al com po n e n t .

(a) A stud e n t hypot h e siz e s that the resist a n c e is inver s ely propo r tio n a l to
the tem p e r a t u r e .
Use dat a from the gra p h to show whet h e r the hypot h e s i s is suppo r t e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 380


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) A secon d stud e n t sugg e s t s that the relations hi p is of the form

b
lg R = a + T

whe r e a and b are const a n t s .

The stud e n t plots the grap h below. Erro r bar s have bee n includ e d for
the sake of clarity.

IB Questionbank Physics 381


(i) Explain how the grap h dra w n could be use d as evide nc e to
suppo r t the stud e n t’s sugg e s tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the const a n t s a and b .

b : .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

a: .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(iii) Using your ans w e r s to (b)(ii), dete r m i n e a value for the


resis t a n c e of the compo n e n t at a tem p e r a t u r e of 260 K.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 382


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

26 5 . This ques tion is abou t forces.

An athlet e trains by dra g gi n g a heavy load acros s a roug h horizont al


surfac e.

The athl et e exer t s a force of ma gni t u d e F on the load at an angle of 25° to


the horizont al.

(a) Once the load is moving at a stea dy spee d, the aver a g e horizon t a l
friction al force acting on the load is 470 N.

Calcula t e the aver a g e value of F that will ena bl e the load to move at
const a n t spee d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 383


(b) The load is moved a horizon t a l dista n c e of 2.5 km in 1.2 hour s.

Calcula t e

(i) the work done on the load by the force F.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 384


(ii) the minim u m aver a g e powe r requi r e d to move the load.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The athlet e pulls the load uphill at the sam e spe e d as in par t (a).

Explain, in ter m s of ene r gy cha n g e s , why the minim u m aver a g e powe r


req ui r e d is grea t e r than in (b)(ii).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

26 6 . This ques tion is abou t solar hea ti n g pan el s.

(a) Stat e the ener gy chan g e tha t take s plac e in a solar pan el.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 385


(b) A village consist s of 120 hous e s . It is propos e d tha t solar pan els be
used to provide hot wate r to the hous e s .

The following data are availa ble.

aver a g e powe r need e d per hous e to hea t wate r = 3.0 kW


aver a g e surfac e solar inten sity = 650 W m –2
efficiency of ene r gy conve r sio n of a solar pan el = 18 %

Calcula t e the minim u m surfa c e are a of the solar pan els requi r e d to
provide the total powe r for wat e r hea tin g.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Sugg e s t two disadv a n t a g e s of using sola r powe r to provide ene r gy for
heatin g wat e r.

1: .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2: .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 386


26 7 . This ques tion is abou t solar radi a tion.

(a) Stat e the Stefan–Boltzm a n n law for a black body.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The following data relat e s to the Eart h and the Sun.

Eart h- Sun dist a n c e = 1.5 × 10 11 m


radius of Eart h = 6.4 × 10 6 m
radius of Sun = 7.0 × 10 8 m
surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of Sun = 5800 K

(i) Use data from the table to show tha t the powe r radi a t e d by the
Sun is abou t
4 × 10 26 W.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the solar powe r incide n t per unit are a at a dista n c e
from the Sun equ al to the Eart h’s dista n c e from the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 387


..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 388


(iii) The aver a g e powe r absor b e d per unit are a at the Eart h’s surfa c e
is 240 W m –2 .
Stat e two reas o n s why the value calcula t e d in (b)(ii) differs from
this value.

1: .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

2: .....................................................................................................................
..

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) Show that the value for powe r absor b e d per unit are a of 240 W
m –2 is consist e n t with an aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e for
the Eart h of abou t 255 K.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Explain, by refer e n c e to the gre e n h o u s e effect, why the aver a g e


tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Eart h is gre a t e r tha n 255 K.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 389


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 390


(d) Sugg e s t why the burnin g of fossil fuels may lead to an incr e a s e in the
tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Eart h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

26 8 . This ques tion is abou t kicking a football.

A ball is susp e n d e d from a ceiling by a string of lengt h 7.5 m. The ball is


kicked horizon t ally and rises to a maxim u m height of 6.0 m.

(a) Assumin g that the air resist a n c e is negligible, show that the initial
spee d of the ball is 11 m s –1 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 391


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 392


(b) The mas s of the ball is 0.55 kg and the impa c t time of the kicke r’s foot
with the ball is 150 ms. Estim a t e the aver a g e force exer t e d on the ball
by the kick.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) (i) Explain why the tension in the string incr e a s e s


imm e di a t ely after the ball is kicke d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Calculat e the tension in the string imm e di a t e ly afte r the ball is
kicked. Assum e that the string is vertic al.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 393


(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 394


26 9 . This ques tion is abou t wat e r wave motion.

A small sphe r e , mount e d at the end of a vertic al rod, dips below the surfa c e
of shallow wat e r in a tray. The sphe r e is drive n vertic ally up and down by a
motor att ac h e d to the rod.
The oscillation s of the sphe r e produ c e travelling waves on the surfa c e of
the wate r .

(a) The diagr a m shows how the displa c e m e n t of the wat e r surfa c e at a
particul a r insta n t in time varies with dista n c e from the sphe r e . The
period of oscillation of the sphe r e is 0.027 s.

Use the diagr a m to calcul a t e , for the wave,

(i) the amplitu d e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 395


(ii) the wavele n g t h .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) the frequ e n cy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iv) the spee d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The wave moves from region A into a region B of shallowe r wate r . The
waves move mor e slowly in region B. The diag r a m (not to scale) shows
som e of the wavefr o n t s in region A.

IB Questionbank Physics 396


IB Questionbank Physics 397
(i) With refer e n c e to a wave, disting uis h betw e e n a ray and a
wavefro n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The angle betw e e n the wavefr on t s and the inte rf a c e in region A
is 60°. The refrac tive index An B is 1.4.

Dete r mi n e the angle betw e e n the wavefro n t s and the inte rfa c e in
region B.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) On the diagr a m above, cons t r u c t thr e e lines to show the position
of thre e wavefro n t s in region B.
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 398


(c) Anothe r sphe r e is dippe d into the wate r . The sphe r e s oscillat e in
phas e. The diagr a m shows some lines in region A along which the
distu r b a n c e of the wat e r surfa c e is a minim u m .

(i) Outline how the regions of minim u m distu r b a n c e occur on the


surfac e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 399


(ii) The frequ e n cy of oscillation of the sphe r e s is incr e a s e d .

Stat e and explain how this will affect the position s of minim u m
distu r b a n c e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

27 0 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r proc e s s e s .

226
(a) A nucleu s of radiu m- 91 ( 9 1 Ra ) unde r g o e s alpha particle dec ay to form
a nucle u s of radon (Rn).

(i) Identify the proto n num b e r and nucle on num b e r of the nucle u s of
Rn.

Proto n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
...............

Nucleo n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
............
(2)

(ii) The half- life of radiu m- 91 is 1600 yea rs. Dete r mi n e the lengt h of
time taken for 87.5 % of the radiu m to disint e g r a t e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 400


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 401


(b) Imm e di a t ely after the dec ay of a station a r y radiu m nucle u s , the alpha
particl e and the rado n nucle u s move off in opposit e dire c tion s and at
differ e n t spee d s .

Outline the reas o n s for thes e obse rv a tio n s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Outline why a bet a particl e has a longe r rang e in air tha n an alpha
particl e of the sam e ene r gy.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 402


IB Questionbank Physics 403
27 1 . This ques tion is abou t an elect ric al hea t e r .

An elect ric al heat e r consist s of two hea ti n g elem e n t s E 1 and E 2 . The


elem e n t s are conn e c t e d in par allel. Each elem e n t has a switc h and is
conne c t e d to a supply of emf 240 V. The supply has negligibl e inter n al
resis t a n c e .

Elem e n t E 1 is mad e from wire that has a cros s- section a l are a of 6.8 × 10 –8
m 2 . The resistivity of the wire at the oper a ti n g tem p e r a t u r e of the elem e n t
is 1.1 × 10 –6 Ωm.

(a) (i) The total lengt h of wire is 4.5 m. Show tha t the
resis t a n c e of E 1 is 73 Ω.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the powe r outp u t of E 1 with only this elem e n t


conne c t e d to the supply.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 404


(iii) Elem e n t E 2 is mad e of wire of the sam e cross- section and
mat e ri al as E 1 . The lengt h of wire use d to make E 2 is 1.5 m.
Dete r mi n e the total powe r outpu t whe n both E 1 and E 2 are
conne c t e d to the supply.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iv) With refer e n c e to the powe r outp u t, explain why it would be


inapp r o p r i a t e to conn e c t the hea ti n g ele m e n t s in serie s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) Each elem e n t in the elect ri c a l heat e r is woun d as a coil as show n.

IB Questionbank Physics 405


Each tur n of the coil may be conside r e d to act as a cur r e n t- car ryin g
long str ai g h t wire.

IB Questionbank Physics 406


(i) On the diagr a m , draw the mag n e t i c field arou n d a curr e n t-
carryi n g long str ai g h t wire. The arro w shows the dire c tion of the
curr e n t .

(3)

(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r the turn s of wire will attr a c t or rep el
one anot h e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

27 2 . This ques tion is abou t heati n g a liquid.

(a) Sugg e s t why, in ter m s of the molec ul a r model, the ene r gy associa t e d
with melting is less than that associ a t e d with boiling.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 407


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 408


(b) Milk in a cup is heat e d to boiling point by passin g stea m throu g h it.
Whilst cooling subs e q u e n t l y, some milk evapo r a t e s .

(i) Disting ui s h betw e e n evapo r a t io n and boiling.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The cup cont ai n s 0.30 kg of milk at an initial tem p e r a t u r e of 18


°C. Estim a t e the minim u m mas s of ste a m at 100 °C tha t is
requi r e d to heat the milk to 80 °C.

Specific latent heat of vaporiz a tio n of wate r = 2.3 × 10 6 J


kg –1
Specific heat capacity of wate r = 4200 J kg –1
K–1
Specific heat capacity of milk = 3800 J kg –1
K–1

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 409


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 410


(iii) Stat e two reas o n s , othe r than evapo r a ti o n, why the ans w e r to (b)
(ii) is likely to be differ e n t from the act u al mas s of cond e n s e d
stea m .

1: .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

2: .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

27 3 . This ques tion is abou t the eye and sight.

(a) Stat e, by refer e n c e to hum a n vision, wha t is me a n t by


accom m o d a t i o n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Explain how accom m o d a t i o n is achieve d in the hum a n eye.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 411


(c) The light outpu t from two par tic ul a r lamps is desc ri b e d as “war m-
white” and as “cold- white”. Both lamps emit the full spec t r u m of
colour s. Stat e how the visual impr e s s io n of tem p e r a t u r e differ e n c e
may be achieve d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

27 4 . This ques tion is abou t the Dopple r effect.

At one point in an arte ry, blood cells flow along the axis of the arte ry with
spee d v , as show n.

A par allel bea m of ultra s o u n d of freq u e n c y 4.5 MHz is incide n t on the


art e r y at an angle of 40°.
The spee d of ultra s o u n d in the body tissu e s is c = 1.5 × 10 3 m s –1 .
The ultra s o u n d dete c t e d after reflection from the blood cells is found to be
Doppler- shifted in frequ e n cy by 740 Hz.
The expr es sio n for the Dopple r shift ∆f of the ultra s o u n d of freq u e n c y f may
be ass u m e d to be

IB Questionbank Physics 412


(2 fv c osθ )
∆f = c .

IB Questionbank Physics 413


(a) For this stat e d expr e s s io n, explain the inclusion of

(i) the factor of 2.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) the factor cos θ.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Deter m i n e a value for the spe e d of the blood cells in the art e r y.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

27 5 . This ques tion is abou t polarizatio n.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by polariz e d light.

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 414


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 415


(b) Descri b e and explain how polariz a tio n may be use d in stre s s analysis.
You may draw a diagr a m if you wish.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(6)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 416


27 6 . This ques tion is abou t the wave nat u r e of matt e r .

(a) Descri b e the de Broglie hypot h e si s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Outline an experi m e n t to verify the de Broglie hypot h e s i s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 417


(c) Show that the de Broglie wavel e n g t h of elect r o n s accel e r a t e d from
rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differe n c e of 150 V is 1.0 ×1 0 –10 m.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

27 7 . This ques tion is abou t alpha ( α) par ticle scat t e r i n g .

An experi m e n t is car ri e d out in which alph a (α) par ticle s of initial kinetic
ene r gy 5.0 MeV are fired at a piece of gold foil. The proton num b e r of gold
is 79.

Dete r mi n e the dista n c e of close s t appr o a c h of an alpha (α) particle to a


gold nucleu s .

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 418


IB Questionbank Physics 419
27 8 . This ques tion is abou t β+ (posit ro n) dec ay.

(a) In a β + decay, a positro n is em itted along with a neut ri n o, and a γ-ray


photon.
Althoug h the ener gy spect r u m for γ-ray s involved is discr e t e , the
ener gy spect r u m for the positr o n s is continu o u s .

(i) Stat e the differ e n c e betw e e n a disc r e t e ene r gy spec t r u m and a


contin uo u s ener gy spec t r u m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Explain how the exist e n c e of the neut ri n o accou n t s for the
contin uo u s nat u r e of the positro n ene r gy spec t r u m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Sodiu m- 22 is a radioisot o p e use d in nucle a r medicin e that unde r g o e s


β + decay.
The half- life of sodiu m- 22 is 2.6 yea rs.
A sam pl e of sodiu m- 22 has an initial activity of 6.2 × 10 9 Bq.

(i) Define decay cons ta n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the decay const a n t of sodiu m- 22.

IB Questionbank Physics 420


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Calculat e the activity of the sam pl e of sodiu m- 22 afte r 8.0 year s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

27 9 . This ques tion is abou t storin g infor m a t io n.

Infor m a ti o n may be stor e d eithe r in analog u e form or in digital form.

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n analog u e inform a t io n and digital infor m a t io n.

Analogu e: ................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Digital: ....................................................................................................
....................

IB Questionbank Physics 421


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Stat e on e met ho d by which inform a t io n may be stor e d in

(i) analog u e form.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) digital form.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 422


(c) Stat e and explain two rea s o n s why, for many pur po s e s , digital stor a g e
of infor m a ti o n is replacin g analog u e stor a g e .

1: .............................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2: .............................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(d) Sugg e s t two possible implica tion s for society of the ever- incr e a si n g
capa bility of data stor a g e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 423


28 0 . This ques tion is abou t an amplifier circuit.

The diagr a m below show s an amplifie r circuit incor p o r a t i n g an ideal


oper a tio n al amplifier (op- amp).

The oper a ti o n al amplifier uses a +9 V / 0 / –9 V supply.

(a) Calcula t e the gain of the amplifier circuit.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 424


(b) Deter m i n e the outp u t pote n ti al V out for value s of input pote n ti al V in
equal to

(i) –0.9 V.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) +2. 0 V.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

28 1 . This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.

Describ e the role of bas e stations and a cellula r excha n g e when a mobile
phon e is switch e d on and befor e a call is ma d e.

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

IB Questionbank Physics 425


.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 426


28 2 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic kine m a t i c s .

(a) Define inertial fram e of refer e n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Ann and Sue are twins. Sue rem ai n s on Eart h. Ann travels to the sta r
Sirius in a spac es hi p moving at a spe e d of 0.80 c, as mea s u r e d by Sue.
The dist an c e betw e e n Eart h and Sirius is 8.8 ly, as mea s u r e d by Sue.

(i) Calculat e the time elaps e d , as mea s u r e d by Sue, betw e e n Ann


leaving Ear t h and rea c hi n g Sirius.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r Ann or Sue mea s u r e s the prope r time
betw e e n Ann leaving Eart h and arriving at Sirius.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Calculat e the time take n for the spa c e s hi p to reac h Sirius, as
meas u r e d by Ann.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 427


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 428


(iv) As Ann appr o a c h e s Sirius, she sends a radio mess a g e back to
Sue. The dista n c e betw e e n Sirius and Eart h, as mea s u r e d by
Ann, is 5.28 ly. Deter m i n e the time, as mea s u r e d by Ann, that it
takes for the signal to reac h Sue.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

28 3 . This ques tion is abou t funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s .

(a) Stat e an excha n g e par ticle for

(i) the weak inter a c ti o n.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) the elect r o m a g n e t i c inter a c tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Comm e n t , with refer e n c e to the mass of the excha n g e particle s , on


the rang e of the weak and elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c ti o n s .

IB Questionbank Physics 429


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) Descri b e the proce s s repr e s e n t e d by the Feyn m a n diagr a m below.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) Stat e what is mea n t by a virtual par ticle.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(e) Explain how the Heise n b e r g unce r t a i n t y princi ple for ene r gy and time
applies to the inter a c t io n in (c).

IB Questionbank Physics 430


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 431


(f) The unce r t ai n t y in the time for the elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c tio n
betw e e n two elect r o n s is 1.6 × 10 –16 s. Dete r mi n e the unc e r t a i n t y in
the ene r gy of the virtu al photon.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

28 4 . Which of the following quan ti tie s can be dete r m i n e d from a spe e d- time
grap h of a particle travelling in a straig h t line?

A. Only the mag nit u d e of the accel e r a ti o n at a given insta n t

B. Both the velocity and the acc el e r a t io n at a given insta n t

C. Only the dista n c e travelled in a given time

D. Both the dista n c e travelle d in a given time and the ma gni t u d e of the
accel e r a t i o n at a given inst a n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )

28 5 . Which of the following is a corr e c t definition of work?

A. Produ c t of force and dista n c e

B. Produ c t of force and dista n c e move d in the dire c tion of the force

C. Produ c t of powe r and time

D. Produ c t of force and displa c e m e n t


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 432


28 6 . The diagr a m shows two par allel met al plat e s X and Y.

Plate X is at Eart h pot en ti al (0 V) and the pote n ti al of plat e Y is V 0 .

Which of the following is corr ec t in resp e c t of the mag nit u d e and the
direction of the elect ric field betw e e n the plat e s ?

Ma g n i t u d e Dire c t i o n
A. const a n t X→Y
B. incr e a si n g Y→ X
C. const a n t Y→ X
D. incr e a si n g X→Y
(Tot al 1 mar k )

28 7 . Gravit atio n al poten ti al at a point is define d as the work done

A. per unit mas s in moving a small mass from infinity to the point.

B. in moving a unit mas s from infinity to the point.

C. in moving a small mas s from infinity to the point.

D. per unit mas s in moving a unit mas s from infinity to the point.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 433


28 8 . The esca p e spee d from the surfa c e of a plan e t dep e n d s on

A. both the radius and the mass of the plane t.

B. only the radi us of the plane t .

C. only the mas s of the plane t.

D. only the gravit a tion al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of the plan e t.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

28 9 . Wate r at a tem p e r a t u r e of 0 °C is kept in a the r m a lly insula t e d cont ai n e r . A


lump of ice, also at 0 °C, is plac e d in the wate r and comple t ely subm e r g e d .

Which of the following is true in resp e c t of both the net amou n t of ice that
will melt and the chan g e in tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r ?

Net am o u n t of Cha n g e in
ice te m p e r a t u r e of
tha t m el t s wat e r
A. all will melt no cha n g e
B. som e will melt decr e a s e
C. none will melt no cha n g e
D. all will melt decr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 434


29 0 . The beh aviou r of a mona t o mi c gas such as heliu m will appr oxi m a t e to that
of an ideal gas when it is kept at

A. a tem p e r a t u r e close to absolut e zero.

B. low pres s u r e .

C. very high pres s u r e .

D. very high tem p e r a t u r e .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

29 1 . The diagr a m shows the pres s u r e p and volum e V relation s hi p for one cycle
of oper a tio n of an engin e.

Which of the labelled par t s of the cycle identify isoba ric cha n g e s and
adiab a ti c chan g e s of stat e?

Isob a ri c Adiab a t i c
A. IV only I and II only
B. I and III only II and IV only
C. II and III only IV only
D. I and III only II only
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 435


29 2 . The funda m e n t a l (first har m o nic) frequ e n c y of the note emitt e d by an
organ pipe closed at one end is f. What is the funda m e n t a l frequ e n c y of the
note emitt e d by an orga n pipe of the sa m e lengt h tha t is open at both ends?

f
A. 4

f
B. 2

C. 2f

D. 4f
(Tot al 1 mar k )

29 3 . Which of the following wave phe no m e n a is associ a t e d with blood flow


meas u r e m e n t s ?

A. Polarization

B. Diffractio n

C. Refrac tion

D. Doppl er effect
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 436


29 4 . A bea m of coher e n t light is incide n t on a single slit of width b . After
passin g throu g h the slit, the light is incide n t on a scre e n at a dista n c e D
from the slit.

Which of the following chan g e s , carri e d out sepa r a t e ly, in res p e c t of b and
D will result in an incr e a s e in width of the first diffra ctio n maxim u m form e d
on the scre e n ?

b D
A. decr e a s e incr e a s e
B. incr e a s e incr e a s e
C. decr e a s e decr e a s e
D. incr e a s e decr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

29 5 . The imag e s of two sourc e s are just resolve d. Which of the following is a
corr e c t stat e m e n t of the Rayleigh crite rion for this situa tion ?

A. The cent r al maxim u m of the diffrac tion patt e r n of one sour c e must
coincide with the cent r al maxim u m of the diffrac tio n patt e r n of the
other sourc e.

B. Light from the sour c e s must pass throu g h a circul a r ape r t u r e .

C. Light from the sour c e s must be cohe r e n t .

D. The first minim u m of the diffra c tion patt e r n of one sourc e must
coincide with the cent r al maxim u m of the diffrac tio n patt e r n of the
other sourc e.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 437


29 6 . An optically active subs t a n c e is a subs t a n c e tha t

A. has a refr ac tive index that depe n d s on the plane of pola riz a tio n of
inciden t light.

B. compl et ely absor b s incide n t unpola riz e d light.

C. rotat e s the plane of polariz a tion of incide n t polariz e d light.

D. polarize s unpola riz e d light.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

29 7 . A copp e r shee t is sus p e n d e d in a region of unifor m magn e t i c field by an


insulati n g wire conne c t e d to a horizon t al suppo r t . The she e t is pulle d to
one side so that it is outsid e the region of the field, and the n rele a s e d .

The unifor m mag n e ti c field is dire c t e d into the plan e of the pape r.

Which of the following is true for both the dire c tion of the induc e d cur r e n t
in the sheet and the chan g e in amplit u d e of the oscillation s of the she e t
with time?

Dire c t i o n of indu c e d Chan g e in am p l i t u d e


curr e n t
A. stays the sam e no cha n g e
B. chan g e s decr e a s e s
C. stays the sam e decr e a s e s
D. chan g e s no cha n g e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 438


29 8 . An alter n a ti n g curr e n t supply of negligible inter n al resist a n c e is conne c t e d
to two resis to r s that are in par all el.

The resist a n c e of each resisto r is R and the peak volta g e of the ac supply is
V 0 . Which of the following is the aver a g e powe r dissip a t e d in the circ uit?

2
2V0
A. R

2
V0
B. R

2
V0
C. 2R

2
V0
D. 2R
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 439


29 9 . Which of the following is true in resp e c t of both the Coulom b inte r a c ti o n
and the stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s in an atom?

Coul o m b int er a c t i o n Str o n g int e r a c t i o n


exi s t s bet w e e n exi s t s bet w e e n
A. proto n s only neut r o n s only
B. both proto n s and neut r o n s only
neut r o n s
C. proto n s only both proto n s and
neut r o n s
D. both proto n s and both proto n s and
neut r o n s neut r o n s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

30 0 . Light of freq u e n c y f is inciden t on a met al surf ac e . The work function of the


met al is φ. Which o f the following is the maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of the
elect r o n s emitt e d from the surfa c e ?

A. hf – 

h
( f  )
B. e

C.  – hf

h
(  f )
D. e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 440


30 1 . An elect r o n is accel er a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e V .

Which of the following is the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the elect r o n afte r


accele r a ti o n?

h
2m e V e
A.

2m e h
B. V2

C. 2m e V 2 e 2

V2
D. 2m e h
(Tot al 1 mar k )

30 2 . Which of the following is an assu m p t i o n of the Schr ö di n g e r model of the


hydro g e n atom?

A. The orbit al pat h of the elect r o n fits a sta n di n g wave.

B. The position of the elect r o n is undefin e d but its mom e n t u m is well


define d.

C. The mom e n t u m of the elect r o n is und efine d but its position is well
define d.

D. The elect r o n is desc ri b e d by wavefun c tio n s .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

30 3 . A Bainbri d g e mass spect r o m e t e r may be use d to mea s u r e the mas s of

A. an atom.

B. an ion.

C. an isotop e.

D. a molecul e.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 441


30 4 . A nucle u s of the isotop e potas si u m- 40 dec ays to a nucle u s of the isotop e
argo n- 40. The reaction equ a tio n for this dec ay may be writt e n as

40 40
19K  Z Ar X ν

Which of the following cor r e c tly identifies the proto n num b e r of argo n- 40
and the particle X?

Z X
A. 18 β–
B. 18 β+
C. 19 β+
D. 19 β–
(Tot al 1 mar k )

30 5 . For the five- bit binary num b e r 1101 0, which of the following corr e c tly
identifies both the most- significa n t bit (MSB) and the equivale n t decim al
num b e r ?

MS B Dec i m a l
A. 1 52
B. 0 26
C. 1 26
D. 0 52
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 442


30 6 . The capa cit a n c e of a pixel of a CCD is 3.2 pF. A pulse of light is incide n t on
the pixel and as a res ult, 10 4 elect r o n s are eject e d from the pixel. The
mag ni t u d e of the chan g e in pote n ti al of the pixel is

A. 5.0 × 10 –16 V

B. 5.0 × 10 –4 V

C. 2.0 × 10 3 V

D. 2.0 × 10 15 V
(Tot al 1 mar k )

30 7 . Which of the following ratios is the definition of qua n t u m efficiency of a


pixel?

n u m b eor f p h ot onins c id e n t
A. n u m b eof
r e le c t r o nesm it t e d

n u m b eof
r e le c t r o nesm it t e d
B. n u m b eor f p h ot onins c id e n t

in t e n s itoyf in c id e nlig
t ht
C. in t e n s itoyf e m it t e lig
d ht

in t e n s itoyf e m it t e lig
d ht
D. in t e n s itoyf in c id e nlig
t ht
(Tot al 1 mar k )

30 8 . Degr a d e d ene r gy is ener gy that is

A. stor e d in the Ear t h’s atmo s p h e r e .

B. availabl e from non- rene w a bl e ene r gy sour c e s .

C. conve r t e d into work in a cyclical proc e s s.

D. no longer available for the perfor m a n c e of useful work.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 443


30 9 . A coal- fired powe r station has a powe r outp u t of P and its efficiency is ε. It
bur n s a mas s of coal M every secon d. The best estim a t e of the ene r gy
density of the coal used is

A. Pε M


B. P


C. M

P
D. εM
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 444


31 0 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e .

The gra p h shows the variation with tem p e r a t u r e T of the resist a n c e R of an


elect ric al com po n e n t .

(a) A stud e n t hypot h e siz e s that the resist a n c e is inver s ely propo r tio n a l to
the tem p e r a t u r e .
Use dat a from the gra p h to show whet h e r the hypot h e s i s is suppo r t e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 445


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) A secon d stud e n t sugg e s t s that the relations hi p is of the form

b
lg R = a + T

whe r e a and b are const a n t s .

The stud e n t plots the grap h below. Erro r bar s have bee n includ e d for
the sake of clarity.

IB Questionbank Physics 446


(i) Explain how the grap h dra w n could be use d as evide nc e to
suppo r t the stud e n t’s sugg e s tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the const a n t s a and b .

b : .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

a: .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(iii) Using your ans w e r s to (b)(ii), dete r m i n e a value for the


resis t a n c e of the compo n e n t at a tem p e r a t u r e of 260 K.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 447


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

31 1 . This ques tion is abou t forces.

An athlet e trains by dra g gi n g a heavy load acros s a roug h horizont al


surfac e.

The athl et e exer t s a force of ma gni t u d e F on the load at an angle of 25° to


the horizont al.

(a) Once the load is moving at a stea dy spee d, the aver a g e horizon t a l
friction al force acting on the load is 470 N.

Calcula t e the aver a g e value of F that will ena bl e the load to move at
const a n t spee d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 448


(b) The load is moved a horizon t a l dista n c e of 2.5 km in 1.2 hour s.

Calcula t e

(i) the work done on the load by the force F.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 449


(ii) the minim u m aver a g e powe r requi r e d to move the load.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The athlet e pulls the load uphill at the sam e spe e d as in par t (a).

Explain, in ter m s of ene r gy cha n g e s , why the minim u m aver a g e powe r


req ui r e d is grea t e r than in (b)(ii).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

31 2 . This ques tion is abou t solar hea ti n g pan el s.

(a) A village consist s of 120 hous e s . It is propos e d tha t solar pan els be
used to provide hot wate r to the hous e s .

The following data are availa ble.

aver a g e powe r need e d per hous e to hea t wate r = 3.0 kW


aver a g e surfac e solar inten sity = 650 W m –2
efficiency of ene r gy conve r sio n of a solar pan el = 18 %

Calcula t e the minim u m surfa c e are a of the solar pan els requi r e d to
provide the total powe r for wat e r hea tin g.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 450


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Sugg e s t two disadv a n t a g e s of using sola r powe r to provide ene r gy for
heatin g wat e r.

1: .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2: .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

31 3 . This ques tion is abou t a gen e r a t o r .

(a) Define electro m o t i v e force .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with time of elect r o m o tive force (emf)
for a gene r a t o r .

IB Questionbank Physics 451


IB Questionbank Physics 452
(i) Calculat e the rms value of the emf of the gen e r a t o r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The spee d of rotation of the gene r a t o r is halved with no othe r


chan g e s being mad e.

On the grap h, sketc h the variatio n of emf with time.


(2)

(iii) Explain why the grap h you drew in (ii) is differ e n t from the
origin al grap h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 453


31 4 . This ques tion is abou t an ideal gas.

(a) The grap h shows a pres s u r e- volum e (P–V ) rela tion s hi p for a fixed
mas s of an ideal gas.

The gas und e r g o e s a thr e e- stag e cycle AB, BC and CA.

(i) Identify the isocho ric (isovolu m e t r i c) cha n g e of stat e.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Use data from the gra p h to show that the chan g e AB is
isothe r m a l .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 454


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 455


(iii) Stat e the two chan g e s for which the r m a l ene r gy is tra n sf e r r e d
from the gas.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iv) Calculat e the work done by the gas in the cha n g e BC.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The amou n t of gas in part (a) is 0.74 mol.

Calcula t e the maxim u m tem p e r a t u r e of the gas durin g the cycle in


part (a).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 456


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 457


(c) The fixed mass of gas is heat e d from tem p e r a t u r e T 1 to T 2 at const a n t
volum e. Explain why, if this fixed mas s of gas is hea t e d from T 1 to T 2
at const a n t pres s u r e , the amou n t of ene r gy requi r e d is differ e n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

31 5 . This ques tion is abou t solar radi a tion.

(a) Stat e the Stefan–Boltzm a n n law for a black body.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The following data relat e to the Eart h and the Sun.

Eart h- Sun dist a n c e = 1.5 × 10 11 m


radius of Eart h = 6.4 × 10 6 m

IB Questionbank Physics 458


radius of Sun = 7.0 × 10 8 m
surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of Sun = 5800 K

IB Questionbank Physics 459


(i) Use data from the table to show tha t the powe r radi a t e d by the
Sun is abou t
4 × 10 26 W.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the solar powe r incide n t per unit are a at a dista n c e
from the Sun equ al to the Eart h’s dista n c e from the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) The aver a g e powe r absor b e d per unit are a at the Eart h’s surfa c e
is 240 W m –2 .
Stat e two reas o n s why the value calcula t e d in (b)(ii) differs from
this value.

1: .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

2: .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) Show that the value for powe r absor b e d per unit are a of 240 W
m –2 is consist e n t with an aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e for
Eart h of abou t 255 K.

IB Questionbank Physics 460


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 461


(c) Explain, by refer e n c e to the gre e n h o u s e effect, why the aver a g e
tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Eart h is gre a t e r tha n 255 K.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Sugg e s t why the burnin g of fossil fuels may lead to an incr e a s e in the
tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Eart h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 462


31 6 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCDs).

(a) List two adva n t a g e s of using CCDs as comp a r e d to using film for
imag e capt u r e .

1: .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2: .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A CCD used to capt u r e X-ray imag e s consis t s of a squa r e 2600 0 ×


2600 0 arr a n g e m e n t of pixels. Eac h pixel produ c e s 16 levels of
infor m a t io n. Imag e s capt u r e d by the CCD are stor e d on a disk which
can stor e a maxim u m of 4.0 × 10 11 bits of dat a.

Deter m i n e the num b e r of imag e s that may be stor e d on one disk.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Outline

(i) how X-rays inciden t on a pixel in a CCD prod u c e a volta g e signal.

IB Questionbank Physics 463


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 464


(ii) how voltag e signal s such as that in (c)(i) are use d to stor e the X-
ray infor m a ti o n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

31 7 . This ques tion is abou t wat e r wave s.

A small sphe r e , mount e d at the end of a vertic al rod, dips below the surfa c e
of shallow wat e r in a tray. The sphe r e is drive n vertic ally up and down by a
motor att ac h e d to the rod. The oscillation s of the sphe r e prod u c e travelling
waves on the surfac e of the wat e r.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by a travelling (prog r e s sive ) wave.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 465


(b) The diagr a m shows how the displa c e m e n t of the wat e r surfa c e at a
particul a r insta n t in time varies with dista n c e from the sphe r e . The
period of oscillation of the sphe r e is 0.027 s.

Use the diagr a m to calcul a t e , for the wave,

(i) the amplitu d e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) the wavele n g t h .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) the frequ e n cy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 466


(iv) the spee d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) The wave moves from region A into a region B of shallowe r wate r . The
waves move mor e slowly in region B. The diag r a m (not to scale) shows
som e of the wavefr o n t s in region A.

(i) On the diagr a m , draw thr e e lines to comple t e the wavefro n t s in


region B.
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 467


(ii) Theory sugg e s t s that the wave spe e d c is relat e d to the wat e r
dept h d by

gd
c =

wher e g is a const a n t .

The refr ac tive index for waves travelling from region A to region
B is 1.4.

Dete r mi n e the following ratio.

w a t e dr e p t hin A
w a t e dr e p t hin B

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(d) Anothe r sphe r e is dippe d into the wate r . The sphe r e s oscillat e in
phas e. The diagr a m shows some lines in region A along which the
distu r b a n c e of the wat e r surfa c e is a minim u m .

IB Questionbank Physics 468


(i) Outline how the regions of minim u m distu r b a n c e occur on the
surfac e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The frequ e n cy of oscillation of the sphe r e s is incr e a s e d .

Stat e and explain how this will affect the position s of minim u m
distu r b a n c e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 469


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 470


31 8 . This ques tion is abou t projectile motion.

A sphe r e is project e d horizont a lly. The sphe r e is photog r a p h e d at inte rv als


of 0.10 s. The imag e s of the sphe r e are show n again s t a grid on the
diagr a m . Air resis t a n c e is negligible.

IB Questionbank Physics 471


(a) Use dat a from the diagr a m to det e r m i n e the accel e r a ti o n of free fall.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Deter m i n e the spee d of the sphe r e 1.2 s afte r rele a s e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)

IB Questionbank Physics 472


(c) On the grid, draw the path of the sphe r e assu mi n g air resis t a n c e is
not negligible.
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 473


31 9 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r dec ay and ioniza tion.

226
(a) A nucleu s of radiu m- 91 ( 9 1 Ra ) unde r g o e s alpha particle dec ay to form
a nucle u s of radon (Rn).

Identify the proton num b e r and nucleo n num b e r of the nucle u s of Rn.

Proton
num b e r : ...........................................................................................
.................

Nucleo n
num b e r : ...........................................................................................
..............
(2)

(b) Imm e di a t ely after the dec ay of a station a r y radiu m nucle u s , the alpha
particl e and the rado n nucle u s move off in opposit e dire c tion s and at
differ e n t spee d s .

(i) Outline the reas o n s for thes e obse rv a ti o n s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 474


(ii) Show that the ratio

in it ia kl in e t ice n e r g oy f a lp h ap a r t ic le
in it ia kl in e t ice n e r g of
y r a d o na t o m

is abou t 56.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) The initial kinetic ener gy of the alpha par ticle is 4.9 MeV. As the alpha
particl e pas s e s thro u g h air, it loses all its kine tic ene r gy by causin g
the ionization of 1.7 × 10 5 air molec ul e s .

(i) Stat e what is mean t by ionization.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Estim a t e , in joules, the aver a g e ene r gy nee d e d to ionize an air


molecul e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 475


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 476


(d) Outline why a bet a particl e has a longe r rang e in air tha n an alpha
particl e of the sam e ene r gy.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

32 0 . This ques tion is abou t radio waves.

A satellite is travelling directly away from a spac e shuttl e with a spe e d of


7.9 km s –1 .
The satellite is tran s m i t ti n g radio wave s of frequ e n c y 150.00 0 000 MHz.

(a) (i) Calculat e the frequ e n c y to which an astr o n a u t on the


shuttl e will need to set a rec eive r in orde r to rec eive the signal
from the satellite.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 477


(ii) The satellite now pass e s close to a secon d spac e shuttl e.
Describ e the chan g e s tha t will nee d to be mad e to the setti ng of
the receive r as the sat ellit e appr o a c h e s and moves away from the
secon d shut tl e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) Sugg e s t why the form ul a use d in the calcul a tion in (a)(i) would
not be suita bl e for radia tio n from a dista n t galaxy moving away
from the Eart h at 90 % of the spe e d of light.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) A space shuttl e orbits at a heigh t of 300 km above the surfa c e of the
Eart h. It carri es two pan els sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e of 24 m. The
panels reflect light of wavel e n g t h 500 nm towa r d s an obse rv e r on the
Eart h’s surfac e.

The obse rv e r views the pan els with a tele sc o p e of ape r t u r e dia m e t e r
85 mm. The panels act as point sourc e s of light for the obse r v e r .

(i) Describ e what is mea n t by the Rayleigh crite rion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 478


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 479


(ii) Dete r mi n e whet h e r the imag e s of the pan els form e d by the
teles co p e will be resolve d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

32 1 . This ques tion is abou t an elect ric al hea t e r .

An elect ric al heat e r consist s of two hea ti n g elem e n t s E 1 and E 2 . The


elem e n t s are conn e c t e d in par allel. Each elem e n t has a switc h and is
conne c t e d to a supply of emf 240 V. The supply has negligibl e inter n al
resis t a n c e .

Elem e n t E 1 is mad e from wire that has a cros s- section a l are a of 6.8 × 10 –8
m 2 . The resistivity of the wire at the oper a ti n g tem p e r a t u r e of the elem e n t
is 1.1 × 10 –6 Ωm.

IB Questionbank Physics 480


(a) (i) The total lengt h of wire is 4.5 m. Show tha t the
resis t a n c e of E 1 is 73 Ω.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 481


(ii) Calculat e the powe r outp u t of E 1 with only this elem e n t
conne c t e d to the supply.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Elem e n t E 2 is mad e of wire of the sam e cross- section and


mat e ri al as E 1 . The lengt h of wire use d to make E 2 is 1.5 m.
Dete r mi n e the total powe r outpu t whe n both E 1 and E 2 are
conne c t e d to the supply.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iv) With refer e n c e to the powe r outp u t, explain why it would be


inapp r o p r i a t e to conn e c t the hea ti n g ele m e n t s in serie s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 482


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 483


(b) Each elem e n t in the elect ri c a l heat e r is woun d as a coil as show n.

Each tur n of the coil may be conside r e d to act as a cur r e n t- car ryin g
long str ai g h t wire.

(i) On the diagr a m , draw the mag n e t i c field arou n d a curr e n t-


carryi n g long str ai g h t wire. The arro w shows the dire c tion of the
curr e n t .

(3)

(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r the turn s of wire will attr a c t or rep el
one anot h e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 484


IB Questionbank Physics 485
32 2 . This ques tion is abou t the hydro g e n atom.

(a) A par allel beam of visible light is shone throu g h mona t o m i c hydro g e n
gas.

The radiation em er gi n g from the gas is analys e d by comp a r i n g the


inciden t and eme r gi n g inte nsi ti e s at various wavele n g t h s . It is found
that at a wavelen g t h of 490 nm the inte nsity of the eme r g e n t bea m is
grea tly reduc e d .

The diagr a m shows some of the elect r o n ene r gy stat e s of the


hydrog e n atom wher e n is the qua n t u m num b e r of the ene r gy level.

(i) Calculat e the ene r gy, in eV, of a photon of light of wavele n g t h


490 nm.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 486


(ii) Use your answ e r in (a)(i) and the ene r gy level diag r a m to explain
the redu c tio n in inten sity of the eme r g e n t bea m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(b) Outline how the Schr ö di n g e r model of the hydrog e n atom leads to the
idea of discr e t e elect r o n ene r gy stat e s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 487


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 488


32 3 . This ques tion is abou t det er m i ni n g some prop e r t i e s of the sta r Wolf 359.

(a) The star Wolf 359 has a par allax angle of 0.419 arcs e c o n d s .

(i) Describ e how this par allax angl e is mea s u r e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(ii) Calculat e the dista n c e in light- year s from Eart h to Wolf 359.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Stat e why the met h o d of par allax can only be use d for star s at a
dist a n c e of less than a few hund r e d par s e c s from Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 489


.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 490


(b) The ratio

a p p a r e nbtr ig h t n e of
s s Wo lf3 5 9
a p p a r e nbtr ig h t n e os sf t h eS u n is 3.7 × 10 –15 .

Show that the ratio

lu m in o s itoyf Wolf3 5 9
lu m in o s itof
y t h eS u n is 8.9 × 10 –4 . (1ly = 6.3 × 10 4 AU)

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(c) The surf ac e tem p e r a t u r e of Wolf 359 is 2800 K and its luminosity is
3.5 × 10 23 W.
Calcula t e the radius of Wolf 359.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 491


(d) By refer e n c e to the data in (c), sugg e s t why Wolf 359 is neith e r a
white dwarf nor a red giant.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

32 4 . This ques tion is abou t the density of the unive r s e .

(a) Define critical densit y .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Explain how the futur e of the unive r s e may be pre dic t e d by comp a r i n g
the estim a t e d density of the unive r s e to the critic al density.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 492


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 493


(c) Explain why the existe n c e of dark matt e r make s it difficult to me a s u r e
the density of the univer s e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

32 5 . This ques tion is abou t stellar evolution.

(a) Descri b e how a larg e cloud of hydro g e n gas can lead to conditions
that initiat e a fusion reac tio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Stat e the prop e r t y of a main sequ e n c e sta r that det e r m i n e s for how
long hydro g e n in its cor e fuse s into helium.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) Stat e the end prod u c t of nucle a r fusion proc e s s e s in the core of

IB Questionbank Physics 494


(i) a red giant.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 495


(ii) the large s t red supe r giant s .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

32 6 . This ques tion is abou t galactic motion.

(a) The wavele n g t h of the Lyma n- alph a line in the hydrog e n spec t r u m is
mea s u r e d in the labor a t o r y to be 122 nm. In the hydro g e n spec t r u m of
a galaxy, the Lyman- alph a line is me a s u r e d to be 147 nm. Dete r m i n e
the dista n c e of this galaxy from the Eart h.
Assum e that the Hubbl e const a n t H 0 is 75km s –1 M pc –1 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Sugg e s t on e reas o n why the r e is unc e r t a i n t y in the value of the


Hubbl e const a n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 496


32 7 . This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.

(a) A car rie r wave may be amplit u d e modula t e d or frequ e n c y modul a t e d .

Stat e

(i) what is mean t by modula tio n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) why car rie r waves are modula t e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) A sinusoid al car ri e r wave has a frequ e n c y of 500 kHz and an


amplit u d e of 8.0 V.
The carri e r wave is frequ e n c y modula t e d by a sinusoi d al infor m a t io n
signal of frequ e n cy 2.5 kHz and amplit u d e 1.2 V. The frequ e n c y
deviation of the carri e r wave is 15 kHz V –1 . Describ e qua n tit a tiv ely the
variation with time of the car ri e r wave.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 497


(4)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 498


32 8 . This ques tion is abou t optic fibre tra n s m i s sio n.

The variation with time t of the input powe r to an optic fibre is show n in
Diagr a m 1.
The variation with time t of the outp u t powe r from the optic fibre is show n
in Diagr a m 2.

The scales are the sam e on both diag r a m s .

(a) Stat e and explain the feat u r e of the gra p h s tha t shows tha t the r e is

(i) att e n u a t i o n of the signal.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) signal noise.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 499


(b) The dur a tio n (time width) of the signal incre a s e s as it travels along
the optic fibre.

(i) Stat e two reas o n s for this incr e a s e d time dur a tio n.

1:......................................................................................................
..................

2:......................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Sugg e s t why this incre a s e in the width of the pulse sets a limit on
the frequ e n cy of pulse s that can be tran s m i t t e d along an
unint e r r u p t e d lengt h of optic fibre.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

32 9 . This ques tion is abou t the use of sat ellite s for com m u ni c a ti o n.

(a) (i) Stat e what is me a n t by a geost a t io n a r y sat ellite.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Explain the advan t a g e s of the use of geos t a tio n a r y satellite s for
com m u ni c a ti o n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 500


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 501


(b) Explain the adva n t a g e s of the use of pola r- orbitin g satellite s for
com m u ni c a t io n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

33 0 . This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.

A pas s e n g e r in a car is using a mobile phon e.


Stat e and explain the role of the base stations and the cellula r excha n g e as
the car moves from one cell to anot h e r .

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 502


........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 503


33 1 . This ques tion is abou t an amplifier circuit.

The diagr a m below show s an amplifie r circuit incor p o r a t i n g an ideal


oper a tio n al amplifier (op- amp).

The oper a ti o n al amplifier uses a +9 V / 0 / –9 V supply.

(a) Calcula t e the gain of the amplifier circuit.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 504


(b) Deter m i n e the outp u t pote n ti al V out for value s of input pote n ti al V in
equal to

(i) –0.9 V.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) +2. 0 V.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

33 2 . This ques tion is abou t a compo u n d microsc o p e , sphe ri c al abe r r a t i o n and


chro m a t i c aber r a t i o n.

(a) An object O is place d in front of the objective lens of a compo u n d


micros c o p e as shown below.

The focal point s of the objective lens are at F. The micros c o p e is in


nor m al adjus t m e n t . Withou t dra wi n g a ray diag r a m , label the
appr oxi m a t e positions , on the princip al axis, of

(i) the image prod u c e d by the objec tive lens (label this position X).
(1)

(ii) the focal points of the eye lens (label thes e points E).
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 505


(iii) the final imag e (label this image Y).
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 506


(b) An object is viewed throu g h a convex lens that has bee n corr e c t e d for
sphe ric al aber r a t i o n.
For a partic ul a r object dista n c e , the image of the objec t is as show n
below.

Anothe r convex lens of the sam e focal lengt h, but not corr e c t e d for
sphe ric al aber r a t i o n, is now used to view the object. The object
dista n c e is unch a n g e d .
In the spac e below, draw the imag e as it would be see n throu g h this
secon d lens.
The imag e as seen thro u g h the cor r e c t e d lens is show n as a broke n
line.

(2)

(c) Explain how chro m a t i c abe r r a t i o n arise s whe n an objec t is viewe d


throu g h a single lens.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 507


33 3 . This ques tion is abou t the scatt e r i n g of light.

(a) Stat e an appr oxi m a t e wavele n g t h for

(i) red light.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) blue light.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) With refer e n c e to your answ e r s in (a), explain why the settin g Sun
appe a r s reddis h in colour.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

33 4 . This ques tion is abou t two- sour c e inte rfe r e n c e .

A doubl e slit is arr a n g e d so that its plan e is nor m al to a bea m of lase r light,
as show n below.

IB Questionbank Physics 508


The wavelen g t h of the light is 640 nm. The slit sepa r a t i o n in the doubl e slit
arr a n g e m e n t is 0.85 mm. Cohe r e n t light eme r g e s from the slits and an
interf e r e n c e patt e r n is observ e d on a scre e n. The scre e n is par allel to the
plane of the double slits. The dist a n c e betw e e n the slits and the scre e n is
2.4 m.

IB Questionbank Physics 509


(a) (i) Stat e what is me a n t by cohe r e n t light.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Explain how an interfe r e n c e patt e r n is form e d on the scre e n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) Calcula t e the sepa r a t io n of the fringe s in the inte rfe r e n c e patt e r n on
the scre e n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) The interf e r e n c e patt e r n in (b) consis t s of a serie s of alter n a t e light


and dark fringe s. The inte n sity of the light from one slit is now
red uc e d . Sugg e s t the effect on the app e a r a n c e of the fringe s.

IB Questionbank Physics 510


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

33 5 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.

(a) In an X-ray tube having a tungs t e n tar g e t , elect r o n s are accele r a t e d


from rest throu g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e of 45 kV.
Calcula t e the ran g e of wavele n g t h s tha t will be obse rv e d in the X-ray
spect r u m produ c e d by this bom b a r d m e n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Explain the origins of the feat u r e s of a cha r a c t e r i s ti c X-ray spec t r u m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 511


.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 512


33 6 . This ques tion is abou t thin film inte rf e r e n c e .

(a) The diagr a m below shows a ray of monoc h r o m a t i c light incide n t on a


thin film in air.

On the diag r a m , draw the pat hs of rays tha t would give rise to
interfe r e n c e as seen by an eye in the region nea r E.
(2)

(b) White light is incide n t on a soap bubbl e. Explain why the soap film
appe a r s colour e d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

33 7 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic kine m a t i c s .

(a) Define inertial fram e of refer e n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 513


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 514


(b) Ann and Sue are twins. Sue rem ai n s on Eart h. Ann travels to the sta r
Sirius in a spac es hi p moving at a spe e d of 0.80c, as mea s u r e d by Sue.
The dist an c e betw e e n Eart h and Sirius is 8.8 ly, as mea s u r e d by Sue.

(i) Calculat e the time elaps e d , as mea s u r e d by Sue, betw e e n Ann


leaving Ear t h and rea c hi n g Sirius.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Stat e and explain whet h e r Ann or Sue mea s u r e s the prope r time
betw e e n Ann leaving Eart h and arriving at Sirius.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Calculat e the time take n for the spa c e s hi p to reac h Sirius, as
meas u r e d by Ann.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) As Ann appr o a c h e s Sirius, she sends a radio mess a g e back to


Sue. The dista n c e betw e e n Sirius and Eart h, as mea s u r e d by
Ann, is 5.28 ly. Deter m i n e the time, as mea s u r e d by Ann, that it
takes for the signal to reac h Sue.

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 515


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) As soon as Ann arrives at Sirius, she imme di a t e ly turn s arou n d and
ret u r n s to Eart h at a spee d of 0.80c, as mea s u r e d by Sue. The ret u r n
journ ey gives rise to the twin par a d ox.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by the twin par a d ox.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Outline how the twin par a d ox is resolve d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

33 8 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic mass and ene r gy.

(a) Define rest mas s.

IB Questionbank Physics 516


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Explain why par ticle s canno t be accel e r a t e d to the spe e d c.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 517


(c) Two proto n s are travelling towa r d s one anot h e r along the sam e
str aig h t line. The spee d of eac h proton is 0.70c as me a s u r e d by a
labor a t o r y observ e r . Calcul a t e the rela tive velocity of app ro a c h , as
mea s u r e d in the fram e of refe r e n c e of one of the proto n s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Deter m i n e the pote n ti al differ e n c e throu g h which a proton mus t be


accel e r a t e d in orde r to rea c h a spe e d of 0.70c.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

33 9 . This ques tion is abou t black holes.

(a) Define the Sch w a r z s c hil d radius .

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 518


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 519


(b) Calcula t e the Schw a r z s c hil d radius for an objec t of mas s 2.0 × 10 31
kg.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) A star s hi p is station a r y just outsid e the event horizon of a black hole.
A space station is also station a r y and is locat e d far away from the
black hole and any othe r mas sive objec t.

(i) The star s hi p tran s m i t s a radio signal to the spac e station. Explain
why the signal receive d at the spac e station is shifte d to a lower
frequ e n c y than the tra n s m i t t e d frequ e n c y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 520


(ii) The star s hi p rem ai n s sta tion a r y just outsid e the event horizon for
one hour as meas u r e d by an obse rv e r in the star s hi p. The time
elaps e d , as meas u r e d by an obse rv e r in the spac e station, is ten
hour s. Deter m i n e , in ter m s of the Schw a r z s c hil d radius R s of the
black hole, the dist an c e of the sta r s hi p from the event horizon of
the black hole.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

34 0 . This ques tion is abou t heari n g.

A stud e n t listen s to music using a pers o n a l ear p h o n e . The powe r of the


soun d produ c e d by the ear p h o n e is 0.19 μW. The powe r i s evenly
distrib u t e d over the tymp a ni c me m b r a n e of are a 54 mm 2 .

(a) Calcula t e, for the surfac e of the tymp a ni c me m b r a n e ,

(i) the sound inten sity.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 521


(ii) the sound inten sity level (IL ).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Comm e n t , with resp e c t to the effect on the hea ri n g of the stud e n t , on
the intensi ty level calcul at e d in (a)(ii).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

34 1 . This ques tion is abou t ultr as o u n d .

(a) Define acous tic impe d a n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 522


(b) The table gives values of the acous tic impe d a n c e for air and soft
tissue.

acous tic
impe d a n c e
/ kg m –2 s –1
air 430
soft tissue 1.63 × 10 6

The inten sity reflectio n coefficie n t for two medi a of impe d a n c e s Z 1


and Z 2 is

2
 Z1  Z 2 
 
Z Z 2
IR =  1 

(i) Dete r mi n e the intensi ty reflectio n coefficie nt betw e e n air and


soft tissue.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Explain why air betw e e n an ultra s o u n d prob e and the skin (soft
tissu e) of a pers o n preve n t s ultr a s o u n d diag no sis taking plac e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 523


(iii) Stat e and explain how the proble m you have explain e d in (b)(ii) is
overco m e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

34 2 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r ma gn e t i c reson a n c e (NMR).

Outline the basic principles of nucle a r mag n e t i c reso n a n c e (NMR) imagin g.

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

IB Questionbank Physics 524


.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 525


34 3 . This ques tion is abou t radiation.

(a) Stat e, in the cont ext of radia tio n mea s u r e m e n t , wha t is me a n t by

(i) expos u r e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) abso r b e d dose.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) equivale n t dose.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The ene r gy requir e d to prod u c e one ion pair in air is 34 eV.

The expos u r e in a workpla c e is found to be 2.5 × 10 –3 C kg –1 .


Deter m i n e the ener gy given to 1.0 g of air as a res ult of this expos u r e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 526


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 527


(c) The expos u r e to X-ray radia tio n during a comp u t e d tomog r a p h y (CT)
scan impos e s a finite risk for the patie n t.

(i) Sugg e s t the nat u r e of this risk.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Explain why such a risk is thou g h t to be acce p t a bl e by both the


patien t and the medic al profes sion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

34 4 . This ques tion is abou t funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s .

(a) Stat e an excha n g e par ticle for

(i) the weak inter a c ti o n.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) the elect r o m a g n e t i c inter a c tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 528


(b) Comm e n t , with refer e n c e to the mass of the excha n g e particle s , on
the rang e of the weak and elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c ti o n s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) Descri b e the proce s s repr e s e n t e d by the Feyn m a n diagr a m below.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) Stat e what is mea n t by a virtual par ticle.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 529


(e) Explain how the Heise n b e r g unce r t a i n t y princi ple for ene r gy and time
applies to the inter a c t io n in (c).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(f) The unce r t ai n t y in the time for the elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c tio n
betw e e n two elect r o n s is 1.6 × 10 –16 s. Dete r mi n e the unc e r t a i n t y in
the ene r gy of the virtu al photon.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

34 5 . This ques tion is abou t particle dete c tio n.

(a) Outline how particle s prod u c e visible trac ks in a bubble cha m b e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 530


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 531


(b) Stat e two reas o n s why wire cha m b e r s are now use d rat h e r tha n
bubbl e cha m b e r s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) Below is a sketc h of the track s in a bubble cha m b e r of an elect r o n and


a positr o n, prod u c e d by the anni hila tion of a photon.

Ther e is a mag n e t i c field dire c t e d nor m al to the plane of the pape r.

Explain why the tracks of the particle s are spirals.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 532


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 533


34 6 . This ques tion is abou t meso n s and baryon s.

(a) Stat e the qua r k cont e n t of meson s and baryon s .

Meson s: ...................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Baryons: ..................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Explain why both meso n s and baryon s can be desc ri b e d as colourle s s .

Meson s: ...................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Baryons: ..................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) A neg a tive pion, π –, collide s with a station a r y proton, produ ci n g a


neut r o n and an unknow n par ticle, X.

π– + p → n + X

(i) Stat e the char g e on par ticle X.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 534


(ii) Deduc e whet h e r particle X is a meson or a baryo n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

34 7 . This ques tion is abou t pair prod u c tio n.

(a) Estim a t e the tem p e r a t u r e below which spont a n e o u s pair prod u c tio n of
elect r o n s and positr o n s cannot occur.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) It is sugg e s t e d that, in the early unive r s e , ther e was slightly mor e
mat t e r than anti- matt e r .
Using your ans w e r to (a), stat e why the r e is cur r e n tly only sta bl e
mat t e r in the univer s e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 535


.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 536


34 8 . The cur r e n t in a resisto r is mea s u r e d as 2.00 A ± 0.02 A. Which of the
following corr e c tly identifies the absolut e unc e r t a i n t y and the perc e n t a g e
unce r t ai n t y in the curr e n t ?

Abso l u t e Per c e n t a g e
unc e r t a i n t y un c e r t a i n t y
A. ± 0.02 A ±1 %
B. ± 0.01 A ± 0.5 %
C. ± 0.02 A ± 0.01 %
D. ± 0.01 A ± 0.005 %
(Tot al 1 mar k )

34 9 . Which of the following lists only two vector qua n ti ti e s ?

A. mas s, ener gy, work

B. mom e n t u m , work, spee d

C. weight, force, accele r a ti o n

D. mom e n t u m , ener gy, displa c e m e n t


(Tot al 1 mar k )

35 0 . Sam a n t h a walks along a horizont a l path in the direc tio n shown. The curve d
par t of the pat h is a semi- circle.

The mag ni t u d e of her displ ac e m e n t from point P to point Q is


app r oxi m a t ely

A. 2 m.

B. 4 m.

C. 6 m.

D. 8 m.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 537


35 1 . Which of the following may be dete r m i n e d from a spe e d- time gra p h ?

A. Displac e m e n t

B. Dista nc e

C. Power

D. Forc e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

35 2 . Step h e n pus h e s two boxes P and Q, tha t stay in cont a c t, along a roug h
table, with a force F of 30 N.
Box P has a mas s of 2.0 kg and box Q has a mas s of 4.0 kg. Both boxes
move with cons t a n t spee d.

The res ult a n t force on box Q is

A. 0 N.

B. 5.0 N.

C. 15 N.

D. 30 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 538


35 3 . A ball moves along the inside of a horizont a l semi- circ ula r ring as show n.
The diagr a m is a view from above.

Which arrow repr e s e n t s the dire c tion of the aver a g e force on the ball?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 539


35 4 . A ball is throw n vertically upwa r d s and come s down again. Air resist a n c e is
negligible. Which of the following gra p h s shows how the gravit a tion a l
poten ti al ene r gy E P varies with time t ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

35 5 . A pum p extr ac t s wate r from a well of dept h h at a const a n t rat e of R kg s –1 .


What is the powe r requir e d to raise the wat e r ?

R
A. gh

B. Rgh

Rg
C. h

hg
D. R
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 540


35 6 . A box that is at rest with resp e c t to horizon t a l grou n d cont ain s a fixed
quan ti ty of an ideal gas. The inte r n a l ene r gy of the gas is U and its
tem p e r a t u r e is T . The box is now ma d e to move at cons t a n t spe e d with
res p e c t to the grou n d . Which of the following gives the cha n g e , if any, in
the inter n al ene r gy and the tem p e r a t u r e of the gas afte r the box has bee n
moving for some time?

Int er n a l en e r g y Te m p e r a t u r e
A. no chan g e no cha n g e
B. no chan g e incr e a s e
C. incr e a s e no cha n g e
D. incr e a s e incr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

35 7 . Object P has a mas s m P and specific hea t capa city c P . Object Q has a mas s
m Q and specific heat capacity c Q . The tem p e r a t u r e of eac h objec t incr e a s e s
by the sam e amou n t . Which of the following gives the ratio

t h e r m aeln e r g y tnr safe r r e tdoo b je c P


t
t h e r m aeln e r g y tnr safe r r e tdoo b je c Q
t ?

mP cQ
mQ c P
A.

mP cP
mQ c Q
B.

mQ c Q

C. mP cP

mQ c P
mP cQ
D.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 541


35 8 . For two object s to be in ther m a l equilibri u m they mus t

A. be in cont a c t with each othe r.

B. radiat e equ al amou n t s of powe r.

C. have the sam e ther m a l capa city.

D. be at the sam e tem p e r a t u r e .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

35 9 . The shock abso r b e r s of a car, in good working condition, ens u r e that the
vertical oscillations of the car are

A. und a m p e d .

B. lightly dam p e d .

C. moder a t e ly dam p e d .

D. critically dam p e d .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 542


36 0 . The gra p h s show how the accele r a ti o n a of four differe n t par ticle s varies
with their displace m e n t x.
Which of the par ticles is executi n g simple har m o ni c motion?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 543


36 1 . The diagr a m below is a snap s h o t of wave fronts of circul a r wave s emitt e d
by a point sour c e S at the surfac e of wate r . The sour c e vibra t e s at a
frequ e n c y f = 10.0 Hz.

The spee d of the wave front is

A. 0.15 cm s –1 .

B. 1.5 cm s –1 .

C. 15 cm s –1 .

D. 30 cm s –1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 544


36 2 . Two coher e n t point sour c e s S 1 and S 2 emit sphe ri c a l waves.

Which of the following bes t desc ri b e s the inte n si ty of the wave s at P and Q?

P Q
A. maxim u m minim u m
B. minim u m maxim u m
C. maxim u m maxim u m
D. minim u m minim u m
(Tot al 1 mar k )

36 3 . An alph a particle is accel e r a t e d thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e of 10 kV. Its


gain in kinetic ene r gy is

A. 10 eV.

B. 20 eV.

C. 10 keV.

D. 20 keV.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 545


36 4 . A copp e r wire, of elect ric resis t a n c e R , has a lengt h L and a cross- section
S
are a S . Anothe r copp e r wire has a lengt h 2 L and a cross- section are a of 2 .
Which of the following is the resist a n c e of this wire?

R
A. 4

R
B. 2

C. 2R

D. 4R
(Tot al 1 mar k )

36 5 . The circuit shows a light- depe n d e n t resisto r (LDR) in serie s with a resisto r
and a cell. The emf of the cell is ε. The inte r n a l resist a n c e of the cell is
negligible.

When light shines on the LDR, the pote n ti al differ e n c e acros s the resis to r
will

A. stay the sam e.

B. decr e a s e .

C. incr e a s e but always be less tha n ε.

D. incr e a s e and exce e d ε.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 546


36 6 . The radius of a char g e d sphe ri c a l condu c t o r is R. Which of the following
grap h s best show s how the mag nit u d e of the elect ric al field str e n g t h E
varies with dista n c e r from the cent r e of the sphe r e ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

36 7 . Which of the following gives the acc ele r a t io n of an elect r o n of elect ric
char g e e and mas s m in a unifor m elect ric field of stre n g t h E ?

A. E

B. Ee

Ee
C. m

m
D. Ee
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 547


36 8 . A particle, of mas s m and char g e q , moves with velocity v perp e n d i c ul a r ly
to a mag n e ti c field. The mag nit u d e of the mag n e ti c forc e acting on the
par ticl e at a par tic ul a r point is F. Which of the following gives the
mag ni t u d e of the mag n e ti c field str e n g t h at that point?

F
A. q

F
B. m

F
C. ν

F
D. qν
(Tot al 1 mar k )

36 9 . Which of the following decay sequ e n c e s would result in the daug h t e r


nucle u s having the sam e proto n num b e r as the par e n t nucle u s ?

A. Alpha followed by gam m a

B. Beta (β – ) followe d by gam m a

C. Alpha followed by bet a (β –) followe d by beta (β –)

D. Beta (β –) followed by gam m a followe d by gam m a


(Tot al 1 mar k )

12
37 0 . The differe n c e betw e e n the mas s of a 6 C nucle u s and the sum of the
mas s e s of the individu al nucleo n s is 0.1 u. Which of the following is
app r oxi m a t ely the bindin g ener gy of the nucle u s ?

A. 90 MeV

B. 90 MeV c –2

C. 8 MeV

D. 8 MeV c –2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 548


37 1 . The proc es s by which a heavy nucle u s splits into two light e r nuclei is
known as

A. fission.

B. fusion.

C. radioac tive decay.

D. artificial (induc e d) tran s m u t a t i o n .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

37 2 . Which of the following cor r e c tly shows a rene w a bl e and a non- ren e w a bl e
sour c e of ener gy?

Ren e w a b l e No n- ren e w a b l e
A. oil geot h e r m a l
B. wind biofuels
C. ocea n waves nucle a r
D. nat u r al gas coal
(Tot al 1 mar k )

37 3 . Critical mas s refer s to the amou n t of fissile mat e ri a l that

A. will allow fission to be sust ai n e d .

B. is equivale n t to 235 g of ura ni u m .

C. will produ c e a growin g chain rea c tion.

D. is the minim u m mass nece s s a r y for fission to take plac e.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 549


37 4 . The annu al variation s of solar powe r incide n t per unit are a at a partic ul a r
point on the Eart h’s surfac e is mainly due to the cha n g e in the

A. dista n c e betw e e n the Ear t h and the Sun.

B. angle at which the solar rays hit the surfa c e of the Eart h.

C. aver a g e albedo of the Eart h.

D. aver a g e cloud cover of the Eart h.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 550


37 5 . The wate r in a res er voir behind a da m drops from an initial height H 0
above a turbin e to prod u c e hydro el e c t r i city. At time t = T , h = 0.

The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the height h of the wat e r
above the tur bi n e.

Which of the following is a mea s u r e of the maxim u m theor e t i c a l elect ric


powe r availabl e?

A. H 0 and the slope of the gra p h

B. T and the slope of the grap h

C. T and the are a unde r the gra p h

D. H 0 and the are a und e r the gra p h


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 551


37 6 . Each squa r e met r e of the Sun’s surfac e emits S joules per secon d. The
radi us of the Sun is r, and the Sun is at a mea n dista n c e R from the Eart h.
Which of the following gives the solar powe r incide n t per unit are a of the
top layer of the Eart h’s atmo s p h e r e ?

r
 S
A.  R

2
r
  S
B. R

 R
 S
C. r

2
R
  S
D. r
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 552


37 7 . The diagr a m shows a simple clima t e model for Ear t h. The tem p e r a t u r e of
the grou n d is T g and is ass u m e d to radia t e as a black body. The
tem p e r a t u r e of the atmos p h e r e is T a and has an emis sivity ε.

In the model, the intensi ty radia t e d from the groun d equ als the inte nsity
Tg

radi at e d from the atm os p h e r e towa r d s the grou n d. What is the ratio Ta ?

A. ε4

B. ε

C. ε4

D. 1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 553


37 8 . Data analysis ques tion.

Gillian carrie d out an experi m e n t to inves tig a t e the crat e r s form e d whe n
steel balls are dropp e d into sand. To try and find the relation s hi p betw e e n
the diam e t e r of the crat e r and the ene r gy of impac t of ste el balls of the
sam e diam e t e r , she dropp e d a ste el ball from differ e n t heigh t s h into sand
and mea s u r e d the res ultin g diam e t e r d of the crat e r . The data are show n
plott e d below.

(a) The unce r t ai n t y in the mea s u r e m e n t of d is ±0. 4 0 cm; the unce r t a i n t y


in h is too small to be show n. Draw erro r bars for the data point (0.2,
0.047) and the dat a point (2.0, 0.10).
(2)

(b) Draw a best- fit line for the data points.


(2)

(c) The origin al hypot h e si s, ma d e by Gillian, was that the diam e t e r of the
crat e r is directly propo r tio n a l to the ene r gy of impa c t of the ste el
balls. Explain why the data does not suppo r t this hypot h e si s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 554


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 555


(d) Since Gillian’s data did not suppo r t her hypot h e s i s, she res e a r c h e d to
find alter n a t iv e hypot h e s e s . She found that the r e are two theo ri e s
used to predict a relation s hi p betw e e n d and h . In orde r to find which
theor y is bes t suppo r t e d by the dat a, she proc e s s e d the data in two
sepa r a t e ways. The proce s s e d dat a are shown below.

(i) Draw a line of best- fit on each gra p h.


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 556


(ii) Stat e and explain which theo ry is best suppo r t e d by the stud e n t’s
data.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

37 9 . This ques tion is abou t circula r motion and global war mi n g.

(a) A car is travelling at const a n t spe e d of 18 m s –1 arou n d a horizon t a l


bend in the road.
The mas s of the car is 1.5 × 10 3 kg and the bend forms part of a circle
of radius
2.0 × 10 3 m.

(i) Stat e why the car is accele r a ti n g .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the friction al forc e betw e e n the tyres of the car and
the surfac e of the roa d that prod u c e s the acc el e r a t io n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 557


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 558


(b) It is sugg e s t e d that the use of fossil fuels to powe r car s has led to an
enha n c e m e n t of the gree n h o u s e effect.

(i) Stat e the reas o n for this sugg e s t io n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Outline on e mech a ni s m by which the enha n c e d gre e n h o u s e


effect may lead to an incr e a s e in global war mi n g .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

38 0 . This ques tion is abou t chan g e of pha s e of a liquid and late nt heat of
vaporiza tion.

(a) Stat e the differ e n c e betw e e n evapo r a t i o n and boiling with refe r e n c e
to

(i) tem p e r a t u r e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 559


(ii) surfac e area of a liquid.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) A liquid in a calori m e t e r is hea t e d at its boiling point for a mea s u r e d


period of time.
The following data are availa ble.

Power rating of heat e r = 15 W


Time for which liquid is hea t e d at boiling point = 4.5 ×
10 2 s
Mass of liquid boiled away = 1.8 ×
10 –2 kg

Use the data to det e r m i n e the specific late nt hea t of vaporiz a tio n of
the liquid.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Stat e and explain on e rea s o n why the calcula tio n in (b) will give a
value of the specific laten t hea t of vaporiz a tion of the liquid tha t is
grea t e r than the true value.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 560


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

38 1 . This ques tion is abou t fossil fuels and the gre e n h o u s e effect.

(a) Stat e two reas o n s why most of the world’s ene r gy cons u m p t i o n is
provide d by fossil fuels.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 561


(b) A powe r station has an outpu t powe r of 500 MW and an over all
efficiency of 27 %.
It uses nat u r al gas as a fuel tha t has an ene r gy density of 56 MJ kg –1 .

(i) Define ener g y densit y .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the rat e of cons u m p t i o n of nat u r a l gas in the powe r


station.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Outline why the enha n c e d gre e n h o u s e effect may res ult in an incr e a s e
in the tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 562


(d) (i) The solar inte nsity at the position of the Eart h is 1380
–2
W m . The aver a g e albe do of Eart h is 0.300. Sta t e why an
aver a g e value of albe d o is quot e d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 563


(ii) Show that the aver a g e reflec t e d inte n sity from the Eart h is about
100 W m –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(e) One of the expect e d res ult s of global war mi n g is an incre a s e d sea
level. The incre a s e in volum e ΔV for a tem p e r a t u r e incr e a s e ΔT is
given by ΔV = γV ΔT. Show, using the following dat a, that the res ultin g
rise in sea level is about 0.5 m.

Temp e r a t u r e incr e a s e = 2.0 °C


Surfa c e are a of ocea n s on Eart h =
8 2
3.6 × 10 km
Avera g e ocea n dept h = 3.0 km
γ = 8.8 × 10 –5 K–1

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 564


38 2 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay and bindin g ene r gy.

(a) Descri b e what is mean t by radioa c tive decay.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A nucleu s of thallium- 206 (Tl-206) unde r g o e s radioa c tive dec ay to a


nucleu s of lead- 206 (Pb- 206). In the reac tio n equa tio n below, identify
the proton num b e r Z of lead and the par ticle x .

206
8 2T  206
Z P b β  x

Z : .............................................................................................................
....................

x : .............................................................................................................
....................
(2)

(c) The mas s of a Tl-206 nucle u s is 191 870 MeV c –2 . Dete r mi n e the
binding ener gy per nucleo n of Tl-206.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 565


(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 566


(d) Stat e why the bindin g ene r gy of Pb- 206 is gre a t e r tha n tha t of Tl-206.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

38 3 . This ques tion is abou t oscillation s and waves.

(a) A rect a n g u l a r piece of wood of lengt h l floats in wate r with its axis
vertical as show n in diagr a m 1.

The lengt h of wood below the surfa c e is d . The wood is pus h e d


vertically down w a r d s a dista n c e A such that a lengt h of wood is still
above the wate r surfac e as show n in diag r a m 2. The wood is the n
relea s e d and oscillat e s vertic ally. At the insta n t show n in diag r a m 3,
the wood is moving down w a r d s and the lengt h of wood bene a t h the
surfac e is d + x .

(i) On diag r a m 3, draw an arrow to show the direc tion of the


accele r a ti o n of the wood.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 567


(ii) The accel e r a t io n a of the wood (in m s –2 ) is relat e d to x (in m) by
the following equ atio n.

14
 x
a = l

Explain why this equ a tio n show s that the wood is exec u ti n g
simpl e har m o ni c motion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) The period of oscillation of the wood is 1.4 s. Show tha t the
lengt h l of the wood is 0.70 m.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 568


(b) The wood in (a), as show n in diagr a m 2, is rele a s e d at time t = 0. On
the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the velocity v of the wood
varies with time over one period of oscillation.

(1)

(c) The dist an c e A that the wood is initially pus h e d down is 0.12 m.

(i) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the maxim u m accele r a ti o n of the


wood.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) On your sketc h gra p h in (b) label with the lette r P one point
wher e the mag nit u d e of the accel e r a ti o n is a maxim u m .
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 569


(d) The oscillations of the wood gen e r a t e waves in the wat e r of
wavelen g t h 0.45 m.
The grap h shows how the displa c e m e n t D, of the wate r surfa c e at a
particul a r dista n c e from the wood varies with time t .

Using the grap h, calcula t e the

(i) spee d of the waves.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) ratio of the displac e m e n t at t = 1.75 s to the displa c e m e n t at t =


0.35 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 570


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 571


(iii) ratio of the ener gy of the wave at t = 1.75 s to the ene r gy at t =
0.35 s

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

38 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e and elect ric circ uit s.

(a) Define resista n c e and stat e Ohm’s law.

Resist a n c e: ..............................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Ohm’s
law: .................................................................................................
.................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A resis to r mad e from a met al oxide has a resist a n c e of 1.5 Ω. The
resisto r is in the form of a cylinde r of lengt h 2.2 × 10 –2 m and radius
1.2 × 10 –3 m. Calcula t e the resistivity of the met al oxide.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) The man uf a c t u r e r of the resisto r in (b) gua r a n t e e s its resis t a n c e to be


IB Questionbank Physics 572
within ±1 0 % of 1.5 Ω provide d the powe r dissip a tio n in the resis to r
does not excee d 1.0 W. Calcula t e th e maxim u m curr e n t in the resis to r
for the power dissipa tion to be equal to 1.0 W.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 573


(d) The resi stan c e of each of the resis to r s in the circ uit below is mea s u r e d
to be 1.5 Ω with an accu r a c y of ±1 0 %.

The cell has an emf of 2.0 V and negligible inte r n a l resist a n c e .

(i) Define emf .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the minim u m and the maxim u m powe r that could be
dissipa t e d in this circuit.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 574


IB Questionbank Physics 575
38 5 . This ques tion is abou t mom e n t u m , ene r gy and powe r.

(a) In his Principia Math e m a t i c a Newt o n expr e s s e d his third law of


motion as “to every action the r e is always oppos e d an equ al rea c tion”.
Stat e what New to n mean t by this law.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A book is relea s e d from rest and falls towa r d s the surfa c e of Eart h.
Discus s how the cons e rv a t io n of mom e n t u m applies to the Eart h- book
syste m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 576


(c) A larg e swingin g ball is use d to drive a horizon t al iron spike into a
vertical wall. The cent r e of the ball falls thro u g h a vertic al height of
1.6 m befor e striking the spike in the position show n.

The mas s of the ball is 3.5 kg and the mas s of the spike is 0.80 kg.
Imm e di a t ely after striking the spike, the ball and spike move toge t h e r .
Show that the

(i) spee d of the ball on striking the spike is 5.6 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) ene r gy dissip at e d as a res ult of the collision is abou t 10 J.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 577


.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 578


(d) As a result of the ball striking the spike, the spike is drive n a dista n c e
7.3 × 10 –2 m into the wall. Calcula t e , ass u m i n g it to be const a n t , the
friction force F betw e e n the spike and wall.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(e) The machin e that is used to rais e the ball has a useful powe r outp u t of
18 W. Calculat e how long it take s for the mac hi n e to raise the ball
throu g h a height of 1.6 m.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

38 6 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c and gravit a tio n a l fields

(a) Stat e, in ter m s of elect r o n s , the differ e n c e betw e e n a cond u c t o r and


an insulat o r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 579


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 580


(b) Sugg e s t why ther e mus t be an elect ric field inside a cur r e n t- carryin g
cond u c t o r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h inside a condu c t o r is 55 N
C –1 . Calculat e the force on a free elect r o n in the cond uc t o r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) The elect ric force betw e e n two point cha r g e s is a funda m e n t a l forc e
as is the gravit ation al forc e betw e e n two point mas s e s . Sta t e on e
similarity betw e e n thes e two force s and on e differ e n c e (othe r than
the fact that one applies to cha r g e and the othe r to mas s).

Similari ty: ...............................................................................................


....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Differ e n c e: ..............................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(e) The force on a mas s of 1.0 kg falling freely nea r the surfa c e of Jupite r

IB Questionbank Physics 581


is 25 N. The radius of Jupite r is 7.0 × 10 7 m.

(i) Stat e the value of the ma gni t u d e of the gravit a tion a l field
str e n g t h at the surfac e of Jupite r.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 582


(ii) Calculat e that the mas s of Jupite r is about 1.8 × 10 27 kg.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

38 7 . This ques tion is abou t vision and the eye.

(a) Stat e on e function of

(i) cone cells.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) rod cells.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Descri b e the distri b u tio n of cone and rod cells on the retin a.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 583


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 584


(c) An object is to be viewed in very dim light. With refe r e n c e to your
ans w e r to (b) explain why the objec t is most clea rly see n whe n looke d
at sidew ay s rat h e r than direc tly.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

38 8 . This ques tion is abou t stan di n g wave s.

A string that is fixed at both ends is mad e to vibra t e in the funda m e n t a l


(first har m o nic) mode.

The fixed ends of the string are at x = 0 and x = L .

Each point on the string oscillat e s in simple har m o ni c motion. The


displac e m e n t y of the string at a point x at time t is given by the equ a tio n

y = A cos(50 0 π t )

 πx 
 
wher e A = 12sin  2  .

In thes e form ul a e x is in met r e s and t is in secon d s . Using this equ a tio n,

(a) explain why the amplitu d e of the sta n di n g wave is not cons t a n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 585


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 586


(b) calculat e the frequ e n c y of the stan di n g wave.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) show that L = 2.0 m.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

38 9 . This ques tion is abou t diffrac tio n and resolution.

(a) Light from a monoc h r o m a t i c point sour c e S 1 is incide n t on a nar r o w


rect a n g ul a r slit.

IB Questionbank Physics 587


After pas sin g thro u g h the slit, the light is incide n t on a scre e n som e
dista n c e away from the slit. The gra p h shows how the inte nsi ty
distrib u tio n on the scre e n varies with the angle θ show n in the
diagr a m .

(i) The width of the slit is 4.0 × 10 –4 m. Use dat a from the gra p h to
calcula t e the wavel en g t h of the light.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 588


(ii) An identical sour c e S 2 is plac e d close to S 1 as show n.

The imag e s of the two sourc e s on the scre e n are just resolve d
accor di n g to the Rayleigh crit e rio n. On the gra p h above, dra w
the inten sity distri b u tio n of the secon d sour c e .
(1)

(b) The Very Larg e Array (VLA) is use d to analys e radio signals from
dista n t galaxies.
The combi n e d diam e t e r of the VLA is 36 km. A region of linea r size L
inside the radio galaxy M87 emits radio wave s with a frequ e n c y of 43
GHz. The galaxy is a dista n c e
4.7 × 10 23 m from Ear t h. The VLA can just resolve the radio emittin g
region.
Estim a t e the value of L .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 589


39 0 . This ques tion is abou t polarizatio n.

(a) A bea m of unpola riz e d light of inte nsity I 0 is incide n t on a polariz e r .


The polarizatio n axis of the pola riz e r is initially vertic al as show n.

The polarizer is then rota t e d by 180° in the direc tio n show n. On the
axes below, sketc h a grap h to show the varia tio n with the rotatio n
angle θ, of the tran s mi t t e d light inte n sity I, as θ varies from 0° to
180°. Label your sketc h- gra p h with the lette r U.

(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 590


(b) The bea m in (a) is now repla c e d with a polariz e d bea m of light of the
sam e inten si ty.
The plane of polarizatio n of the light is initially par allel to the
polariza tio n axis of the pola riz e r.

The polarizer is then rota t e d by 180° in the direc tio n show n. On the
sam e axes in (a), sketc h a gra p h to show the variatio n with the
rotation angle θ, of the tra n s mi t t e d light inte n sity I, as θ varies from
0° to 180°. Label your sketc h- gra p h with the lette r P.
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

39 1 . This ques tion is abou t the photo el e c t r i c effect.

(a) In the photo el ec t r i c effect, elect r o n s are emitt e d from a met al surfa c e
almost imm edi at ely after light is incide n t on the surfa c e, i.e. withou t
any time delay. Explain this obse r v a tio n with refe r e n c e to Einst ei n’s
theor y of the photoel e c t r i c effect.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 591


(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with incide n t light freq u e n c y f of the
maxim u m kinetic ene r gy E K of the emitt e d elect r o n s .

Use the grap h to

(i) estim a t e the work function of the met al surfa c e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) calcula t e the maxim u m spe e d of the emitt e d elect r o n s for


incide n t light of frequ e n c y 5.0 × 10 15 Hz.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 592


IB Questionbank Physics 593
39 2 . This ques tion is abou t qua n t u m aspe c t s of the elect r o n .

(a) The ene r gy of elect r o n s in atom s is said to be qua n tiz e d. Stat e wha t is
mea n t by qua n tize d ener gy.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) An elect r o n that is confine d to move in a region of lengt h L can only


have ener gi e s given by the equ a tio n

h2n2
2
E n = 8πm L

whe r e n is a positive integ e r .

For L = 1.0 × 10 –10 m, use the equa tio n above to

(i) calcula t e that the smalle s t differ e n c e betw e e n the allowe d


ene r gi e s of the elect r o n is 5.8 × 10 –18 J.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) det e r m i n e the wavele n g t h of the photon whos e ene r gy is 5.8 ×


10 –18 J.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 594


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 595


(c) Part of the emission spect r u m of hydro g e n is show n in the diag r a m .

Sugg e s t whet h e r this spec t r u m can be explain e d by the model in (b).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

39 3 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.

(a) The decay const a n t for a par tic ul a r isotop e is λ = 0.048 s –1 . A sam pl e
of the isotop e initially cont ai n s 2.0 × 10 12 nuclei of this isotop e.

(i) Define decay cons ta n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Estim a t e the num b e r of nuclei that will dec ay in the first secon d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 596


(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with time t of the activity A of a sam pl e
cont ai nin g radioac tive mat e ri al that consis t s of two differe n t isotop e s .
Each isotop e decays into a stabl e daug h t e r isotop e .

(i) Use the grap h to explain how it may be dedu c e d that the sa m pl e
cont ai n s mor e than one isotop e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 597


(ii) One of the isotop e s in the sam pl e has a half- life tha t is shor t e r
than 0.20 s. Use the gra p h to estim a t e the half- life of the othe r
isotop e. Explain your workin g.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

39 4 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCDs).

(a) Light from an object that is incide n t on the pixels of a CCD gives rise
to pote n ti al differ e n c e s acros s the pixels. Outline how the s e pote n ti al
differ e n c e s are used to prod u c e an imag e of the object.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The CCD of a partic ul a r digital cam e r a has 5.0 × 10 6 pixels and a
collectin g are a of 22 mm 2 . Light of inte n si ty 1.4 W m –2 is incide n t on
the collectin g are a of the CCD for a time of 85 ms. The aver a g e ene r gy
of the photon s of the incide n t light is 3.6 × 10 –19 J.
The quan t u m efficiency of the CCD is 75 %.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by qua n t u m efficiency.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 598


(ii) Show that the num b e r of photon s incide n t on on e pixel of the
CCD in the time interv al of 85 ms is appr oxi m a t e ly 1.5 × 10 6 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) The capa cit a n c e of a pixel of the CCD is 12 pF. Show tha t the
poten ti al differ e n c e est a blis h e d acros s the pixel is appr oxi m a t e ly
15 mV.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) The voltag e in (b)(iii) is digitize d into a four bit bina ry num b e r .
Dete r mi n e the bina ry equivale n t of this volta g e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) CCDs dete c ti n g X-rays are now use d in medic al diagno si s. Stat e the
adva n t a g e to the patien t of an X-ray CCD det e c t o r with high qua n t u m
efficiency.

IB Questionbank Physics 599


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 600


39 5 . This ques tion is abou t the mobile phone syste m .

In the mobile phon e syste m , a partic ul a r geog r a p h i c are a is divide d into a


num b e r of cells with a base station in eac h cell, eac h conn e c t e d to a
cellula r exch a n g e .

Describ e the function of the bas e sta tion s and the cellula r excha n g e .

Base
stations : ...................................................................................................
......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

Cellula r
exch a n g e : ................................................................................................
.................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

39 6 . This ques tion is abou t the oper a tio n al amplifie r.

(a) On the axes below draw a sketc h gra p h to show the variatio n with
input voltag e V in of the outpu t volta g e V out of a non- inverti n g
oper a ti o n al amplifier.

IB Questionbank Physics 601


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 602


(b) A tem p e r a t u r e war nin g devic e make s use of a buzze r tha t sound s
whe n the poten ti al differe n c e acros s it is 24 V. The circ uit in the
war ni n g device is show n.

It is requi r e d that the buzze r should sound whe n the tem p e r a t u r e of


the ther m i s t o r rises above 50 °C.

(i) Stat e the voltag e at point Q.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) At a tem p e r a t u r e of 50 °C the resist a n c e of the the r m i s t o r is R .


Explain why the buzze r will sound whe n the tem p e r a t u r e rise s
above 50 °C.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 603


39 7 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic kine m a t i c s .

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by prope r lengt h and prop e r time inte rv al.

Prope r
lengt h: .............................................................................................
.................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Prope r time
interv al: ...........................................................................................
........

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A space s hi p moves with spe e d v = 0.600 c relative to a spa c e sta tion.
Two laser s , A and B, on the spac e station are 5.00 m apa r t as
mea s u r e d by the space station obse rv e r s . The ga m m a factor for a
spee d of v = 0.600 c is γ =1. 2 5.

(i) A radio signal is sent to the spac e s hi p from the spac e sta tion. The
tran s mi s s io n lasts for 6.00 s accor di n g to spa c e station clocks.
Calculat e the dur atio n of the tra n s m i s sio n accor di n g to the
spac e s hi p obse rv e r s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 604


..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 605


(ii) Calculat e the dista n c e betw e e n the laser s A and B accor di n g to
the space s hi p obse rv e r s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The laser s in (b) are fired si m u l t a n e o u s l y accor di n g to the spa c e


stat i o n obse rv e r s .
Light from each laser make s a ma rk on the spac e s hi p. The spac e s hi p
obse rv e r s mea s u r e the dista n c e betw e e n the two ma rk s to be 6.25 m.
Accordi n g to the space s hi p obse rv e r s

(i) stat e which laser was fired first.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) det e r m i n e the differ e n c e in time betw e e n the firings of the two
laser s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

39 8 . This ques tion is abou t qua r k s.

The table below gives the elect ric cha r g e of the thr e e light e s t qua r k s in
ter m s of e , the char g e of the proton.

IB Questionbank Physics 606


up down str a n g e
Quark flavo u r
u d s
Elec t r i c 2 1 1
 
ch ar g e / e 3 3 3

IB Questionbank Physics 607


(a) Using the dat a in the table, dete r m i n e the

(i) quar k conte n t of a meson with cha r g e +1 and str a n g e n e s s 0 and


that of a baryon with cha r g e –1 and str a n g e n e s s –3.

Meso n: ............................................................................................
..................

Baryon: ............................................................................................
.................
(2)

(ii) possible spin values of the meson in (a)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Stat e the Pauli exclusion principle.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

3
(c) Explain how the baryon with qua r k cont e n t uuu and spin 2 does not
violate the Pauli exclusion principle.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) In the Feyn m a n diagr a m show n a blue down qua r k emits a gluon and
prod u c e s a red qua r k.

IB Questionbank Physics 608


IB Questionbank Physics 609
Deduc e the

(i) quar k flavour (type) of the prod u c e d qua r k.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) colour quan t u m num b e r s of the emitt e d gluon.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(e) The positive kaon K + (qua r k cont e n t u s ) dec ays into an anti- muon and
a neut ri no accor di n g to the rea c tion below.

K+ → µ + + ν

Explain how it may be dedu c e d that this dec ay is a weak inter a c ti o n


proce s s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 610


(f) The diagr a m shows thre e of the inter a c ti o n vertic e s for the wea k
inter a c ti o n.

Using the app r o p r i a t e vert ex, dra w a Feyn m a n diag r a m for the dec ay
K + → µ + + ν labelling all particl e s involve d.

(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 611


39 9 . This ques tion is abou t the luminosity, size and dista n c e of star s.

The Her tzs p r u n g–R u s s ell (HR) diag r a m shows the varia tion with spec t r a l
class of the absolut e mag ni t u d e of sta r s .

The star Capella and the Sun are in the sa m e spec t r a l class (G). Using the
HR diag r a m ,

(a) (i) sugg e s t why Capella has a gre a t e r surfa c e are a than
the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 612


(ii) estim a t e the luminosity of Capella in ter m s of that of the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) calcula t e the radius of Capella in ter m s of that of the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The spect r o s c o pi c par allax meth o d can be use d to me a s u r e the


dista n c e of star Vega.

(i) Using the HR diagr a m , sta t e the absolut e mag nit u d e of Vega.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) The app a r e n t mag nit u d e of Vega is 0.0. Dete r mi n e (in pars e c ) the
dist a n c e of Vega from Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 613


..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 614


(iii) Light from Vega is abso r b e d by a dust cloud betw e e n Vega and
Eart h. Sugg e s t the effect, if any, this will have on dete r m i ni n g
the dista n c e of Vega from Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Vega is a very massive sta r. Sta t e why Vega does not und e r g o
gravit atio n al collaps e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

40 0 . This ques tion is abou t cosmic microw a v e backg r o u n d radia tio n (CMB) and
the density of the univer s e.

The gra p h shows the relative inte nsity of the CMB as a function of
wavele n g t h .

IB Questionbank Physics 615


(a) Explain how this grap h is consist e n t with the Big Bang model of the
univer s e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) The density of the univer s e will det e r m i n e its ultim a t e fate. Outline
the proble m s associa t e d with dete r m i ni n g the density of the unive r s e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 616


40 1 . A cart of mas s M is on a horizont a l frictionle s s table.

The cart is conn ec t e d to an object of weigh t W via a pulley. Which of the


following is the accel er a ti o n of the cart?

W
M
g
A. W

W
W
M
B. g

Mg
C. W

D. 0
(Tot al 1 mar k )

40 2 . An ideal gas has pres s u r e p 0 and volum e V 0 . The num b e r of molec ul e s of


the gas is doubl ed withou t chan gi n g the tem p e r a t u r e . What is the new
value of pres s u r e times volum e ?

p 0V 0
A. 4

p 0V 0
B. 2

C. p 0V0

D. 2 p 0V0
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 617


40 3 . The diagr a m shows the pres s u r e–vol u m e (PV ) rela tion s hi p for a gas.

Which of the following area(s) is/ar e equal to the work done by the gas as it
expa n d s ?

A. are a I

B. are a II

C. are a I + are a II

D. are a I – are a II
(Tot al 1 mar k )

40 4 . The shock abso r b e r s of a car, in good working condition, ens u r e that the
vertical oscillations of the car are

A. und a m p e d .

B. lightly dam p e d .

C. moder a t e ly dam p e d .

D. critically dam p e d .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 618


40 5 . An orga n pipe of lengt h L is ope n at one end and close d at the othe r . Which
of the following gives the wavele n g t h of the secon d har m o nic sta n di n g
wave in the pipe?

L
A. 2

B. L

C. 4L

4L
D. 3
(Tot al 1 mar k )

40 6 . A man stan di n g by the shor e obs e rv e s sea wave s appr o a c h i n g at a


frequ e n c y of 0.20 Hz. A man on a boat obse r v e s tha t wave s are
app r o a c hi n g the boat at a frequ e n c y of 0.50 Hz. The spe e d of the wave s is
2.0 m s –1 . Which of the following gives a possible value for the spe e d of the
boat and its directio n?

Sp e e d / m s –1 Dire c t i o n
A. 3.0 away from the
shor e
B. 3.0 towa r d s the shor e
C. 1.2 away from the
shor e
D. 1.2 towa r d s the shor e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

40 7 . In a monoch r o m a t i c liquid cryst al display (LCD), suc h as thos e use d in


calcula t o r s , the pur po s e of the liquid cryst al is to

A. chan g e colour from white to black whe n a seg m e n t is to be displaye d.

B. lubrica t e the small gap betw e e n the plat e s to preve n t over h e a ti n g .

C. rotat e the plan e of polariz a tio n of the light pas si ng throu g h it.

D. act as a cond u c ti n g pat h w a y betw e e n the segm e n t elect r o d e s .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 619


40 8 . A par allel bea m of light with a wavele n g t h 600 nm pass e s throu g h a single
nar r o w slit and forms a diffraction patt e r n on a scre e n. The angle at which
the first diffractio n minim u m is form e d is 2.0 × 10 –3 rad.

What would be the angle of the first diffrac tion minim u m for light of
wavele n g t h 400 nm?

A. 3.0 × 10 –3 rad

B. 2.0 × 10 –3 rad

C. 1.3 × 10 –3 rad

D. 1.2 × 10 –3 rad
(Tot al 1 mar k )

40 9 . The gra p h shows how the cur r e n t I in a resis to r varies with the volta g e V
applied acros s it.

Which of the following gives the resist a n c e of the resis to r, whe n I = I 1 ?

V1
A. I1

B. The slope of the curve at the point (V 1 , I 1 )

I1
C. V1

D. The inver s e of the slope of the curve at the point ( V 1 , I 1 )


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 620


41 0 . Two 10 Ω resis to r s are conn e c t e d as show n.

What is the resist a n c e acros s PQ?

A. 0 Ω

B. 5 Ω

C. 10 Ω

D. 20 Ω
(Tot al 1 mar k )

41 1 . A unifor m mag n e t i c field is per p e n di c ul a r to the plane of a loop of


condu c ti n g wire.

The field is direct e d out of the plan e of pape r. The ma g nit u d e of the
mag n e ti c field is decr e a s i n g at a cons t a n t rat e. Which of the following gives
the corr e c t stat e and corr e c t dire c tio n of the cur r e n t in the wire?

Curre n t Dire c t i o n
A. varying clockwis e
B. const a n t clockwis e
C. varying count e r-
clockwis e
D. const a n t count e r-
clockwis e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 621


41 2 . The gra p h shows th e variation of the induc e d emf ε of a gene r a t o r as a
function of time.

IB Questionbank Physics 622


The frequ e n cy of rotation of the gene r a t o r is halve d. Which of the following
grap h s corr e c tly shows the variation of the new induc e d emf ε as a function
of time?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 623


41 3 . Which of the following is true about gravit a tion a l field lines?

A. They are always tang e n t i al to equipo t e n ti a l surfa c e s .

B. They are always perp e n di c ul a r to equipo t e n t i al surfa c e s .

C. They can be both tang e n ti al or per p e n d i c ul a r to equipot e n t i al


surfac e s .

D. They can have any angle to the equipot e n t i al surfa c e s .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

41 4 . Which of the following is true about the gravit a tion a l pote n ti al V due to a
point mass at a dista n c e r from the point mas s?

1

A. V r and always positive

1

B. V r and always neg ative

1

C. V r 2 and always positive

1

D. V r 2 and always positive
(Tot al 1 mar k )

41 5 . An astro n a u t in orbit arou n d Eart h is said to be “weightl e s s ”. This is due to


the fact that the

A. gravit atio n al force on the astr o n a u t is zero.

B. ast ro n a u t and the spac e c r a f t expe ri e n c e the sa m e accel e r a t io n.

C. ast ro n a u t and the spac e c r a f t expe ri e n c e the sa m e gravit a tio n a l force.

D. gravit atio n al field at the position of the spa c e c r a f t is zero.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 624


41 6 . Which of the following decay sequ e n c e s would result in the daug h t e r
nucle u s having the sam e proto n num b e r as the par e n t nucle u s ?

A. Alpha followed by gam m a

B. Beta (β –) followed by gam m a

C. Alpha followed by bet a (β –) followe d by beta (β –)

D. Beta (β –) followed by gam m a followe d by gam m a


(Tot al 1 mar k )

41 7 . A radioac tive sour c e emits alpha par ticle s that the n travel throu g h air.
With refer e n c e to the rang e of the alpha par ticle s consid e r the following
thre e qua n ti ti es .

I. The char g e of the alph a par ticl e

II. The kinetic ener gy of the alpha par ticle

III. The density of the air

Which of the above dete r m i n e s the rang e of the alpha par ticle s?

A. I only

B. II only

C. I and II only

D. I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )

41 8 . Photoel e ct r o n emission only occur s if the light incide n t on a met al surfa c e


is

A. coher e n t .

B. above a cert ai n minim u m inte nsi ty.

C. below a cert ai n minim u m frequ e n c y.

D. below a cert ai n minim u m wavel e n g t h .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 625


41 9 . Elect r o n s are accel e r a ti n g from rest thro u g h a pot e n ti al differ e n c e of V .
The de Broglie wavelen g t h λ of the elect r o n s is propo r tio n a l to which of the
following?

A. V

1
B. V

C. V

1
D. V
(Tot al 1 mar k )

42 0 . The diagr a m shows som e of the ene r gy levels of a hypot h e t ic al atom.

The atom is excite d to the ene r gy level n = 4. Which of the following


tran si tion s will prod u c e a photo n of the longe s t and the short e s t
wavele n g t h ?

Lon g e s t Sh or t e s t
wav el e n g t h wave l e n g t h
A. 4 →3 4 →1
B. 4 →1 4 →3
C. 2 →1 4 →3
D. 4 →3 2 →1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 626


42 1 . In the Schr ö di n g e r model of the hydro g e n atom, it is ass u m e d tha t
elect r o n s

A. are mas sl es s par ticles.

B. are waves.

C. oscillat e.

D. can be descri b e d by wave functions .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

42 2 . The ener gy of α-par ticles in α-dec ay and the ene r gy of γ-rays in γ-dec ay are
discr e t e . This provide s evide n c e for the existe n c e of

A. nuclea r ener gy levels.

B. neut ri n o s.

C. atomic ene r gy levels.

D. isotop e s .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 627


42 3 . The gra p h below shows the num b e r of nuclei N of a radioa c tive isotop e as a
function of time t .

The slope of the curve at any given time is

A. indep e n d e n t of the decay const a n t .

B. propo r tio n al to the half- life of the isotop e.

C. propo r tio n al to the num b e r of radioa c tive nuclei re m ai ni n g at that


time.

D. propo r tio n al to the num b e r of radioa c tive nuclei dec ay e d.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 628


42 4 . Worldwi d e, the use of gas powe r e d tur bi n e s is beco mi n g more com m o n
than the use of oil powe r e d turbi n e s . A stud e n t mak e s the following thr e e
stat e m e n t s about gas powe r e d turbin e s as comp a r e d to oil powe r e d
turbin e s .

I. They are mor e efficient.

II. They prod u c e mor e the r m a l ene r gy per unit of mass.

III. They prod u c e less CO 2 per unit of outp u t ene r gy.

Which stat e m e n t ( s ) could be a possible reas o n for favourin g gas powe r e d


turbin e s ?

A. I only

B. II only

C. I and II only

D. I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )

42 5 . To ret riev e infor m a ti o n stor e d on a CD, light of wavele n g t h 800 nm is use d.


To ret riev e infor m a ti o n stor e d on a DVD, light of wavele n g t h 400 nm is
used.

p it h e ig hoft t h eCD
Which of the following gives the ratio p it h e ig hot f t h eDVD ?

A. 8

B. 2

C. 1

D. 0.5
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 629


426. N photo n s are incide n t on a pixel of a CCD. Each photon caus e s one
elect r o n of char g e e to be emitt e d . The capa ci t a n c e of the pixel is C. What
is the res ultin g poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the pixel?

A. NeC

C
B. Ne

Ne
C. C

Ce
D. N
(Tot al 1 mar k )

42 7 . The linear mag nificatio n of a digital cam e r a is M . The lengt h of one side of
a pixel is l. A pictur e of two points of an object sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e D is
take n.

MD
The imag e s of the points will be resolve d on the CCD if the ratio l is

A. smaller than 1.

B. equal to 1.

C. equal to 2 or mor e.

D. at least 10 or more.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 630


42 8 . Data analysis ques tion.

Gillian carrie d out an experi m e n t to inves tig a t e the crat e r s form e d whe n
steel balls are dropp e d into sand. To try and find the relation s hi p betw e e n
the diam e t e r of the crat e r and the ene r gy of impac t of ste el balls of the
sam e diam e t e r , she dropp e d a ste el ball from differ e n t heigh t s h into sand
and mea s u r e d the res ultin g diam e t e r d of the crat e r . The data are show n
plott e d below.

(a) The unce r t ai n t y in the mea s u r e m e n t of d is ±0. 4 0 cm; the unce r t a i n t y


in h is too small to be show n. Draw erro r bars for the data point (0.2,
0.047) and the dat a point (2.0, 0.10).
(2)

(b) Draw a best- fit line for the data points.


(2)

(c) The origin al hypot h e si s, ma d e by Gillian, was that the diam e t e r of the
crat e r is directly propo r tio n a l to the ene r gy of impa c t of the ste el
balls. Explain why the data does not suppo r t this hypot h e si s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 631


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 632


(d) Since Gillian’s data did not suppo r t her hypot h e s i s, she res e a r c h e d to
find alter n a t iv e hypot h e s e s . She found that the r e are two theo ri e s
used to predict a relation s hi p betw e e n d and h .

1
3
Theory 1 predict s that d = cons t (h) and theory 2 pre dic t s that d =
1
4
const (h) .

In orde r to test which theo ry her dat a suppo r t s , she plott e d a gra p h of
lg( d ) again s t lg( h ).
The plot produ c e d a straig h t line tha t could be dra w n throu g h all the
erro r bar s.

IB Questionbank Physics 633


The grap h includ es the lines of maxim u m and minim u m gra di e n t s
bas e d on the first erro r bar for the first non- zero dat a point and the
last error bar. The last error bar is too small to be show n. Sta t e and
explain if the original data suppo r t theory 1 or theor y 2.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

42 9 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay and bindin g ene r gy.

(a) Descri b e what is mean t by radioa c tive decay.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A nucleu s of potas si u m- 40 (K-40) unde r g o e s radioa c tive dec ay to a

IB Questionbank Physics 634


nucleu s of argon- 40 (Ar- 40). In the reac tio n equa tio n below, identify
the proton num b e r Z of argon and the particle x .

40
19K  4Z0 Ar β  x

Z : .............................................................................................................
....................

x : .............................................................................................................
....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 635


(c) The mas s of a K-40 nucleu s is 37 216 MeV c –2 . Dete r m i n e the bindin g
ener gy per nucleon of K-40.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(d) Stat e why the bindin g ene r gy of Ar-40 is gre a t e r tha n that of K-40.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

43 0 . This ques tion is abou t chan g e of pha s e of a liquid and late nt heat of
vaporiza tion.

(a) Stat e the differ e n c e betw e e n evapo r a t i o n and boiling with refe r e n c e
to

(i) tem p e r a t u r e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 636


.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 637


(ii) surfac e area of a liquid.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) A liquid in a calori m e t e r is hea t e d at its boiling point for a mea s u r e d


period of time.
The following data are availa ble.

Power rating of heat e r = 15 W


Time for which liquid is hea t e d at boiling point = 4.5 ×
10 2 s
Mass of liquid boiled away = 1.8 ×
10 –2 kg

Use the data to det e r m i n e the specific late nt hea t of vaporiz a tio n of
the liquid.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Stat e and explain on e rea s o n why the calcula tio n in (b) will give a
value of the specific laten t hea t of vaporiz a tion of the liquid tha t is
grea t e r than the true value.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 638


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 639


43 1 . This ques tion is abou t induc e d emf and tra nsfo r m e r s .

(a) One of the coils of a par tic ul a r tra n sfor m e r is conn e c t e d in serie s with
a switch and a batt e r y. The coil has low resis t a n c e . On closing the
switch it is obs erv e d that the curr e n t take s a cert ai n amou n t of time to
reac h its final const a n t value. Explain this obs e rv a ti o n with refe r e n c e
to Far a d ay’s law and Lenz’s law.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) In a particul a r powe r station the volta g e gen e r a t e d is step p e d up by a


tran sfo r m e r .
The root mea n squa r e volta g e is incr e a s e d by a factor of 2 × 10 3 . The
outpu t power of the tran sfor m e r is tra n s m i t t e d to a town by cable s.

(i) Outline what is mea n t by the root me a n squa r e value of a time-


varying voltag e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Stat e the best estim a t e for the factor by which the powe r loss in
the cables is redu c e d as a res ult of step pi n g up the volta g e.

IB Questionbank Physics 640


.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 641


43 2 . This ques tion is abou t stan di n g wave s.

(a) Stat e two prop e r t i e s of a sta n di n g (station a r y) wave.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The diagr a m shows an orga n pipe that is open at one end.

The lengt h of the pipe is l. The frequ e n c y of the funda m e n t a l (first


har m o ni c) note emitt e d by the pipe is 16 Hz.

(i) On the diagr a m , label with the lette r P the position along the
pipe whe r e the amplitu d e of oscillation of the air molec ul e s is the
large s t .
(1)

(ii) The spee d of sound in the air in the pipe is 330 m s –1 . Calcula t e
the lengt h l.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 642


.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 643


(c) Use your answ e r to (b)(ii) to sugg e s t why it is bett e r to use orga n
pipes that are closed at one end for produ ci n g low frequ e n c y note s
rat h e r than pipes that are open at both ends.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

43 3 . This ques tion is abou t polarized light.

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n polariz e d and unpol a riz e d light.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 644


(b) A bea m of plan e polarized light of inte n sity I 0 is incide n t on an
analys e r . The directio n of the bea m is at right angle s to the plan e of
the analys e r .

The angle betw e e n the tra n s m i s sio n axis of the analys e r and the plan e
of polarizatio n of the light is θ. In the position show n the tra ns m i s sio n
axis of the analys e r is par allel to the plane of polariz a tion of the light
(θ = 0).

On the axes, sketc h a grap h to show how the inte nsity I of the
tran s m i t t e d light varies with θ as the analys e r is rotat e d throu g h 180°.

(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

43 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c fields and elect ri c a l resist a n c e .

(a) Stat e, in ter m s of elect r o n s , the differ e n c e betw e e n a cond u c t o r and


an insulat o r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 645


(b) Sugg e s t why ther e mus t be an elect ric field inside a cur r e n t- carryin g
cond u c t o r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h inside a condu c t o r is 55 N
C –1 . Calculat e the force on a free elect r o n in the cond uc t o r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) Define resista n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(e) A resis to r mad e from a met al oxide has a resis t a n c e of 1.5 Ω. The
resisto r is in the form of a cylinde r of lengt h 2.2 × 10 –2 m and radius
1.2 × 10 –3 m. Calcula t e the resistivity of the met al oxide.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 646


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 647


(f) The man uf a c t u r e r of the resisto r in (e) gua r a n t e e s its resist a n c e to be
within ±1 0 % of 1.5 Ω provide d the powe r dissip a tio n in the resis to r
does not excee d 1.0 W. Calcula t e th e maxim u m curr e n t in the resis to r
for the power dissipa tion to be equal to 1.0 W.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(g) Thre e of the resisto r s in (f) are conn e c t e d in the circuit below.

The cell has an emf of 2.0 V and negligible inte r n a l resist a n c e .

(i) Define emf .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 648


(ii) Dete r mi n e the minim u m and the maxim u m powe r that could be
dissipa t e d in this circuit.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

43 5 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.

(a) The alpha particle s prod u c e d in alpha dec ay have discr e t e ene r gi e s .
Sugg e s t how this obs erv a ti o n provide s evide n c e for the existe n c e of
nuclea r ener gy levels.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A nucleu s of the isotop e fluorin e- 18 decays into a nucle u s of oxyge n-


18 by the emission of a positro n and neut ri n o. Outline how the natu r e
of the β-decay ener gy spect r u m o f fluorine- 18 sugg e s t s the exist e n c e
of the neut ri n o involved in the decay.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 649


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 650


(c) A freshly prep a r e d sam pl e of fluorine- 18 has an activity of 1.12 MBq.
Its activity four hour s late r is 0.246 MBq.

(i) Show that the decay const a n t for fluorin e- 18 is 0.379 hr –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Calculat e the half- life of fluorine- 18.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) The ene r gy of a beta par ticle in the dec ay of the sa m pl e in (c) is 8.4 ×
10 –15 J. Show that the de Broglie wavele n g t h of this particle is 5.3 ×
10 –12 m.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 651


43 6 . This ques tion is abou t oscillation s and waves.

(a) A rect a n g u l a r piece of wood of lengt h l floats in wate r with its axis
vertical as show n in diagr a m 1.

The lengt h of wood below the surfa c e is d . The wood is pus h e d


vertically down w a r d s a dista n c e A such that a lengt h of wood is still
above the wate r surfac e as show n in diag r a m 2. The wood is the n
relea s e d and oscillat e s vertic ally. At the insta n t show n in diag r a m 3,
the wood is moving down w a r d s and the lengt h of wood bene a t h the
surfac e is d + x .

(i) On diag r a m 3, draw an arrow to show the direc tion of the


accele r a ti o n of the wood.
(1)

(ii) The accel e r a t io n a of the wood (in m s –2 ) is relat e d to x (in m) by


the following equ atio n.

14
 x
a = l

Explain why this equ a tio n show s that the wood is exec u ti n g
simpl e har m o ni c motion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 652


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) The period of oscillation of the wood is 1.4 s. Show tha t the
lengt h l of the wood is 0.70 m.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) The wood in (a), as show n in diagr a m 2, is rele a s e d at time t = 0. On


the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the velocity v of the wood
varies with time over one period of oscillation.

(1)

(c) The dist an c e A that the wood is initially pus h e d down is 0.12 m.

(i) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the maxim u m accele r a ti o n of the


wood.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 653


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) On your sketc h grap h in (b) label with the lette r P one point whe r e the
magni t u d e of the accele r a t i o n is a maxim u m .
(1)

(d) The oscillations of the wood gen e r a t e waves in the wat e r of


wavelen g t h 0.45 m.
The grap h shows how the displa c e m e n t D, of the wate r surfa c e at a
particul a r dista n c e from the wood varies with time t .

Using the grap h, calcula t e the

(i) spee d of the waves.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 654


(ii) ratio of the displac e m e n t at t = 1.75 s to the displa c e m e n t at t =
0.35 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 655


(iii) ratio of the ener gy of the wave at t = 1.75 s to the ene r gy at t =
0.35 s

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

43 7 . This ques tion is abou t gase s and the r m o d y n a m i c proc e s s e s .

(a) Stat e on e way in which a real gas differs from an ideal gas.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 656


(b) The diagr a m shows how the pre s s u r e p varies with volum e V of an
ideal gas that und e r g o e s a cyclic cha n g e of stat e.

AB and CD are adiab a t ic cha n g e s of stat e. The pres s u r e at point B is


1.8 × 10 5 Pa and the chan g e in volum e of the gas betw e e n B and C is
4.8 ×1 0 –4 m 3 .

IB Questionbank Physics 657


(i) Stat e what is mean t by an adia b a ti c cha n g e of stat e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 658


(ii) The chan g e in volum e of the gas betw e e n B and C take s 0.020 s.
Dete r mi n e the powe r develop e d durin g this cha n g e of stat e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 659


(iii) Stat e durin g which par t of the cycle the r m a l ene r gy is
tran sf e r r e d from the gas to the sur ro u n di n g s .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 660


(c) The ene r gy tran sf e r r e d is degr a d e d . Explain wha t is me a n t by
deg r a d e d ener gy.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 661


(d) Discus s how your answ e r to (c) relat e s to the secon d law of
ther m o d y n a m i c s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 662


43 8 . This ques tion is abou t fossil fuels and the gre e n h o u s e effect.

(a) Stat e two reas o n s why most of the world’s ene r gy cons u m p t i o n is
provide d by fossil fuels.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 663


(b) A powe r station has an outpu t powe r of 500 MW and an over all
efficiency of 27 %.
It uses nat u r al gas as a fuel tha t has an ene r gy density of 56 MJ kg –1 .

(i) Define ener g y densit y .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 664


(ii) Dete r mi n e the rat e of cons u m p t i o n of nat u r a l gas in the powe r
station.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 665


(c) Outline why the enha n c e d gre e n h o u s e effect may res ult in an incr e a s e
in the tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 666


(d) (i) The solar inte nsity at the position of the Eart h is 1380
–2
W m . The aver a g e albe do of Eart h is 0.300. Sta t e why an
aver a g e value of albe d o is quot e d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 667


(ii) Show that the aver a g e reflec t e d inte n sity from the Eart h is about
100 W m –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 668


(e) One of the expect e d res ult s of global war mi n g is an incre a s e d sea
level. The incre a s e in volum e ΔV for a tem p e r a t u r e incr e a s e ΔT is
given by ΔV = γV ΔT. Show, using the following dat a, that the res ultin g
rise in sea level is about 0.5 m.

Temp e r a t u r e incr e a s e = 2.0 °C


Surfa c e are a of ocea n s on Eart h =
8 2
3.6 × 10 km
Avera g e ocea n dept h = 3.0 km
γ = 8.8 × 10 –5 K–1

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 669


43 9 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c pote n ti al.

(a) Define electric pote n tial at a point in an elect ric field.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 670


(b) The elect ric field inside a cha r g e d condu c ti n g sphe r e is zero. Stat e
and explain why the value of the pote n ti al inside the sphe r e is
const a n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 671


(c) In 1914 Niels Bohr propos e d a simple model of the hydrog e n atom in
which the elect r o n is assu m e d to be in an orbit of radius r about the
proto n. Both the elect r o n and the proton are reg a r d e d to be point
char g e s .

(i) It can be shown that the kinetic ene r gy E K of the elect r o n is


given by the equ a tio n

k e2
E K = 2r

wher e k is the Coulom b const a n t and e is the elect r o n cha r g e .


Deduc e an equa tio n for the total ene r gy E of the elect r o n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 672


(ii) In the Bohr model, the mag nit u d e of the minim u m ene r gy of the
elect r o n is
2.2 × 10 –18 J. Estim a t e the radius of the orbit, in which the
elect r o n has minim u m ene r gy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 673


44 0 . This ques tion is abou t mom e n t u m , ene r gy and powe r.

(a) In his Principia Math e m a t i c a Newt o n expr e s s e d his third law of


motion as “to every action the r e is always oppos e d an equ al rea c tion”.
Stat e what New to n mean t by this law.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 674


(b) A book is relea s e d from rest and falls towa r d s the surfa c e of Eart h.
Discus s how the cons e rv a t io n of mom e n t u m applies to the Eart h- book
syste m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 675


(c) A larg e swingin g ball is use d to drive a horizon t al iron spike into a
vertical wall.
The cent r e of the ball falls throu g h a vertic al height of 1.6 m befor e
striking the spike in the position show n.

IB Questionbank Physics 676


The mas s of the ball is 3.5 kg and the mas s of the spike is 0.80 kg.
Imm e di a t ely after striking the spike, the ball and spike move toge t h e r .
Show that the

(i) spee d of the ball on striking the spike is 5.6 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 677


(ii) ene r gy dissip at e d as a res ult of the collision is abou t 10 J.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 678


(d) As a result of the ball striking the spike, the spike is drive n a dista n c e
7.3 × 10 –2 m into the wall. Calcula t e , ass u m i n g it to be const a n t , the
friction force F betw e e n the spike and wall.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 679


(e) The machin e that is used to rais e the ball has a useful powe r outp u t of
18 W. Calculat e how long it take s for the mac hi n e to raise the ball
throu g h a height of 1.6 m.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 680


44 1 . This ques tion is abou t CCDs and digital dat a stor a g e .

(a) An object is to be photo g r a p h e d using a digital cam e r a .

(i) Stat e the nam e of the phe no m e n o n in which light caus e s


elect r o n s to be emitt e d from a pixel of a CCD.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 681


(ii) Outline how the image of the object on the CCD is form e d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 682


(b) Photo n s are inciden t on one of the pixels of the CCD at a rat e of 3.6 ×
10 6 s –1 . The pixel has capa cit a n c e 34 pF and qua n t u m efficiency of 80
%. Dete r m i n e the poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the pixel after an
expos u r e time of 15 ms.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 683


(c) Outline, with refer e n c e to the ret riev al of stor e d data, why it is bett e r
to stor e dat a in digital form rath e r tha n analog u e form.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 684


44 2 . This ques tion is abou t the relative popul a tion density of sta r s and galaxie s.

The num b e r of star s arou n d the Sun, within a dista n c e of 17 ly, is 75. The
num b e r of galaxies in the local group, within a dist a n c e of 4.0 × 10 6 ly from
the Sun, is 26.

(a) Calcula t e the aver a g e popula tion density, per ly 3 , of star s and
galaxies.

Star s: .......................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Galaxies: ..................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 685


(b) Use your answ e r to (a) to dete r m i n e the ratio

a ve r a gpeo p u la t ion
d e n s it oy f s t a r s
a ve r a gpeo p u la t ion
d e n s it oy f g a la xie s

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 3 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 686


44 3 . This ques tion is abou t the luminosity, size and dista n c e of star s.

The Her tzs p r u n g–R u s s ell (HR) diag r a m shows the varia tion with spec t r a l
class of the absolut e mag ni t u d e of sta r s .

IB Questionbank Physics 687


The star Capella and the Sun are in the sa m e spec t r a l class (G). Using the
HR diag r a m ,

(a) (i) sugg e s t why Capella has a gre a t e r surfa c e are a than
the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 688


(ii) estim a t e the luminosity of Capella in ter m s of that of the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 689


(iii) calcula t e the radius of Capella in ter m s of that of the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 690


(b) The spect r o s c o pi c par allax meth o d can be use d to me a s u r e the
dista n c e of star Vega.

(i) Using the HR diagr a m , sta t e the absolut e mag nit u d e of Vega.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 691


(ii) The app a r e n t mag nit u d e of Vega is 0.0. Dete r mi n e (in pars e c ) the
dist a n c e of Vega from Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 692


(iii) Light from Vega is abso r b e d by a dust cloud betw e e n Vega and
Eart h. Sugg e s t the effect, if any, this will have on dete r m i ni n g
the dista n c e of Vega from Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 693


44 4 . This ques tion is abou t cosmic microw a v e backg r o u n d radia tio n (CMB) and
the density of the univer s e.

The gra p h shows the relative inte nsity of the CMB as a function of
wavele n g t h .

IB Questionbank Physics 694


(a) Explain how this grap h is consist e n t with the Big Bang model of the
univer s e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 695


(b) The density of the univer s e will det e r m i n e its ultim a t e fate. Outline
the proble m s associa t e d with dete r m i ni n g the density of the unive r s e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 696


(c) Outline how the expan sio n of the univer s e ultim a t e ly mad e it possible
for stabl e nuclei and atom s to exist.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 697


44 5 . This ques tion is abou t the mass–lumi no si ty rela tion and also the evolution
of star s .

The mas s–lu mi n o sity relation for main sequ e n c e sta r s is assu m e d to be L 
M 3.5 , wher e L is the luminosity and M is the mas s. Star X is 8 × 10 4 time s
mor e lumino u s than the Sun and 25 time s mor e mas sive tha n the Sun.

(a) Deduc e that star X is a main sequ e n c e sta r.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 698


(b) Outline with refer e n c e to the Oppe n h e i m e r–Volkoff limit, the
evolution a r y steps and the fate of sta r X afte r it leave s the main
sequ e n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 699


44 6 . This ques tion is abou t Hubbl e’s law and the expa n sio n of the unive r s e .

(a) The spect r u m of the clust e r of galaxies Pega s u s I shows a shift of 5.04
nm in the wavele n g t h of the K-line. The wavel e n g t h of this line from a
labor a t o r y sour ce is mea s u r e d as 396.8 nm. Calcul a t e the velocity of
rece s s io n of the clust e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 700


(b) The grap h shows the reces sio n velocitie s of a num b e r of clust e r s of
galaxies as a function of their app roxi m a t e dista n c e s .

IB Questionbank Physics 701


(i) Stat e on e met ho d by which the dista n c e s show n on the gra p h
could have bee n dete r m i n e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 702


(ii) Use the grap h to show that the age of the unive r s e is about 10 17
s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 703


44 7 . This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.

(a) The diagr a m shows how the volta g e signal of a frequ e n c y modul a t e d
(FM) car ri e r wave varies with time.

The carri e r wave is modul a t e d by a single frequ e n c y signal.

On the above axes sketc h the infor m a ti o n signal.


(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 704


(b) Stat e and explain on e adva n t a g e of using FM modul a tio n rath e r tha n
amplit u d e modul a tio n (AM).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 3 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 705


44 8 . This ques tion is abou t sam pling.

A telep h o n e call is sam pl e d with a sam pling frequ e n c y of 8.0 kHz. Eac h
sam pl e is stor e d as a four bit bina ry num b e r . The dur a tio n of eac h bit in
the sam pl e is 4.0 µ s.

(a) Calcula t e the time interv al betw e e n the end of one sam pl e and the
beginni n g of the next.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 706


(b) Outline, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r in (a), what is me a n t by time-
division multiplexing.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 707


44 9 . This ques tion is abou t the mobile phone syste m .

In the mobile phon e syste m , a partic ul a r geog r a p h i c are a is divide d into a


num b e r of cells with a base station in eac h cell, eac h conn e c t e d to a
cellula r exch a n g e .

Describ e the function of the bas e sta tion s and the cellula r excha n g e .

Base
stations : ...................................................................................................
......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

Cellula r
exch a n g e : ................................................................................................
.................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 708


45 0 . This ques tion is abou t the tran s m i s s io n of signals along an optic fibre.

(a) A ray of light ente r s an optic fibre from air. The ray make s an angle θ
with the nor m al.
The ray und e r g o e s total inte r n a l reflectio n at point P.

The refra ctive index of the core is 1.56 and that of the claddin g is
1.38.

(i) Calculat e the critical angle of the claddi n g- cor e bound a r y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Show that the large s t angle of incide n c e θ in air, at which total
inter n al reflection at the claddi n g- core boun d a r y take s plac e, is
46.7°.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 709


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 710


(b) Disting ui s h betw e e n modal dispe r sio n and mat e ri a l dispe r si o n in an
optic fibre.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) The signal show n is fed into a mono m o d e optic fibre.

(i) Stat e what the shad e d are a repr e s e n t s .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Use the axes above to dra w the sha p e of the signal afte r it has
travelled a large dist a n c e in the fibre.
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 711


(iii) The input signal powe r in a mono m o d e fibre is 15.0 mW. The
att e n u a t i o n per unit lengt h for this fibre is 1.24 dB km –1 .
Dete r mi n e the powe r of the outp u t signal afte r the signal has
travelled a dista n c e of 3.40 km in the fibre.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

45 1 . This ques tion is abou t the oper a tio n al amplifie r.

(a) On the axes below draw a sketc h gra p h to show the variatio n with
input voltag e V in of the outpu t volta g e V out of a non- inverti n g
oper a ti o n al amplifier.

(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 712


(b) A tem p e r a t u r e war nin g devic e make s use of a buzze r tha t sound s
whe n the poten ti al differe n c e acros s it is 24 V. The circ uit in the
war ni n g device is show n.

It is requi r e d that the buzze r should sound whe n the tem p e r a t u r e of


the ther m i s t o r rises above 50 °C.

(i) Stat e the voltag e at point Q.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) At a tem p e r a t u r e of 50 °C the resist a n c e of the the r m i s t o r is R .


Explain why the buzze r will sound whe n the tem p e r a t u r e rise s
above 50 °C.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 713


45 2 . This ques tion is abou t laser light.

(a) Outline how laser light is prod u c e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Stat e two ways in which light emitt e d by a lase r differ s from light
emitt e d from an ordin a r y filam e n t lamp.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 714


45 3 . This ques tion is abou t a compo u n d microsc o p e .

The diagr a m (not to scale) is of a compo u n d micros c o p e .

The focal lengt h of the objective lens is 20 mm and that of the eyepiec e
lens is 60 mm. A small object is plac e d at a dist a n c e of 24 mm from the
objective lens. The micros c o p e prod u c e s a final virtu al imag e of the object
at a dista n c e of 240 mm from the eyepi ec e lens.

(a) (i) Dete r mi n e , by calcula tion, the dista n c e from the


objective lens of the imag e form e d by the objective lens.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Explain why the imag e in (a)(i)is real.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Dete r mi n e the dista n c e of the image form e d by the objective lens
from the eyepiec e lens.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 715


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Deter m i n e the over all mag nifica tion of the micros c o p e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

45 4 . This ques tion is abou t interf e r e n c e .

(a) Light from a laser is incide n t on two very nar r o w slits A and B.

(diagr a m not to scale)

Point C on the scre e n is direc tly opposit e the midpoint of the slits.

IB Questionbank Physics 716


(i) On the axes below, sketc h the varia tion with angle θ of the
inten si ty of the light on the scre e n.

(2)

(ii) The sepa r a t i o n of the slits is 0.120 mm and the wavele n g t h of the
light is
6.80 × 10 –7 m. The dist a n c e bet w e e n the slits and the scre e n is
1.40 m. Calculat e the sepa r a t i o n of the bright fringe s on the
scre e n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Slit A is cover e d with a tra n s p a r e n t piec e of glass. The effect of the
glas s is to incr e a s e the path lengt h of the light from the slit to the
scre e n by half a wavelen g t h . It may be assu m e d tha t the amou n t of
light absor b e d by the glass is negligible. Stat e and explain the
effect(s), if any, of the glass on the

(i) inten si ty patt e r n you have dra w n in (a)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 717


(ii) sepa r a t i o n of the brigh t fringe s calcul a t e d in (a)(ii).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

45 5 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.

In an X-ray tube elect r o n s are accele r a t e d from rest throu g h a pote n ti al


differ e n c e and strike a met al tar g e t .

(a) On the axes below draw and annot a t e a typical X-ray spec t r u m .

(2)

(b) Identify the mech a ni s m by which the differ e n t regions of the X-ray
spect r u m are produ c e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 718


(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 719


(c) In a particul a r X-ray tube the elect r o n s are accel e r a t e d from res t
throu g h a poten ti al differ e n c e of 24 kV. The minim u m wavele n g t h of
the X-rays produ c e d is 4.8 × 10 –11 m.
Deter m i n e a value for the Planck cons t a n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) X-rays of wavele n g t h 2.25 × 10 –10 m are direc t e d towa r d s the surfa c e
of a cryst al. A stron g first orde r reflect e d X-ray bea m is obse rv e d
whe n the X-rays make an angle of 28.1° with the cryst al surfa c e .
Deter m i n e the sepa r a t i o n of the atomic plan e s in the cryst al.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

45 6 . This ques tion is abou t fram e s of refe r e n c e and the spe e d of light.

(a) Descri b e what is mean t by an inerti al fram e of refe r e n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 720


.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 721


(b) The diagr a m shows two iner ti al fram e s of refe r e n c e . Fra m e S ′ moves
with velocity v = 2.0 × 10 8 m s –1 relative to fra m e S along the x -x ′-
directio n. When the origins of the two fram e s coincid e d, the clocks in
both fram e s wer e set to show zero.

An event takes place at x = 5.0 × 10 3 m whe n the clocks in fram e S


show t = 3.0 × 10 –5 s.

(i) By using Galilean tra nsfor m a t i o n equa tio n s , dete r m i n e the


position and time of this event in the S ′ fram e of refe r e n c e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) A laser, at res t in the fram e S ′, emits a ray of light along the
neg a tive x ′-direction ( i.e. towa r d s the left). The spe e d of the ray
of light is meas u r e d to be c in the fram e S ′. Show, using the
relativistic velocity addition form ul a, tha t the spe e d of the ray of
light in the fram e S is also me a s u r e d to be c .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 722


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 723


(c) Outline an experi m e n t (othe r tha n the Michelso n–Mo rl ey expe ri m e n t )
which provides eviden c e that the spe e d of light is inde p e n d e n t of the
spee d of its sourc e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

45 7 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic kine m a t i c s .

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by prope r lengt h and prop e r time inte rv al.

Prope r
lengt h: .............................................................................................
.................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Prope r time
interv al: ...........................................................................................
.........

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A space s hi p moves with spe e d v = 0.600 c relative to a spa c e sta tion.
Two laser s , A and B, on the spac e station are 5.00 m apa r t as
mea s u r e d by the space station obse rv e r s . The ga m m a factor for a
spee d of v = 0.600 c is γ =1. 2 5.

IB Questionbank Physics 724


IB Questionbank Physics 725
(i) A radio signal is sent to the spac e s hi p from the spac e sta tion. The
tran s mi s s io n lasts for 6.00 s accor di n g to spa c e station clocks.
Calculat e the dur atio n of the tra n s m i s sio n accor di n g to the
spac e s hi p obse rv e r s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Calculat e the dista n c e betw e e n the laser s A and B accor di n g to


the space s hi p obse rv e r s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The laser s in (b) are fired si m u l t a n e o u s l y accor di n g to the spa c e


stat i o n obse rv e r s .
Light from each laser make s a ma rk on the spac e s hi p. The spac e s hi p
obse rv e r s mea s u r e the dista n c e betw e e n the two ma rk s to be 6.25 m.
Accordi n g to the space s hi p obse rv e r s

(i) stat e which laser was fired first.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) det e r m i n e the differ e n c e in time betw e e n the firings of the two
laser s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 726


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 727


45 8 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic mec h a ni c s .

The upsilon (Y0 ) is an uns t a bl e particle that dec ays into a tau (τ –) and an
antit a u (τ + ) accor di n g to the reac tio n

Y0 → τ – + τ +

The Y0 is at rest relative to the labor a t o r y whe n it dec a ys. The mom e n t u m
of the τ – relative to the labor a t o r y is 4.40 GeV c –1 . The rest mas s of the τ –
and of the τ + is 1.78 GeV c –2 .

Dete r mi n e the rest mass of the Y0 .

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 3 mark s )

45 9 . This ques tion is abou t gene r a l relativity.

(a) Stat e Einst ei n’s principle of equivale n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 728


(b) A rocket is accel er a t i n g in the direc tio n show n far from any mass e s .

A monoch r o m a t i c bea m of light is emitt e d from the floor F of the


rocke t. The bea m is receive d at the ceiling C of the rocke t. Sugg e s t
why the freq u e n cy of the light bea m me a s u r e d at C is less tha n the
frequ e n c y mea s u r e d at F.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 729


(c) The diagr a m shows thre e identic al rocke t s A, B and C.

Rocket A is accel e r a t i n g in oute r spa c e with accele r a t io n a.

Rocket B is at rest on the surf ac e of a plane t. The gravit a tio n al field


str en g t h at the surfac e of the plane t is a .

Rocket C is falling freely above a plane t. The gravit a tion a l field


str en g t h of the plane t in the region of the rocke t is a.

Light is emitt e d from a sour c e X on the left wall of eac h rocke t. The
receive r Y is directly opposit e X.

The initial directio n of the light is par allel to the floor of the rocke t.

Draw, for each rocket, the pat h of the light ray emitt e d from X
accor di n g to an obse rv e r in eac h rocke t.
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 730


(d) Einst ei n’s theo ry of gen e r a l rela tivity pre dic t s that a mas sive body
caus e s a curvat u r e (bendin g) of spa c e.

(i) Describ e what is mea n t by the curva t u r e of spa c e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Describ e how Edding t o n’s expe ri m e n t provide s evide n c e for the
curvat u r e of space caus e d by the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

46 0 . This ques tion is abou t the ear and hea ri n g.

(a) Stat e the physical prop e r t y of a sound wave tha t is relat e d to the
intensity of the sound.

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 731


.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 732


(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with freq u e n c y of the thr e s h ol d of
heari n g for a pers o n with nor m al hea ri n g.

Calcula t e the inten sity of sound of freq u e n c y 600 Hz that can just be
hear d by this pers o n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) As a result of long- ter m expos u r e to noise a pers o n suffer s from a


heari n g loss of 20 dB.

(i) On the axes in (b) dra w a sketc h gra p h to show the variation with
frequ e n c y of the thr e s h ol d of hea ri n g for this pers o n.
(1)

(ii) Explain why this loss is likely to lead to difficulties with spee c h
recog ni tion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 733


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

46 1 . This ques tion is abou t ultr as o u n d .

(a) Define acous tic impe d a n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Ultra s o u n d of intensi ty I 0 is travelling in a mediu m of impe d a n c e Z 1


and is incide n t on a mediu m of impe d a n c e Z 2 . The reflect e d
ultra s o u n d has intensity I R given by the following equ a tio n.

2
I R  Z1  Z 2 
 
I 0  Z 1 Z 2 

Explain why when using ultr a s o u n d a gel is plac e d betw e e n the


tran s d u c e r and the skin of the patie n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 734


46 2 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.

(a) Define half- value thickn e s s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 735


(b) The half- value thickn e s s in met r e s of air at pres s u r e p and
tem p e r a t u r e T is given by the equ a tio n

T
x 1 1.8 1 05 
2
p

X-rays from the Sun reach the oute r layers of the atmo s p h e r e of Eart h.

The following data are availa ble.

Avera g e pres s u r e of the atmos p h e r e = 2.0 × 10 4 Pa


Avera g e tem p e r a t u r e of the atmos p h e r e = 240 K
Effective heigh t of the atmos p h e r e = 25 km

Using the dat a, calcul at e the

(i) half- value thickn e s s for the atmo s p h e r e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) fraction of the incide n t X-ray inte n si ty that is tra n s m i t t e d to the


surfac e of the Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Comm e n t , using your ans w e r to (b)(ii), on whet h e r the atmo s p h e r e

IB Questionbank Physics 736


provides any significan t prot e c t io n from incomi n g X-rays.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) X-ray photon s of aver a g e ene r gy 20 keV are incide n t at a height of 10


km above the Eart h’s surfa c e at a rate of 2.8 × 10 8 m –2 s –1 . A
pas s e n g e r is in a plan e flying at a height of 10 km above the surfa c e of
the Ear t h. The pass e n g e r has a mas s of 60 kg and body surfa c e are a
1.6 m 2 .

The quality factor for X-rays is 1.

(i) Calculat e the dose equivale n t rec eive d by this pass e n g e r durin g
a thr e e hour flight at a height of 10 km.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(ii) Stat e on e reas o n why the dose equivale n t rec eive d will be muc h
less than your ans w e r in (d)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 737


46 3 . This ques tion is abou t radioisot o p e s .

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the effective half- life of a radioisot o p e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 738


(b) The function of the lungs may be monitor e d using the radioisoto p e s
133 81
5 4 X and 3 6 Kr .

Infor m a t io n on thes e two radioisot o p e s is given in the table.

Radi oi s o t o p e s Effe c t i v e half- De c a y prod u c t s


life
133
54X 5.2 days β– and γ
81
3 6 Kr 12 secon d s γ

133
Stat e and explain on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dva n t a g e of using 54X
81
rat h e r than 3 6 Kr .

Advant a g e : ..............................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Disadv a n t a g e : ..........................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

46 4 . This ques tion is abou t qua r k s.

The table below gives the elect ric cha r g e of the thr e e light e s t qua r k s in
ter m s of e , the char g e of the proton.

up down str a n g e
Quark flavo u r
u d s

IB Questionbank Physics 739


Elec t r i c 2 1 1
 
ch ar g e / e 3 3 3

IB Questionbank Physics 740


(a) Using the dat a in the table, dete r m i n e the

(i) quar k conte n t of a meson with cha r g e +1 and str a n g e n e s s 0 and


that of a baryon with cha r g e –1 and str a n g e n e s s –3.

Meso n: ............................................................................................
..................

Baryon: ............................................................................................
.................
(2)

(ii) possible spin values of the meson in (a)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Stat e the Pauli exclusion principle.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

3
(c) Explain how the baryon with qua r k cont e n t uuu and spin 2 does not
violate the Pauli exclusion principle.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) In the Feyn m a n diagr a m show n a blue down qua r k emits a gluon and
prod u c e s a red qua r k.

IB Questionbank Physics 741


Deduc e the

(i) quar k flavour (type) of the prod u c e d qua r k.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) colour quan t u m num b e r s of the emitt e d gluon.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(e) The positive kaon K + (qua r k cont e n t u s ) dec ays into an anti- muon and
a neut ri no accor di n g to the rea c tion below.

K+ → µ + + ν

Explain how it may be dedu c e d that this dec ay is a weak inter a c ti o n


proce s s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(f) The diagr a m shows thre e of the inter a c ti o n vertic e s for the wea k
inter a c ti o n.

IB Questionbank Physics 742


Using the app r o p r i a t e vert ex, dra w a Feyn m a n diag r a m for the dec ay
K + → µ + + ν labelling all particl e s involve d.
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 743


46 5 . This ques tion is abou t the bubbl e cha m b e r .

The diagr a m is a copy of a bubbl e cha m b e r photog r a p h of the dec ay of a


neut r al pion (π 0 ) into two photon s , π 0 → 2 γ. Each of the photon s prod u c e d
mat e ri alizes into an elect r o n–po sit r o n pair. The path s show n belong to the
two elect r o n–posi t r o n pairs.

(a) Stat e why the track s of the photo n s do not show up in the photog r a p h .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) On the diag r a m above,

(i) draw lines to indicat e the path of eac h of the photo n s .


(1)

(ii) label with the lette r P the point whe r e the pion dec ay e d .
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 744


(c) Outline whet h e r the pion was moving or whe t h e r it was at rest whe n
it decaye d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) The path of one of the elect r o n s produ c e d is a spir al. Sugg e s t a rea so n
for the shap e of this pat h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

46 6 . This ques tion is abou t Feyn m a n diag r a m s and neut r a l cur r e n t s .

(a) The diagr a m shows the inter a c t io n vert ex of the elect r o m a g n e t i c


inter a c ti o n.

Had r o n s may be prod u c e d via the elec t r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c ti o n in


elect r o n–posi t r o n collisions thro u g h the rea c tion

e– + e+ → q + q

whe r e q stan d s for a quar k and q for an antiqu a r k .

IB Questionbank Physics 745


(i) Draw a Feyn m a n diagr a m for the proc e s s e – + e + → u + u whe r e
u stan d s for the up qua r k.

(1)

(ii) Outline why the reac tion in (a)(i) event u a lly leads to the
produ c t io n of had ro n s rat h e r tha n individu al qua r k s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The diagr a m shows two vertic e s for the weak inter a c t io n.

The solid lines repr e s e n t qua r k s or lepto n s.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by a neut r a l curr e n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 746


(ii) Draw a Feyn m a n diagr a m for the proc e s s e – + e + → u + u , whe r e
u stan d s for an up qua r k, that is media t e d by a neut r al curr e n t .

(1)

(c) By refer e n c e to the weak inte r a c ti o n vertic e s in (b) sugg e s t how the
Z 0 may be det ec t e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) The W – decays accor di n g to W – → e – + ν . Stat e and explain, whet h e r


the antine u t r i n o in this dec ay is an elect r o n , muon or tau
antine u t r i n o.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 747


46 7 . Which of the following is equivale n t to the joule?

A. N m2

B. N m –2

C. kg m s –2

D. kg m 2 s –2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

46 8 . An object falls for a time of 0.25 s. The accele r a t io n of free fall is 9.81 m s –
2
. The displac e m e n t is calcul at e d . Which of the following gives the corr e c t
num b e r of significa n t digits for the calcula t e d value of the displ ac e m e n t of
the object?

A. 1

B. 2

C. 3

D. 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 748


46 9 . A raind r o p falling from rest at time t = 0 rea c h e s ter mi n a l velocity. Which
grap h bes t repr e s e n t s how the spe e d v varies with time t ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 749


47 0 . The gra p h shows how the displa c e m e n t d of an objec t varies with time t .
The tang e n t to the curve at time t 1 is also show n.

Which of the following gives the spe e d of the objec t at point P?

A. the gradi e n t at P

B. the shad e d area

1
C. g r a d ie natt P

d1
D. t1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 750


47 1 . A ball falls vertically and bounc e s off the groun d. Imme di a t e ly befor e
impact with the groun d the spe e d of the ball is u . Imme di a t ely after leaving
the grou n d the speed is v .

Which of the following expr e s si o n s is the ratio of


k in e t ice n e r g lo
y s to n c o llis io n
k in e t ice n e r g im
y m e d ia tyebl e fo r ec o llis ion?

v
A. u

v
1
B. u

2
v
 
C. u

2
v
1  
D. u
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 751


47 2 . A railway engin e of mas s m moves along a horizont al trac k with unifor m
spee d v . The total resis tive force acting on the engin e is F.

Which of the following is the powe r of the engine ?

F
A. mv

B. Fv

mv
C. F

v
D. F
(Tot al 1 mar k )

47 3 . A ball is tied to a string and rota t e d at a unifor m spe e d in a vertic al plan e.


The diagr a m shows the ball at its lowest position. Which arrow shows the
direction of the net force acting on the ball?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 752


47 4 . A gas atom strikes a wall with spe e d v at an angle θ to the nor m a l to the
wall. The atom rebo u n d s at the sam e spe e d v and angle θ.

Which of the following gives the mag ni t u d e of the mom e n t u m cha n g e of the
gas atom?

A. zero

B. 2 mv sin θ

C. 2 mv

D. 2 mv cos θ
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 753


47 5 . A syste m consist s of an ice cube plac e d in a cup of wate r . The syste m is
ther m ally insulat e d from its sur r o u n di n g s . The wate r is origin ally at 20 °C.
Which gra p h best show s the variation of total inte r n a l ene r gy U of the
syste m with time t ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 754


47 6 . Ther m al ener gy is adde d at a const a n t rate to a subst a n c e which is solid at
time t = 0. The gra p h shows the variation with t of the tem p e r a t u r e T .

Which of the stat e m e n t s are corr e c t ?

I. The specific latent hea t of fusion is gre a t e r tha n the specific


laten t heat of vaporiz a tio n.

II. The specific heat capa city of the solid is less tha n the specific
heat capacity of the liquid.

A. I only

B. I and II

C. II only

D. Neith e r I nor II
(Tot al 1 mar k )

47 7 . Which of the following is an assu m p t i o n mad e in the kinetic model of ideal


gas es ?

A. Molecul e s have zero mas s.

B. Forc es betw e e n molec ul e s are attr a c tive.

C. Collisions betw e e n molec ul e s are elastic.

D. Molecul e s move at high spe e d.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 755


47 8 . An object at the end of a spring oscillat e s vertic ally with simple har m o ni c
motion. The grap h shows the varia tion with time t of the displa c e m e n t x .
The amplitu d e is x 0 and the period of oscillation is T .

Which of the following is the corr e c t expr e s sio n for the displa c e m e n t x ?


 x0 c o s t
A. T


x0 c o s t
B. T


 x 0 s in t
C. T


x 0 s in t
D. T
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 756


47 9 . An object at the end of a spring oscillat e s vertic ally with simple har m o ni c
motion. The grap h shows the varia tion with time t of the displa c e m e n t x .
The amplitu d e is x 0 and the period of oscillation is T .

Which of the following is the corr e c t expr e s sio n for the maxim u m
accele r a ti o n of the object?


x0
A. T


x0
B. T2

4π 2
x0
C. T2

4π 2
x0
D. T
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 757


48 0 . One end of a horizont al string is fixed to a wall. A tran s v e r s e pulse moves
along the string as show n.

Which of the following stat e m e n t s are corr e c t for the reflect e d pulse
comp a r e d to the forwa r d puls e?

I. It moves mor e slowly.

II. It has less ene r gy.

III. It is invert e d .

A. I and II only

B. I and III only

C. II and III only

D. I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )

48 1 . Monoc h r o m a t i c light travels from air into wat e r . Which of the following
descri b e s the chan g e s in wavele n g t h and spe e d ?

Wavel e n g t h Spe e d
A. incr e a s e s decr e a s e s
B. incr e a s e s incr e a s e s
C. decr e a s e s incr e a s e s
D. decr e a s e s decr e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 758


48 2 . Two resis to r s , mad e of the sam e mat e ri al, are conne c t e d in serie s to a
batt e r y. The lengt h of resis to r X is twice that of resisto r Y, and X has twice
the cross- section al area of Y.

r e s is t a n cofe X
Which of the following gives r e s is t a n cofe Y ?

1
A. 4

1
B. 2

C. 1

D. 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )

48 3 . The circuit shows a resis to r R conn e c t e d in serie s with a batt e r y and a


resis to r of resis tanc e 10 Ω. The e mf of the batt e r y is 20 V and it has
negligible inter n al resist a n c e . The cur r e n t in the circ uit is 1.0 A.

Which of the following is the resist a n c e of R?

A. 1.0 Ω

B. 2.0 Ω

C. 10 Ω

D. 20 Ω
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 759


48 4 . Three identic al resist o r s are conn e c t e d to a batt e r y as show n.

Which of the following is a corr e c t stat e m e n t ?

A. The cur r e n t throu g h X is gre a t e r tha n that throu g h Z.

B. The poten t i al differ e n c e acros s Z is gre a t e r tha n tha t acros s Y.

C. The poten t i al differ e n c e acros s resist o r X and Y toge t h e r is the sa m e


as that acros s Z.

D. The cur r e n t throu g h Z is less tha n the total cur r e n t throu g h X and Y.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

48 5 . A cur r e n t is est a blis h e d in a coil of wire in the dire c tion show n.

The direction of the mag n e t i c field at point P is

A. out of the plane of the pap e r .

B. into the plane of the pap e r .

C. to the left.

D. to the right.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 760


48 6 . Which arr a n g e m e n t of thr e e point cha r g e s at the corn e r of an equila t e r a l
trian gl e will res ul t in a zero elect ric field stre n g t h at the cent r e of the
trian gl e, point P?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

48 7 . The mas s of a plan e t is twice that of Eart h. Its radius is half tha t of the
radi us of Eart h. The gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Eart h is g.
The gravit a tion al field str e n g t h at the surfac e of the plane t is

1
g
A. 2 .

B. g.

C. 2g.

D. 8g.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 761


48 8 . An elect r o n ente r s the vacuu m betw e e n two opposit ely cha r g e d plat e s with
velocity v . The elect r o n is followe d by an alpha particle moving with the
sam e initial velocity as the elect r o n . A unifor m ma gn e t i c field is direc t e d
out of the plan e of the pape r.

The elect r o n’s pat h is undeflec t e d . The path of the alph a particle will be

A. deflect e d out of the plan e of the pape r .

B. und eflect e d .

C. deflect e d upw a r d .

D. deflect e d down w a r d .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

48 9 . The Geige r–M a r s d e n experi m e n t provide s evide n c e for

A. the existe n c e of discr e t e atomic ene r gy levels.

B. the existe n c e of the neut r o n .

C. a dens e positively char g e d nucle u s .

D. the stability of some nuclei.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 762


49 0 . A radioac tive isotop e has a half- life of two minut e s . A sam pl e cont ain s
sixtee n gra m s of the isotop e. How muc h time elaps e s until one gra m of the
isotop e rem ai n s ?

A. 6 minut e s

B. 8 minut e s

C. 10 minut e s

D. 12 minut e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

49 1 . Data conce r ni n g nuclide s are plotte d using the axes below.

What are the axis labels for this gra p h ?

Y X
A. bindin g ener gy per num b e r of nucleo n s
nucleon
B. bindin g ener gy num b e r of proto n s
C. num b e r of proto n s bindin g ene r gy per
nucle on
D. num b e r of nucleo n s bindin g ene r gy
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 763


49 2 . Which of the following is true about beta minus ( β–) dec ay?

A. An antin e u t r i n o is abso r b e d .

B. The char g e of the daug h t e r nuclide is less tha n that of the par e n t
nuclide.

C. An antin e u t r i n o is emitt e d .

D. The mas s num b e r of the daug h t e r nuclide is less tha n that of the
par e n t nuclide.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

49 3 . A wave gene r a t o r produ c e s a powe r per unit lengt h of 4.0 kW m –1 for


waves of amplit u d e A and spee d v . The efficiency of the gen e r a t o r is
cons t a n t . The power per unit lengt h obtain e d from waves of amplit u d e 2 A
and spee d 2 v would be

A. 8.0 kW m –1 .

B. 16 kW m –1 .

C. 32 kW m –1 .

D. 64 kW m –1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 764


49 4 . The diagr a m shows the variation with wavele n g t h of the powe r per unit
wavele n g t h I radi at e d from an are a of 1 m 2 of two differ e n t bodies.

Which of the following is a corr e c t comp a r i s o n of the tem p e r a t u r e and of


the emissivity of the two bodies?

Te m p e r a t u Emi s s i v i t y
re
A. sam e sam e
B. sam e differ e n t
C. differ e n t sam e
D. differ e n t differ e n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )

49 5 . Which of the following is the most likely expla n a ti o n for a rise in global sea
level?

A. Ther m al expan s io n of wate r

B. Melting of sea ice

C. Incr e a s e in rainfall

D. Ther m al expan s io n of ice


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 765


49 6 . The diagr a m shows an ener gy balan c e clima t e model for a plane t.

The intensiti es of the reflect e d and radia t e d radia tio n are given in ter m s of
the incide n t intensity I. Which of the following is the albe d o of this plane t ?

A. 0.15

B. 0.25

C. 0.40

D. 0.60
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 766


49 7 . Data analysis ques tion.

A stud e n t perfor m s an expe ri m e n t with a pap e r toy tha t rota t e s as it falls


slowly throu g h the air. After rele a s e , the pape r toy quickly att ain s a
cons t a n t vertic al spee d as meas u r e d over a fixed vertic al dista n c e .

The aim of the expe ri m e n t was to find how the ter mi n al spe e d of the pape r
toy varies with its weigh t. The weigh t of the pape r toy was chan g e d by
using differ e n t num b e r s of pap e r she e t s in its const r u c t i o n.

IB Questionbank Physics 767


The gra p h shows a plot of the ter mi n a l spe e d v of the pap e r toy (calcula t e d
from the raw dat a) and the num b e r of pap e r she e t s n use d to const r u c t the
toy. The unce r t ai n t y in v for n = 1 is show n by the erro r bar.

(a) The fixed dist a n c e is 0.75 m and has an absolut e unce r t a i n t y of 0.01
m. The perc e n t a g e unce r t a i n t y in the time take n to fall throu g h the
fixed dist an c e is 5 %.

(i) Calculat e the absolut e unce r t a i n t y in the ter mi n al spe e d of the


pap e r toy for n = 6.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 768


(ii) On the grap h, draw an error bar on the point corr e s p o n di n g to n
= 6.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 769


(b) On the gra p h, draw a line of best- fit for the data points.
(1)

(c) The stud e n t hypot h e s iz e s tha t v is propo r tio n a l to n . Use the data
points for n = 2 and n = 4 from the gra p h opposit e to show tha t this
hypot h e s i s is incor r e c t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 770


(d) Anothe r stud e n t hypot h e s iz e d tha t v might be propo r tio n a l to n . To
verify this hypot h e si s he plott e d a gra p h of v 2 agains t n as show n
below.

Explain how the gra p h verifies the hypot h e s i s tha t v is propo r tio n a l to
n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics 771
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 772


49 8 . In 1997 a high- spee d car of mas s 1.1 × 10 4 kg achieve d the world land
spee d recor d. The car accel e r a t e d unifor mly in two sta g e s as show n in the
table. The car star t e d from res t.

Tim e / s Spe e d attai n e d at en d of


sta g e / m s –1
Sta g e 1 0.0 – 4.0 44
Sta g e 2 4.0 – 12 280

Use the dat a to calculat e the

(a) aver a g e accel e r a t io n of the car in sta g e 1.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) aver a g e net force req ui r e d to accel e r a t e the car in sta g e 2.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) total dist an c e travelled by the car in 12 s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 773


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

49 9 . (a) Draw the compl et e diagr a m of the circuit that uses a pote n ti al
divider, am m e t e r , voltm e t e r and cell to mea s u r e the curr e n t- volta g e
char a c t e r i s ti c s for compo n e n t X.

(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 774


(b) The grap h shows the curr e n t- volta g e cha r a c t e r i s ti c s for the
compo n e n t X.

Compo n e n t X is now conne c t e d acros s the ter mi n al s of a cell of emf


2.0 V and negligible inter n a l resist a n c e . Use the gra p h to show that
the resist a n c e of X is 0.83 Ω.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) A resis to r of cons t a n t resis tanc e 1.0 Ω i s conn e c t e d in series with the
cell in (b) and with X. Use the gra p h to ded uc e that the curr e n t in the
circuit is 1.3 A.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 775


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

50 0 . This ques tion is abou t a simple pend ul u m .

(a) A pend ul u m consist s of a bob susp e n d e d by a light inexte n si bl e string


from a rigid suppo r t . The pend ul u m bob is move d to one side and the n
relea s e d . The sketc h grap h show s how the displa c e m e n t of the
pend ul u m bob und e r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion varie s with time
over one time period.

On the sketc h grap h above,

(i) label with the lette r A a point at which the accele r a t io n of the
pend ul u m bob is a maxim u m .
(1)

(ii) label with the lette r V a point at which the spe e d of the pend ul u m
bob is a maxim u m .
(1)

(b) Explain why the mag ni t u d e of the tension in the string at the midpoint
of the oscillation is grea t e r tha n the weight of the pend ul u m bob.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 776


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 777


(c) The pend ul u m bob is moved to one side until its cent r e is 25 mm
above its rest position and the n rele a s e d .

(i) Show that the spee d of the pend ul u m bob at the midpoint of the
oscillation is 0.70 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The mas s of the pend ul u m bob is 0.057 kg. The cent r e of the
pend ul u m bob is 0.80 m below the suppo r t . Calcula t e the
mag ni t u d e of the tension in the string whe n the pend ul u m bob is
vertically below the point of sus p e n s i o n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 778


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 779


(d) The point of susp e n s i o n of the pend ul u m bob is move d from side to
side with a small amplitu d e and at a variabl e driving frequ e n c y f.

For each value of the driving frequ e n c y a ste a dy cons t a n t amplitu d e A


is reac h e d . The oscillations of the pend ul u m bob are lightly dam p e d .

(i) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show the variation of A with
f.

(2)

(ii) Explain, with refer e n c e to the gra p h in (d)(i), wha t is me a n t by


reson a n c e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 780


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(e) The pend ul u m bob is now imm e r s e d in wate r and the varia bl e
frequ e n c y driving force in (d) is again applie d. Sugg e s t the effect this
imme r s io n of the pend ul u m bob will have on the sha p e of your gra p h
in (d)(i).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 781


50 1 . This ques tion is abou t the Ruthe r fo r d model of the atom.

(a) Most alpha par ticles used to bomb a r d a thin gold foil pass thro u g h the
foil witho u t a significa n t cha n g e in direc tion. A few alpha par ticle s are
deviat e d from their original direc tion thro u g h angl es gre a t e r than 90°.
Use thes e observ a tio n s to desc ri b e the Ruthe r fo r d atomic model.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 782


.....................
(5)

IB Questionbank Physics 783


197 199
(b) The isotop e gold- 197 ( 7 9 Au ) is sta ble but the isotop e gold- 199 ( 7 9 Au )

is not.

(i) Outline, in ter m s of the force s acting betw e e n nucleo n s , why, for
large stabl e nuclei such as gold- 197, the num b e r of neut r o n s
excee d s the num b e r of proton s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

199 199
(ii) A nucle u s of 7 9 Au dec ays to a nucle u s of 8 0 H g with the emission
of an elect r o n and anot h e r particle. Stat e the na m e of this othe r
par ticl e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

50 2 . This ques tion is abou t a light ni n g disch a r g e .

(a) Define electric field stren g t h .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 784


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 785


(b) A thun d e r cl o u d can be modelle d as a neg a tively cha r g e d plat e that is
par allel to the grou n d .

The mag ni t u d e of the char g e on the plat e incre a s e s due to proc e s s e s


in the atmo s p h e r e . Event u a lly a cur r e n t disc h a r g e s from the
thun d e r cl o u d to the grou n d .

On the diag r a m , draw the elect ric field patt e r n betw e e n the
thun d e r cl o u d bas e and the grou n d .
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 786


(c) The mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h E betw e e n two infinite
char g e d par allel plat es is given by the expr e s si o n

σ
E = ε0

whe r e σ is the char g e per unit are a on one of the plate s .

A thun d e r cl o u d car rie s a cha r g e of ma g nit u d e 35 C spre a d over its


bas e. The are a of the bas e is 1.2 × 10 7 m 2 .

(i) Dete r mi n e the mag nit u d e of the elect ric field betw e e n the bas e
of the thun d e r cl o u d and the grou n d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Stat e two ass u m p t io n s mad e in (c)(i).

1. .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

2. .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 787


(iii) When the thun d e r cl o u d disc h a r g e s , the aver a g e disch a r g e
curr e n t is 1.8 kA. Estim a t e the disch a r g e time.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iv) The poten ti al differ e n c e betw e e n the thun d e r c lo u d and the


grou n d befor e disch a r g e is 2.5 × 10 8 V. Dete r m i n e the ene r gy
relea s e d in the disch a r g e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 17 mark s )

50 3 . This ques tion is abou t fuel for hea tin g.

(a) Define the ener gy densi ty of a fuel.

IB Questionbank Physics 788


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 789


(b) A room heat e r bur n s liquid fuel and the following dat a are availabl e.

Density of liquid fuel =


8.0 × 10 2 kg m –3
Ener gy produ c e d by 1 m 3 of liquid fuel =
2.7 × 10 10 J
Rate at which fuel is cons u m e d =
0.13 g s –1
Latent heat of vaporiz a tion of the fuel =
290 kJ kg –1

(i) Use the dat a to calcula t e the powe r outp u t of the room hea t e r ,
ignorin g the power requi r e d to conve r t the liquid fuel into a gas.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Show why, in your calcula tio n in (b)(i), the powe r req ui r e d to
conver t the liquid fuel into a gas at its boiling point can be
ignor e d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Stat e, in ter m s of molecul a r str uc t u r e and their motion, two


IB Questionbank Physics 790
differ e n c e s betw e e n a liquid and a gas.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

50 4 . This ques tion is abou t the produ c tio n of ene r gy in nucle a r fission.

(a) A possible fission reac tio n is

235
92 U 01n 93 26 Kr 15461Ba x 10 n .

(i) Stat e the value of x .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Show that the ener gy rele a s e d whe n one ura ni u m nucle u s
unde r g o e s fission in the rea c tion in (a) is about 2.8 × 10 –11 J.

Mass of neut r o n = 1.008 6 7 u


Mass of U-235 nucle u s = 234.99 3 3 3 u
Mass of Kr- 92 nucle u s = 91.90 6 4 5 u
Mass of Ba- 141 nucle u s = 140.88 3 5 4 u

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 791


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(iii) Stat e how the ene r gy of the neut r o n s produ c e d in the reac tion in
(a) is likely to com p a r e with the ene r gy of the neut r o n that
initiat e d the reac tion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 792


(b) Outline the role of the mode r a t o r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) A nuclea r powe r plant that use s U-235 as fuel has a useful powe r
outpu t of 16 MW and an efficiency of 40 %. Assumi n g tha t eac h fission
of U-235 gives rise to 2.8 × 10 –11 J of ene r gy, det e r m i n e the mas s of
U-235 fuel used per day.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

50 5 . This ques tion is abou t collisions.

(a) Stat e the principl e of cons e r v a ti o n of mom e n t u m .

IB Questionbank Physics 793


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 794


(b) In an expe ri m e n t , an air- rifle pellet is fired into a block of modelling
clay that res ts on a table.

(not to scale)

The air- rifle pellet rem ai n s inside the clay block afte r the impa c t.

As a result of the collision, the clay block slides along the table in a
str aig h t line and comes to res t. Furt h e r dat a relatin g to the
expe ri m e n t are given below.

Mass of air- rifle pellet = 2.0 g


Mass of clay block = 56 g
Velocity of impa c t of air- rifle pellet = 140 m s –1
Stoppi n g dista n c e of clay block = 2.8 m

(i) Show that the initial spee d of the clay block afte r the air- rifle
pellet strikes it is
4.8 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 795


(ii) Calculat e the aver a g e friction al force tha t the surfa c e of the table
exert s on the clay block whilst the clay block is moving.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(c) Discus s the ener gy tran sfor m a t i o n s tha t occur in the clay block and
the air- rifle pellet from the mom e n t the air- rifle pellet strike s the
block until the clay block come s to rest.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) The clay block is dropp e d from rest from the edg e of the table and
falls vertically to the grou n d . The tabl e is 0.85 m above the groun d.
Calcula t e the spee d with which the clay block strike s the grou n d.

IB Questionbank Physics 796


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

50 6 . This ques tion is abou t the eye.

(a) Stat e, with refer e n c e to the definition s of nea r point and far point,
what is mea n t by accom m o d a t i o n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Explain how accom m o d a t i o n is achieve d by the eye.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 797


(Tota l 5 mark s )

50 7 . This ques tion is abou t diffrac tio n and resolution.

(a) A par allel beam of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t on a nar r o w


rect a n g ul a r slit. After passin g throu g h the slit, the light is incide n t on
a dista n t scre e n.

Point X is the midpoint of the slit.

(i) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the inte n si ty of
the light on the scre e n varies with the angle θ show n in the
diagr a m .

(3)

(ii) The wavelen g t h of the light is 520 nm, the width of the slit is
0.04 mm and the scre e n is 1.2 m from the slit. Show tha t the
width of the cent r al maxim u m of inte nsi ty on the scre e n is about
3 cm.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 798


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 799


(b) Points P and Q are on the circ u mf e r e n c e of a plan e t as show n.

By consid e ri n g the two points, outline why diffrac tio n limits the ability
of an astr o n o m i c al telesco p e to resolve the imag e of the plane t as a
disc.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

50 8 . This ques tion is abou t stan di n g wave s and orga n pipes.

(a) Stat e on e way in which a sta n di n g wave differs from a travelling


wave.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 800


(b) An organ pipe of lengt h L is close d at one end. On the diag r a m s , dra w
a repr e s e n t a t i o n of the displa c e m e n t of the air in the pipe whe n the
frequ e n c y of the note emitt e d by the pipe is the

(i) fund a m e n t a l (first har m o ni c) freq u e n c y f 1 .

(1)

(ii) secon d har m o ni c frequ e n c y f 2 .

(1)

f1
(c) Use your answ e r to (b) to dedu c e an expr e s sio n for the ratio f2 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 801


(d) Stat e, in ter m s of the boun d a r y conditions of the sta n di n g wave s that
can be form e d in the pipe, the reas o n why the ratio of the highe r
frequ e n ci e s of the har m o ni c s to tha t of the funda m e n t a l mus t always
be an integ e r num b e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

50 9 . This ques tion is abou t wave–pa r ti cl e duality.

(a) In the photo el ec t r i c effect, elect r o n s are not emitt e d from the surf ac e
of a met al if the frequ e n c y of the incide n t light is below a cert ai n
value called the thr es h ol d frequ e n c y.

(i) Explain, with refer e n c e to the Einst ei n model of the photo el e c t ri c


effect, the exist en c e of the thre s h ol d frequ e n c y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 802


(ii) Stat e, with refer e n c e to your answ e r in (a)(i), the rea s o n why the
thre s h ol d frequ e n c y is differ e n t for differ e n t met als.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 803


(b) Light of frequ e n cy 1.0 × 10 15 Hz is incide n t on the surfa c e of a met al.
The work function of the met al is 3.2 × 10 –19 J.

(i) Show that the maxim u m kine tic ene r gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s
is 3.4 × 10 –19 J.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the elect r o n s in (b)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 804


51 0 . This ques tion is abou t the spec t r u m of atomic hydrog e n .

(a) The diagr a m repr e s e n t s the princi p al lines in the visible spec t r u m of
atomic hydro g e n .

Outline how the spect r u m can be produ c e d and obse r v e d in the


labor a t o r y.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 805


(b) Calcula t e the differe n c e in ene r gy in eV betw e e n the ene r gy levels in
the hydro g e n atom that give rise to the red line in the spec t r u m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

51 1 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.

(a) A nucleu s of a radioac tive isotop e of gold (Au- 189) emits a neut ri n o in
the decay to a nucle u s of an isotop e of platin u m (Pt).

In the nucle a r reaction equa tio n below, stat e the na m e of the par ticle
X and identify the nucleon num b e r A and proto n num b e r Z of the
nucleu s of the isotop e of platin u m .

189 A
7 9 Au  Z P t  X v

X : .............................................................................................................
...................

A : .............................................................................................................
...................

Z : .............................................................................................................
...................
(2)

(b) The half- life of Au-189 is 8.84 minut e s . A fres hly pre p a r e d sam pl e of
the isotop e has an activity of 124 Bq.

(i) Calculat e the decay const a n t of Au-189.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 806


(ii) Dete r mi n e the activity of the sam pl e afte r 12.0 min.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

51 2 . This ques tion is abou t CDs and CCDs.

(a) Analogu e signals are stor e d on a CD as a digital, bina ry signal. For an


analog u e signal of str e n g t h 11 V,

(i) stat e the magni t u d e of the signal stre n g t h as a bina ry num b e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) descri b e how a digit al signal, such as that in (a)(i), is stor e d on


the CD.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) outline how the stor e d digit one (1) in a digital signal is rea d
from the CD using laser light reflect e d from the surfa c e of the
CD.

IB Questionbank Physics 807


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 808


(b) Unlike a CD, a CCD stor es light incide n t on its surfa c e in a digital
form by dividing the surf ac e into a larg e num b e r of pixels. Eac h pixel
has a fixed value of capaci t a n c e .

(i) Define what is mea n t by the capacitan c e of a pixel.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Pixels of a particul a r CCD have an are a of 2.8 × 10 –10 m 2 and a


capacit a n c e of 20 pF. A bea m of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t
on the CCD. The num b e r of photo n s per squa r e met r e arriving at
the CCD is 4.0 × 10 13 . The qua n t u m efficiency of a pixel is 74 %.

Dete r mi n e the incre a s e in pote n ti al differ e n c e acros s a pixel as a


res ult of the incide n t light.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 809


51 3 . This ques tion is abou t an oper a tio n a l amplifier use d in a Sch mit t trigg e r
circuit.

(a) An oper a tio n al amplifier use s a ±6. 0 V supply. The oper a ti o n a l


amplifier oper a t e s in the non- inver ti n g mode.

(i) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the outp u t
voltag e V OUT of the amplifier varie s with the pote n ti al differ e n c e
V betw e e n the two input s of the amplifie r.

(2)

(ii) With refer e n c e to the gra p h sketc h e d in (a)(i), explain why the
oper a tio n al amplifier is said to act as a comp a r a t o r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The diagr a m shows an oper a ti o n a l amplifier conn e c t e d as a Schmit t


trigg e r . The outp u t of the amplifie r is ±6. 0 V.

IB Questionbank Physics 810


IB Questionbank Physics 811
(i) Show that the upp e r switc hi n g volta g e of the trigg e r , i.e. the
input voltag e V IN for which the outp u t volta g e V OUT switc h e s
from –6.0 V to +6. 0 V, is 2.0 V.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The input signal V IN to the trigg e r is show n in the gra p h.

The switchin g voltag e s of the trigg e r are ±2. 0 V.

On the axes above, sketc h a gra p h to show how the outpu t


voltag e V OUT varies with time t .
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 812


(c) Explain the use of a Sch mit t trigg e r in the tra ns m i s sio n of digital
signals.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

51 4 . This ques tion is abou t a Galilea n tra n sfor m a t i o n and time dilation.

Ben is in a spac e s hi p that is travelling in a str ai g h t- line with const a n t spe e d


v as meas u r e d by Jill who is in a spa c e station.

Ben switch e s on a light puls e that bounc e s vertic ally (as obse rv e d by Ben)
betw e e n two horizon t al mirror s M 1 and M 2 sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e d . At
the insta n t that the mir ro r s are opposit e Jill, the pulse is just leaving the
mirro r M 2 . The spee d of light in air is c .

(a) On the diag r a m , sketc h the pat h of the light pulse betw e e n M 1 and M 2
as obse rv e d by Jill.

IB Questionbank Physics 813


(1)

(b) The time for the light pulse to travel from M 2 to M 1 as me a s u r e d by Jill
is Δt .

(i) Stat e, accor di n g to Jill, the dista n c e move d by the spac e s hi p in


time Δt .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Using a Galilean tran sfo r m a t i o n, derive an expr e s s io n for the


lengt h of the pat h of the light betw e e n M 2 and M 1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Stat e, accor di n g to speci al rela tivity, the lengt h of the pat h of the light
betw e e n M 2 and M 1 as me a s u r e d by Jill in ter m s of c and ∆t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) The time for the puls e to travel from M 2 to M 1 as mea s u r e d by Ben is
∆t ′. Use your answ e r s to (b)(i) and (c) to derive a rela tion s hi p betw e e n
∆t and ∆t ′.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 814


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 815


(e) Accordi n g to a clock at res t with res p e c t to Jill, a clock in the
space s hi p runs slow by a factor of 2.3. Show that the spe e d v of the
space s hi p is 0.90c.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

51 5 . This ques tion is abou t lepton s and meson s .

(a) Lepto n s are a class of elem e n t a r y particle s and eac h lepton has its
own antip a r ti cl e. Stat e wha t is mea n t by an

(i) elem e n t a r y particle.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) antip a r t i cl e of a lepton.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 816


(b) The elect r o n is a lepton and its antip a r t i cl e is the positro n. The
following reaction can take plac e betw e e n an elect r o n and positro n.

e– + e+ → γ + γ

Sket ch the Feyn m a n diagr a m for this reac tion and identify on your
diagr a m any virtual particl e s.

(3)

(c) Unlike lepton s , the π + meso n is not an elem e n t a r y particle. Sta t e the

(i) quar k s truct u r e of the π + meso n.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) reas o n why the following rea c tio n does not occur.

p + + p+ → p + + π+

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) Stat e the Pauli exclusion principle.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 817


(e) Explain, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r to (d), why qua r k s are
assig n e d the prope r t y of colour.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

51 6 . This ques tion is abou t the char a c t e r i s ti c s of the sta r s Procyon A and
Procyon B.

(a) The star s Procyon A and Procyon B are both locat e d in the sa m e
stellar clust e r in the const ell a tion Canis Minor. Disting uis h betw e e n a
const ell ation and a stellar clust e r .

Cons t ella tio n: ..........................................................................................


....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Stellar
clust e r : ............................................................................................
.................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The table shows som e dat a for Procyon A and Procyon B.

Appar e n t Abso l u t e Appar e n t


ma g n i t u d e ma g n i t u d e bri g h t n e s s
/ W m –2
Procy o n A +0. 4 0 0 +2. 6 8 2.06 × 10 –8
(P A )
Procy o n B +1 0. 7 +1 3. 0 1.46 × 10 –12
(P B )

IB Questionbank Physics 818


Explain, using dat a from the table, why

(i) as viewed from Eart h, P A is muc h bright e r tha n P B .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) the luminosity of P A is muc h gre a t e r tha n that of P B .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Deduc e, using dat a from the table in (b), that P A and P B are
appr oxi m a t ely the sam e dista n c e from Eart h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics 819
.....................
(2)

(d) Stat e, using your ans w e r s to (a) and (c), why P A and P B might be
binar y star s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

LA
(e) Calcula t e, using dat a from the table in (b), the ratio LB whe r e L A is
the luminosi ty of P A and L B is the luminosity of P B .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(f) The surf ac e tem p e r a t u r e of both P A and P B is of the orde r of 10 4 K.


The luminosity of P A is of the orde r of 10 L S , whe r e L S is the luminosity
of the Sun. The diag r a m shows the grid of a Her tz s p r u n g–R u s s e ll
diagr a m .

IB Questionbank Physics 820


Label, on the grid above, the app r oxi m a t e position of

(i) star P A with the lette r A.


(1)

(ii) star P B with the lette r B.


(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 821


(g) Identify the natu r e of star P B .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

51 7 . This ques tion is abou t the Big Bang model and red- shift.

(a) Descri b e what is mean t by the Big Bang model.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) In the 1960s, Penzias and Wilson discove r e d a unifor m cosmic


backg r o u n d radiation (CMB) in the microw a v e region of the
elect r o m a g n e t i c spect r u m .

(i) Explain how the CMB is consist e n t with the Big Bang model.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Stat e why the red- shift of light from galaxies suppo r t s the Big

IB Questionbank Physics 822


Bang model.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 823


51 8 . This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the modula tio n of a car ri e r wave.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The grap h shows how the volta g e signal stre n g t h V of an amplitu d e
modul a t e d (AM) carri e r wave varies with time t .

Use the grap h to det e r m i n e the

(i) frequ e n c y of the carri e r wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) frequ e n c y of the signal wave.

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 824


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 825


(iii) amplitu d e of the signal wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) ban d wi d t h.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) A car rie r wave may also be frequ e n c y modul a t e d (FM). Stat e and
explain on e adva n t a g e of FM comp a r e d to AM.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

51 9 . This ques tion is abou t optical fibre s.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by mat e ri al dispe r s io n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 826


(2)

(b) Sugg e s t why mat e ri al dispe r si o n sets a limit on the bit- rat e of
tran s m i s sio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) (i) The signal show n below is fed into a mono m o d e optical
fibre.

On the diagr a m above, show the effects of mat e ri a l dispe r s io n on


the input signal by drawi n g the sha p e of the sign al afte r it has
travelled a long dista n c e in the optical fibre.
(1)

(ii) Stat e and explain how the effect s on the signal draw n in (c)(i)
may be red uc e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(d) Digital dat a are tran s m i t t e d in an optic al fibre with a glass core which
has a refr ac tive index of 1.5. The dur a tio n of one bit in the
tran s m i s sio n is 0.50 ns and eac h sam pl e in the signal consist s of 32
bits.

(i) Calculat e the time requi r e d for the signal to travel a dista n c e of

IB Questionbank Physics 827


500 km.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 828


(ii) Dete r mi n e the sam pling frequ e n c y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(e) The data in (d) are confide n ti al and mus t be prot e c t e d . Without taking
financi al costs into accou n t , outline whet h e r a direc t optical fibre
conn e c tio n or a tran s m i s sio n thro u g h a geosync h r o n o u s satellite
would be mor e suita bl e for the tra n sf e r of the s e dat a.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

52 0 . This ques tion is abou t laser s.

(a) With refer e n c e to the light waves emitt e d by a lase r, stat e wha t is
mea n t by the ter m s

(i) monoch r o m a t i c.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 829


.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) cohe r e n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The diagr a m (not to scale) shows thr e e of the ene r gy levels of a
subs t a n c e used to produ c e lase r light.

The ene r gy of the grou n d stat e is E 0 .

(i) Stat e what is mean t by popula tion inver sion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Draw an arro w on the diagr a m to indic at e the tran si tion that
res ults in a popula tion inver sion. Label the arro w P.
(1)

(iii) Draw an arro w on the diagr a m to indic at e the tran si tion that

IB Questionbank Physics 830


res ults in a pulse of lase r light. Label the arro w L.
(1)

(iv) Deduc e that the wavel e n g t h of the emitt e d lase r light is 690 nm.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

52 1 . This ques tion is abou t an astr o n o m i c a l telesc o p e .

The diagr a m (not to scale) show s the arr a n g e m e n t of the two convex lense s
in an astro n o m i c al teles co p e in nor m a l adjus t m e n t .

The teles co p e is used to observ e a dista n t star. One of the focal points of
the eyepiec e lens is labelled F E .

(a) On the diag r a m above,

(i) label, with the symbol F E , the position of the othe r focal point of
the eyepiec e lens.
(1)

(ii) label, with the symbol F O , the position of the focal point of the
objective lens that is in betw e e n the two lens e s .
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 831


(iii) cons t r u c t rays to locat e the final image of the star.
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 832


(b) In a particul a r astr o n o m i c a l tele sc o p e , the eyepie c e lens has a powe r
of 40 diopt r e s and the objec tive lens a powe r of 0.80 diopt r e s .
Deter m i n e the angul a r mag nifica tion of the telesc o p e in nor m al
adjus t m e n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) In an astr o n o m i c al telesco p e the objective is ofte n mad e up from a


diver gi n g and a conver gi n g lens, whe r e a s the ape r t u r e of the eyepie c e
is usually rest rict e d such that only rays close to the princip al axis are
viewe d. Stat e the reas o n s for this.

Objective
lens: ................................................................................................
.............

Eyepiec e
lens: ................................................................................................
..............
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 833


52 2 . This ques tion is abou t a diffraction gra ti n g.

(a) A par allel beam of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t nor m ally on a


diffraction grati n g. After passin g thro u g h the gra tin g it is broug h t to a
focus on a scre e n by a lens. The diagr a m shows a few of the slits of
the diffraction gratin g and the pat h of the light that is diffra c t e d at an
angle θ to each slit.

The dist an c e betw e e n the slits is d and the wavele n g t h of the light is
λ.

(i) On the diagr a m , const r u c t a line tha t ena bl e s the path differ e n c e
betw e e n the rays from two adjac e n t slits to be show n. Label the
path dist a n c e L .
(1)

(ii) Use your answ e r to (a)(i) to derive the condition, in ter m s of d


and θ, for ther e to be a maxim u m of inte n si ty at the point P on
the scre e n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 834


(b) For a partic ul a r gratin g, the dista n c e betw e e n adjac e n t slits is 2.0 ×
10 –6 m. Dete r mi n e, for light of wavele n g t h 520 nm, the maxim u m
theor e t i c al orde r of diffrac tio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

52 3 . Two lengt h s, a and b , are mea s u r e d to be 51 ± 1 cm and 49 ± 1 cm


res p e c tiv ely. In which of the following qua n ti tie s is the perc e n t a g e
unce r t ai n t y the large s t ?

A. a + b

B. a –b

C. a × b

a
D. b
(Tot al 1 mar k )

52 4 . A net force of mag nit u d e 4.0 N acts on a body of mas s 3.0 kg for 6.0 s. The
body is initially at rest. Which of the following is the spe e d of the body afte r
the 6.0 s interv al?

A. 0.50 m s –1

B. 2.0 m s –1

C. 4.5 m s –1

D. 8.0 m s –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 835


IB Questionbank Physics 836
52 5 . A car moves from X to Y along a semicir c ul a r path. The radius of the path is
250 m and the time taken to compl e t e the trip is 50 s.

Which of the following cor r e c tly shows the mag nit u d e of the aver a g e
velocity and the mag nit u d e of the ave r a g e spe e d ?

Avera g e Avera g e
velo c i t y sp e e d
A. 10 m s –1 10 m s –1
B. 10 m s –1 16 m s –1
C. 16 m s –1 10 m s –1
D. 16 m s –1 16 m s –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

52 6 . A ball is tied to a string and rota t e d at a unifor m spe e d in a vertic al plan e.


The diagr a m shows the ball at its lowest position. Which arrow shows the
direction of the net force acting on the ball?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 837


52 7 . Two steel balls, of mas s M and 2 M , fall at const a n t spe e d s in a tube filled
with oil.

Which of the following cor r e c tly comp a r e s the magni t u d e s of the net force
and of the drag (resist a n c e ) force on the two balls?

Ne t forc e Dra g forc e


A. sam e sam e
B. sam e differ e n t
C. differ e n t sam e
D. differ e n t differ e n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )

52 8 . An ice cube and an icebe r g are both at a tem p e r a t u r e of 0 °C. Which of the
following is a corr ec t comp a ri s o n of the aver a g e ran do m kine tic ene r gy and
the total kinetic ener gy of the molec ul e s of the ice cube and the icebe r g ?

Avera g e rand o m kin e t i c Tot al kin e t i c


en e r g y en e r g y
A. sam e sa m e
B. sam e differ e n t
C. differ e n t sa m e
D. differ e n t differ e n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 838


52 9 . An ideal gas expa n d s isoth e r m a lly from a stat e X to a new stat e of volum e
V . The work done by the gas is W . Which of the following is corr e c t for an
adiab a ti c expa n sio n of the gas from stat e X to a new sta t e of volum e V ?

Cha n g e in int e r n a l Work don e


en e r g y
A. ∆U > 0 gre a t e r tha n W
B. ∆U < 0 gre a t e r tha n W
C. ∆U > 0 less tha n W
D. ∆U < 0 less tha n W
(Tot al 1 mar k )

53 0 . The gra p h shows the variation with absolut e tem p e r a t u r e T of the pre s s u r e
p of a fixed mas s of an ideal gas.

Which of the following is corr ec t conc e r ni n g the volum e and the density of
the gas?

Volu m e De n s i t y
A. const a n t cons t a n t
B. const a n t incr e a s i n g
C. incr e a si n g cons t a n t
D. incr e a si n g incr e a s i n g
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 839


53 1 . Which of the following grap h s shows the varia tion with displa c e m e n t x of
the spee d v of a particle perfor mi n g simple har m o nic motion.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

53 2 . A particle perfor m s simple har m o ni c oscillations. Which of the following


quan ti tie s will be unaffect e d by a redu c tio n in the amplitu d e of oscillations ?

A. The total ene r gy

B. The maxim u m spee d

C. The maxim u m accele r a t i o n

D. The period
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 840


53 3 . Monoc h r o m a t i c light travels from air into wat e r . Which of the following
descri b e s the chan g e s in wavele n g t h and spe e d ?

Wavel e n g t h Sp e e d
A. incr e a s e s decr e a s e s
B. incr e a s e s incr e a s e s
C. decr e a s e s incr e a s e s
D. decr e a s e s decr e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

53 4 . A stan di n g wave is esta blis h e d in air in a pipe with one close d and one
open end.

The air molecul e s near X are

A. always at the cent r e of a comp r e s si o n.

B. always at the cent r e of a rar ef a c tio n.

C. som eti m e s at the cent r e of a comp r e s s io n and som e ti m e s at the cent r e


of a rar ef a c tio n.

D. neve r at the cent r e of a comp r e s si o n or a rar ef a c tio n.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 841


53 5 . In two sepa r a t e expe ri m e n t s monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t on a single
slit. The diagr a m s show the diffra c tion patt e r n s obtain e d on a scre e n far
from the slit. In the top diag r a m the wavele n g t h of light is λ 1 and the slit
width is b 1 . In the botto m diag r a m the wavele n g t h of light is λ 2 and the slit
width is b 2 .

In each expe ri m e n t the dista n c e betw e e n the slit and the scre e n is the
sam e. Which of the following may be ded uc e d ?

λ1 λ 2

A. b1 b2

λ1 λ 2

B. b1 b2

C. b1 < b2

D. λ1 > λ2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 842


53 6 . Horizont ally polarize d light is tra n s m i t t e d throu g h a polarize r whos e
tran s mi s s io n axis is horizont al. The light ent e r s a cont ai n e r with a suga r
solution and is then incide n t on a secon d pola riz e r whos e tra n s m i s sio n axis
is vertical.

When the secon d polarizer is rotat e d by a small angle, no light is


tran s mi t t e d thro u g h the secon d polariz e r . The expla n a t io n for this
obse rv a tio n is that the suga r solution

A. caus e s dest r u c t iv e interf e r e n c e .

B. rotat e s the plane of polariz a tion of light.

C. can only tran s m i t vertically pola riz e d light.

D. refr ac t s light so no light is incide n t on the secon d pola riz e r.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

53 7 . A sour c e of soun d app ro a c h e s a station a r y obse rv e r . The spe e d of the


emitt e d sound and its wavele n g t h , me a s u r e d at the sourc e , are v and λ
res p e c tiv ely. Which of the following is the wave spe e d and the wavele n g t h ,
as meas u r e d by the station a r y obse rv e r ?

Wave sp e e d Wavel e n g t h
A. larg e r than larg e r tha n
v λ
B. equal to v larg e r tha n
λ
C. equal to v less tha n λ
D. larg e r than less tha n λ

IB Questionbank Physics 843


v
(Tot al 1 mar k )

53 8 . The diagr a m shows the pat h of a projec tile tha t is launc h e d with velocity v .
Air resis t a n c e is negligible.

A secon d projectile has doubl e the mas s of the first proje ctile and is
launc h e d with the sam e velocity. Air resist a n c e is still negligible. Which of
the following pat hs best repr e s e n t s the pat h of the projec tile? ( The original
path is sho w n as a dott ed line )

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 844


53 9 . The diagr a m shows equipot e n t i al lines due to two object s.

The two object s could be

A. elect ric char g e s of the sam e sign only.

B. mas s e s only.

C. elect ric char g e s of opposit e sign only.

D. mas s e s or elect ric char g e s of any sign.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 845


54 0 . Two positive and two neg a tive point char g e s of equal mag ni t u d e are plac e d
at the vertice s of a squa r e as show n. The origin of the axes is at the cent r e
of the squa r e .

The elect ric poten ti al is zero

A. at the origin of the axes only.

B. along both the x -axis and the y -axis.

C. along the y -axis only.

D. along the x -axis only.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 846


54 1 . A rect a n g ul a r loop of condu c ti n g wire rota t e s in a region of mag n e ti c field.
The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the induc e d emf in the loop
durin g one cycle.

Which of the following gives the corr e c t time s at which the ma gni t u d e of
the mag n e t i c flux linkag e and the mag nit u d e of the curr e n t in the loop are
maxim u m ?

Flux Curre n t
link a g e
A. Y Y
B. Y X
C. X Y
D. X X
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 847


54 2 . A rect a n g ul a r loop of condu c ti n g wire rota t e s in a region of mag n e ti c field.
The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the induc e d emf in the loop
durin g one cycle.

The resist a n c e of the coil is 5.0 Ω. Which of the following i s the aver a g e
powe r dissipa t e d in the loop?

45
A. 2 W

45
B. 2W

C. 45 W

D. 45 2 W
(Tot al 1 mar k )

54 3 . The radii of nuclei may be dete r m i n e d by

A. scat t e r i n g char g e d particle s off the nuclei.

B. injectin g the nuclei in a mass spec t r o m e t e r .

C. mea s u ri n g the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the nuclei.

D. obse rvin g the spect r u m of the nuclei.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 848


54 4 . In the photo el ec t ri c effect, the following obse rv a tio n s may be ma de .

I. The kinetic ener gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s incr e a s e s with


incr e a s i n g light frequ e n c y.

II. The elect r o n s are emitt e d withou t time delay.

Which of thes e obs erv a tio n s , if any, can be explain e d in ter m s of the wave
theo ry of light?

A. Neith e r I nor II

B. I and II

C. I only

D. II only
(Tot al 1 mar k )

54 5 . A proton and an alpha par ticle have the sam e de Broglie wavele n g t h .

s p e e dof a lp h ap a r t ic le
Which of the following is appr oxi m a t e ly the ratio s p e e do f p r o t o n ?

1
A. 4

1
B. 2

C. 2

D. 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 849


54 6 . The ener gi e s of alpha particl es and of gam m a- rays emitt e d in radioa c tive
decay are discr e t e . This observ a tio n is evide n c e for

A. atomic ene r gy levels.

B. nuclea r ener gy levels.

C. nuclei having mor e neut r o n s tha n proton s .

D. the existe n c e of isotop e s.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

54 7 . The diagr a m s show the variation with dista n c e x of the wave function ψ of
four differ e n t elect r o n s . The scale on the horizont al axis in all four
diagr a m s is the sam e. For which elect r o n is the unc e r t a i n t y in the
mom e n t u m the large s t ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 850


54 8 . A wave gene r a t o r produ c e s a powe r per unit lengt h of 4.0 kW m –1 for
waves of amplit u d e A and spee d v . The efficiency of the gen e r a t o r is
cons t a n t . The power per unit lengt h obtain e d from waves of amplit u d e 2 A
and spee d 2 v would be

A. 8.0 kW m –1 .

B. 16 kW m –1 .

C. 32 kW m –1 .

D. 64 kW m –1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

54 9 . Which of the following stat e m e n t s , relatin g to the prod u c tio n of nucle a r


powe r , is corr e c t ?

A. The fuel has high ener gy density.

B. Supplies of nuclea r fuels are unlimit e d.

C. Gree n h o u s e gas emissions are significa n t.

D. Wast e produ c t s are not signific a n t .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

55 0 . Data are stor e d on an audio comp a c t disc (CD) at a rat e of f sam pl e s per
secon d. Each sam pl e cont ai ns b bits. A total of N bits are stor e d on the CD.
Which of the following is the playing time of the CD in secon d s ?

Nf
A. b

N
B. bf

bN
C. f

bf
D. N
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 851


55 1 . Light incide n t on the pixel of a CCD caus e s elect ric char g e to collec t in the
pixel. The amou n t of char g e collect e d in a given time is propo r t io n al to
which char a c t e r i s tic of the incide n t light?

A. The degr e e of polariza tion

B. The inten sity

C. The wavele n g t h

D. The frequ e n c y
(Tot al 1 mar k )

55 2 . Data analysis ques tion.

A stud e n t perfor m s an expe ri m e n t with a pap e r toy tha t rota t e s as it falls


slowly throu g h the air. After rele a s e , the pape r toy quickly att ain s a
cons t a n t vertic al spee d as meas u r e d over a fixed vertic al dista n c e .

The aim of the expe ri m e n t was to find how the ter mi n al spe e d of the pape r
toy varies with its weigh t. The weigh t of the pape r toy was chan g e d by
using differ e n t num b e r s of pap e r she e t s in its const r u c t i o n.

IB Questionbank Physics 852


The gra p h shows a plot of the ter mi n a l spe e d v of the pap e r toy (calcula t e d
from the raw dat a) and the num b e r of pap e r she e t s n use d to const r u c t the
toy. The unce r t ai n t y in v for n = 1 is show n by the erro r bar.

(a) The fixed dist a n c e is 0.75 m and has an absolut e unce r t a i n t y of 0.01
m. The perc e n t a g e unce r t a i n t y in the time take n to fall throu g h the
fixed dist an c e is 5 %.

(i) Calculat e the absolut e unce r t a i n t y in the ter mi n al spe e d of the


pap e r toy for n = 6.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 853


(ii) On the grap h, draw an error bar on the point corr e s p o n di n g to n
= 6.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 854


(b) On the gra p h, draw a line of best- fit for the data points.
(1)

(c) The stud e n t hypot h e s iz e s tha t v is propo r tio n a l to n . Use the data
points for n = 2 and
n = 4 from the gra p h above to show that this hypot h e s i s is incor r e c t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 855


(d) Anothe r stud e n t hypot h e s iz e d tha t v might be propo r tio n a l to n . To
verify this hypot h e si s he plott e d a gra p h of lg v agains t lg n as show n
below.

Show that the grap h verifies the hypot h e si s that v is propo r tio n a l to
n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

55 3 . This ques tion is abou t fuel for hea tin g.

IB Questionbank Physics 856


(a) Define the ener gy densi ty of a fuel.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 857


(b) A room heat e r bur n s liquid fuel and the following dat a are availabl e.

Density of liquid fuel =


8.0 × 10 2 kg m –3
Ener gy produ c e d by 1 m 3 of liquid fuel =
2.7 × 10 10 J
Rate at which fuel is cons u m e d =
0.13 g s –1
Temp e r a t u r e at which air ent e r s hea t e r = 12
°C
Temp e r a t u r e at which air leave s hea t e r = 32
°C
Specific heat capa ci ty of air =
990 J kg –1 K–1

(i) Use the dat a to calcula t e the powe r outp u t of the room hea t e r ,
ignorin g the power requi r e d to conve r t the liquid fuel into a gas.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) All the ene r gy outp u t of the room heat e r raise s the tem p e r a t u r e
of the air moving throu g h it. Use the dat a to calcul a t e the mas s
of air that moves throu g h the room hea t e r in on e secon d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 858


.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 859


55 4 . This ques tion is abou t digital data stor a g e .

(a) Descri b e, with refer e n c e to the stru c t u r e of a DVD, how stor e d digital
dat a are read.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) The Blu- ray stor a g e syste m uses a lase r diode tha t emits a wavele n g t h
of 405 nm, wher e a s the olde r DVD syste m uses radia tion of
wavelen g t h 650 nm. Explain the adva n t a g e s of using a smalle r
wavelen g t h .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 860


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

55 5 . This ques tion is abou t elect r o m a g n e t i c induc tio n.

(a) In orde r to mea s u r e the rms value of an alte r n a t i n g cur r e n t in a cable,


a small coil of wire is plac e d close to the cable.

The plane of the small coil is par allel to the direc tio n of the cable. The
ends of the small coil are conn e c t e d to a high resist a n c e ac voltm e t e r .

Use Far a d a y’s law to explain why an emf is induc e d in the small coil.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 861


(b) The grap h below show s the variatio n with time t of the cur r e n t in the
cable.

On the axes below, draw a sketc h gra p h to show the variatio n with
time of the emf induc e d in the small coil.

(2)

(c) Explain how readi n g s on the high resist a n c e ac voltm e t e r can be use d
to com p a r e the rms values of alte r n a t i n g curr e n t s in differ e n t cable s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 862


55 6 . This ques tion is abou t the Ruthe r fo r d model of the atom.

(a) Most alpha par ticles used to bomb a r d a thin gold foil pass thro u g h the
foil witho u t a significa n t cha n g e in direc tion. A few alpha par ticle s are
deviat e d from their original direc tion thro u g h angl es gre a t e r than 90°.
Use thes e observ a tio n s to desc ri b e the Ruthe r fo r d atomic model.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)

IB Questionbank Physics 863


197 199
(b) The isotop e gold- 197 ( 7 9 Au ) is sta ble but the isotop e gold- 199 ( 7 9 Au )

is not.

(i) Outline, in ter m s of the force s acting betw e e n nucleo n s , why, for
large stabl e nuclei such as gold- 197, the num b e r of neut r o n s
excee d s the num b e r of proton s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

199 199
(ii) A nucle u s of 7 9 Au dec ays to a nucle u s of 8 0 H g . Sta t e the two
par ticl es , othe r than γ-photon, e mitte d in this dec ay.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

55 7 . This ques tion is abou t the simple pend ul u m .

(a) A pend ul u m consist s of a bob susp e n d e d by a light inexte n si bl e string


from a rigid suppo r t . The pend ul u m bob is move d to one side and the n
relea s e d . The sketc h grap h show s how the displa c e m e n t of the
pend ul u m bob und e r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion varie s with time
over one time period.

IB Questionbank Physics 864


IB Questionbank Physics 865
On the sketc h grap h above,

(i) label with the lette r A a point at which the accele r a t io n of the
pend ul u m bob is a maxim u m .
(1)

(ii) label with the lette r V a point at which the spe e d of the pend ul u m
bob is a maxim u m .
(1)

(b) Explain why the mag ni t u d e of the tension in the string at the midpoint
of the oscillation is grea t e r tha n the weight of the pend ul u m bob.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The pend ul u m bob is moved to one side until its cent r e is 25 mm
above its rest position and the n rele a s e d .

IB Questionbank Physics 866


(i) Show that the spee d of the pend ul u m bob at the midpoint of the
oscillation is
0.70 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The mas s of the pend ul u m bob is 0.057 kg. The cent r e of the
pend ul u m bob is 0.80 m below the suppo r t . Calcula t e the
mag ni t u d e of the tension in the string whe n the pend ul u m bob is
vertically below the point of sus p e n s i o n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(d) The point of susp e n s i o n of the pend ul u m bob is move d from side to
side with a small amplitu d e and at a variabl e driving frequ e n c y f.

IB Questionbank Physics 867


For each value of the driving frequ e n c y a ste a dy cons t a n t amplitu d e A
is reac h e d . The oscillations of the pend ul u m bob are lightly dam p e d .

IB Questionbank Physics 868


(i) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show the variation of A with
f.

(2)

(ii) Explain, with refer e n c e to the gra p h in (d)(i), wha t is me a n t by


reson a n c e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(e) The pend ul u m bob is now imm e r s e d in wate r and the varia bl e
frequ e n c y driving force in (d) is again applie d. Sugg e s t the effect this
imme r s io n of the pend ul u m bob will have on the sha p e of your gra p h
in (d)(i).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 869


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 870


55 8 . This ques tion is abou t the de Broglie hypot h e si s .

(a) Descri b e the de Broglie hypot h e si s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A bea m of elect r o n s is acc ele r a t e d from res t thro u g h a pote n ti al


differ e n c e of 85 V.

Show that the de Broglie wavel e n g t h associa t e d with the elect r o n s in


the bea m is 0.13 nm.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Elect r o n s with the sam e kinetic ene r gy as thos e in (b) are incide n t on
a circula r aper t u r e of diam e t e r 1.1 nm.

IB Questionbank Physics 871


The elect r o n s are dete c t e d beyond the ape r t u r e .

IB Questionbank Physics 872


The grap h shows the variatio n with angle θ of the num b e r n of
elect r o n s det ec t e d per secon d after diffrac tion by the ape r t u r e .

Use your answ e r to (b) above to explain how dat a from the gra p h
suppo r t the de Broglie hypot h e s i s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

55 9 . This ques tion is abou t a light ni n g disch a r g e .

(a) Define electric field stren g t h .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 873


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 874


(b) A thun d e r cl o u d can be modelle d as a neg a tively cha r g e d plat e that is
par allel to the grou n d .

The mag ni t u d e of the char g e on the plat e incre a s e s due to proc e s s e s


in the atmo s p h e r e . Event u a lly a cur r e n t disc h a r g e s from the
thun d e r cl o u d to the grou n d .

On the diag r a m , draw the elect ric field patt e r n betw e e n the
thun d e r cl o u d bas e and the grou n d .
(3)

(c) The cur r e n t disch a r g e s whe n the mag ni t u d e of the elect ric field
betw e e n the groun d and the thun d e r c l o u d base is 0.33 MN C –1 . The
thun d e r cl o u d bas e is 750 m above the groun d.

(i) Calculat e, just befor e disch a r g e , the pote n ti al differ e n c e betw e e n


the thun d e r cl o u d bas e and the grou n d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 875


(ii) The poten ti al differ e n c e V , betw e e n the thun d e r c l o u d bas e and
the grou n d , is given by

Qd
V = Aε 0

wher e Q is the char g e on the thun d e r c l o u d bas e, A is the are a of


the bas e, and d is the dista n c e betw e e n the bas e and the groun d.
The area of the bas e is 1.2 × 10 7 m 2 .

Calculat e, just befor e disch a r g e , the cha r g e on the bas e of the


thun d e r cl o u d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Dete r mi n e the ener gy rele a s e d in the disch a r g e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 876


56 0 . This ques tion is abou t microw a v e radia tio n.

A microw a v e tran s m i t t e r emits radia tio n of a single wavele n g t h towa r d s a


met al plat e along a line nor m al to the plat e. The radia tio n is reflec t e d back
towa r d s the tran s m i t t e r .

A microw a v e det ec t o r is moved along a line nor m a l to the microw a v e


tran s mi t t e r and the met al plat e. The det e c t o r recor d s a sequ e n c e of equ ally
spac e d maxim a and minim a of inten sity.

(a) Explain how thes e maxim a and minim a are form e d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) The microw av e det ec t o r is move d thro u g h 130 mm from one point of
minim u m intensi ty to anot h e r point of minim u m inte n si ty. On the way
it pass es thro u g h nine point s of maxim u m inte n sity. Calcula t e the

(i) wavele n g t h of the microw a v e s .

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 877


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 878


(ii) frequ e n c y of the microw a v e s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Descri b e and explain how it could be demo n s t r a t e d that the


microw av e s are polarize d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 879


IB Questionbank Physics 880
56 1 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r fission.

(a) A possible fission reac tio n is

235
92 U 01 n  93 26 Kr 15461Ba x 10 n .

(i) Stat e the value of x .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Show that the ener gy rele a s e d whe n one ura ni u m nucle u s
unde r g o e s fission in the rea c tion in (a) is about 2.8 × 10 –11 J.

Mass of neut r o n = 1.008 6 7 u


Mass of U-235 nucle u s = 234.99 3 3 3 u
Mass of Kr- 92 nucle u s = 91.90 6 4 5 u
Mass of Ba- 141 nucle u s = 140.88 3 5 4 u

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(iii) Stat e how the ene r gy of the neut r o n s produ c e d in the reac tion in
(a) is likely to com p a r e with the ene r gy of the neut r o n that
initiat e d the reac tion.

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 881


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 882


(b) Outline the role of the mode r a t o r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) (i) A nucle a r powe r plant that uses U-235 as fuel has a
useful powe r outpu t of 16 MW and an efficiency of 40 %.
Assumi n g that each fission of U-235 gives rise to
2.8 × 10 –11 J of ener gy, dete r m i n e the mas s of U-235 fuel used
per day.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(ii) Describ e how some reac t o r s are use d to prod u c e pluto ni u m- 239.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 883


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 884


(iii) Stat e the impor t a n c e of plutoniu m- 239.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) Some nuclea r react o r s have a hea t exch a n g e r tha t uses a gas that is
kept at const a n t volum e. The first law of the r m o d y n a m i c s can be
repr e s e n t e d as Q = ∆U + W .

(i) Stat e the mea ni n g s of Q and W .

Q: ....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

W : ....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Describ e how the first law of the r m o dy n a m i c s applie s in the


oper a tio n of the heat excha n g e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 885


.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 886


(iii) Discus s the ent r o py chan g e s that take plac e in the gas and in the
sur r o u n di n g s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 25 mark s )

56 2 . This ques tion is abou t collisions.

(a) Stat e the principl e of cons e r v a ti o n of mom e n t u m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 887


(b) In an expe ri m e n t , an air- rifle pellet is fired into a block of modelling
clay that res ts on a table.

(not to scale)

The air- rifle pellet rem ai n s inside the clay block afte r the impa c t.

As a result of the collision, the clay block slides along the table in a
str aig h t line and comes to res t. Furt h e r dat a relatin g to the
expe ri m e n t are given below.

Mass of air- rifle pellet = 2.0 g


Mass of clay block = 56 g
Velocity of impa c t of air- rifle pellet = 140 m s –1
Stoppi n g dista n c e of clay block = 2.8 m

(i) Show that the initial spee d of the clay block afte r the air- rifle
pellet strikes it is 4.8 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 888


(ii) Calculat e the aver a g e friction al force tha t the surfa c e of the table
exert s on the clay block whilst the clay block is moving.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(c) The experi m e n t is repe a t e d with the clay block plac e d at the edg e of
the table so that it is fired away from the table. The initial spee d of the
clay block is 4.3 m s –1 horizon t ally. The table surfa c e is 0.85 m above
the groun d.

(not to scale)

IB Questionbank Physics 889


(i) Ignorin g air resist a n c e , calcula t e the horizon t al dista n c e
travelled by the clay block befor e it strike s the groun d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(ii) The diagr a m in (c) shows the pat h of the clay block negle c ti n g air
resis t a n c e . On the diagr a m , dra w the app roxi m a t e shap e of the
path that the clay block will take assu mi n g that air resist a n c e
acts on the clay block.
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

56 3 . This ques tion is abou t the gravit a tio n a l field of Mar s.

(a) Define gravitational poten tial ener g y of a mas s at a point.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 890


.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 891


(b) The grap h shows the variatio n with dist a n c e r from the cent r e of Mars
of the gravit a tio n al poten ti al V . R is the radius of Mar s which is 3.3
Mm. (Values of V for r < R are not show n.)

A rocket of mas s 1.2 × 10 4 kg lifts off from the surfa c e of Mar s. Use
the grap h to

(i) calcula t e the chan g e in gravit a tion a l pote n ti al ene r gy of the


rocket at a dist an c e 4 R from the cent r e of Mars.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 892


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) show that the magni t u d e of the gravit a tion a l field stre n g t h at a
dist a n c e 4 R from the cent r e of Mars is 0.23 N kg –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Use the answ e r to (b)(ii) to show that the mag nit u d e of the
gravit atio n al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Mars is 3.7 N kg –1 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) The gravit a tio n al poten ti al at the surfa c e of Eart h is –63 MJ kg –1 .


Without any furth e r calcula tio n, comp a r e the esca p e spee d requir e d
to leave the surfac e of Eart h with that of the esca p e spe e d requi r e d to
leave the surf ac e of Mars.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 893


.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 894


56 4 . This ques tion is abou t the char a c t e r i s ti c s of the sta r s Procyon A and
Procyon B.

(a) The star s Procyon A and Procyon B are both locat e d in the sa m e
stellar clust e r in the const ell a tion Canis Minor. Disting uis h betw e e n a
const ell ation and a stellar clust e r .

Cons t ella tio n: ..........................................................................................


....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Stellar
clust e r : ............................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The table shows som e dat a for Procyon A and Procyon B.

Appar e n t Abs ol u t e Appar e n t


ma g n i t u d e ma g n i t u d e bri g h t n e s s
/ W m –2
Pro cy o n A +2. 6 8 2.06 × 10 –8
(P A ) +0. 4 0 0
Pro cy o n B +1 0. 7 +1 3. 0 1.46 × 10 –12
(P B )

Explain, using dat a from the table, why

(i) as viewed from Eart h, P A is muc h bright e r tha n P B .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 895


(ii) the luminosity of P A is muc h gre a t e r tha n that of P B .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Deduc e, using dat a from the table in (b), that P A and P B are
appr oxi m a t ely the sam e dista n c e from Eart h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) Stat e, using your ans w e r s to (a) and (c), why P A and P B might be
binar y star s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 896


LA
(e) Calcula t e, using dat a from the table in (b), the ratio LB whe r e L A is
the luminosi ty of P A and L B is the luminosity of P B .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(f) The surf ac e tem p e r a t u r e of both P A and P B is of the orde r of 10 4 K.


The luminosity of P A is of the orde r of 10 L S , whe r e L S is the luminosity
of the Sun. The diag r a m shows the grid of a Her tz s p r u n g–R u s s e ll
diagr a m .

Label, on the grid above, the app r oxi m a t e position of

(i) star P A with the lette r A.


(1)

(ii) star P B with the lette r B.


(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 897


(g) Identify the natu r e of star P B .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(h) On the grid provide d in (f), dra w the evolution a r y pat h of the sta r P A.
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 898


(i) The luminosity of the main sequ e n c e sta r Regul us is 150 L S . Assumin g
that, in the mas s–lu mi n o sity relation s hi p, n = 3.5 show tha t the mass
of Regulus is 4.2 M S wher e M S is the mas s of the Sun.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(j) The star Betelg e u s e is about five times the mass of Regulus. One
possible outco m e of the final sta g e of the evolution of Betelg e u s e is
for it to beco m e a black hole. Sta t e the

(i) othe r possible outco m e of the final sta g e of the evolution of


Betelg e u s e .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) reas o n why the final sta g e in (j)(i) is stabl e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 21 mark s )

56 5 . This ques tion is abou t the Big Bang model and red- shift.

(a) Descri b e what is mean t by the Big Bang model.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 899


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 900


(b) In the 1960s, Penzias and Wilson discove r e d a unifor m cosmic
backg r o u n d radiation (CMB) in the microw a v e region of the
elect r o m a g n e t i c spect r u m .

(i) Explain how the CMB is consist e n t with the Big Bang model.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Stat e why the red- shift of light from galaxies suppo r t s the Big
Bang model.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) Many galaxies are a grea t dista n c e from Eart h. Explain, with
refer e n c e to Hubbl e’s law, how the mea s u r e m e n t of the red- shift of
light from such galaxies ena bl e s their dist a n c e from Eart h to be
dete r m i n e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 901


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 902


(d) Stat e on e proble m associ a t e d with using Hubbl e’s law to det e r m i n e
the dista n c e of a galaxy a gre a t dista n c e from Eart h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

56 6 . This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the modula tio n of a car ri e r wave.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The grap h shows how the volta g e signal stre n g t h V of an amplitu d e
modul a t e d (AM) carri e r wave varies with time t .

IB Questionbank Physics 903


Use the grap h to det e r m i n e the

(i) frequ e n c y of the carri e r wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) frequ e n c y of the signal wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) amplitu d e of the signal wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) ban d wi d t h.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) A car rie r wave may also be frequ e n c y modul a t e d (FM). Stat e and
explain on e adva n t a g e of FM comp a r e d to AM.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 904


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 905


56 7 . This ques tion is abou t optical fibre s.

(a) Outline what is mean t by mat e r i al dispe r s io n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Sugg e s t why mat e ri al dispe r si o n sets a limit on the bit- rat e of
tran s m i s sio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) (i) The signal show n below is fed into a mono m o d e optical
fibre.

On the diagr a m above, show the effects of mat e ri a l dispe r s io n on


the input signal by drawi n g the sha p e of the sign al afte r it has
travelled a long dista n c e in the optical fibre.
(1)

(ii) Stat e and explain how the effect s on the signal draw n in (c)(i)
may be red uc e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 906


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 907


(d) Digital dat a are tran s m i t t e d in an optic al fibre with a glass core which
has a refr ac tive index of 1.5. The dur a tio n of one bit in the
tran s m i s sio n is 0.50 ns and eac h sam pl e in the signal consist s of 32
bits.

(i) Calculat e the time requi r e d for the signal to travel a dista n c e of
500 km.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the sam pling frequ e n c y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(e) The data in (d) are confide n ti al and mus t be prot e c t e d . Without taking
financi al costs into accou n t , outline whet h e r a direc t optical fibre
conn e c tio n or a trans m i s si o n throu g h a geosync h r o n o u s satellite
would be mor e suita bl e for the tra n sf e r of the s e dat a.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 908


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 909


56 8 . This ques tion is abou t an oper a tio n a l amplifier use d in a Sch mit t trigg e r
circuit.

(a) An oper a tio n al amplifier use s a ±6. 0 V supply. The oper a ti o n a l


amplifier oper a t e s in the non- inver ti n g mode.

(i) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the outp u t
voltag e V OUT of the amplifier varie s with the pote n ti al differ e n c e
V betw e e n the two input s of the amplifier.

(2)

(ii) With refer e n c e to the gra p h sketc h e d in (a)(i), explain why the
oper a tio n al amplifier is said to act as a comp a r a t o r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The diagr a m shows an oper a ti o n a l amplifier conn e c t e d as a Schmit t


trigg e r . The outp u t of the amplifie r is ±6. 0 V.

IB Questionbank Physics 910


IB Questionbank Physics 911
(i) Show that the upp e r switc hi n g volta g e of the trigg e r , i.e. the
input voltag e V IN for which the outp u t volta g e V OUT switc h e s
from –6.0 V to +6. 0 V, is 2.0 V.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The input signal V IN to the trigg e r is show n in the gra p h.

The switchin g voltag e s of the trigg e r are ±2. 0 V.

On the axes above, sketc h a gra p h to show how the outpu t


voltag e V OUT varies with time t .
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 912


(c) Explain the use of a Sch mit t trigg e r in the tra ns m i s sio n of digital
signals.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

56 9 . This ques tion is abou t laser s.

(a) With refer e n c e to the light waves emitt e d by a lase r, stat e wha t is
mea n t by the ter m s

(i) monoch r o m a t i c.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) cohe r e n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 913


(b) The diagr a m (not to scale) shows thr e e of the ene r gy levels of a
subs t a n c e used to produ c e lase r light.

The ene r gy of the grou n d stat e is E 0 .

(i) Stat e what is mean t by popula tion inver sion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Draw an arro w on the diagr a m to indic at e the tran si tion that
res ults in a popula tion inver sion. Label the arro w P.
(1)

(iii) Draw an arro w on the diagr a m to indic at e the tran si tion that
res ults in a pulse of lase r light. Label the arro w L.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 914


(iv) Deduc e that the wavel e n g t h of the emitt e d lase r light is 690 nm.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

57 0 . This ques tion is abou t an astr o n o m i c a l telesc o p e .

The diagr a m (not to scale) show s the arr a n g e m e n t of the two convex lense s
in an astro n o m i c al teles co p e in nor m a l adjus t m e n t .

The teles co p e is used to observ e a dista n t star. One of the focal points of
the eyepiec e lens is labelled F E .

(a) On the diag r a m above,

(i) label, with the symbol F E , the position of the othe r focal point of
the eyepiec e lens.
(1)

(ii) label, with the symbol F O , the position of the focal point of the
objective lens that is in betw e e n the two lens e s .
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 915


(iii) cons t r u c t rays to locat e the final image of the star.
(3)

(b) In a particul a r astr o n o m i c a l tele sc o p e , the eyepie c e lens has a powe r


of 40 diopt r e s and the objec tive lens a powe r of 0.80 diopt r e s .
Deter m i n e the angul a r mag nifica tion of the telesc o p e in nor m al
adjus t m e n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) In an astr o n o m i c al telesco p e the objective is ofte n mad e up from a


diver gi n g and a conver gi n g lens, whe r e a s the ape r t u r e of the eyepie c e
lens is usually res t ric t e d suc h tha t only rays close to the princip al axis
are viewed. Stat e the reas o n s for this.

Objective
lens: ................................................................................................
............

Eyepiec e
lens: ................................................................................................
.............
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 916


57 1 . This ques tion is abou t a diffraction gra ti n g.

(a) A par allel beam of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t nor m ally on a


diffraction grati n g. After passin g thro u g h the gra tin g it is broug h t to a
focus on a scre e n by a lens. The diagr a m shows a few of the slits of
the diffraction gratin g and the pat h of the light that is diffra c t e d at an
angle θ to each slit.

The dist an c e betw e e n the slits is d and the wavele n g t h of the light is
λ.

(i) On the diagr a m , const r u c t a line tha t ena bl e s the path differ e n c e
betw e e n the rays from two adjac e n t slits to be show n. Label the
path dist a n c e L .
(1)

(ii) Use your answ e r to (a)(i) to derive the condition, in ter m s of d


and θ, for ther e to be a maxim u m of inte n si ty at the point P on
the scre e n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 917


(b) For a partic ul a r gratin g, the dista n c e betw e e n adjac e n t slits is 2.0 ×
10 –6 m. Dete r mi n e, for light of wavele n g t h 520 nm, the maxim u m
theor e t i c al orde r of diffrac tio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

57 2 . This ques tion is abou t X-ray diffrac tion.

(a) The diagr a m repr e s e n t s som e of the atom s in two layer s of a cubic
cryst al lattice.

Use the diagr a m to outline how diffra c tio n arise s from the scat t e ri n g
of X-rays by a cryst al.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 918


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) X-rays of wavele n g t h 87 pm are scat t e r e d by a cryst al whos e atom s


are arr a n g e d in a cubic lattic e. The smalles t scat t e ri n g angle for
which a maxim u m of the scat t e r e d X-ray is obs e rv e d is 18°. Calcula t e
the spacin g betw e e n adjac e n t atom s in the cryst al.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

57 3 . This ques tion is abou t thin- film inte rf e r e n c e .

The diagr a m (not to scale) repr e s e n t s an expe ri m e n t a l set- up desig n e d to


meas u r e the diam e t e r of a hum a n hair.

A hair is used to sepa r a t e two micros c o p e slide s. A monoc h r o m a t i c bea m of


light is reflect e d onto the two slides by the glass plate. The light is the n
reflect e d from the two slides and tra n s m i t t e d throu g h the glass plat e and is
viewed by the travelling micros c o p e .

IB Questionbank Physics 919


(a) Stat e why the light reflect e d from the two micros c o p e slide s prod u c e s
a syst e m of interfe r e n c e fringe s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 920


(b) The condition that a brigh t fringe is obs e rv e d in the field of view of
the travelling micros co p e is given by the relation s hi p

 1
 m  λ
2t =  2

whe r e t is the thickn e s s of the air film form e d by the wedg e at the
point wher e the brigh t fringe is obse rv e d , m is an inte g e r and λ is the
wavelen g t h of the incide n t light.

1
Stat e the reas o n for the factor 2 in the relation s hi p.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) In the diagr a m , the lengt h of the slides is 5.00 cm. The wavele n g t h of
the monoc h r o m a t i c light is 5.92 × 10 –7 m. Using the travelling
micros c o p e it is observ e d tha t 50 fringe s occupy a lengt h of 0.940 cm.
Show that the diam e t e r of the hair use d to sepa r a t e the slide s is about
80 µm.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 921


57 4 . This ques tion is abou t a Galilea n tra n sfor m a t i o n and time dilation.

Ben is in a spac e s hi p that is travelling in a str ai g h t- line with const a n t spe e d


v as meas u r e d by Jill who is in a spa c e station.

Ben switch e s on a light puls e that bounc e s vertic ally (as obse rv e d by Ben)
betw e e n two horizon t al mirror s M 1 and M 2 sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e d . At
the insta n t that the mir ro r s are opposit e Jill, the pulse is just leaving the
mirro r M 2 . The spee d of light in air is c .

(a) On the diag r a m , sketc h the pat h of the light pulse betw e e n M 1 and M 2
as obse rv e d by Jill.

(1)

(b) The time for the puls e to travel from M 2 to M 1 as mea s u r e d by Jill is
∆t .

(i) Stat e, accor di n g to Jill, the dista n c e move d by the spac e s hi p in


time ∆t .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 922


(ii) Using a Galilean tran sfo r m a t i o n, derive an expr e s s io n for the
lengt h of the pat h of the light betw e e n M 2 and M 1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Stat e, accor di n g to speci al rela tivity, the lengt h of the pat h of the light
betw e e n M 2 and M 1 as me a s u r e d by Jill in ter m s of c and ∆t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) The time for the puls e to travel from M 2 to M 1 as mea s u r e d by Ben is
∆t ′. Use your answ e r s to (b)(i) and (c) to derive a rela tion s hi p betw e e n
∆t and ∆t ′.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(e) Accordi n g to a clock at res t with res p e c t to Jill, a clock in the


space s hi p runs slow by a factor of 2.3. Show that the spe e d v of the
space s hi p is 0.90c.

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 923


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 924


(f) The lengt h of a table in the spac e s hi p is mea s u r e d by Ben to be 1.8 m.
Calcula t e the lengt h of the table as mea s u r e d by Jill.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(g) The ques tion s (e) and (f) introd u c e the conc e p t s of time dilation and
lengt h cont r a c t io n. Discus s how muon dec ay in the atmo s p h e r e
provides expe ri m e n t a l evide n c e for the s e conc e p t s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 925


57 5 . This ques tion is abou t pair prod u c tio n and rela tivistic mech a ni c s .

A γ-photon of ener gy 2.46 MeV i s travelling close to the nucle u s of a gold


atom. It conver t s into an elect r o n (e –)–positro n (e + ) pair. Each particle
travels at 45° to the original direc tion of the photo n.

Imme di a t ely after the conve r sio n, the kinetic ene r gi e s of the elect r o n and
positr o n are equ al. The mag nit u d e of the recoil mom e n t u m of the gold
nucle u s is 0.880 MeV c –1 and is in the direc tion of the photo n.

(a) Calcula t e, imme di a t ely afte r the dec ay, the ma g nit u d e of the
mom e n t u m of the elect r o n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 926


(b) Calcula t e the value V of the pote n ti al differ e n c e thro u g h which an
elect r o n at rest must be accele r a t e d in orde r to have the sam e
magni t u d e of mom e n t u m as tha t in (a).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

57 6 . This ques tion is abou t gene r a l relativity.

Bob is stan di n g on the floor of a spac e s hi p and he throw s a ball in a


direction par allel to the floor.

Betw e e n leaving Bob’s hand and landin g on the floor, the ball follows the
path show n.

(a) Stat e and explain whet h e r , from the path followe d by the ball, Bob can
ded uc e that the space s hi p is at res t on the surfa c e of a plane t.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 927


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 928


(b) Outline how the concep t of spac e ti m e can be use d to explain the

(i) traject o r y of the ball if the spa c e s hi p is at rest on the surfa c e of a


plane t.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) natu r e of a black hole.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Calcula t e the radius that Eart h would have to have in orde r for it to
behave as a black hole. The mass of Eart h is 6.0 × 10 24 kg.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 929


57 7 . This ques tion is abou t soun d inte nsi ty.

(a) Define

(i) inten si t y of sound .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) soun d inten sit y level .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Stat e two ways by which the soun d pre s s u r e at the ear dru m is
amplified befor e reac hi n g the cochle a r fluid.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) A stud e n t with a hea ri n g proble m can hea r sound s clea rly whe n the
sound intensity level is 65 dB or high e r . In a large lectu r e hall, at a
dista n c e of 25 m from the lectu r e r , the sound inte n si ty level is 55 dB.

Deter m i n e the maxim u m dista n c e from the lectu r e r at which the


stud e n t can hea r clearly. The inte n si ty of sound a dista n c e d from a
P
2
sourc e of powe r P is given by I = 4πd .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 930


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 931


57 8 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.

(a) Define half- value thickn e s s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The half- value thickn e s s in tiss ue for X-rays of a specific ene r gy is
3.50 mm. Deter m i n e the fraction of the incide n t inten sity of X-rays
that has bee n tran s m i t t e d throu g h tiss ue of thickn e s s 6.00 mm.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) For X-rays of high e r ener gy tha n thos e in (b), the half- value thickn e s s
is grea t e r than 3.50 mm. Stat e and explain the effect, if any, of this
chan g e on your answ e r in (b).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) X-ray imag e s are often blur r e d des pit e the patie n t re m a i ni n g

IB Questionbank Physics 932


station a r y during expos u r e .

(i) Stat e on e possible physic al mec h a ni s m for the blur rin g of an X-


ray imag e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 933


(ii) For the physical mec h a ni s m stat e d in (d)(i) sugg e s t how X-ray
imag es can be mad e mor e distinc t.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(e) The expos u r e time of photo g r a p h i c film to X-rays is longe r than that
for visible light. The expos u r e time for X-rays may be red uc e d with the
use of enh a n c e m e n t tech ni q u e s , such as that of an inte nsifying scre e n.
Outline how an intensifying scr e e n redu c e s the expos u r e time.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 934


57 9 . This ques tion is abou t laser s in medicin e.

In a proce d u r e called pulse oxime t ry, lase r s are use d to mea s u r e the
perc e n t a g e of oxygen in the blood. Outline how laser s are use d in this
proce d u r e .

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................

.........................................................................................................................
........................
(Tota l 3 mark s )

58 0 . This ques tion is abou t dosim et r y.

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n the ter m s abso r b e d dos e and dos e equivale n t.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A bet a sour c e is inject e d into a tum ou r in a patie n t . The following dat a
are availabl e.

Mass of tumo u r = 65 g
Activity of sour c e = 4.8 × 10 8 Bq
Averag e ene r gy of emitt e d elect r o n s = 1.2
MeV

IB Questionbank Physics 935


Quality factor of bet a radia tion = 1.0

IB Questionbank Physics 936


(i) Dete r mi n e the dose equivale n t over a period of fiftee n minut e s
after the beta sour c e is inject e d into the tumo u r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(ii) Stat e on e reas o n why the dose equivale n t det e r m i n e d in (b)(i) is


only appr oxi m a t e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Stat e on e reas o n why patie n t s might be willing to subjec t


them s elve s to such a conside r a b l e amou n t of radia tio n as
det e r m i n e d in (b)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 937


58 1 . This ques tion is abou t lepton s and meson s .

(a) Lepto n s are a class of elem e n t a r y particle s and eac h lepton has its
own antip a r ti cl e. Stat e wha t is mea n t by an

(i) elem e n t a r y particle.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) antip a r t i cl e of a lepton.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The elect r o n is a lepton and its antip a r t i cl e is the positro n. The
following reaction can take plac e betw e e n an elect r o n and positro n.

e– + e+ → γ + γ

Sket ch the Feyn m a n diagr a m for this reac tion and identify on your
diagr a m any virtual particl e s.

(3)

(c) Unlike lepton s , the π + meso n is not an elem e n t a r y particle. Sta t e the

(i) quar k s truct u r e of the π + meso n.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 938


(ii) reas o n why the following rea c tio n does not occur.

ρ+ + ρ+ → ρ+ + π +

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 939


(d) Stat e the Pauli exclusion principle.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(e) Explain, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r to (d), why qua r k s are
assig n e d the prope r t y of colour.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(f) The pion was sugg e s t e d to be the media ti n g particle of the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s . Given that the rang e of the stron g
nuclea r inter a c tio n betw e e n nucleo n s is about 10 –15 m, show tha t the
rest mas s of the pion is about 100 MeV c –2 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 940


IB Questionbank Physics 941
58 2 . This ques tion is abou t particle acc el e r a t o r s .

(a) The diagr a m (not to scale) rep r e s e n t s a view from above of the
esse n ti al featu r e s of a cyclotr o n.

The positive par ticles emitt e d by the sour c e , travel in an anticlock wis e
directio n arou n d the Ds.

(i) Stat e the direction of the mag n e ti c field tha t is use d in this
cyclot ro n.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) On the diagr a m , draw the pat h of a positive particle betw e e n the
sour c e and the det ec t o r .
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 942


(iii) Explain why an alter n a ti n g pote n ti al of a partic ul a r frequ e n c y is
applied to the Ds as show n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) Outline why much highe r ene r gi e s can be achieve d in a synch r o t r o n


than in a cyclotr o n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) In a particul a r expe ri m e n t , proton s in a synch r o t r o n are accel e r a t e d


to an ene r gy of 2.0 GeV. Calcula t e the kinetic ene r gy of the proton s in
GeV.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 943


(d) In the Large Had r o n Collider , proto n s can be accel e r a t e d to ene r gi e s
of 7 TeV. Deduc e whet h e r this value of ene r gy is sufficie nt to mimic
the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e , 10 32 K, shor tly afte r the Big Bang.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

58 3 . This ques tion is abou t the stan d a r d model.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the sta n d a r d model.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Use the cons e r v a ti o n of lepton num b e r and cha r g e to dedu c e the
nat u r e of the par ticle x in the following rea c tion.

νe + μ– → e – + x

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 944


(c) Stat e what is mea n t by dee p inelas tic scatt e r i n g.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 945


(d) Outline how deep inelas tic scat t e ri n g expe ri m e n t s provide evide n c e
for asym p t o ti c freedo m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

58 4 . A volum e is mea s u r e d to be 52 mm 3 . This volum e in m 3 is

A. 5.2 × 10 3 m 3 .

B. 5.2 × 10 1 m 3 .

C. 5.2 × 10 –1 m 3 .

D. 5.2 × 10 –8 m 3 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 946


58 5 . The mas s e s and weight s of differ e n t object s are inde p e n d e n t ly me a s u r e d .
The gra p h is a plot of weight vers u s mas s that includ e s erro r bars.

These experi m e n t al res ult s sugg e s t tha t the

A. mea s u r e m e n t s show a significa n t syste m a t i c erro r but small ran do m


erro r.

B. mea s u r e m e n t s show a significa n t rand o m erro r but small syste m a t i c


erro r.

C. mea s u r e m e n t s are preci s e but not acc u r a t e .

D. weight of an object is propo r ti o n al to its mas s.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

58 6 . A skydive r jumpe d out of an airpla n e . On reac hi n g a ter mi n a l spe e d of 60 m


s –1 , she open e d her par a c h u t e . Which of the following desc ri b e s her motion
after openin g her par a c h u t e ?

A. She went upwa r d s for a shor t time, befor e falling to Eart h at a spe e d
of 60 m s –1 .

B. She contin u e d downw a r d s at 60 m s –1 , but hit the grou n d with less


force.

C. She contin u e d to fall but reac h e d a new ter mi n al spe e d of less than 60
m s –1 .

D. She went upwa r d s for a shor t time, befor e falling to Eart h at a spe e d
of less than 60 m s –1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 947


58 7 . The gra p h is a spee d vers u s time gra p h for an objec t tha t is moving in a
str ai g h t line.

The dista n c e travelled by the objec t durin g the first 4.0 secon d s is

A. 80 m.

B. 40 m.

C. 20 m.

D. 5 m.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 948


58 8 . The diagr a m shows a girl att e m p ti n g (but failing) to lift a heavy suitc a s e of
weigh t W. The mag ni t u d e of the vertic al upw a r d s pull of the girl on the
suitca s e is P and the mag nit u d e of the vertic al reac tio n of the floor on the
suitca s e is R .

Which equa tio n corr e c tly relat e s W , P and R ?

A. W = P+ R

B. W > P+ R

C. W < P+ R

D. W = P= R
(Tot al 1 mar k )

58 9 . Objects A and B collide toget h e r . They end up joined toge t h e r and


station a r y. During the collision, a force + F is exert e d on object A by objec t
B. Accor din g to New to n’s third law, the r e will also be a force of

A. –F acting on object B .

B. –F acting on object A .

C. + F acting on object B .

D. + F acting on object A .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 949


59 0 . A lift (elevato r ) is oper a t e d by an elect ric motor. It moves betw e e n the 10th
floor and the 2nd floor at a const a n t spee d. One main ene r gy
tran sfor m a t i o n during this journ e y is

A. gravit atio n al poten ti al ene r gy → kinetic ene r gy.

B. elect ric al ener gy → kinetic ene r gy.

C. kinetic ener gy → ther m a l ene r gy.

D. elect ric al ener gy → ther m a l ene r gy.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

59 1 . A com m u ni c a ti o n s satellit e is moving at a cons t a n t spee d in a circul a r orbit


arou n d Eart h. At any given insta n t in time, the res ult a n t force on the
satellite is

A. zero.

B. equal to the gravit a tion al force on the satellit e.

C. equal to the vector sum of the gravit a tio n a l force on the satellite and
the cent ri p e t a l force.

D. equal to the force exer t e d by the sat ellite’s rocke t s .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

59 2 . A tem p e r a t u r e of 23 K is equival e n t to a tem p e r a t u r e of

A. –300 °C.

B. –250 °C.

C. +2 5 0 °C.

D. +3 0 0 °C.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 950


59 3 . The ratio

t h e r m acla p a c itoyf a s a m p leo f c op p e r


s p e c ifich e a tc a p a c itof
y copp e r

A. does not have any unit.

B. has unit J kg –1 K–1 .

C. has unit J kg –1 .

D. has unit kg.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

59 4 . In the kinetic model of an ideal gas, it is assu m e d tha t

A. the forces betw e e n the molec ul e s of the gas and the cont ai n e r are
always zero.

B. the inter m ol e c ul a r pot en ti al ene r gy of the molec ul e s of the gas is


const a n t .

C. the kinetic ener gy of a given molec ul e of the gas is const a n t .

D. the mom e n t u m of a given molec ul e of the gas is const a n t .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 951


59 5 . Which gra p h corr e c tly shows how the accele r a ti o n, a of a particl e
unde r g oi n g SHM varies with its displac e m e n t , x from its equilibriu m
position?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 952


59 6 . A mas s on the end of a horizon t al sprin g is displa c e d from its equilibri u m
position by a dista n c e A and rele a s e d . Its subs e q u e n t oscillation s have total
ene r gy E and time period T.

An identical mas s is attac h e d to an identic al sprin g. The maxim u m


displac e m e n t is 2 A . Assumin g this sprin g obeys Hooke’s law, which of the
following gives the corr ec t time period and total ene r gy?

New ti m e
New en e r g y
peri o d
A. T 4E
B. T 2E
C. 2T 4E
D. 2T 2E

(Tot al 1 mar k )

59 7 . In which of the following regions of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m is


radi ation of wavele n g t h 600 nm locat e d ?

A. microw av e s

B. radio waves

C. visible light

D. X-rays
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 953


59 8 . What is the best esti m a t e for the refra c tiv e index of a mediu m in which
light travels at a spee d of 2.7 × 10 8 m s –1 ?

A. 0.9

B. 1.0

C. 1.1

D. 2.7
(Tot al 1 mar k )

59 9 . Two rect a n g ul a r blocks, X and Y, of the sa m e mat e ri al have differ e n t


dime n sio n s but the sam e over all resist a n c e . Which of the following
equ a tio n s is corr ec t ?

A. resistivity of X × lengt h of X = resistivity of Y × lengt h of Y

le n g t hof X le n g t ho f Y

B. c r os s e c t io n a lr e ao f X c r o s s e c t io n a lr e ao f Y

C. resistivity of X × cross section a l are a of X = resistivity of Y × cross


section al area of Y

le n g t hof X le n g t hof Y

D. c r os s e c t io n a lr e ao f Y c r o s ss e c t io n a lr e ao f X
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 954


60 0 . Two 6 Ω resis to r s are conn e c t e d in serie s with a 6 V cell. A stud e n t
inc orr e c t l y conne c t s an am m e t e r and a voltm e t e r as show n below.

The readi n g s on the am m e t e r and on the voltm e t e r are

Am m e t e r Volt m e t e r
readi n g / A read i n g / V
A. 0.0 0.0
B. 0.0 6.0
C. 1.0 0.0
D. 1.0 6.0
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 955


60 1 . The diagr a m shows a pote n ti al divide r circuit.

In orde r to incre a s e the readi n g on the voltm e t e r the

A. tem p e r a t u r e of R should be incr e a s e d .

B. tem p e r a t u r e of R should be decr e a s e d .

C. light intensity on R should be incr e a s e d .

D. light intensity on R should be decr e a s e d .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 956


60 2 . The mas s of Eart h is M E , its radius is R E and the mag nit u d e of the
gravit a tion al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Eart h is g . The univer s a l
g
gravit a tion al cons t a n t is G. The ratio G is equal to

ME

A. R E2

R E2
B. ME

C. M ER E

D. 1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

60 3 . Which diagr a m best repr e s e n t s the elect ric field due to a nega tively
char g e d cond u c ti n g sphe r e ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 957


60 4 . A point mas s carrie s a positive cha r g e + Q and is at rest in a ma gn e t i c field.
The field is in the direction show n.

The mag n e t i c force acting on the cha r g e is

A. from left to right in the plan e of the page .

B. from top to botto m in the plan e of the page .

C. into the plane of the pag e.

D. zero.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

60 5 . The num b e r of neut r o n s and the num b e r of proto n s in a nucle u s of an atom


235
of the isotop e of urani u m 9 2 U are

Ne u t r o n s Prot o n s
A. 92 143
B. 143 92
C. 235 92
D. 92 235
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 958


60 6 . A sam pl e cont ai n s an amou n t of radioa c tive mat e ri a l with a half- life of 3.5
days. After 2 weeks the fraction of the radioa c tiv e mat e ri al rem ai ni n g is

A. 94 %.

B. 25 %.

C. 6 %.

D. 0 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

60 7 . The rest mas s of a proto n is 938 MeV c –2 . The ene r gy of a proton at res t is

A. 9.38 J.

B. 9.38 × 10 8 × (3 ×1 0 8 ) 2 J.

C. 9.38 × 10 8 eV.

D. 9.38 × 10 8 × (3 × 10 8 ) 2 eV.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

60 8 . The efficiency of a mode r n natu r a l gas powe r station is appr oxi m a t e l y

A. 10 %.

B. 50 %.

C. 5 %.

D. 90 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 959


y @60 9 . The ene r gy sourc e that cur r e n tly provide s the gre a t e s t propo r tio n of
the world’s total ener gy dem a n d is

A. coal.

B. oil.

C. nat u r al gas.

D. urani u m .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

61 0 . In a nuclea r powe r station, ura ni u m is use d as the ene r gy sour c e and


plutoni u m- 239 is produ c e d .
Which of the following is true?

A. Plutoni u m- 239 is produ c e d by nucle a r fusion.

B. A mode r a t o r is used to abso r b plutoni u m- 239.

C. Cont r ol rods are used to slow down pluto ni u m- 239.

D. Plutoni u m- 239 can be use d as a fuel in anot h e r type of nucle a r


reac t o r .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

61 1 . One dis a d v a n t a g e of using photovolt aic cells to powe r a dom e s tic wat e r
heat e r is that

A. solar ene r gy is a ren e w a b l e sourc e of ene r gy.

B. the powe r radiat e d by the Sun varies significa n tly depe n di n g on the
weat h e r .

C. a large are a of photovolt aic cells would be nee d e d .

D. photovolt aic cells cont ai n CFCs, which cont ri b u t e to the gre e n h o u s e


effect.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 960


61 2 . Gree n h o u s e gas es

A. reflect infrar e d radiation but absor b ultr aviole t radia tion.

B. reflect ultr aviolet radia tio n but absor b infra r e d radia tion.

C. tran s m i t infra r e d radiation but absor b ultraviole t radia tion.

D. tran s m i t ultr aviolet radiation but absor b infra r e d radia tion.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

61 3 . The rat e of global war mi n g might be redu c e d by

A. replaci n g the use of coal and oil with nat u r a l gas.

B. a redu c tio n in the Eart h’s albe do.

C. a redu c tio n in car bo n fixation.

D. an incr e a s e in defor e s t a t io n.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 961


61 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e of the met al mer c u r y.

The resist a n c e R of a sam pl e of me rc u r y was mea s u r e d as a function of the


tem p e r a t u r e T of the sam pl e. The sam pl e was cooled and dat a points wer e
take n at tem p e r a t u r e interval s of 0.2 K. The unc e r t a i n ti e s in R and T are
too small to be show n on the gra p h.

The hypot h e s i s is that resist a n c e is propo r tio n a l to absolut e tem p e r a t u r e


for tem p e r a t u r e s grea t e r than 4.5 K.

(a) (i) Sugg e s t whet h e r the dat a suppo r t s the hypot h e s i s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Draw a line of best fit throu g h the dat a.


(2)

(b) Stat e the value of R for which the rat e of cha n g e of resist a n c e of the
sam pl e with tem p e r a t u r e is least.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 962


(c) At a tem p e r a t u r e T C the resist a n c e sudd e nly beco m e s zero.

(i) Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the possibl e rang e of the


tem p e r a t u r e T C .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Stat e, to the corr e c t num b e r of signific a n t figur e s , the value of T C


and its unce r t ai n t y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Outline how the tem p e r a t u r e T C could be me a s u r e d more


precis ely.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) Outline two reas o n s why you could not use the dat a to det e r m i n e an
accu r a t e value for R at room tem p e r a t u r e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 963


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 964


61 5 . This ques tion is abou t impuls e.

(a) A net force of magni t u d e F acts on a body. Define the impuls e I of the
force.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A ball of mas s 0.075 0 kg is travelling horizont a lly with a spe e d of 2.20
m s –1 . It strike s a vertical wall and rebo u n d s horizon t ally.

Due to the collision with the wall, 20 % of the ball’s initial kinetic
ener gy is dissip a t e d .

(i) Show that the ball rebou n d s from the wall with a spee d of 1.97 m
s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Show that the impuls e given to the ball by the wall is 0.313 N s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 965


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 966


(c) The ball strikes the wall at time t = 0 and leave s the wall at time t = T .

The sketc h gra p h shows how the forc e F that the wall exert s on the
ball is assu m e d to vary with time t .

The time T is meas u r e d elect r o ni c ally to equ al 0.089 4 s.

Use the impuls e given in (b)(ii) to estim a t e the aver a g e value of F.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

61 6 . This ques tion is abou t ener gy tra n sf e r s .

(a) Ener gy degr a d a t i o n takes plac e in the ene r gy tra n sfo r m a t i o n s which
occur in the gene r a t i o n of elect ric al powe r. Explain wha t is mea n t in
this context by ener gy degr a d a t i o n .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 967


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 968


Som e of the ene r gy tran sfo r m a t i o n s that take plac e in a coal- fired powe r
station are repr e s e n t e d by the Sank ey diag r a m below.

(b) (i) Stat e what is repr e s e n t e d by the width w .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) At the thre e places ma rk e d A, B and C on the diagr a m , ene r gy is


degr a d e d .
Identify the proce s s by which the ene r gy is degr a d e d in eac h of
the places.

A: .....................................................................................................
.................

.........................................................................................................
..................

B: .....................................................................................................
.................

.........................................................................................................
..................

C: .....................................................................................................
.................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 969


IB Questionbank Physics 970
61 7 . This ques tion is abou t gree n h o u s e effect

(a) The grap h shows part of the absor p ti o n spec t r u m of nitrog e n oxide
(N 2 O) in which the intensity of absor b e d radia tio n A is plott e d agains t
frequ e n c y f.

(i) Stat e the region of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m to which the


reson a n t frequ e n cy of nitrog e n oxide belong s.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Using your ans w e r to (a)(i), explain why nitrog e n oxide is


classified as a gree n h o u s e gas.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 971


..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 972


(b) Define emis si vit y and albedo .

Emissivity: ...............................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Albedo: ....................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The diagr a m shows a simple ene r gy bala nc e climat e model in which
the atmo s p h e r e and the surfa c e of Eart h are two bodie s eac h at
const a n t tem p e r a t u r e . The surfa c e of the Eart h rec eive s both solar
radiatio n and radiation emitt e d from the atmo s p h e r e . Assum e tha t the
Eart h’s surfac e beh av e s as a black body.

The following data are availa ble for this model.

aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the atmo s p h e r e of Eart h = 242 K


emissivity, e of the atmos p h e r e of Eart h = 0.720
aver a g e albed o, α of the atm os p h e r e of Eart h = 0.280
solar inten sity at top of atmo s p h e r e = 344 W
m –2
aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the surfa c e of Eart h = 288 K

IB Questionbank Physics 973


Use the data to show that the

(i) powe r radia t e d per unit are a of the atmo s p h e r e is 140 W m –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) solar powe r absor b e d per unit are a at the surfa c e of the Eart h is
248 W m –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) It is hypot h e s iz e d that, if the produ c tio n of gre e n h o u s e gas e s wer e to


stay at its pres e n t level the n the tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s
atmo s p h e r e would event u a lly rise by 6.0 K.

Calcula t e the powe r per unit are a that would then be

(i) radi at e d by the atmos p h e r e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) abso r b e d by the Eart h’s surfa c e .

.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics 974
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 975


(e) Estim a t e , using your ans w e r to (d)(ii), the incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of
Eart h’s surfac e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

61 8 . This ques tion is abou t motion of a ball falling in oil.

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n aver a g e spee d and insta n t a n e o u s spe e d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 976


(b) A small steel ball of mass M is dropp e d from rest into a long vertic al
tube that cont ain s oil.

The sketc h gra p h shows how the spe e d v of the ball varies with time t .

Explain how you would use the gra p h to find the aver a g e spe e d of the
ball betw e e n t = 0 and t = t 1 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The gradi e n t of the grap h at t = t 1 is k . Deduc e an expr e s s io n in ter m s


of k , M and g , the accel e r a t io n of free fall, for the ma g nit u d e of the
friction al force F acting on the ball at t = t 1 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 977


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 978


(d) Stat e and explain the mag nit u d e of the friction al force acting on the
ball at t = t 2 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

61 9 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion and wave s.

(a) A particle of mas s m that is att a c h e d to a light spring is execu ti n g


simple har m o ni c motion in a hori z o n t a l dire c t i o n .

Stat e the condition relati n g to the net force acting on the particle that
is neces s a r y for it to execut e simple har m o ni c motion.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 979


(b) The grap h shows how the kine tic ene r gy E K of the par ticle in (a) varies
with the displac e m e n t x of the par ticle from equilibri u m .

(i) Using the axes above, sket c h a gra p h to show how the pote n ti al
ene r gy of the particle varie s with the displa c e m e n t x .
(2)

(ii) The mas s of the par ticle is 0.30 kg. Use dat a from the gra p h to
show that the frequ e n c y f of oscillation of the par ticle is 2.0 Hz.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 980


(c) The par ticles of a mediu m M 1 throu g h which a tra n sv e r s e wave is
travelling, oscillat e with the sam e frequ e n c y and amplit u d e as that of
the par ticle in (b).

(i) Describ e, with refer e n c e to the prop a g a t i o n of ene r gy thro u g h


the mediu m , what is me a n t by a tran s v e r s e wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The spee d of the wave is 0.80 m s –1 . Calcula t e the wavele n g t h of


the wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) The diagr a m shows wavefro n t s of the waves in (c) incide n t on a


boun d a r y XY betw e e n mediu m M 1 and anot h e r mediu m M 2 .

IB Questionbank Physics 981


The angle betw e e n the nor m a l, and the dire c tion of travel of the
wavefro n t s is 30°.

IB Questionbank Physics 982


(i) The spee d of the wave in M 1 is 0.80 m s –1 . The spe e d of the
waves in M 2 is
1.2 m s –1 .
Calculat e the angle betw e e n the dire c tion of travel of the
wavefro n t s in M 2 and the nor m al.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) On the diagr a m , sket c h the wavefro n t s in M 2 .


(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

62 0 . This ques tion is abou t decay of radiu m- 226.

(a) A nucleu s of the isotop e radiu m- 226 (Ra) unde r g o e s α-dec ay with a
half- life of
1.6 × 10 3 yr to form a nucle u s of rado n (Rn).

Define the ter m s isotop e and half- life .

Isotop e: ...................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Half-
life: ..................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 983


.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 984


(b) Using the grid below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the activity A of a
sam pl e of radiu m- 226 (Ra) would be expe c t e d to vary with time t over
a period of about 5.0 × 10 3 yr.
The activity of the sam pl e at time t = 0 is A 0 .

(3)

(c) The nucle a r reaction equa tio n for the dec ay of radiu m- 226 (Ra) may
be writt e n as

226
8 8 Ra Rn α

(i) Stat e the value of the proto n num b e r and neut r o n num b e r of the
isotop e of rado n (Rn).

Proto n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
...............

Neut r o n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
.............
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 985


(ii) Outline why the binding ene r gy of Ra is less tha n that of Rn.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(d) The following data are availa ble.

mas s of Ra = 226.02 5 4 u
mas s of Rn = 222.01 7 5 u
mas s of α = 4.002 6 u

Show that the ene r gy rele a s e d in the decay of a Ra nucle u s is 4.94


MeV.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

62 1 . This ques tion is abou t inter n al ene r gy, hea t and ideal gas e s .

(a) The inter n al ene r gy of a piec e of coppe r is incr e a s e d by hea tin g.

(i) Explain what is mea n t, in this cont ext, by inte r n a l ene r gy and
heati n g.

Inte r n al
ener gy: ....................................................................................
.............

IB Questionbank Physics 986


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

Heatin g: ..........................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The piece of copp e r has mass 0.25 kg. The incre a s e in inte r n a l
ene r gy of the coppe r is 1.2 × 10 3 J and its incr e a s e in
tem p e r a t u r e is 20 K. Estim a t e the specific heat capa city of
coppe r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) An ideal gas is kept in a cylinde r by a piston tha t is free to move. The
gas is heat e d such that its inte r n a l ene r gy incr e a s e s and the pres s u r e
rem ai n s const a n t . Use the molec ul a r model of ideal gase s to explain

(i) the incr e a s e in inter n a l ene r gy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) how the pres s u r e rem ai n s cons t a n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 987


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 988


62 2 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c fields and elect ri c circuits.

(a) Two par allel, char g e d met al plate s A and B are in a vacuu m .

At a par ticul a r insta n t an elect r o n is at point P.

On the diag r a m , draw

(i) the elect ric field patt e r n due to the plate s .


(3)

(ii) an arrow to repr e s e n t the dire c tion of the force on the elect r o n at
P.
(1)

(b) The accele r a ti o n of the elect r o n at P is 8.8 × 10 14 m s –2 . Dete r m i n e


the mag nit u d e of the elect ric field str e n g t h at the point P.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The elect ric pote n ti al ener gy of the elect r o n cha n g e s by 1.9 × 10 –17 J
as it moves from one plat e to the othe r. Show tha t the pote n ti al

IB Questionbank Physics 989


differ e n c e betw e e n the plate s is 120 V.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) A resis to r R and a filam e n t lamp L are conne c t e d in serie s with a


batt e r y. The batt e r y has an emf of 12 V and inte r n a l resis t a n c e 4.0 Ω.
The poten t i al differ e n c e acros s the filam e n t of the lamp is 3.0 V and
the cur r e n t in the filam e n t is 0.25 A.

(i) Define emf and desc ri b e the conc e p t of inte r n a l resis t a n c e .

emf:

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

Inte r n al resist a n c e :

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Calculat e the total powe r supplie d by the batt e r y.

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 990


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 991


(iii) Calculat e the powe r dissip a t e d in the exte r n a l circuit.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) Dete r mi n e the resist a n c e of the resisto r R.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

62 3 . This ques tion is abou t vision and resolution.

(a) Comp a r e scotopic with photopic vision.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 992


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 993


(b) The grap h shows the variation with wavele n g t h λ of the sensitivity I,
of the rod and the cone cells of a hum a n eye.

A red piece of pape r and a blue piece of pape r are both viewe d in very
low inten si ty light.
Each piece of pap e r reflec t s the sam e inte nsi ty of light.

With refer e n c e to the grap h, sta t e and explain which one of the two
pieces of pap e r will be mor e clearly visible.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 994


(c) The diam e t e r of the pupil of a hum a n eye is 1.5 mm.

(i) Calculat e the minim u m angul a r sepa r a ti o n of two point s tha t can
be resolved by the hum a n eye for light of wavele n g t h 680 nm.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Two star s , the sam e dista n c e from Eart h, are sepa r a t e d by a
dist a n c e of
4.0 × 10 13 m.
Both star s emit light of wavele n g t h 680 nm.

The two star s are just resolve d by an obse rv e r on Eart h. Estim a t e


the dista n c e to the two sta r s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

62 4 . This ques tion is abou t polarizatio n.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by polariz e d light.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 995


(b) A ray of light is inciden t on the surfac e of a lake. The angle of
inciden c e is φ.

The reflect e d light is comple t e ly polariz e d horizont a lly.


The refra ctive index of wate r is n .

(i) On the diagr a m above draw the refr a c t e d ray.


(1)

(ii) Use the diagr a m to deduc e the relation s hi p betw e e n φ and n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) The refr ac tive index of the wat e r is 1.3. Calcula t e the value of φ.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 996


(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 997


62 5 . This ques tion is abou t the Dopple r effect.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the Dopple r effect.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Ultra s o u n d of frequ e n c y 5.2 MHz is direc t e d from a station a r y sourc e


towar d s red blood cells in an art e r y. A simplified diag r a m is show n
below in which the blood cells are travelling in the sam e direc tion.

The ultr a s o u n d is reflect e d from the cells and is rec eive d back at the
sourc e.
The meas u r e d frequ e n cy shift is 3.5 kHz. The spe e d of ultr a s o u n d in
blood is
Δf 2v

c = 1.5 × 10 3 m s –1 . The freq u e n c y shift is det e r m i n e d from f c .

(i) Stat e the significan c e of the factor of 2 in the form ul a for the
frequ e n c y shift.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the spee d of the red blood cells.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 998


.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 999


(iii) Stat e two reas o n s why, in prac tic e, the frequ e n c y shift will have
a rang e of values.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

62 6 . This ques tion is abou t the photo el e c t r i c effect.

(a) In the photo el ec t r i c effect, elect r o n s are emitt e d from a met allic
surfac e only if the wavele n g t h of the light incide n t on the surfa c e is
below a cert ai n value called the thr e s h ol d wavele n g t h .

Explain this obse rv a tio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) A monoch r o m a t i c sour c e of powe r 3.0 W emits light of wavele n g t h


4.60 × 10 –7 m. All of the light is incide n t on a met al surfa c e and
caus e s elect r o n s to be emitt e d at a rat e of
4.0 × 10 10 s –1 . The thre s h ol d wavele n g t h of the met al is 5.50 × 10 –7 m.

Calcula t e the

IB Questionbank Physics 1000


(i) photo el e c t r i c cur r e n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1001


(ii) work function of the met al.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) the ratio of the rate of elect r o n emission to the rat e at which the
photo n s are incide n t on the met al.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Light from a differ e n t sour c e is incide n t on the met al in (b). The new
sourc e has power 6.0 W and emits light of wavele n g t h 9.00 × 10 –7 m.

Stat e the effect of thes e cha n g e s , if any, on your ans w e r to (b)(i).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1002


62 7 . This ques tion is abou t qua n t u m aspe c t s of the elect r o n .

The gra p h shows the variation with dist a n c e x of the wavefu n c tio n Ψ of an
elect r o n at a par tic ul a r inst a n t of time. The elect r o n is confine d within a
region of lengt h 2.0 × 10 –10 m.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the wavefun c tio n of an elec t r o n .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Using data from the grap h esti m a t e , for this elect r o n ,

(i) its mom e n t u m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1003


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1004


(ii) the unce r t a i n t y in its mom e n t u m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

62 8 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r ene r gy levels and radioa c tive dec ay.

The diagr a m shows som e of the nucle a r ene r gy levels of the boron isotop e
12 12
5 B and the car bo n isotop e 6 C . Differe n c e s in ene r gy betw e e n the levels

are indicat e d on the diagr a m . A partic ul a r bet a dec ay of boron and a


gam m a decay of car bo n are ma rk e d on the diagr a m .

(a) Calcula t e the wavel en g t h of the photon emitt e d in the gam m a dec ay.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1005


.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1006


(b) Calcula t e the maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of the elect r o n emitt e d in the
beta decay indicat e d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) Explain why the elect r o n s emitt e d in the indic at e d beta decay of boron
do not always have the kinetic ene r gy calcul a t e d in (b).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

62 9 . This ques tion is abou t the com p a c t disc (CD).

The diagr a m shows light from a laser tha t is incide n t on a CD.

The reflect e d light is used to rea d the dat a stor e d on the CD. The dept h of
the pits is d and the wavelen g t h of the light is λ.

IB Questionbank Physics 1007


(a) Explain the relation s hi p betw e e n λ and d that allows the lase r bea m to
dete c t the edge of a pit.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) The wavele n g t h of the lase r light is 640 nm. Calcula t e the pit dept h d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) The diagr a m shows a serie s of pits on one par t of the spiral tra ck of an
audio CD.
The aver a g e lengt h of one pit and the aver a g e lengt h of one land are
both 1900 nm.

Infor m a t io n is stor e d on the CD with a sam pling frequ e n c y of 44.1


kHz. Each sam pl e consist s of two 16 bit bina ry num b e r s .

(i) The total lengt h of the spiral on the CD is appr oxi m a t e ly 5 km.
On aver a g e the num b e r of bits stor e d on a CD is equ al to four
times the num b e r of pits. Show that the stor a g e capa ci ty of this
CD is app roxi m a t e ly 5 × 10 9 bits.

IB Questionbank Physics 1008


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Using the answ e r to (c)(i) calcula t e the playing time of this audio
CD.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(d) Descri b e on e adva n t a g e , othe r than amou n t of dat a, of storin g music


on a CD rat h e r than on a vinyl LP recor d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

63 0 . This ques tion is abou t the oper a tio n al amplifie r.

Diagr a m 1 shows a non- inver ti n g amplifie r circuit.

Dia gr a m 1

IB Questionbank Physics 1009


(a) Sugg e s t why the amplifier is refe r r e d to as non- inverti n g.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1010


(b) The input voltag e for the amplifier in (a) is V in = 2.0 mV.

Calcula t e

(i) the gain G of the amplifier.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) the outpu t voltag e V out .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) Diagr a m 2 show s a partic ul a r non- invertin g amplifier.

Dia gr a m 2

Explain, in ter m s of the prop e r ti e s of an op- amp, why the gain of this
non- inver tin g amplifier is equal to 1.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1011


(d) Diagr a m 3 show s a circuit in which the bat t e r y has an emf of 6.0 V
and negligibl e inter n al resis t a n c e . Two 2.0 M Ω resis to r s are
conn e c t e d in series to the batt e r y.

Dia gr a m 3

(i) Stat e the value of the pote n ti al differ e n c e betw e e n points A and
B.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) A voltm e t e r of resist a n c e 100 k Ω is use d to mea s u r e the pot e n ti al


differ e n c e acros s points A and B.

Stat e why the readi n g on the voltm e t e r is not equ al to the value
stat e d in (d)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1012


(iii) The circuit in diagr a m 3 is modifie d to includ e the circuit show n
in diag r a m 2.

Dia g r a m 4

Explain why the voltm e t e r rea d s the value of the pote n t i al


differ e n c e as stat e d in (d)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1013


63 1 . This ques tion is abou t simult a n e i ty.

Albert is at rest with res p e c t to the grou n d. Her m a n n is in a car ri a g e that is


moving with spee d v relative to Albert in the dire c tion show n. Two flash e s
of light are emitt e d from the back and the front of the car ri a g e . Accordin g
to Her m a n n’ s clock they arrive at Her m a n n’ s position simult a n e o u s ly.

Explain with refer e n c e to the conc e p t of prope r time, why the arrival of the
light puls es at Her m a n n will also be simult a n e o u s to Albert.

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 3 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1014


63 2 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic kine m a t i c s .

A space c r af t leaves Eart h at a spe e d of 0.80c as me a s u r e d by an obse rv e r


on Eart h. It head s towar d s , and contin u e s beyond, a dista n t plan e t . The
plane t is 52 light years away from Eart h as me a s u r e d by an obs e rv e r on
Eart h.

When the spac e c r a f t leaves Eart h, Amand a , one of the astr o n a u t s in the
spac e c r a f t , is 20 year s old.

5
The Loren tz gam m a factor for a spe e d of 0.80c is γ = 3 .

(a) Calcula t e

(i) the time take n for the journ ey to the plane t as mea s u r e d by an
obse rv e r on Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) the dista n c e betw e e n the Eart h and the plan e t, as mea s u r e d by
Amand a .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Amand a’s age as the spac e c r a f t goes past the plan e t, accor di n g
to Amand a.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1015


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1016


(b) As the spac ec r af t goes pas t the plane t Amand a sends a radio signal to
Eart h.
Calcula t e, as meas u r e d by the spac e c r a f t obse rv e r s , the time it take s
for the signal to arrive at Eart h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

63 3 . This ques tion is abou t funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s .

The diagr a m below show s an inte r a c t io n vert ex of the weak inte r a c t io n.

(a) (i) Draw a Feyn m a n diagr a m , for the proc e s s e – + e + → µ –


+ µ + using the infor m a ti o n given in the diag r a m above.

(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1017


(ii) Identify the virtu al particle in the Feyn m a n diag r a m that you
drew in (a)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The closes t dista n c e betw e e n the elect r o n- positr o n pair and the muon-
anti m u o n pair in the reactio n e – + e + → µ – + µ + is app r oxim a t e ly 9 ×
10 –19 m.

Use this infor m a ti o n to estim a t e the mas s of the virtual particle in (a)
(ii).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

63 4 . This ques tion is abou t qua r k s.

1
The diagr a m below show s the eight spin 2 baryo n s mad e out of the thr e e
lighte s t quar k s , the up (u), the down (d) and the stra n g e (s). In this plot
baryon s belon gi n g to the sam e horizon t a l line have the sam e str a n g e n e s s
(S ) and those along the sam e slant e d line have the sam e cha r g e ( Q).

IB Questionbank Physics 1018


IB Questionbank Physics 1019
(a) (i) On the diagr a m above draw a circle arou n d the point
repr e s e n t i n g the neut r o n .
(1)

(ii) Stat e the quar k cont e n t of the neut r o n.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The Ξ – baryo n is uns t a bl e and decays accor di n g to the rea c tion Ξ – →
Λ0 + π –.

The quar k cont e n t of the particle s involve d is Ξ – = ssd, Λ0 = uds and


π – = du .

Stat e and explain whet h e r the inter a c ti o n involved in this dec ay is


elect r o m a g n e t i c, stron g or wea k.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

63 5 . A lift (elevato r ) is oper a t e d by an elect ric motor. It moves betw e e n the 10th
floor and the 2nd floor at a const a n t spee d. One main ene r gy
tran sfor m a t i o n during this journ e y is

A. gravit atio n al poten ti al ene r gy → kinetic ene r gy.

B. elect ric al ener gy → kinetic ene r gy.

C. kinetic ener gy → ther m a l ene r gy.

IB Questionbank Physics 1020


D. elect ric al ener gy → ther m a l ene r gy.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1021


63 6 . A com m u ni c a ti o n s satellit e is moving at a cons t a n t spee d in a circul a r orbit
arou n d Eart h. At any given insta n t in time, the res ult a n t force on the
satellite is

A. zero.

B. equal to the gravit a tion al force on the satellit e.

C. equal to the vector sum of the gravit a tio n a l force on the satellite and
the cent ri p e t a l force.

D. equal to the force exer t e d by the sat ellite’s rocke t s .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

63 7 . A stud e n t is sitting on a chair. One force that is acting on the stud e n t is the
pull of gravity. Accordin g to Newt o n’s third law, the r e must be anot h e r
force which is

A. the upw a r d pus h of the chair on the stud e n t .

B. the down w a r d force on the stud e n t .

C. the down w a r d pus h of the chair on Eart h.

D. the upw a r d force on Eart h.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1022


63 8 . An object moves in the x-y plan e. The gra p h s below show how the
compo n e n t of its velocity V x in the x -dire c tio n and the compo n e n t of its
velocity V y in the y -direction, vary with time t .

The particle is moving

A. in a par a b ol a.

B. with simple har m o ni c motion.

C. with cons t a n t velocity in a str ai g h t line.

D. in a circle.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1023


63 9 . The mas s of a plan e t is M and its radius is R . In orde r for a body of mas s m
to esca p e the gravit a tio n al attr a c tio n of the plan e t , its kinetic ene r gy at the
surfac e of the plane t must be at leas t

GM m
A. R

GM m
B. R2

GM
C. R

GM
D. R2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1024


64 0 . The two grap h s below rep r e s e n t the variation with dista n c e , d , for d = r to
d = 2 r of the elect ric field and the elect ri c pote n ti al arou n d an isolat e d
point char g e .

The work done by an exter n al forc e in moving a test cha r g e + q from d = 2 r


to d = r is equ al to q multiplied by the

A. shad e d area und e r grap h 1.

B. shad e d area und e r grap h 2.

C. aver a g e value of the elect ric field.

D. aver a g e value of the elect ric pote n ti al.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1025


64 1 . A positive amou n t of ther m al ene r gy Q is tra n sf e r r e d to an ideal gas from
its sur r o u n d i n g s . The inter n al ene r gy of the gas incr e a s e s and the gas does
a positive amou n t of work W on its sur r o u n d i n g s . The cha n g e of sta t e of the
gas is

A. isochoric (isovolum e t r i c).

B. isoba ric.

C. isoth e r m a l.

D. adiab a tic.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

64 2 . Which of the following cor r e c tly desc ri b e s the ent ro py cha n g e s of the
wate r molec ul e s and the univer s e whe n a sam pl e of wat e r freez e s ?

Wat er Univ e r s e
mol e c u l e s
A. incr e a s e s incr e a s e s
B. decr e a s e s incr e a s e s
C. incr e a s e s decr e a s e s
D. decr e a s e s decr e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1026


64 3 . The gra p h below rep r e s e n t s the variatio n with time of the displa c e m e n t of
an oscillatin g particle.

The motion of the object is

A. over dam p e d .

B. critically dam p e d .

C. lightly dam p e d .

D. not dam p e d .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

64 4 . The wavelen g t h of a stan di n g (sta tion a r y) wave is equal to

A. the dista n c e betw e e n adjac e n t node s .

B. twice the distan c e bet w e e n adjac e n t node s.

C. half the dista n c e betw e e n adjac e n t node s.

D. the dista n c e betw e e n a node and an adjac e n t antino d e .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1027


64 5 . During a journ ey an obs erv e r travel s at const a n t spe e d towa r d s , and the n
goes beyond, a station a r y emitt e r of soun d.

The frequ e n cy of the soun d as me a s u r e d at the emitt e r is f. The frequ e n c y


accor di n g to the obs erv e r

A. is always grea t e r than f.

B. is always equ al to f.

C. is always less than f.

D. varies during the jour n ey.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

64 6 . A par allel bea m of monoc h r o m atic light of wavele n g t h λ pa sses thro u g h a


slit of width b . After passin g thro u g h the slit the light is incide n t on a
dist a n t scree n . The angul a r width of the cent r a l maxim u m is

λ
A. 2 b radia n s .

λ
B. b radia n s .

λ
C. 2 b deg r e e s .

λ
D. b deg r e e s .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1028


64 7 . Unpol arize d light is shon e thro u g h two identic al polarize r s whos e axes are
par allel.

I
The ratio I 0 is

A. 100 %.

B. 50 %.

C. 25 %.

D. 0 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1029


64 8 . A cur r e n t car ryin g wire is in the sam e plane as a unifor m magn e t i c field.
The angle betw e e n the wire and the mag n e t i c field is θ.

The mag n e t i c force on the curr e n t car ryin g wire is

A. zero.

B. into the plane of the pap e r .

C. out of the plane of the pap e r .

D. at an angle θ to the direction of the ma gn e ti c field.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1030


64 9 . A per m a n e n t bar mag n e t is move d towa r d s a coil of cond u c ti n g wire
wrap p e d arou n d a non- condu c ti n g cylinde r . The ends of the coil, P and Q
are joined by a str ai g h t piece of wire.

The induc e d cur r e n t in the strai g h t pie c e of wire is

A. alter n a t i n g.

B. zero.

C. from P to Q.

D. from Q to P.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

65 0 . In orde r to red uc e powe r losses in the tra n s m i s sio n lines betw e e n a powe r
station and a factory, two tran sfor m e r s are used. One is locat e d at the
powe r station and the othe r at the factory. Which of the following gives the
corr e c t types of transfo r m e r used?

Pow er sta ti o n Fact o r y


A. step- up ste p- up
B. step- up step- down
C. step- down ste p- up
D. step- down step- down
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1031


65 1 . Ultr a- violet light is shon e on a zinc surfa c e and photo el e c t r o n s are emitt e d.
The sketc h grap h shows how the stoppin g pote n ti al V s varies with
frequ e n c y f.

Planck’s const a n t may be det er m i n e d from the cha r g e of an elect r o n e


multiplied by

A. the x-inter c e p t .

B. the y- inter c e p t .

C. the gradi e n t .

D. the area und e r the grap h.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

65 2 . A bea m of elect r o n s is accele r a t e d from rest throu g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e


V . The de Broglie wavele n g t h of the elect r o n s is λ. For elect r o n s
accele r a t e d thro u g h a poten ti al differ e n c e of 2 V the de Broglie wavele n g t h
is

A. 2λ

B. 2λ

λ
C. 2

λ
D. 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1032


65 3 . The diagr a m shows four possible elect r o n ene r gy levels in the hydrog e n
atom.

The num b e r of differ e n t frequ e n c i e s in the emission spec t r u m of atomic


hydro g e n that arise from elect r o n tran si tion s betw e e n the s e levels is

A. 0.

B. 2.

C. 4.

D. 6.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

65 4 . A sam pl e cont ai n s an amou n t of radioa c tive mat e ri a l with a half- life of 3.5
days. After 2 weeks the fraction of the radioa c tiv e mat e ri al rem ai ni n g is

A. 94 %.

B. 25 %.

C. 6 %.

D. 0 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1033


65 5 . The rest mas s of a proto n is 938 MeV c –2 . The ene r gy of a proton at res t is

A. 9.38 J

B. 9.38 × 10 8 × (3 × 10 8 ) 2 J

C. 9.38 × 10 8 eV.

D. 9.38 × 10 8 × (3 × 10 8 ) 2 eV
(Tot al 1 mar k )

65 6 . In the Schr ö di n g e r model of the hydro g e n atom, the prob a bility of finding
an elect r o n in a small region of spac e is calcula t e d from the

A. de Broglie hypot h e s i s.

B. Heise n b e r g unce r t ai n t y principle.

C. (amplitu d e of the wavefun c tio n) 2 .

D. rms value of the wavefun c ti o n.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

65 7 . The radii of nuclei can be estim a t e d from expe ri m e n t s involving

A. the scat t e r i n g of char g e d particle s.

B. the Bainbri d g e mass spect r o m e t e r .

C. emission spect r a .

D. beta particle spect r a .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1034


65 8 . When a nucleu s und e r g o e s radioa c tive β+ dec ay, the cha n g e in the num b e r
of par ticles in the univer s e is

A. 0.

B. 1.

C. 2.

D. 3.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

65 9 . In bina ry, the decim al num b e r 20 is repr e s e n t e d as

A. 1110 1

B. 1100 0

C. 1010 0

D. 0001 0
(Tot al 1 mar k )

66 0 . Laser light of wavelen g t h 500 nm is use d to rea d the infor m a t io n on a CD.


The app r oxi m a t e dept h for a pit on the CD is

A. 1000 nm.

B. 500 nm.

C. 250 nm.

D. 125 nm.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1035


66 1 . Two CCDs are identic al in all res p e c t s exce pt the pixels of one device have
a gre a t e r qua n t u m efficiency. This device will

A. have a grea t e r magnifica tion.

B. have a grea t e r resolutio n.

C. be able to recor d imag es at lowe r light levels.

D. use less ene r gy.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

66 2 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e of the met al mer c u r y.

The resist a n c e R of a sam pl e of me rc u r y was mea s u r e d as a function of the


tem p e r a t u r e T of the sam pl e. The sam pl e was cooled and dat a points wer e
take n at tem p e r a t u r e interval s of 0.2 K. The unc e r t a i n ti e s in R and T are
too small to be show n on the gra p h.

The hypot h e s i s is that resist a n c e is propo r tio n a l to absolut e tem p e r a t u r e


for tem p e r a t u r e s grea t e r than 4.5 K.

(a) (i) Sugg e s t whet h e r the dat a suppo r t s the hypot h e s i s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1036


(ii) Draw a line of best fit throu g h the dat a.
(2)

(b) Stat e the value of R for which the rat e of cha n g e of resist a n c e of the
sam pl e with tem p e r a t u r e is least.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) At a tem p e r a t u r e T C the resist a n c e sudd e nly beco m e s zero.

(i) Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the possibl e rang e of the


tem p e r a t u r e T C .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Stat e, to the corr e c t num b e r of signific a n t figur e s , the value of T C


and its unce r t ai n t y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Outline how the tem p e r a t u r e T C could be me a s u r e d more


precis ely.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1037


(d) Outline two reas o n s why you could not use the dat a to det e r m i n e an
accu r a t e value for R at room tem p e r a t u r e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

66 3 . This ques tion is abou t impuls e.

(a) A net force of magni t u d e F acts on a body. Define the impuls e I of the
force.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A ball of mas s 0.075 0 kg is travelling horizont a lly with a spe e d of 2.20
m s –1 . It strike s a vertical wall and rebo u n d s horizon t ally.

Due to the collision with the wall, 20 % of the ball’s initial kinetic
ener gy is dissip a t e d .

IB Questionbank Physics 1038


(i) Show that the ball rebou n d s from the wall with a spee d of 1.97 m
s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Show that the impuls e given to the ball by the wall is 0.313 N s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1039


(c) The ball strikes the wall at time t = 0 and leave s the wall at time t = T .

The sketc h gra p h shows how the forc e F that the wall exert s on the
ball is assu m e d to vary with time t .

The time T is meas u r e d elect r o ni c ally to equ al 0.089 4 s.

Use the impuls e given in (b)(ii) to estim a t e the aver a g e value of F.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1040


66 4 . This ques tion is abou t inter n al ene r gy, hea t and ideal gas e s .

(a) The inter n al ene r gy of a piec e of coppe r is incr e a s e d by hea tin g.

(i) Explain what is mea n t, in this cont ext, by inte r n a l ene r gy and
heati n g.

Inte r n al
ener gy: ....................................................................................
............

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

Heatin g: ..........................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The piece of copp e r has mass 0.25 kg. The incre a s e in inte r n a l
ene r gy of the coppe r is 1.2 × 10 3 J and its incr e a s e in
tem p e r a t u r e is 20 K. Estim a t e the specific heat capa city of
coppe r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) One mole of an ideal gas is hea t e d at cons t a n t pre s s u r e . The incre a s e
in tem p e r a t u r e of the gas is 30.0 K. The ene r gy tra n sf e r r e d to the gas
is 623 J and the work done is 249 J.

Deter m i n e

IB Questionbank Physics 1041


(i) the chan g e in inter n al ene r gy of the gas.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) the ther m al capacity of the gas.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Anothe r mole of the sam e gas is hea t e d at cons t a n t volum e star ti n g
from the sam e stat e as that in (b). Sugg e s t whe t h e r the ther m a l
capa city in this case is equal to, gre a t e r than or less tha n the answ e r
in b(ii).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1042


IB Questionbank Physics 1043
66 5 . This ques tion is abou t alter n a t i n g cur r e n t .

(a) The grap h shows the variatio n with time t of the outpu t volta g e V of
an ac gen e r a t o r of negligible inte r n a l resis t a n c e .

A resis to r of resist a n c e 25 Ω is conn e c t e d acros s the outp u t of the


gene r a t o r .

Calcula t e

(i) the rms value of the cur r e n t in the resist o r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) the aver a g e powe r dissip a t e d in the resisto r .

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1044


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) the powe r dissipa t e d in the resist o r at 0.40 ms.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The frequ e n c y of rotatio n of the gen e r a t o r coil is now double d. Sketc h,
using the axes in (a), the variatio n with t of the new outpu t volta g e V .
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

66 6 . This ques tion is abou t ener gy tra n sf e r s .

(a) Ener gy degr a d a t i o n takes plac e in the ene r gy tra n sfo r m a t i o n s which
occur in the gene r a t i o n of elect ric al powe r. Explain wha t is mea n t in
this context by ener gy degr a d a t i o n .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

Som e of the ene r gy tran sfo r m a t i o n s that take plac e in a coal- fired powe r
station are repr e s e n t e d by the Sank ey diag r a m below.

IB Questionbank Physics 1045


(b) (i) Stat e what is repr e s e n t e d by the width w .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) At the thre e places ma rk e d A, B and C on the diagr a m , ene r gy is


degr a d e d .
Identify the proce s s by which the ene r gy is degr a d e d in eac h of
the places.

A: .....................................................................................................
.................

.........................................................................................................
..................

B: .....................................................................................................
.................

.........................................................................................................
..................

C: .....................................................................................................
.................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

66 7 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c fields and elect ri c circuits.

IB Questionbank Physics 1046


(a) Two par allel, char g e d met al plate s A and B are in a vacuu m .

At a par ticul a r insta n t an elect r o n is at point P.

On the diag r a m , draw

(i) the elect ric field patt e r n due to the plate s .


(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1047


(ii) an arrow to repr e s e n t the dire c tion of the force on the elect r o n at
P.
(1)

(b) The accele r a ti o n of the elect r o n at P is 8.8 × 10 14 m s –2 . Dete r m i n e the


magni t u d e of the elect ric field stre n g t h at the point P.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The elect ric pote n ti al ener gy of the elect r o n cha n g e s by 1.9 × 10 –17 J
as it moves from one plat e to the othe r. Show tha t the pote n ti al
differ e n c e betw e e n the plate s is 120 V.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) A resis to r R and a filam e n t lamp L are conne c t e d in serie s with a


batt e r y. The batt e r y has an emf of 12 V and inte r n a l resis t a n c e 4.0 Ω.
The poten t i al differ e n c e acros s the filam e n t of the lamp is 3.0 V and
the cur r e n t in the filam e n t is 0.25 A.

IB Questionbank Physics 1048


IB Questionbank Physics 1049
(i) Calculat e the total powe r supplie d by the batt e r y.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the powe r dissip a t e d in the exte r n a l circuit.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Dete r mi n e the resist a n c e of the resisto r R.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1050


66 8 . This ques tion is abou t atomic and nucle a r spec t r a .

Atomic spect r a

(a) The diagr a m repr e s e n t s som e of the ene r gy levels of the mer c u r y
atom.

Photo n s are emitt e d by elect r o n tra n si tio n s betw e e n the levels. On the
diagr a m draw arrow s to rep r e s e n t the tra n si tion, for thos e ene r gy
levels that gives rise to,

(i) the longes t wavelen g t h photo n (label this L).


(1)

(ii) the short e s t wavele n g t h photon (label this S).


(1)

(b) Deter m i n e the wavele n g t h associa t e d with the arrow you have
labelled S.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1051


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1052


Nucle a r spect r a

(c) A nucleu s of the isotop e bism u t h- 212 unde r g o e s α-dec ay into a


nucleu s of an isotop e of thalliu m . A γ-ray photon i s also emitt e d.

Draw a labelled nuclea r ene r gy level diagr a m for this dec ay.

(2)

(d) The activity of a fres hly prep a r e d sam pl e of bism u t h- 212 is 2.80 ×
10 13 Bq. After 80.0 minut e s the activity is 1.13 × 10 13 Bq. Dete r mi n e
the half- life of bism u t h- 212.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1053


66 9 . This ques tion is abou t the gree n h o u s e effect.

(a) The grap h shows part of the absor p ti o n spec t r u m of nitrog e n oxide
(N 2 O) in which the intensity of absor b e d radia tio n A is plott e d agains t
frequ e n c y f.

(i) Stat e the region of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m to which the


reson a n t frequ e n cy of nitrog e n oxide belong s.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Using your ans w e r to (a)(i), explain why nitrog e n oxide is


classified as a gree n h o u s e gas.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1054


..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1055


(b) Define emis si vit y and albedo .

Emissivity: ...............................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Albedo: ....................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The diagr a m shows a simple ene r gy bala nc e climat e model in which
the atmo s p h e r e and the surfa c e of Eart h are two bodie s eac h at
const a n t tem p e r a t u r e . The surfa c e of the Eart h rec eive s both solar
radiatio n and radiation emitt e d from the atmo s p h e r e . Assum e tha t the
Eart h’s surfac e beh av e s as a black body.

The following data are availa ble for this model.

aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the atmo s p h e r e of Eart h = 242 K


emissivity, e of the atmos p h e r e of Eart h = 0.720
aver a g e albed o, α of the atm os p h e r e of Eart h = 0.280
solar inten sity at top of atmo s p h e r e = 344 W
m –2
aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the surfa c e of Eart h = 288 K

IB Questionbank Physics 1056


Use the data to show that the

(i) powe r radia t e d per unit are a of the atmo s p h e r e is 140 W m –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) solar powe r absor b e d per unit are a at the surfa c e of the Eart h is
248 W m –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) It is hypot h e s iz e d that, if the produ c tio n of gre e n h o u s e gas e s wer e to


stay at its pres e n t level the n the tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s
atmo s p h e r e would event u a lly rise by 6.0 K.

Calcula t e the powe r per unit are a that would then be

(i) radi at e d by the atmos p h e r e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) abso r b e d by the Eart h’s surfa c e .

.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics 1057
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1058


(e) Estim a t e , using your ans w e r to (d)(ii), the incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of
Eart h’s surfac e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

67 0 . This ques tion is abou t digital stor a g e device s.

(a) (i) Conve r t the decim al num b e r 25 to bina ry.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Outline two adva n t a g e s of storin g a text in digital form rat h e r


than in analog u e form.

1. .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

2. .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1059


(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to their struc t u r e , why more data can be stor e d
on a DVD than on a CD.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1060


(c) Define the ter m mag nification as it applie s to a CCD.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) A digital cam e r a is used to photog r a p h a par tic ul a r object. Two small
mark s on the object are sepa r a t e d by a dist a n c e of 2.0 × 10 –3 m.

The cam e r a has a mag nific a tio n of 1.4 × 10 –2 and an imag e collection
are a of
4.0 × 10 –4 m 2 . Dete r mi n e the minim u m num b e r of pixels that the CCD
of a digital cam e r a mus t have, in orde r that the image s of the two
mark s on the object are just resolve d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

67 1 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion and wave s.

(a) A particle of mas s m that is att a c h e d to a light spring is execu ti n g


simple har m o ni c motion in a hori z o n t a l dire c t i o n .

Stat e the condition relati n g to the net force acting on the particle that
is neces s a r y for it to execut e simple har m o ni c motion.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1061


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1062


(b) The grap h shows how the kine tic ene r gy E K of the par ticle in (a) varies
with the displac e m e n t x of the par ticle from equilibri u m .

(i) Using the axes above, sket c h a gra p h to show how the pote n ti al
ene r gy of the particle varie s with the displa c e m e n t x .
(2)

(ii) The mas s of the par ticle is 0.30 kg. Use dat a from the gra p h to
show that the frequ e n c y f of oscillation of the par ticle is 2.0 Hz.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1063


(c) The par ticles of a mediu m M 1 throu g h which a tra n sv e r s e wave is
travelling, oscillat e with the sam e frequ e n c y and amplit u d e as that of
the par ticle in (b).

(i) Describ e, with refer e n c e to the prop a g a t i o n of ene r gy thro u g h


the mediu m , what is me a n t by a tran s v e r s e wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The spee d of the wave is 0.80 m s –1 . Calcula t e the wavele n g t h of


the wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) The diagr a m shows wavefro n t s of the waves in (c) incide n t on a


boun d a r y XY betw e e n mediu m M 1 and anot h e r mediu m M 2 .

IB Questionbank Physics 1064


The angle betw e e n the nor m a l, and the dire c tion of travel of the
wavefro n t s is 30°.

IB Questionbank Physics 1065


(i) The spee d of the wave in M 1 is 0.80 m s –1 . The spe e d of the
waves in M 2 is
1.2 m s –1 .
Calculat e the angle betw e e n the dire c tion of travel of the
wavefro n t s in M 2 and the nor m al.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) On the diagr a m , sket c h the wavefro n t s in M 2 .


(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

67 2 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l fields and pote n ti al.

(a) Define gravitational field stre n g t h and stat e how it is rela t e d to


gravit atio n al poten ti al.

Definition: ...............................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Relation s hi p: ...........................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1066


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1067


(b) A binary star syste m consist s of two sta r s with mas s e s M 1 and M 2
rotati n g abou t a com m o n cent r e . The cent r e s of the two sta r s are
sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e R = 1.2 × 10 10 m.

The diagr a m is not to scale.

The total gravit a tion al pote n ti al due to the sta r s at any point along a
line joining their cent r e s is V . The gra p h shows how V varies with the
dista n c e x from the cent r e of sta r M 1 . (Value s of the pote n ti al inside
each star are not known.)

IB Questionbank Physics 1068


A particle is launch e d with kine tic ene r gy E K from the surfa c e of sta r
with mass M 2 .
The par ticle arrives at the surfac e of the star of mas s M 1 . Use the
grap h to

(i) explain whet h e r the kinetic ene r gy of the particle at the surfac e
of M 1 is less than, equal to, or larg e r tha n E K.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) det e r m i n e the dista n c e x at which the gravit a tion a l field stre n g t h
due to the two star s is zero.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

M1
(iii) det e r m i n e the ratio M 2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1069


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1070


67 3 . This ques tion is abou t the decay of radiu m- 226.

(a) The nucle a r reaction equa tio n for the dec ay of radiu m- 226 (Ra) may
be writt e n as

226
8 8 Ra = Rn + α

(i) Stat e the value of the proto n num b e r and neut r o n num b e r of the
isotop e of rado n (Rn).

Proto n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
...............

Neut r o n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
.............
(1)

(ii) Comp a r e , with refer e n c e to the nucle a r reac tion in (a), the
bindin g ener gy of Ra with that of Rn.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The following data are availa ble.

mas s of Ra = 226.02 5 4 u
mas s of Rn = 222.01 7 5 u
mas s of α = 4.002 6 u

Show that the ene r gy rele a s e d in the decay of a Ra nucle u s is 4.94


MeV.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1071


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1072


(c) An α-par ticle of ene r gy 4.94 MeV e mitt e d in the dec ay of a Ra nucle u s ,
travels a dista n c e d in air befor e coming to rest.

(i) Show that the initial s pee d of the α-par ticle i s 1.54 × 10 7 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Stat e the relations hi p betw e e n the mag nit u d e of the aver a g e
force F acting on the α-particle, the cha n g e in kinetic ene r gy ∆E K
and the dista n c e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Use your answ e r to (c)(ii) to calcul a t e F given that d = 4.20 × 10 –


2
m.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1073


(iv) Estim a t e the time that it takes the α-par ticl e to co me to rest.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1074


67 4 . This ques tion is abou t diffrac tio n and resolution.

(a) Plane wavefro n t s of monoc h r o m a t i c light of wavele n g t h λ are incide n t


on a nar r o w slit.
After pas sin g thro u g h the slit they are incide n t on a scr e e n place d a
larg e dista n c e from the slit.

The width of the slit is b and the point X is at the cent r e of the slit.
The point M on the scre e n is the position of the first minim u m of the
diffraction patt e r n form e d on the scre e n.
The path differ e n c e betw e e n light from the top edg e of the slit and
light from the botto m edge of the slit is l.

Use the diagr a m to explain why the dista n c e l is equal to λ.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1075


The wavefro n t s in (a) are from a monoc h r o m a t i c point sour c e S 1 . Diagr a m
1 is a sketc h of how the intensity of the diffrac tio n patt e r n form e d by the
single slit varies with angl e θ. The units on the vertical axis are arbit a r y.

Dia gr a m 1

Anoth e r identical point sourc e S 2 is plac e d close to S 1 as show n in diag r a m


2.

Dia gr a m 2

(b) The diffrac tio n patt e r n s form e d by eac h sour c e are just resolve d.

On dia gr a m 1 sketc h the inten sity distrib u tio n of the light from
sourc e S 2 .
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1076


(c) Outline how the Rayleigh crite rio n affect s the design of radio
teles co p e s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) The dish of the Arecibo radio telesc o p e has a diam e t e r of 300 m. Two
dista n t radio sour c e s are 2.0 × 10 12 m apa r t. The sour c e s are 3.0 ×
10 16 m from Ear t h and they emit radio wave s of wavele n g t h 21 cm.
Deter m i n e whet h e r the radio teles c o p e can resolve thes e sour c e s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

67 5 . This ques tion is abou t star s.

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n app a r e n t mag nit u d e and absolut e mag nit u d e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1077


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1078


(b) The table gives infor m a ti o n on thr e e sta r s, Ache r n a r , EG 129 and
Mira.

Abso l u t e
Appar e n t ma g n i t u d e Spe c t r a l cla s s
ma g n i t u d e
Acher n
–3.0 +0. 5 0 B
ar
EG 129 +1 3. 0 +1 4. 0 B
Mira –3.0 +5. 0 M

(i) Stat e which on e of the thr e e sta r s appe a r s bright e s t from Ear t h.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

LA
(ii) Estim a t e the ratio LE whe r e L A is the luminosity of Ache r n a r
and L E is the luminosity of EG 129.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) Show that the dista n c e of the sta r Acher n a r from Eart h is
app r oxi m a t ely 50 pc.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1079


(c) The surf ac e tem p e r a t u r e of Mira is 5 time s lowe r tha n that of
RM
Acher n a r . Estim a t e the ratio R A whe r e R M is the radius of Mira and
R A is the radius of Acher n a r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) Stat e and explain which of the sta r s in the table in (b) is a white
dwa rf.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1080


67 6 . This ques tion is abou t cosmic microw a v e backg r o u n d radia tio n.

The gra p h shows the spect r u m of the cosmic microw a v e backg r o u n d


radi ation.

The shap e of the gra p h sugg e s t s a black body spec t r u m i.e. a spec t r u m to
which the Wien displac e m e n t law applie s.

(a) Use the grap h to estim a t e the black body tem p e r a t u r e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Explain how your answ e r to (a) is evide n c e in suppo r t of the Big Bang
model.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1081


.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1082


(c) Stat e and explain anot h e r piece of expe ri m e n t a l evide nc e in suppo r t
of the Big Bang model.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

67 7 . This ques tion is abou t stellar evolution.

(a) Outline what is mean t by the Oppe n h e i m e r - Volkoff limit.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Eta Carina e is a main sequ e n c e sta r whos e mas s is about 100 time s
larg e r than that of the Sun. The sta r will evolve to beco m e a neut r o n
sta r.

(i) By refer e n c e to the Oppe n h e i m e r - Volkoff limit, outline the


evolution of Eta Carina e from whe n it leaves the main sequ e n c e
until the neut r o n star sta g e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Stat e the reas o n why Eta Carina e will not und e r g o furt h e r

IB Questionbank Physics 1083


collaps e when it beco m e s a neut r o n sta r.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1084


(c) The mas s- luminosity relation s hi p for sta r s such as Eta Carina e and the
Sun is given by the expr e s si o n L = kM 3.5 whe r e k is a const a n t and M
is the mas s of the star. The mass of Eta Carina e is 100 time s larg e r
than that of the Sun.

l E t aC a r in a e L
(i) Calculat e the ratio l Sun , whe r e l = M is the luminosity per
unit mass.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) A star will leave the main sequ e n c e after it has conve r t e d 12 % of
its mas s into ene r gy. By refe r e n c e to your answ e r to (i) sugg e s t
why Eta Carina e will spe n d less time on the main sequ e n c e tha n
the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

67 8 . This ques tion is abou t Hubbl e’s law.

(a) Stat e Hubbl e’s law.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Sugg e s t why, in verifying Hubbl e’s law, data from nea r by galaxies
canno t be used.

IB Questionbank Physics 1085


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 3 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1086


67 9 . This ques tion is abou t amplit u d e modula tio n (AM).

The gra p h shows the powe r spec t r u m of an AM car rie r wave.

(a) Use the grap h to det e r m i n e the

(i) frequ e n c y of the carri e r wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) frequ e n c y of the signal wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) ban d wi d t h of the tran s m i t t e d signal.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) A broa d c a s t i n g comp a ny has bee n given per mi s sion to broa d c a s t in a


frequ e n c y ran g e of 320 kHz. The tra n s mi s s io n s have the band wi d t h
found in (a)(iii).

Deter m i n e how many radio stations the comp a ny can oper a t e in this
frequ e n c y ran g e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1087


IB Questionbank Physics 1088
68 0 . This ques tion is abou t tran s m i s sio n and sam pling of signals.

(a) The block diagr a m illust r a t e s the principle s of the tra n s m i s sio n and
rece p tio n of digital signals.

Descri b e the function of eac h of the blocks labelle d P, Q, R and S.

P: .............................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Q: .............................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

R: .............................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

S: .............................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1089


(b) The grap h shows thirt e e n sa m pl e d values of an analog u e signal as a
function of the time at which the sam plin g took plac e.

Each sam pl e is conve r t e d into a 4- bit bina ry num b e r , accor di n g to the


encodin g sche m e :

4- bit binar y
Sig n a l / mV Sa m p l e / mV
nu m b e r
  
2.000–2.9 9 9 2 0010
3.000–3.9 9 9 3 0011
4.000–4.9 9 9 4 0100
  

Deter m i n e the

(i) 4- bit binary num b e r corr e s p o n di n g to the sam pl e at t = 0.07 ms.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1090


(ii) bit- rate of the digital tra n s m i s sio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Stat e on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dva n t a g e of incre a si n g the


sam pling frequ e n cy used to sam pl e an analog u e signal.

Advant a g e : ..............................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Disadv a n t a g e : .........................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

68 1 . This ques tion is abou t optical fibre s.

(a) Stat e on e caus e of atte n u a t i o n and on e caus e of dispe r s io n in an


optical fibre.

Atten u a ti o n: ............................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Dispe r s io n: ..............................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1091


(b) An optical fibre of lengt h 5.4 km has an atte n u a t i o n per unit lengt h of
2.8 dB km –1 .
The signal powe r input is 80 mW.

(i) Calculat e the outpu t powe r of the signal.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) In orde r for the powe r of the outpu t signal to be equal to the
input powe r an amplifier is installe d at the end of the fibre.

Stat e the gain, in decibels (dB), of the amplifie r at the end of the
fibre.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

Ps ig n a l

(c) The signal to noise ratio (SNR), in dB, is define d as SNR = 10log Pn ois e
whe r e P signal and P noise are the powe r s of the signal and noise
res p e c t ively.

The SNR of the signal in (b) befor e am plifica tio n was 20 dB. Calcula t e
the SNR after amplificatio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

68 2 . This ques tion is abou t the oper a tio n al amplifie r.

IB Questionbank Physics 1092


Diagr a m 1 shows a non- inver ti n g amplifie r circuit.

Dia gr a m 1

IB Questionbank Physics 1093


(a) Sugg e s t why the amplifier is refe r r e d to as non- inverti n g.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The input voltag e for the amplifier in (a) is V in = 2.0 mV.

Calcula t e the

(i) gain G of the amplifier.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) outp u t voltag e V out .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) Diagr a m 2 show s a partic ul a r non- invertin g amplifier.

Dia g r a m 2

Explain, in ter m s of the prop e r ti e s of an op- amp, why the gain of this
non- inver tin g amplifier is equal to 1.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1094


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1095


(d) Diagr a m 3 show s a circuit in which the bat t e r y has an emf of 6.0 V
and negligibl e inter n al resis t a n c e . Two 2.0 M Ω resis to r s are
conn e c t e d in series to the batt e r y.

Dia g r a m 3

(i) Stat e the value of the pote n ti al differ e n c e betw e e n points A and
B.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) A voltm e t e r of resist a n c e 100 k Ω is use d to mea s u r e the pot e n ti al


differ e n c e acros s points A and B.

Stat e why the readi n g on the voltm e t e r is not equal to the value
stat e d in (d)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1096


(iii) The circuit in diagr a m 3 is modifie d to includ e the circuit show n
in diag r a m 2.

Dia gr a m 4

Explain why the voltm e t e r rea d s the value of the pote n t i al


differ e n c e as stat e d in (d)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

68 3 . This ques tion is abou t the colour of the sky.

Outline why the sky app e a r s blue during the day and red durin g a suns e t .

Blue
sky: ..........................................................................................................
.....................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(2)

Red
sky: ..........................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

IB Questionbank Physics 1097


.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1098


68 4 . This ques tion is abou t image form a tio n in a convex lens.

(a) Define near point .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A small object is place d in front of a conve r gi n g lens that will act as a
magnifier.
The focal point s of the lens are labelle d with the lette r F.

On the diag r a m const r u c t rays to locat e the imag e of the objec t.


(2)

(c) A particul a r lens has a focal lengt h of 9.0 cm and the image is form e d
at the nea r point which is 25 cm from the lens.

Assumin g that the eye is very close to the lens det e r m i n e the

(i) dist a n c e of the object from the lens.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1099


(ii) ang ul a r mag nifica tion of the lens.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(d) The ang ul a r mag nificatio n of the lens incr e a s e s with decr e a s i n g focal
lengt h.

Stat e on e disadva n t a g e of using very short focal lengt h lens e s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

68 5 . This ques tion is abou t interf e r e n c e .

Monoc h r o m a t i c, coher e n t light is incide n t on two nar r o w par allel slits


whos e widths are small com p a r e d to their sepa r a t i o n. After passin g
thro u g h the slits the light is brou g h t to a focus on a scre e n prod u ci n g
interf e r e n c e fringe s. Point X is the midpoint of the slits.

The angul a r position of a point on the scre e n is det e r m i n e d by the angl e θ.

IB Questionbank Physics 1100


(a) (i) Explain why the inte n sity of light at θ = 0 will be a
maxim u m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The wavelen g t h of light is 6.80 × 10 –7 m and the sepa r a t i o n of


the slits is
1.13 × 10 –4 m. Show that for the first orde r maxim u m θ = 6.02 ×
10 –3 rad.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) On the axes below dra w a gra p h to show how the inten sity of
light obs erv e d on the scre e n varies with angle θ. (You do not
have to put num b e r s on the vertic al axis.)

(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1101


(b) The two slits are replac e d by a large num b e r of slits whos e widths and
sepa r a t i o n are the sam e as in (a).

Stat e the chan g e s , if any, in the inte nsity patt e r n you dre w in (a)(iii)
with refer e n c e to

IB Questionbank Physics 1102


(i) the value of the inten sity at θ = 0.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) the angul a r position of the points of maxim u m inte nsi ty.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) the angul a r width of the fringe s.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

68 6 . This ques tion is abou t X-ray spec t r a and X-ray diffrac tio n.

(a) Elect r o n s are accele r a t e d from res t by a pote n ti al differe n c e . They


strike a met al targ e t and the res ultin g X-ray spec t r u m is show n below.

(i) Stat e and explain what may be deduc e d abou t the ene r gy levels
of the atom s of the met al from the fact that this spect r u m does
not cont ai n any char a c t e r i s ti c lines.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1103


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Outline the mech a ni s m by which the photo n s of wavele n g t h 2.0 ×


10 –10 m are produ c e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Calculat e the poten ti al differ e n c e throu g h which the elect r o n s


have been accel e r a t e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) X-rays are incide n t on a cryst al surfa c e makin g an angle θ 1 with the
surfac e. The scat t e r e d X-rays make an angle θ 2 with the surf ac e . In
the diagr a m below, the circles, tha t are sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e d ,
repr e s e n t lattice ions of the cryst al.

The path differ e n c e betw e e n the two scat t e r e d rays is d (cos θ 1 – cos

IB Questionbank Physics 1104


θ 2 ).

IB Questionbank Physics 1105


(i) Stat e and explain the condition for cons t r u c tive inte rfe r e n c e
betw e e n the two scat t e r e d rays show n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The wavelen g t h of the X-rays is 4.20 × 10 –10 m. A maxim u m in


the inten sity of the scatt e r e d X-rays is first obse r v e d at an angle
θ = 34.5°. Deter m i n e the sepa r a t i o n of the atomic plan e s that
give rise to this maxim u m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1106


68 7 . This ques tion is abou t the Michels o n- Morley expe ri m e n t .

The diagr a m shows the type of arr a n g e m e n t tha t was used in the
Michelso n- Morley expe ri m e n t .

The spee d of light in free space is c and the orbit al spe e d of Eart h is v .

(a) Stat e

(i) the pur po s e of the Michels o n- Morley expe ri m e n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) using a Galilean tran sfor m a t i o n , the spe e d of light along the path
fro m the mirro r M 1 to the semi- tran s p a r e n t mirro r S in ter m s of
c and v .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1107


.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1108


(b) With the app a r a t u s in the position show n, an inte rf e r e n c e patt e r n was
obse rv e d in the field of view of the telesc o p e . The appa r a t u s was the n
rotat e d by 90º.

Stat e

(i) what was expect e d to be obs e rv e d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) what was actu ally obse rv e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) how the res ult of the Michelso n- Morley expe ri m e n t is explaine d
in the theo ry of special relativity.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

68 8 . This ques tion is abou t simult a n e i ty.

(a) Define what is mea n t by a prope r tim e interval .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1109


(b) Albert is at res t with res p e c t to the grou n d . Her m a n n is in a carri a g e
that is moving with spee d v relative to Albert in the dire c tion show n.
Two flashe s of light are emitt e d from the back and the front of the
car ri a g e . Accor di n g to Her m a n n’ s clock they arrive at Her m a n n’ s
position simult a n e o u s ly.

Explain with refer e n c e to the conc e p t of prop e r time, why the arrival
of the light pulses at Her m a n n will also be simult a n e o u s to Albert.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1110


68 9 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic kine m a t i c s .

A space c r af t leaves Eart h at a spe e d of 0.80c as me a s u r e d by an obse rv e r


on Eart h. It head s towar d s , and contin u e s beyond, a dista n t plan e t . The
plane t is 52 light years away from Eart h as me a s u r e d by an obs e rv e r on
Eart h.

When the spac e c r a f t leaves Eart h, Amand a , one of the astr o n a u t s in the
spac e c r a f t , is 20 year s old.

5
The Loren tz gam m a factor for a spe e d of 0.80c is γ = 3 .

(a) Calcula t e

(i) the time take n for the journ ey to the plane t as mea s u r e d by an
obse rv e r on Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) the dista n c e betw e e n the Eart h and the plan e t, as mea s u r e d by
Amand a .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Amand a’s age as the spac e c r a f t goes past the plan e t, accor di n g
to Amand a.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1111


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1112


(b) As the spac ec r af t goes pas t the plane t Amand a sends a radio signal to
Eart h.
Calcula t e, as meas u r e d by the spac e c r a f t obse rv e r s , the time it take s
for the signal to arrive at Eart h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

69 0 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic mec h a ni c s .

The gra p h shows the variation with spe e d v of the total ene r gy E of a
par ticl e called the kaon,
K–. The rest mas s of the K – is 490 MeV c –2 and its elect ric cha r g e is the
sam e as that of the elect r o n .

IB Questionbank Physics 1113


(a) Sugg e s t how the gra p h may be use d in orde r to obtain the rest mass
of the K –.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Use the grap h to det e r m i n e the pote n ti al differ e n c e requir e d to


accel e r a t e a K – from res t to a spe e d of 0.95c.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) The K– is uns t a bl e and dec ays into a muon and an antine u t r i n o
accor di n g to the reaction

K– →µ – + v

The rest mas s of the muon is 105 MeV c –2 . The rest mas s of the
antine u t r i n o may be assu m e d to be zero.

The K– is at rest when it dec ays.

(i) Show that total ener gy is cons e r v e d if the mom e n t u m of the


muon is 234 MeV c –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1114


(ii) Dete r mi n e the kinetic ene r gy of the muon.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

69 1 . This ques tion is abou t black holes

(a) Define what is mea n t by the Sch w a r z s c hil d radius of a black hole.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A prob e is at rest a small dista n c e from a black hole of Schw a r z s c hil d
radius 6.7 × 10 4 m.
The probe emits monoc h r o m a t i c light pulse s tha t are rec eive d by a
space c r af t very far from the black hole.

Accordi n g to a clock in the prob e the puls e s have a frequ e n c y of 4.5 ×


10 14 Hz, with one puls e being emitt e d every two secon d s. The
frequ e n c y of the light as me a s u r e d by a clock in the spac e c r a f t is 3.0
× 10 14 Hz.

(i) Stat e the nam e of the phe no m e n o n res po n si bl e for the obse rv e d

IB Questionbank Physics 1115


chan g e in the frequ e n c y of the light.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1116


(ii) Dete r mi n e , accor di n g to the spa c e c r a f t clock, how often the
pulse s are received by the spac e c r a f t.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Dete r mi n e the dista n c e of the probe from the cent r e of the black
hole.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

69 2 . This ques tion is abou t the ear and hea ri n g.

Sound waves are incide n t on the ear d r u m of a per so n. The gra p h show s the
variation with time t of the differ e n c e ∆P betw e e n the pres s u r e at the
ear d r u m and atmos p h e r i c pres s u r e .

IB Questionbank Physics 1117


(a) The grap h below show s the variatio n with time t of the velocity v of
the cent r e of the ear d r u m .

The aver a g e powe r car rie d by the soun d wave is given by P av =


Fm a xv m a x
2 wher e F max is the maxim u m force exer t e d on the ear d r u m .

Use dat a from the gra p h s above to

(i) show that the aver a g e inte n si ty of the soun d at the ear d r u m is
app r oxi m a t ely 1.8 × 10 –6 W m –2 . The are a of the ear d r u m , A , is
42 mm 2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) estim a t e the maxim u m soun d inte nsity level, in dB, at the
ear d r u m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1118


(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1119


(b) The area of the oval window whe r e the stirr u p is att a c h e d is 3.2 mm 2 .
The ossicles amplify the force by a factor of 1.5.

Estim a t e the maxim u m pre s s u r e at the inne r ear.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) Outline the role of the ossicles and the oval window in the
tran s m i s sio n of soun d to the inne r ear.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

69 3 . This ques tion is abou t ultr as o u n d imagin g.

(a) Descri b e

(i) what is mean t by ultr a s o u n d .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) how ultra s o u n d may be produ c e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1120


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1121


(b) The table gives infor m a ti o n on the spe e d of soun d, the density and the
acous tic imped a n c e for various mat e ri al s.

Mat e ri a l Sp e e d of so u n d / De n s i t y / kg Aco u s t i c
m s –1 m –3 imp e d a n c e
/ kg m –2 s –1
Air 330 1.3 430
Bone 2800 1.5 × 10 3
Tissue 1600 1.0 × 10 3 1.6 × 10 6

Calcula t e the acous tic impe d a n c e of bone and ent e r your answ e r in
the table above.
(1)

(c) Ultra s o u n d of intensi ty I 0 is travelling in a mediu m of impe d a n c e Z 1


and is incide n t on a mediu m of impe d a n c e Z 2 . The refl e c t e d
ultra s o u n d has intensity I R given by

2
 Z1  Z 2 
 
Z Z 2
IR = I0  1 

(i) With refer e n c e to the equa tio n above explain why ultr a s o u n d
would not be an effective met ho d for a brain sca n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IR
(ii) Using dat a from the table in (b) det e r m i n e the ratio I 0 of
ultr a s o u n d ente ri n g tiss u e from air.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1122


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1123


(iii) Using your ans w e r to (c)(ii), explain the pur po s e of the gel that is
applied to the skin befor e an ultra s o u n d scan.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(d) A pulse of ultr as o u n d is emitt e d from a tra n s d u c e r plac e d on a


patien t’s skin. The pulse is reflec t e d by the stom a c h and is receive d
back at the tran s d u c e r . The gra p h (an A sca n) shows how the volta g e
due to the tran s m i t t e d and the reflect e d puls e varies with time.
The spee d of soun d in tissu e is 1600 m s –1 .

(i) Using dat a from the gra p h dete r m i n e the dist a n c e betw e e n the
stom a c h and the trans d u c e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1124


..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1125


(ii) Outline two differ e n c e s betw e e n an A scan and a B scan.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

69 4 . This ques tion is abou t radiation the r a p y.

(a) To trea t thyroid cance r , radioa c tive iodine- 131 is adminis t e r e d to a


patien t.

(i) Stat e how the radioac tive iodine may be adminis t e r e d to the
patien t .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Stat e the reas o n why iodine is use d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) Stat e two differ e n c e s , comp a r e d with nor m al cells, in the


res po n s e of canc e r o u s cells to expos u r e to radia tion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1126


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1127


(b) The physical half- life of iodine- 131 is 8 days and its biologic al half- life
is 12 days.

(i) Disting ui s h betw e e n physic al and biological half- lives.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Calculat e the effective half- life of iodine- 131.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) A patie n t who has rec eive d tre a t m e n t with iodine- 131 mus t
rem ai n in isolation until the activity of the iodine in the body
redu c e s to about one fourt h of its initial activity.

Estim a t e the num b e r of days a patie n t must rem ai n in isolation.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

69 5 . This ques tion is abou t funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s .

The diagr a m below show s two fund a m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n vertic e s, one for the
elect r o m a g n e t i c and the othe r for the weak inte r a c t io n s .

IB Questionbank Physics 1128


IB Questionbank Physics 1129
(a) Explain why in both vertic e s the incomi n g and the outgoin g cha r g e d
fermion s above must have the sam e elect ric cha r g e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The proce s s e – + e + → µ – + µ + occur s mostly via the elect r o m a g n e t i c


inter a c ti o n and less frequ e n t ly via the weak inte r a c ti o n.

Draw a Feyn m a n diagr a m for the proc e s s e – + e + → µ – + µ + accor di n g


to

(i) the elect r o m a g n e t i c inter a c tio n.

(1)

(ii) the weak inter a c ti o n.

(1)

(iii) Identify the virtu al particle s in eac h of the Feyn m a n diagr a m s


that you drew in (i) and (ii).

Virtual par ticle in


(i): ........................................................................................

Virtual par ticle in


(ii): .......................................................................................
(1)

(c) Stat e one reas o n why the proc e s s e – + e + → µ – + µ + is mor e likely to


involve the elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c ti o n rat h e r tha n the weak
inter a c ti o n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1130


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1131


(d) Elect r o n s are accele r a t e d to a total ene r gy E and the n collide with
station a r y positro n s .

Deter m i n e the minim u m total ene r gy E of the elect r o n for the reac tio n
e – + e + → µ – + µ + to take plac e.

Elect r o n rest mas s = 0.511 MeV c –2 .


Muon res t mas s = 105 MeV c –2 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

69 6 . This ques tion is abou t particle decto r s .

(a) (i) Describ e the oper a ti n g principl e of the bubbl e


cha m b e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Outline how two particl e prop e r t i e s or cha r a c t e r i s ti c s are


meas u r e d using a bubble cha m b e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1132


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1133


(b) The propo r tio n al wire spar k cha m b e r has now repla c e d the bubble
cha m b e r .

Outline two advan t a g e s of this det e c t o r com p a r e d to the bubbl e


cha m b e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

69 7 . This ques tion is abou t qua r k s.

1
The diagr a m below show s the eight spin 2 baryo n s mad e out of the thr e e
lighte s t quar k s , the up (u), the down (d) and the stra n g e (s). In this plot
baryon s belon gi n g to the sam e horizon t a l line have the sam e str a n g e n e s s
(S ) and those along the sam e slant e d line have the sam e cha r g e ( Q).

(a) (i) On the diagr a m above draw a circle arou n d the point
repr e s e n t i n g the neut r o n .
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1134


(ii) Stat e the quar k cont e n t of the neut r o n.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The Ξ – baryo n is uns t a bl e and decays accor di n g to the reac tio n Ξ – →
Λ0 + π –.

The quar k cont e n t of the particle s involve d is Ξ – = ssd, Λ0 = uds and


π – = du .

Stat e and explain whet h e r the inter a c ti o n involved in this dec ay is


elect r o m a g n e t i c, stron g or wea k.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

69 8 . This ques tion is abou t cosmology and string s .

(a) It is ass u m e d that in the first 10 –2 s afte r the Big Bang qua r k s beha v e d
as free par ticles that could not bind into nucleon s .

Sugg e s t a reas o n for this.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) At a time of 10 –2 s after the Big Bang the aver a g e the r m a l ene r gy per
particl e in the univer s e was appr oxi m a t e ly 50 MeV.

Estim a t e the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e 10 –2 s afte r the Big Bang.

IB Questionbank Physics 1135


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1136


(c) In the very early univer s e it is thou g h t that the total num b e r of
particl es was only very slightly larg e r tha n the num b e r of
antip a r ti cl es .

Explain why the mat t e r in the pre s e n t unive r s e is ma d e pre do m i n a n t ly


by par ticles and not antipa r t i cl e s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) Outline why physicis t s wer e led to consid e r string theori e s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(e) Many string theo ri e s sugg e s t that spac e is 10 dime n sio n a l rat h e r tha n
the usual 3+ 1 dimen si o n s (3 for spac e and 1 for time).

Assumin g that string theo ry is corr e c t , explain why we are not awa r e
of the extr a dimen sio n s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

69 9 . The mag ni t u d e of the mas s of the unive r s e is of the orde r of

A. 10 20 kg.

B. 10 30 kg.

IB Questionbank Physics 1137


C. 10 40 kg.

D. 10 50 kg.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

70 0 . Which of the following is a valid sta t e m e n t ?

A. A mea s u r e m e n t that is not precis e can be accu r a t e .

B. A mea s u r e m e n t that is pre cis e is always accu r a t e .

C. A mea s u r e m e n t that is not precis e will always be inacc u r a t e .

D. Repe a t e d mea s u r e m e n t s will always incre a s e accu r a c y and pre cision.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

70 1 . A ball, initially at rest, is dropp e d in the air from a gre a t heigh t. Air
resis t a n c e is not negligible.
Which of the following grap h s best shows the variation with time t of the
accele r a ti o n a of the ball?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1138


70 2 . The gra p h below shows the varia tion with time t of the velocity v of an
object moving along a str ai g h t line.

The displac e m e n t of the object betw e e n t = 0 s and t = 6.0 s is

A. 2.0 m.

B. 12 m.

C. 20 m.

D. 24 m.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1139


70 3 . A const a n t force of magni t u d e F is applie d to a mass m for a time inte rval
∆t . The mag ni t u d e of the impuls e given to the mas s equal s

F
A. m.

F
B. Δt .

C. F∆t .

FΔt
D. m .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

70 4 . Two cart s of differ e n t mass m and M are conn e c t e d by a spring. They are
pus h e d toget h e r such that the sprin g is comp r e s s e d .

After the cart s are relea s e d , the car t of mas s m moves with velocity v . The
chan g e in the mom e n t u m of mas s M is

A. m v.

B. –m v .

C. M v.

D. –M v .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1140


70 5 . A lamp of weigh t W is susp e n d e d by a wire fixed to the ceiling. With
refer e n c e to Newt o n’s third law of motion, the force tha t is equ al and
opposit e to W is the

A. tension in the wire.

B. force applied by the ceiling.

C. force exer t e d by the lamp on the Eart h.

D. force exer t e d by the Eart h on the lamp.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

70 6 . A const a n t force acts on a mas s tha t is initially at rest. Which of the


following grap h s best shows how the kine tic ene r gy E K of the mas s cha n g e s
with the work W done on the mass ? Friction is negligibl e.

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1141


70 7 . Two object s near each othe r are at the sam e tem p e r a t u r e . Which of the
following stat e m e n t s has to be true ?

A. The object s have the sam e inte r n a l ene r gy.

B. The object s have the sam e the r m a l capa city.

C. No ther m al ene r gy is exch a n g e d betw e e n the object s.

D. The net ther m al ener gy exch a n g e d betw e e n the object s is zero.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

70 8 . The tem p e r a t u r e of an ideal gas is a mea s u r e of the molec ul e s’ aver a g e

A. velocity.

B. mom e n t u m .

C. kinetic ener gy.

D. frequ e n c y of collisions.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

70 9 . For a syste m execu ti n g simple har m o ni c motion, the resto ri n g forc e acting
on the syste m is propo r tio n al to the

A. displac e m e n t of the syste m from equilibri u m .

B. amplit u d e of oscillation.

C. elastic poten t i al ener gy.

D. frequ e n c y of oscillation.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1142


71 0 . A cart, conn e c t e d to two identic al spring s , is oscillating with simple
har m o ni c motion betw e e n two points X and Y tha t are equidis t a n t from
point O.

The cart is in equilibriu m at

A. all points betw e e n X and Y.

B. point O only.

C. points X and Y only.

D. points O, X and Y only.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

71 1 . During one comple t e oscillation, the amplitu d e of a da m p e d har m o ni c


motion chan g e s from 1.5 cm to 0.30 cm. The total ene r gy at the end of the
oscillation is E 2 and the total ene r gy at the begin ni n g of the oscillation is
E2
E . The ratio E1 is
1

1
A. 5.

1
B. 25.

C. 5.

D. 25.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1143


71 2 . Plane wavefro n t s are incide n t on a bound a r y betw e e n two medi a labelle d 1
and 2 in the diag r a m .
The diagr a m of the wavefro n t s is dra w n to scale.

The ratio of the refra c tive index of mediu m 2 to that of mediu m 1 is

A. 0.50.

B. 0.67.

C. 1.5.

D. 2.0.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1144


71 3 . A wave pulse is travelling to the right along a string.

Which of the following bes t repr e s e n t s the direc tion of the velocity of the
point P?

A. ↑

B. ↓

C. →

D. ←
(Tot al 1 mar k )

71 4 . The tung s t e n filam e n t of a lamp has a cros s- section a l are a A and lengt h L .
For a poten ti al differ e n c e V acros s the filam e n t , the cur r e n t in the filam e n t
is I. The resis tivity of the tungs t e n equals

VA
A. IL.

IL
B. V A.

VL
C. IA.

IA
D. VL
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1145


71 5 . Which of the following is a corr e c t unit of elect r o m o tiv e force (emf)?

A. A Ω–1

B. Ω A–1

C. C J–1

D. J C –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

71 6 . Which of the following cor r e c tly gives the resist a n c e of an ideal am m e t e r


and resist a n c e of an ideal voltm e t e r ?

Am m e t e r Volt m e t e r
A. infinite infinite
B. zero zero
C. zero infinite
D. infinite zero
(Tot al 1 mar k )

71 7 . The gravit a tion al force betw e e n two unit mass e s sepa r a t e d by a dist a n c e r
is F g . The elect ric force betw e e n two unit cha r g e s sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e
r is F e . The Coulom b const a n t is k and the unive r s al gravit a tion a l cons t a n t
is G. The ratio F g / F e is

A. one.

k
B. G.

G
C. k .

D. Gk .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1146


71 8 . A hollow met allic sphe r e is nega tively cha r g e d . Which of the following
corr e c tly repr e s e n t s the elect ric field?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

71 9 . In the diagr a m , a long cur r e n t- car ryin g wire is nor m al to the plan e of the
pap e r . The cur r e n t in the wire is direc t e d into the plane of the pap e r .

Which of the arrow s gives the direc tion of the mag n e ti c field at point P?

A. W

B. X

C. Y

D. Z
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1147


72 0 . The Geige r- Mars d e n expe ri m e n t (scat t e r i n g of alpha particle s) provide d
evide nc e for

A. the natu r e of alph a particle s.

B. orbital elect r o n s in the atom.

C. very small and relatively mas sive nucle u s .

D. the existe n c e of atomic ene r gy levels.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

72 1 . A nucle a r reactio n is repr e s e n t e d by the following equa tio n.

1
0n  18908H g 197
7 9 Au  21 H

This reac tion is an exam pl e of

A. fission.

B. fusion.

C. nat u r al tran s m u t a t i o n.

D. artificial (induc e d) tran s m u t a t i o n .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1148


72 2 . Which of the following grap h s best shows the variation with nucleo n
num b e r N of the binding ener gy per nucleo n E ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

72 3 . The unit of ener gy density of a fuel is

A. J m –2 .

B. J m –3 .

C. J kg –1 .

D. kg J–1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1149


72 4 . Which of the following is the best estim a t e for the over all efficiency of a
typical coal power station?

A. 5 %

B. 30 %

C. 60 %

D. 90 %
(Tot al 1 mar k )

72 5 . When sunlight is incide n t on a sola r cell an elect ric cur r e n t is prod u c e d .


This is due to

A. a tem p e r a t u r e gradi e n t within the cell.

B. very long wavele n g t h infra r e d radia tio n.

C. very shor t ultr aviolet radia tion.

D. the photo el e c t ri c effect.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

72 6 . The powe r per unit lengt h P of an oscillating wate r colum n (OWC) is due to
the action of a surface wave of amplitu d e A . Which of the following
corr e c tly relat e s P and A , and corr e c tly identifies the nat u r e of the ene r gy
of the wate r colum n?

Rela t i o n bet w e e n P Nat ur e of en e r g y


and A
A. P  A kinetic
B. P  A kinetic and pote n ti al
C. P  A2 kinetic
D. P  A2 kinetic and pote n ti al
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1150


72 7 . The aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Sun is about 20 time s mor e
than the aver a g e surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of the Eart h. The ave r a g e powe r per
unit are a radiat e d by the Eart h is P. The aver a g e powe r per unit are a
radi at e d by the Sun is

A. 20 P.

B. 400 P.

C. 8000 P.

D. 160 000 P.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

72 8 . Global war mi n g red uc e s the ice and snow cover on Eart h. Which of the
following corr e c tly describ e s the cha n g e s in albe d o and rat e of ene r gy
abso r p ti o n by Ear t h?

Albe d o Rat e of en e r g y
abs o r p t i o n
A. incr e a s e incr e a s e
B. decr e a s e incr e a s e
C. incr e a s e decr e a s e
D. decr e a s e decr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1151


72 9 . This ques tion is abou t liquid flow.

The diagr a m shows a stor a g e cont ai n e r for liquids.

The cont ai n e r is filled from above. The dista n c e betw e e n the bas e of the
cont ai n e r and the grou n d is h 0 .

IB Questionbank Physics 1152


The cont ai n e r , which is initially empty, is the n filled at a co n s t a n t rat e.
The heigh t h of the liquid surfa c e above the groun d is mea s u r e d as a
function of time t . The results of the mea s u r e m e n t s are show n plott e d
below.

(a) Draw a best- fit line for the data.


(1)

(b) It is hypot h e s iz e d that h is direc tly propo r tio n a l to t . Sta t e and explain
whet h e r this hypot h e si s is corr e c t for the period s

(i) t = 0 to t = 120 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1153


(ii) t > 120 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) Use dat a from the gra p h to det e r m i n e the value of h 0 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) The area of the base of the cont ai n e r is 1.8 m 2 . Deduc e that the
volum e of liquid ent e ri n g the stor a g e cont ai n e r eac h secon d is
appr oxi m a t ely 0.02 m 3 s –1 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1154


.....................
(3)

(e) The cont ain e r is compl et ely filled afte r 850 s. Calcula t e the total
volum e of the cont ai n e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1155


(f) The empty cont ai n e r is now filled at half the rate in (d). Using the
axes, sketc h a grap h to show the variatio n of h with t in the rang e t =
0 to t = 900 s.

(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

73 0 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e .

(a) A heatin g coil is to be mad e of wire of diam e t e r 3.5 × 10 –4 m. The


heat e r is to dissipa t e 980 W whe n conn e c t e d to a 230 V d.c. supply.
The mat e ri al of the wire has resistivity
1.3 × 10 –6 Ω m at the working tem p e r a t u r e of the hea t e r .

(i) Define electrical resista n c e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1156


(ii) Calculat e the resist a n c e of the hea ti n g coil at its nor m al workin g
tem p e r a t u r e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Show that the lengt h of wire nee d e d to make the hea tin g coil is
app r oxi m a t ely 4 m.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Thre e identical elect ric al hea t e r s eac h provide powe r P whe n
conn e c t e d sepa r a t e ly to a supply S which has zero inte r n a l resist a n c e .
On the diag r a m below, com ple t e the circ uit by drawi n g two switc h e s
so that the power provide d by the hea t e r s may be eit h e r P or 2 P or
3 P.

(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1157


73 1 . This ques tion is abou t force fields.

(a) Outline what is mean t by a field of forc e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Five particles A to E are eac h plac e d in a differe n t type of field.


Complet e the table to identify the nat u r e of the field in which eac h
particl e is situat e d .

Initi a l dire c t i o n
Char g e Dire c t i o n of
Parti c l of
on forc e on Type of fiel d
e mo t i o n of
parti c l e parti c l e
parti c l e
unch a r g e in dire ctio n of ...............................
A station a r y
d field ......
opposit e to
along direc tio n of
B nega tive direc tio n of ...............................
field
field ......
nor m a l to nor m a l to
C positive dire c tion direc tio n of ...............................
of field field ......
nor m a l to
in dire ctio n of
D positive dire c tion ...............................
field
of field ......
opposit e to
unch a r g e in dire ctio n of
E dire c tion ...............................
d field
of field ......
(5)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1158


73 2 . This ques tion is abou t dyna mic s and ene r gy.

A bullet of mas s 32 g is fired from a gun. The gra p h show s the variatio n of
the force F on the bullet with time t as it travels along the bar r el of the
gun.

The bullet is fired at time t = 0 and the lengt h of the bar r e l is 0.70 m.

(a) Stat e and explain why it is inapp r o p r i a t e to use the equ a tio n s = ut +
1
at 2
2 to calculat e the accele r a t io n of the bullet.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1159


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1160


(b) Use the grap h to

(i) det e r m i n e the aver a g e acc ele r a t io n of the bullet durin g the final
2.0 ms of the grap h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) show that the chan g e in mom e n t u m of the bullet, as the bullet
travels along the lengt h of the bar r el, is appr oxi m a t e ly 9 N s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Use the answ e r in (b)(ii) to calcul a t e the

(i) spee d of the bullet as it leave s the bar r e l.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1161


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1162


(ii) aver a g e powe r delive r e d to the bullet.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(d) Use New to n’s thir d law to explain why a gun will recoil whe n a bullet
is fired.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1163


73 3 . This ques tion is abou t fossil fuels.

(a) A Sankey diag r a m for the gen e r a t i o n of elect ric al ene r gy using fossil
fuel as the prim a r y ener gy sour c e is show n.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by a fuel.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Stat e two exam pl e s of fossil fuels.

1. .....................................................................................................
..................

2. .....................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1164


(iii) Explain why fossil fuels are said to be non- ren e w a b l e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) Use the Sank ey diag r a m to estim a t e the efficiency of prod u c tio n
of elect ri cal ener gy and explain your ans w e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Despit e the fact that fossil fuels are non- ren e w a b l e and cont rib u t e to
atmo s p h e r i c pollution ther e is wides p r e a d use of suc h fuels. Sugg e s t
thr e e reas o n s for this wides p r e a d use.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

3. .............................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1165


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1166


73 4 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion and wave s.

An object is vibrati n g in air. The variation with displa c e m e n t x of the


accele r a ti o n a of the object is show n below.

IB Questionbank Physics 1167


(a) Stat e and explain two rea s o n s why the gra p h opposit e indica t e s that
the object is executi n g simple har m o ni c motion.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) Use dat a from the gra p h to show tha t the frequ e n c y of oscillation is
350 Hz.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(c) Stat e the amplitu d e of the vibra tion s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) The motion of the object gives rise to a longitu di n a l progr e s s iv e


(travelling) soun d wave.

IB Questionbank Physics 1168


(i) Stat e what is mean t by a longitu di n a l progr e s sive wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1169


(ii) The spee d of the wave is 330 m s –1 . Using the answ e r in (b),
calcula t e the wavel en g t h of the wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

73 5 . This ques tion is abou t α-particle scat t e r i n g and nucle a r proc e s s e s .

α-particle scat t e r i n g

Radiu m- 226 decays with the emiss ion of α-particle s to rado n (Rn).

(a) Complet e the nuclea r reac tion equ a tio n.

226
8 8 Ra  Rn +
(2)

(b) Expe ri m e n t a l evidenc e tha t suppo r t s a nucle a r model of the atom was
provide d by α-par ticle scat t e r i n g . The diag r a m repr e s e n t s the path of
an α-particle a s it appr o a c h e s and then rec e d e s from a sta tion a r y gold
nucleu s .

(i) On the diagr a m , draw lines to show the angle of devia tion of the
α-particle.
Label this angle D.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1170


(ii) The gold nucleu s is repla c e d by anot h e r gold nucle u s tha t has a
large r nucleo n num b e r . Sugg e s t and explain the cha n g e , if any,
in the angle D of an α-particle with the sa m e ene r gy and
following the sam e initial path as in (b)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The diagr a m shows the initial pat h of an α-particle that appr o a c h e s
the gold nucle u s along a line joining their cent r e s . On the diagr a m
draw the subs e q u e n t pat h of the α-particle.

(1)

Nucle a r proce s s e s

(d) The main nucle a r proc e s s that gives rise to ene r gy emission from the
Sun may be simplified to

4H → He + ener gy.

(i) Stat e the nam e of this nucle a r proc e s s .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1171


(ii) The total mas s of four hydro g e n (H) nuclei is 6.693 × 10 –27 kg
and the mass of a helium (He) nucle u s is 6.645 × 10 –27 kg. Show
that the ener gy relea s e d in this rea c tion is 4.3 × 10 –12 J.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) The Sun has a radius R of 7.0 × 10 8 m and emit s ene r gy at a rat e
of 3.9 × 10 26 W.
The nuclea r reactio n s take plac e in the sphe ri c al core of the Sun
of radius 0.25 R . Use thes e dat a and the ans w e r in (d)(ii) to
det e r m i n e the num b e r of nucle a r rea c tion s occur ri n g per cubic
met r e per secon d in the core of the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

73 6 . This ques tion is abou t wave powe r.

(a) Outline how the ener gy of a wave can be conve r t e d to elect ric al
ener gy.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1172


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1173


(b) A wave on the surfac e of wate r is assu m e d to be a squa r e- wave of
heigh t 2 A , as show n.

The wave has wavelen g t h λ, spe e d v and has a wavefro n t of lengt h L .


For this wave,

(i) show that the gravita tion a l pote n ti al ene r gy E P stor e d in one
wavele n g t h of the wave is given by

1
A 2 λgρL
EP = 2

wher e ρ is the density of the wat e r and g is the acc ele r a t io n of


free fall.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) dedu c e that the gravit a tion a l wave powe r P per unit lengt h of the
wavefro n t is given by

1
P= 2 A 2 vg ρ

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1174


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1175


(c) The density of sea- wate r is 1.2 × 10 3 kg m –3 . Using the expr e s si o n in
(b)(ii), estim a t e the gravit a tio n a l powe r per met r e lengt h availa ble in a
wave of height 0.60 m.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) In practice a wat e r wave is appr oxi m a t e ly sinus oid al in cross- section.
Outline whet h e r a sine wave of the sam e heigh t as in (b) tra n sf e r s a
grea t e r or a smaller amou n t of powe r tha n tha t derive d in (b)(ii).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(e) List two adva n t a g e s of the utiliza tion of wave powe r rath e r tha n
photovolt aic cells for the gene r a t i o n of elect ric powe r.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

73 7 . This ques tio n is about the albe d o of the Ear t h.

(a) Outline the mech a ni s m by which a gas, such as carbo n dioxide,


absor b s infra- red radiation.

IB Questionbank Physics 1176


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r in (a), why car bo n dioxide is
know n as a gree n h o u s e gas.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) Stat e the na m e of anot h e r gre e n h o u s e gas.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) In the last fifty year s the amou n t of car bo n dioxide in the Eart h’s
atmo s p h e r e has incr e a s e d signific a n tly. Explain

(i) why this incr e a s e could accou n t for global war mi n g .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) what effect this has had on the ave r a g e albe do of the Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1177


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1178


(e) It has bee n estim a t e d that doubling the amou n t of car bo n dioxide in
the Ear t h’s atmo s p h e r e chan g e s the albe do of the Eart h by 0.01. Use
the data to show that this doubling will lead to a cha n g e of abou t 3 W
m –2 in the inten si ty being reflec t e d by the Eart h into spac e .

Averag e inten sity rec eive d at Eart h from the Sun = 340 W
m –2
Averag e albedo = 0.30

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(f) Stat e on e reas o n why the answ e r to (e) is an estim a t e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

73 8 . This ques tion is abou t the eye and sight.

(a) A whit e object is illumin a t e d with red light and gre e n light at the sam e
time. Stat e the colour that the objec t will appe a r to an obse rv e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1179


(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1180


(b) The aver a g e wavelen g t h of red light is 650 nm and that of blue light is
488 nm. The refra c tive index of wate r is 1.3. Jim argu e s tha t since
wavelen g t h s in wat e r comp a r e d with thos e in air are redu c e d by a
factor of 1.3, a red cricket ball plac e d und e r wate r shoul d appe a r to
be blue to a pers o n with nor m al sight. Sugg e s t why Jim’s rea s o ni n g is
incor r e c t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 3 mark s )

73 9 . This ques tion is abou t stan di n g wave s.

A string is att ac h e d betw e e n two rigid suppo r t s and is mad e to vibra t e at


its fund a m e n t a l frequ e n c y (first har m o ni c) f.

The diagr a m shows the displac e m e n t of the string at t = 0.

(a) Draw the displace m e n t of the string at time

1
(i) t = 4f

(1)

1
(ii) t = 2f

IB Questionbank Physics 1181


(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1182


(b) The dist an c e betw e e n the suppo r t s is 1.0 m. A wave in the strin g
travels at a spee d of
240 m s –1 . Calculat e the frequ e n c y of the vibra tion of the string.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) An organ pipe that is open at one end has the sa m e fund a m e n t a l
frequ e n c y as the string in part (b). The spee d of sound in air is 330 m
s –1 . Dete r mi n e the lengt h of the pipe.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

74 0 . This ques tion is abou t the Dopple r effect.

A station a r y louds p e a k e r emits soun d of frequ e n c y of 1000 Hz. Nadin e


att ac h e s the louds p e a k e r to a string. She move s the louds p e a k e r in a
horizont al circle above her hea d at a spe e d of
30 m s –1 . The spee d of sound in air is 330 m s –1 .

An observ e r is stan di n g well away from Nadin e .

(a) Explain why the sound hea r d by the obse rv e r cha n g e s reg ul a rly.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1183


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1184


(b) Deter m i n e the maxim u m freq u e n c y of the sound hea r d by the
obse rv e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

74 1 . This ques tion is abou t polarizatio n.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by unpola riz e d light.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) A bea m of unpola riz e d light of inte nsity 1.0 W m –2 is incide n t on an


ideal polarizin g filter.
Stat e the value of the inte n sity of the tra n s m i t t e d light. Explain your
ans w e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1185


.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1186


(c) Outline how polarize d light may be use d to mea s u r e the conc e n t r a t i o n
of a suga r solution.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1187


74 2 . This ques tion is abou t the photo el e c t r i c effect.

(a) A clean met al surfac e in a vacuu m is illumin a t e d with monoc h r o m a t i c


light, res ultin g in the emission of elec t r o n s from the surfa c e .

IB Questionbank Physics 1188


(i) On the axes, sket ch a gra p h to show how the maxim u m kinetic
ene r gy K of the elect r o n varies with the inte nsity I of the light.

(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1189


(ii) Explain the shap e of the gra p h you have dra w n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1190


(b) The wavele n g t h of the incide n t light in (a) is 400 nm. The maxim u m
kinetic ener gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s is 2.1 eV. Dete r mi n e the work
function of the met al.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1191


74 3 . This ques tion is abou t the wave nat u r e of matt e r and qua n t u m ene r gy
stat e s.

(a) Descri b e what is mean t by the de Broglie hypot h e si s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1192


(b) An elect r o n is confined to one dime n s io n in a “box” of lengt h L . The de
Broglie waves associa t e d with the particl e form sta n di n g wave s in the
2L
box with wavelen g t h s given by n whe r e n is = 1, 2, 3, etc .

Show that the ene r gy levels E n for the par ticle are given by E n =
n2h2
(8m L2 ) wher e h is Planck’s const a n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1193


(c) The elect r o n make s a tran sitio n from the ene r gy sta t e given by n = 4
to n = 2. The lengt h L = 1.3 × 10 –9 m. Calcula t e the

(i) ene r gy of the photon emitt e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1194


(ii) wavele n g t h of the photon emitt e d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1195


74 4 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r physics and radioa c tive dec ay.

(a) Define the decay consta n t of a radioa c tive nuclide.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1196


(b) (i) Plutoniu m- 239 (Pu- 239) has a half- life of 2.4 × 10 4
year s. Show that the dec ay cons t a n t of Pu- 239 is appr oxi m a t e l y 3
× 10 –5 year –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1197


(ii) Calculat e the time take n for the activity of a fres hly- pre p a r e d
sam pl e of Pu- 239 to fall to 0.1 % of its initial value.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1198


74 5 . This ques tion is abou t data stor a g e .

(a) With refer e n c e to binary num b e r s , define the ter m bit and explain
what is mea n t by least significa n t bit.

Bit:

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Leas t significa n t bit:

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1199


(b) An acous ti c signal is conve r t e d into an analog u e volta g e signal. The
analog u e signal is then conve r t e d to a digital signal. The maxim u m
value of the voltag e signal is 20 V.

(i) Stat e the value of the least significa n t bit of the bina ry num b e r
that repr e s e n t s the num b e r 20.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1200


(ii) Outline how the analog u e signal afte r conve r sio n to a digital
signal may be stor e d on a comp a c t disc (CD).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1201


(c) Sugg e s t on e implication tha t the stor a g e of inform a t io n in digital form
on a CD may have in conn e c tio n with environ m e n t a l issue s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1202


74 6 . This ques tion is abou t capacit a n c e and cha r g e- couple d device s (CCD).

(a) Define capacita nc e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1203


(b) Outline how light that is incide n t on a pixel on the surfa c e of a CCD
can prod u c e a pote n ti al differ e n c e acros s the pixel.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1204


(c) The num b e r of photo n s incide n t on one pixel of a CCD for a cert ai n
period of time is
1.2 × 10 4 . The capacit a n c e of the pixel is 22 pF and the qua n t u m
efficiency is 75 %.
Deter m i n e the chan g e in pote n ti al differ e n c e acros s the pixel.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1205


74 7 . This ques tion is abou t oper a t io n a l amplifie r s.

(a) The diagr a m shows a circuit tha t uses an oper a t io n a l amplifie r as an


inver ti n g amplifier.

The point P is a virtual ear t h, tha t is at the sam e pote n ti al (0 V) as the


eart h line.

IB Questionbank Physics 1206


(i) Stat e the two prop e r ti e s of the ope r a tio n a l amplifier which make
P a virtual ear t h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1207


(ii) In the circuit R f = 100 k Ω and R in = 10 k Ω. Calcula t e the gain of
the a mplifier.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1208


(b) The diagr a m shows a circuit tha t uses an oper a t io n a l amplifie r as a
non- inver tin g Sch mit t trigg e r .

In the situatio n show n, the pote n ti al at point X is 2.0 V and the outpu t
poten ti al V out is at its minim u m value of –10 V. Show that for the
outpu t pote n ti al to switch to its maxim u m value of +1 0 V

IB Questionbank Physics 1209


(i) the curr e n t in the resis to r s R 1 and R 2 is 0.08 mA.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1210


(ii) V in mus t rise to 5.8 V.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1211


74 8 . This ques tion is abou t simult a n e i ty and lengt h mea s u r e m e n t .

(a) One of the two post ul a t e s of special rela tivity sta t e s that “the laws of
physics are the sam e for all iner tial obse rv e r s ”. Sta t e the othe r
post ul a t e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1212


(b) Tom and Barb a r a are two obse rv e r s eac h in a sepa r a t e refe r e n c e
fram e. The refer e n c e fram e s are moving rela tive to eac h othe r in the
sam e str ai g h t line with cons t a n t velocity.
Two lamps L 1 and L 2 are ope r a t e d by the sam e switc h. Tom is at the
mid- point betw e e n the lamps as me a s u r e d in his fram e of refer e n c e .

The lam ps and the switch are at rest rela tive to Tom.

Tom switch e s on the lamps and to him they light simult a n e o u s ly.
Explain, bas e d on your answ e r to (a), why the lamps will not light
simult a n e o u s ly, accor di n g to Barb a r a .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1213


(c) Tom meas u r e s the sepa r a t io n of L 1 and L 2 to be 1.5 m whe r e a s
Barb a r a meas u r e s the sepa r a t i o n to be 0.5 m.

(i) Stat e and explain which obse rv e r me a s u r e s the prop e r lengt h


betw e e n L 1 and L 2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1214


(ii) Calculat e, in ter m s of the free spac e spee d of light c , the relative
spee d betw e e n Tom and Barb a r a .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1215


(iii) Sketc h a gra p h to show how the relative spee d v betw e e n Tom
and Barb a r a varies with the lengt h L betw e e n L 1 and L 2 as
meas u r e d by Barb a r a . The dat a point (1.5,0) is shown. On the v
axis, label the point v = c .

(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1216


74 9 . This ques tion is abou t funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s and elem e n t a r y particle s.

(a) In the table identify the excha n g e par ticle(s) associa t e d with the two
funda m e n t a l inter a c tio n s given.

Int er a c t i o n Exc h a n g e parti c l e ( s )


Elect r o- weak
Stron g
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1217


(b) Stat e why the exch a n g e par ticle s are known as elem e n t a r y particl e s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1218


(c) An exch a n g e particle associ a t e d with the weak inte r a c ti o n has a mas s
of about 90 GeVc –2 . Estim a t e the life- time of the particle.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1219


(d) The diagr a m is a Feyn m a n diagr a m tha t repr e s e n t s the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n qua r k s.

IB Questionbank Physics 1220


(i) Identify the excha n g e par ticl e X.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1221


(ii) Explain why the quar k s have a colour associa t e d with the m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1222


75 0 . This ques tion is abou t the star Anta r e s .

The star Antar e s is a red supe r gi a n t sta r in the const ell a tio n Scor pi u s.

(a) Descri b e thre e char a c t e r i s ti c s of a red supe r gi a n t sta r and stat e what
is mea n t by a const ella tion.

Red supe r gi a n t star:

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Cons t ella tio n:

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1223


(b) The appa r e n t magni t u d e of Antar e s is + 1.1 and its absolut e
magni t u d e is –5.3.

(i) Disting ui s h betw e e n appa r e n t mag ni t u d e and absolut e


mag ni t u d e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1224


(ii) Show that the dista n c e of Antar e s from Eart h is 3.9 × 10 7 AU.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1225


(iii) Stat e the nam e of the met ho d tha t is use d to mea s u r e the
dist a n c e of Antar e s from Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1226


(c) The appa r e n t bright n e s s of Antar e s is 4.3 × 10 –11 time s the app a r e n t
bright n e s s of the Sun.

(i) Define appar e n t bright n e s s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1227


(ii) Using the answ e r to (b)(ii), show that Anta r e s is 6.5 × 10 4 time s
mor e lumino u s than the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1228


75 1 . The Moon orbits the Ear t h.

Which of the following diag r a m s corr e c tly rep r e s e n t s the force(s) acting on
the Moon?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1229


75 2 . A stone is throw n horizon t ally from the top of a cliff with an initial spe e d v.

The time of flight of the ston e is t and its rang e R . Air resis t a n c e is
negligible.

For a ston e that is throw n horizon t a lly from the top of the cliff with an
initial spee d 3 v , which of the following is corr e c t ?

Tim e of Ran g e
flig h t
A. t R
B. 3t 3R
C. t 3R
D. 3t R
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1230


75 3 . A char g e d par ticle is moved at const a n t spe e d betw e e n two points in an
elect ric field. The work done betw e e n the two points is det e r m i n e d by the

A. value of the char g e and the pat h take n.

B. value of the char g e .

C. pat h take n.

D. spee d.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1231


75 4 . The diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s equipot e n t i al lines of a gravit a tio n al field.

Which of the following is the direc tion and str e n g t h of the field at point P?

Dire c t i o n Stre n g t h
A. ← 5.0 N kg –1
B. → 5.0 N kg –1
C. ← 13 N kg –1
D. → 13 N kg –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1232


75 5 . The tem p e r a t u r e of an ideal gas is a mea s u r e of the molec ul e s’ aver a g e

A. velocity.

B. mom e n t u m .

C. kinetic ener gy.

D. frequ e n c y of collisions.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1233


75 6 . For an ideal gas of const a n t mas s the pres s u r e is always propo r ti o n al to

A. density and volum e.

B. density and tem p e r a t u r e .

C. volum e and tem p e r a t u r e .

D. volum e only.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1234


75 7 . Which of the following stat e m e n t s is in agr e e m e n t with the secon d law of
ther m o d y n a m i c s ?

A. It is possible to continu o u s ly conve r t the r m a l ene r gy fully into work.

B. In nat u r al proc es s e s , local ent r o py must incr e a s e .

C. Ther m al ener gy will not flow by itself from cold to hot bodie s.

D. The entr o py in a closed syste m tend s to dec r e a s e .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1235


75 8 . For a syste m execu ti n g simple har m o ni c motion, the resto ri n g forc e acting
on the syste m is propo r tio n al to the

A. displac e m e n t of the syste m from equilibri u m .

B. amplit u d e of oscillation.

C. elastic poten t i al ener gy.

D. frequ e n c y of oscillation.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1236


75 9 . Which of the following stat e m e n t s is true for a sta n di n g wave on a string?

A. No ener gy is tran sf e r r e d along the string.

B. The maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of eac h seg m e n t of the strin g is


propo r tio n al to the amplit u d e of the seg m e n t .

C. Each seg m e n t of the string oscillat e s with differ e n t pha s e and


frequ e n c y.

D. The amplit u d e along the string varies with time.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1237


76 0 . A siren at rest emits a sound of frequ e n c y f 0 . The spe e d of soun d in air is v .
The siren moves away from an obse rv e r at rest rela tive to the sire n in a
str ai g h t line with cons t a n t spee d v s .

The observ e r mea s u r e s a frequ e n c y lowe r tha n f 0 bec a u s e the

A. spee d at which the sound moves relative to the obse rv e r is v – v s .

B. spee d at which the sound moves relative to the obse rv e r is v s – v .

vs
C. wavelen g t h meas u r e d by the obse rv e r is smalle r by a factor v .

vs
D. wavelen g t h meas u r e d by the obse rv e r is gre a t e r by a factor v .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1238


76 1 . In an elect r o n micros co p e, high ene r gy elect r o n s are use d in orde r to
incr e a s e the

A. interfe r e n c e effect s.

B. diffraction effects.

C. resolving powe r of the micros c o p e .

D. magnifying power of the micros c o p e .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1239


76 2 . The diagr a m repr e s e n t s a beam of unpola riz e d light incide n t on a diam o n d.

The refr ac tive index of the diamo n d is n .

At an angle θ p , the bea m reflect e d from the dia mo n d is plane pola riz e d
nor m al to the pag e. The angle θ p is

A. tan –1 n .

1
 
B. tan –1  n  .

1
 
C. sin –1  n  .

1
 
D. cos –1  n  .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1240


76 3 . Two polarizin g shee t s have plane s of polariza tion tha t are initially par allel.

The incomin g light on sheet 1 is unpola riz e d. The inte nsity of the light
I
tran s mi t t e d is I. To red uc e the inte n sity to 2 , which shee t must be rota t e d
and thro u g h what angle?

Sh e e t to be Rot a t i o n an gl e
rota t e d
 1 
A. 1 only  
–1  2 
θ = cos
1
B. 2 only  
θ = cos –1  2 
 1 
C. 1 or 2  
–1  2 
θ = cos
1
D. 1 or 2  
θ = cos –1  2 
(Tot al 1 mar k )

76 4 . The elect r o nv olt is a unit of

A. force.

B. poten ti al differe n c e .

C. ener gy.

D. elect ric field str e n g t h .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1241


76 5 . A disc of radius r is place d in a unifor m ma g n e ti c field. The ma g nit u d e of
the field str e n g t h is B and it make s an angle θ to the plane of the disc.

The mag n e t i c flux linking the disc is

A. π r2B .

B. π r 2 B sin θ.

C. π r 2 B cos θ.

D. π r 2 B tan θ.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

76 6 . A magn e t i c flux linking a wire loop cha n g e s sinusoid ally with time. The emf
induce d in the loop chan g e s sinusoi d ally

A. in phas e with the chan gi n g flux.

B. out of phas e with the chan gi n g flux by a qua r t e r period.

C. out of phas e with the chan gi n g flux by a third of a period.

D. out of phas e with the chan gi n g flux by half a period.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1242


76 7 . The maxim u m outp u t voltag e of a gen e r a t o r is V 0 . The freq u e n c y of
rota tio n of the gen e r a t o r coil is doubl e d. What is the new maxim u m outp u t
voltag e?

A. V0

B. 2 V0

C. 2 V0

D. 4 V0
(Tot al 1 mar k )

76 8 . A photon has

A. ener gy and mom e n t u m .

B. no ener gy.

C. ener gy only.

D. no mom e n t u m .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

76 9 . The de Broglie hypot h e s i s applies to

A. nucleo n s only.

B. elect r o n s only.

C. photon s only.

D. all particles .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1243


77 0 . In the Schr ö di n g e r model of the hydro g e n atom a wavefu n c tio n of
amplitu d e A is assign e d to the elect r o n. The prob a bility of locating the
elect r o n at a region of space within the atom is propo r tio n a l to

A. A –1 .

B. A.

C. A.

D. A2.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

77 1 . Which of the following lists the particle s associa t e d with radioa c tive dec ay
in orde r of incr e a s i n g ionizing powe r ?

A. α, β, γ

B. γ, α, β

C. β, α, γ

D. γ, β, α
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1244


77 2 . The diagr a m is a sche m a t i c rep r e s e n t a t i o n of the Bainbri d g e mass
spect r o m e t e r . Positive ions are inject e d betw e e n the plat e s of the spee d
select o r .

Which of the following cor r e c tly shows the dire c tion of the magn e t i c fields
B 1 and B 2 ?

B1 B2
A. out of the pag e out of the page
B. into the page into the pag e
C. out of the pag e into the pag e
D. into the page out of the page
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1245


77 3 . The desig n of a ther m al fission rea c t o r includ e s the following.

I. Fuel rods

II. Contr ol rods

III. Mode r a t o r

Which par t(s) help maint ai n a const a n t rate of fission in the cor e of a
react o r ?

A. I, II and III

B. I and II only

C. II only

D. III only
(Tot al 1 mar k )

77 4 . The binding ener gy of a nucle u s is define d to be the

A. ener gy relea s e d when a nucle u s is form e d from its individu al


constit u e n t s .

B. ener gy relea s e d when the nucle u s is sepa r a t e d into its individu al


constit u e n t s .

C. total ene r gy of the nucle u s.

D. total ene r gy of the proto n s inside the nucle u s .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

77 5 . Most climat e scientis t s agr e e that the enh a n c e d gre e n h o u s e effect is due to

A. cyclical chan g e s of the Eart h’s orbit.

B. volcanic activity.

C. the bur ni n g of fossil fuels.

D. incr e a s e d solar activity.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1246


77 6 . A comp a c t disc playe r uses lase r light to rea d a disc. The heigh t of one pit
1
on the CD is about 4 of the wavele n g t h of the lase r light. The light
illumin a t e s the edge of a pit. Which of the following is corr e c t with
refer e n c e to the interf e r e n c e of the light and the bina ry infor m a t io n
regist e r e d ?

Int erf e r e n c e Bin ary


infor m a t i o n
A. cons t r u c tive 0
B. des t r u c tive 1
C. cons t r u c tive 1
D. des t r u c tive 0
(Tot al 1 mar k )

77 7 . Light incide n t on a pixel elem e n t in a cha r g e- coupl e d devic e (CCD)


produ c e s elect r o n- hole pair s.
This is due to

A. the photo el e c t ri c effect.

B. a tem p e r a t u r e gradi e n t in the semicon d u c t o r lattic e.

C. elect r o d e s acros s the surfa c e of the pixel ele m e n t .

D. a chemic al reac tio n on the oxide insul at o r .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

77 8 . A CCD cam e r a is used to take the pictu r e of an object of lengt h 30 m. The


imag e of the object on the chip mea s u r e s 0.03 mm. The ma gnific a tio n is

A. 10 6 .

B. 10 3 .

C. 10 –3 .

D. 10 –6 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1247


77 9 . This ques tion is abou t liquid flow.

The diagr a m shows a stor a g e cont ai n e r for liquids.

The cont ai n e r is filled from above. The dista n c e betw e e n the bas e of the
cont ai n e r and the grou n d is h 0 .

IB Questionbank Physics 1248


The cont ai n e r , which is initially empty, is the n filled at a co n s t a n t rat e.
The heigh t h of the liquid surfa c e above the groun d is mea s u r e d as a
function of time t . The results of the mea s u r e m e n t s are show n plott e d
below.

(a) Draw a best- fit line for the data.


(1)

(b) Stat e and explain whet h e r h is direc tly propo r tio n a l to t for the
period s

(i) t = 0 to t = 120 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1249


(ii) t > 120 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) Use dat a from the gra p h to det e r m i n e the value of h 0 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) The area of the base of the cont ai n e r is 1.8 m 2 . Deduc e that the
volum e of liquid ent e ri n g the stor a g e cont ai n e r eac h secon d is
appr oxi m a t ely 0.02 m 3 s –1 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1250


.....................
(3)

(e) The cont ain e r is compl et ely filled afte r 850 s. Calcula t e the total
volum e of the cont ai n e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1251


(f) It is hypot h e s iz e d that for t > 400 s the relation betw e e n t and h is of
the form

h = kt n

whe r e k and n are const a n t s .

(i) Outline how, using a gra p hi c al tec h ni q u e , you would verify this
hypot h e s i s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Explain how you would det e r m i n e the value of n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1252


(g) The empty cont ai n e r is now filled at half the rate in (d). Using the
axes, sketc h a grap h to show the variatio n of h with t in the rang e t =
0 to t = 900 s.

(2)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

78 0 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e .

(a) A heatin g coil is to be mad e of wire of diam e t e r 3.5 × 10 –4 m. The


heat e r is to dissipa t e 980 W whe n conn e c t e d to a 230 V d.c. supply.
The mat e ri al of the wire has resistivity
1.3 × 10 –6 Ω m at the working tem p e r a t u r e of the hea t e r .

(i) Define electrical resista n c e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1253


(ii) Calculat e the resist a n c e of the hea ti n g coil at its nor m al workin g
tem p e r a t u r e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Show that the lengt h of wire nee d e d to make the hea tin g coil is
app r oxi m a t ely 4 m.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Thre e identical elect ric al hea t e r s eac h provide powe r P whe n
conn e c t e d sepa r a t e ly to a supply S which has zero inte r n a l resist a n c e .
On the diag r a m below, com ple t e the circ uit by drawi n g two switc h e s
so that the power provide d by the hea t e r s may be eit h e r P or 2 P or
3 P.

(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1254


78 1 . This ques tion is abou t force fields.

(a) Outline what is mean t by a field of forc e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Thre e particles A, B, and C are eac h plac e d in a differ e n t type of field.
Complet e the table to identify the nat u r e of the field in which eac h
particl e is situat e d .

Initi a l dire c t i o n
Char g e Dire c t i o n of
Parti c l of
on forc e on Type of fiel d
e mo t i o n of
parti c l e parti c l e
parti c l e
unch a r g e in dire ctio n of ...............................
A station a r y
d field ......
opposit e to
along direc tio n of
B nega tive direc tio n of ...............................
field
field ......
nor m a l to nor m a l to
C positive dire c tion direc tio n of ...............................
of field field ......
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

78 2 . This ques tion is abou t wave powe r.

(a) Outline how the ener gy of a wave can be conve r t e d to elect ric al
ener gy.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1255


.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1256


(b) A wave on the surfac e of wate r is assu m e d to be a squa r e- wave of
heigh t 2 A , as show n.

The wave has wavelen g t h λ, spe e d v and has a wavefro n t of lengt h L .


For this wave,

(i) show that the gravita tion a l pote n ti al ene r gy E P stor e d in one
wavele n g t h of the wave is given by

1
E P = 2 A 2 λg ρL

wher e ρ is the density of the wat e r and g is the acc ele r a t io n of


free fall.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) dedu c e that the gravit a tion a l wave powe r P per unit lengt h of the
wavefro n t is given by

1
P = 2 A 2 vg ρ

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1257


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1258


(c) The density of sea- wate r is 1.2 × 10 3 kg m –3 . Using the expr e s si o n in
(b)(ii), estim a t e the gravit a tio n a l powe r per met r e lengt h availa ble in a
wave of height 0.60 m.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) In practice a wat e r wave is appr oxi m a t e ly sinus oid al in cross- section.
Outline whet h e r a sine wave of the sam e heigh t as in (b) tra n sf e r s a
grea t e r or a smaller amou n t of powe r tha n tha t derive d in (b)(ii).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

78 3 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCD).

(a) With refer e n c e to a CCD, stat e what is mea n t by a pixel.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Outline how light falling on a CCD leads to an elect ric al signal being
prod u c e d by a pixel.

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1259


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Stat e on e other piece of infor m a t io n tha t nee d s to be collec t e d, in


addition to the elect ric al signal in (b), in orde r that an image may be
form e d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) Sugg e s t two advan t a g e s of a CCD in comp a ri s o n with a photog r a p h i c


film for imag e prod u c tio n.

1 ..............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2 ..............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1260


78 4 . This ques tion is abou t dyna mic s and ene r gy.

A bullet of mas s 32 g is fired from a gun. The gra p h show s the variatio n of
the force F on the bullet with time t as it travels along the bar r el of the
gun.

The bullet is fired at time t = 0 and the lengt h of the bar r e l is 0.70 m.

(a) Stat e and explain why it is inapp r o p r i a t e to use the equ a tio n s = ut +
1
2 at 2 to calculat e the accele r a t io n of the bullet.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1261


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Use the grap h to

(i) det e r m i n e the aver a g e acc ele r a t io n of the bullet durin g the final
2.0 ms of the grap h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) show that the chan g e in mom e n t u m of the bullet, as the bullet
travels along the lengt h of the bar r el, is appr oxi m a t e ly 9 N s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Use the answ e r in (b)(ii) to calcul a t e the

(i) spee d of the bullet as it leave s the bar r e l.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1262


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1263


(ii) aver a g e powe r delive r e d to the bullet.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(d) Use New to n’s thir d law to explain why a gun will recoil whe n a bullet
is fired.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

78 5 . This ques tion is abou t motion of a cha r g e d particl e in an elect ric field.

(a) An α-par ticle of mas s 4 u and cha r g e +2 e is accele r a t e d from rest in a


vacuu m thro u g h a poten ti al differ e n c e of 2.4 kV. Show that the final
s peed of the α-par ticl e is
4.8 × 10 5 m s –1 .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1264


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1265


(b) The α-particle i s travelling in a direc tion par allel to and mid- way
betw e e n two par allel met al plat e s.

(not to scale)

The met al plat es are of lengt h 2.4 cm and their sepa r a ti o n is 0.80 cm.
The poten t i al differ e n c e betw e e n the plate s is 600 V. The elect ric field
is unifor m in the region betw e e n the plat e s and is zero outside this
region.

(i) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the elect ric field betw e e n the plat e s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Show that the m agnit u d e of the accele r a ti o n of the α-particl e by


the elect ric fiel d is 3.6 × 10 12 m s –2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) (i) Calculat e the tim e take n for the α-par ticle to travel a
horizont al di stanc e of 2.4 cm par allel to the plat e s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1266


.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1267


(ii) Use your answ e r s in (b)(ii) and (c)(i) to dedu c e whet h e r , as the α-
par ticl e pa sses betw e e n the plat e s, it will hit one of the plate s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

78 6 . This ques tion is abou t ideal gas e s.

(a) The atom s or molecul e s of an ideal gas are assu m e d to be identic al


har d elas tic sphe r e s that have negligible volum e com p a r e d with the
volum e of the cont ai nin g vess el.

(i) Stat e two furth e r ass u m p ti o n s of the kinetic theory of an ideal


gas.

1. .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

2. .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Sugg e s t why only the aver a g e kine tic ene r gy of the molec ul e s of
an ideal gas is relat e d to the inte r n a l ene r gy of the gas.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1268


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1269


(b) An ideal gas is cont ai n e d in a cylinde r by me a n s of a frictionle s s
piston.

At tem p e r a t u r e 290 K and pre s s u r e 4.8 × 10 5 Pa, the gas has volum e
9.2 ×1 0 –4 m 3 .

(i) Calculat e the num b e r of mole s of the gas.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) The gas is comp r e s s e d isoth e r m a lly to a volum e of 2.3 × 10 –4 m 3 .


Dete r mi n e the pres s u r e p of the gas.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) The gas is now heat e d at const a n t volum e to a tem p e r a t u r e of


420 K. Show that the pres s u r e of the gas is now 2.8 × 10 6 Pa.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1270


.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1271


(c) The gas in (b)(iii) is now expa n d e d adia b a ti c ally so that its
tem p e r a t u r e and pres s u r e ret u r n to 290 K and 4.8 × 10 5 Pa
res p e c t ively. This stat e is show n below as point A.

(i) Using the axes above sket c h a pre s s u r e - volum e ( p -V ) diag r a m for
the chan g e s in (b)(ii), (b)(iii) and (c).
(3)

(ii) On your diagr a m in (c)(i), identify with the lette r H any cha n g e
or chan g e s wher e the gas does exte r n al work on its
sur r o u n di n g s .
(1)

(iii) Describ e how a p- V diagr a m may be use d to estim a t e a value for


the useful work done in one cycle of ope r a tio n of an engine .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1272


(Tot al 16 mark s )

78 7 . This ques tion is abou t fossil fuels.

(a) Stat e two exam pl e s of fossil fuels.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Explain why fossil fuels are said to be non- rene w a bl e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1273


(c) A Sankey diag r a m for the gen e r a t i o n of elect ric al ene r gy using fossil
fuel as the prim a r y ener gy sour c e is show n.

Use the Sankey diagr a m to estim a t e the efficiency of produ c tio n of


elect ric al ener gy and explain your answ e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1274


(d) Despit e the fact that fossil fuels are non- ren e w a b l e and cont rib u t e to
atmo s p h e r i c pollution ther e is wides p r e a d use of suc h fuels. Sugg e s t
thr e e reas o n s for this wides p r e a d use.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

3. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1275


78 8 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion and wave s.

An object is vibrati n g in air. The variation with displa c e m e n t x of the


accele r a ti o n a of the object is show n below.

IB Questionbank Physics 1276


(a) Stat e and explain two rea s o n s why the gra p h opposit e indica t e s that
the object is executi n g simple har m o ni c motion.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) Use dat a from the gra p h to show tha t the frequ e n c y of oscillation is
350 Hz.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(c) The motion of the object gives rise to a longitu di n a l progr e s s iv e


(travelling) soun d wave.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by a longitu di n a l progr e s sive wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1277


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1278


(ii) The spee d of the wave is 330 m s –1 . Using the answ e r in (b),
calcula t e the wavel en g t h of the wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

78 9 . This ques tion is abou t the diffrac tio n of light.

(a) (i) Describ e wha t is mea n t by the diffrac tion of light.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1279


(ii) A par allel bea m of monoc h r o m a t i c light from a lase r is incide n t
on a nar r o w slit.
The diffract e d light eme r gi n g from the slit is incide n t on a
scre e n .

(not to scale)

The cent r e of the diffrac tion pat t e r n produ c e d on the scre e n is at


C. On the axes sketc h a gra p h to show how the inte n si ty I of the
light on the scre e n varies with the dista n c e d from C.

(3)

(iii) The slit width is 0.40 mm and it is 1.9 m from the scre e n . The
wavele n g t h of the light is 620 nm. Dete r m i n e the width of the
cent r al maxim u m on the scre e n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1280


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1281


(b) (i) When two sepa r a t e lase r s are use d as sour c e s , the
imag es of the slit form e d by the light from each laser are
resolve d. Stat e what is mea n t by the ter m resolve d in this
cont ext.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) A car, with its two hea dlig h t s switc h e d on, is appr o a c h i n g an
obse rv e r who has good eyesigh t . Outline why, at a long dista n c e
from the obs erv e r , the imag e s of the hea dligh t s of the car are not
resolve d by the obse rv e r .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

79 0 . This ques tion is abou t α-par ticle scat t e r i n g and nucle a r proc e s s e s .

Radiu m- 226 decays with the emiss ion of α-particle s to rado n (Rn).

IB Questionbank Physics 1282


(a) Complet e the nuclea r reac tion equ a tio n.

226
8 8 Ra → Rn +
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1283


(b) The decay const a n t of radiu m- 226 is 1.4 × 10 –11 s –1 and eac h em itte d
α-par ticle ha s an ene r gy of 7.6 × 10 –13 J.

(i) Calculat e the half- life of radiu m- 226.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the rat e, in watts, of emission of ene r gy from 1.0 g of


radi u m- 226.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(c) Expe ri m e n t a l evidenc e tha t suppo r t s a nucle a r model of the atom was
provide d by α-par ticle scat t e r i n g . The diag r a m repr e s e n t s the path of
an α-particle a s it appr o a c h e s and then rec e d e s from a sta tion a r y gold
nucleu s .

(i) On the diagr a m , draw lines to s how the angle of deviation of the

IB Questionbank Physics 1284


α-particle.
Label this angle D.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1285


(ii) The gold nucleu s is repla c e d by anot h e r gold nucle u s tha t has a
large r nucleo n num b e r . Sugg e s t and explain the cha n g e , if any,
in the angle D of an α-particle with the sa m e ene r gy and
following the sam e initial path as in (c)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(d) Estim a t e the dista n c e of close s t app r o a c h to a gold nucle u s ( Z = 79) of


an α-particle wit h an initial kine tic ene r gy of 4.0 MeV.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

79 1 . This ques tion is abou t the albedo of the Eart h.

(a) Outline the mech a ni s m by which a gas, such as carbo n dioxide,


absor b s infra- red radiation.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1286


(b) Stat e, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r in (a), why car bo n dioxide is
know n as a gree n h o u s e gas.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) Stat e the na m e of anot h e r gre e n h o u s e gas.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) In the last fifty year s the amou n t of car bo n dioxide in the Eart h’s
atmo s p h e r e has incr e a s e d signific a n tly. Explain

(i) why this incr e a s e could accou n t for global war mi n g .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) what effect this has had on the ave r a g e albe do of the Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1287


(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1288


(e) It has bee n estim a t e d that doubling the amou n t of car bo n dioxide in
the Ear t h’s atmo s p h e r e chan g e s the albe do of the Eart h by 0.01. Use
the data to show that this doubling will lead to a cha n g e of abou t 3 W
m –2 in the inten si ty being reflec t e d by the Eart h into spac e .

Averag e inten sity rec eive d at Eart h from the Sun = 340 W
m –2
Averag e albedo = 0.30

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(f) Stat e on e reas o n why the answ e r to (e) is an estim a t e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1289


79 2 . This ques tion is abou t the star Anta r e s .

The star Antar e s is a red supe r gi a n t sta r in the const ell a tio n Scor pi u s.

(a) Descri b e thre e char a c t e r i s ti c s of a red supe r gi a n t sta r and stat e what
is mea n t by a const ella tion.

Red supe r gi a n t star:

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Cons t ella tio n:

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(b) The appa r e n t magni t u d e of Antar e s is + 1.1 and its absolut e


magni t u d e is –5.3.

(i) Disting ui s h betw e e n appa r e n t mag ni t u d e and absolut e


mag ni t u d e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Show that the dista n c e of Antar e s from Eart h is 3.9 × 10 7 AU.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1290


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) Stat e the nam e of the met ho d tha t is use d to mea s u r e the
dist a n c e of Antar e s from Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) The appa r e n t bright n e s s of Antar e s is 4.3 × 10 –11 time s the app a r e n t
bright n e s s of the Sun.

(i) Define appar e n t bright n e s s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Using the answ e r to (b)(ii), show that Anta r e s is 6.5 × 10 4 time s
mor e lumino u s than the Sun.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1291


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(d) Alnitak is a main sequ e n c e sta r with a luminosity simila r to that of


Antar e s . Use the value quot e d in (c)(ii) to deduc e that the mas s of
Alnitak is in the ran g e 16 M S to 40 M S , whe r e M S is the mas s of the
Sun.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1292


(e) Explain, in ter m s of the Cha n d r a s e k h a r limit, why it unlikely tha t
Alnitak will develop into a whit e dwa rf.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(f) Stat e the prob a bl e final evolution a r y sta t e of Alnitak

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 20 mark s )

79 3 . This ques tion is abou t models of the univer s e .

Obse rv a ti o n s of the night sky indica t e that the r e are many regions of the
univer s e that do not cont ai n any sta r s.

(a) Explain why this obse rv a ti o n cont r a di c t s Newt o n’s model of the
univer s e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1293


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1294


(b) Outline how the Big Bang model of the unive r s e is consis t e n t with this
obse rv a tio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

79 4 . This ques tion is abou t Hubbl e’s law.

Hubbl e’s law stat e s that

v = H 0d

wher e v is the relative rece s sio n a l spe e d betw e e n galaxie s, d is their


sepa r a t i o n and H 0 is the Hubbl e const a n t . Rece n t mea s u r e m e n t s plac e the
value of H 0 in the rang e 60 to
90 km s –1 Mpc –1 .

(a) Sugg e s t why a precis e value of H 0 is not known.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1295


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1296


(b) Estim a t e , in secon d s , the maxim u m know n age of the univer s e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

79 5 . This ques tion is abou t radio com m u ni c a t i o n.

(a) Stat e the differ e n c e betw e e n

(i) a signal wave and a carri e r wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) amplitu d e modula tion and frequ e n c y modul a tion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1297


(b) Grap h A shows a sketc h of how the signal str e n g t h of a cert ai n radio
car ri e r wave varies with time at a partic ul a r point in spac e .

Grap h B shows how the signal str e n g t h of the wave is amplit u d e


modul a t e d by a signal wave.

The time scale for both gra p h s is the sam e.

The frequ e n c y of the car rie r wave is f c and that of the signal wave f s .
fc
Use both gra p h s to estim a t e the ratio f s and explain how you arrive d
at your answ e r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1298


(c) On grap h B sketc h the wave form of the signal wave.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1299


(d) Descri b e on e adva n t a g e and stat e on e disa dv a n t a g e of using
amplit u d e modul a tio n in radio tra n s m i s sio n as com p a r e d to the use of
frequ e n c y modula tio n.

Advant a g e : ..............................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Disadv a n t a g e : .........................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

79 6 . This ques tion is abou t tran s m i s sio n of signals.

In a particul a r tran s m i s sio n syste m a single piec e of analog u e infor m a t i o n


is conve r t e d into a 4- bit bina ry “word” rep r e s e n t e d by the lette r s ABCD.
The wor d is tran s m i t t e d along an optic fibre to the rec eive r . The block
diagr a m shows the princi ple compo n e n t s for the tra n s m i s sio n and
rece p tio n of this word.

(a) On the diag r a m label the com po n e n t s X and Y and outline the function
of each compo n e n t .

X: .............................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1300


Y: .............................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1301


(b) The diagr a m is a repr e s e n t a t i o n of a two- input time division
multiplexe r.

Outline, with refer e n c e to the diagr a m , how this device ena bl e s two
sets of digital data to be tra n s m i t t e d appa r e n t ly simult a n e o u s ly along
the sam e optic fibre.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) As a signal is trans m i t t e d along an optic fibre its signal str e n g t h is


att en u a t e d . For this reas o n amplifie r s have to be plac e d at points
along the fibre.

(i) Explain what is mea n t by atte n u a t i o n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1302


(ii) In a particul a r fibre, the signal nee d s to be amplified whe n the
signal powe r is
8.2 × 10 –19 W. The fibre has an att e n u a t i o n loss of 2.0 dB km –1 .
Dete r mi n e , for an input signal of powe r 5.0 mW, the sepa r a ti o n
of the amplifier s along the fibre.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

79 7 . This ques tion is abou t oper a t io n a l amplifie r s.

(a) The diagr a m shows a circuit tha t uses an oper a t io n a l amplifie r as an


inver ti n g amplifier.

The point P is a virtual ear t h, tha t is at the sam e pote n ti al (0 V) as the


eart h line.

(i) Stat e the two prop e r ti e s of the ope r a tio n a l amplifier which make
P a virtual ear t h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1303


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1304


(ii) In the circuit R f = 100 k Ω and R in = 10 k Ω. Calcula t e the gain of
the a mplifier.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The diagr a m shows a circuit tha t uses an oper a t io n a l amplifie r as a


non- inver tin g Sch mit t trigg e r .

In the situatio n show n, the pote n ti al at point X is 2.0 V and the outpu t
poten ti al V out is at its minim u m value of –10 V. Show that for the
outpu t pote n ti al to switch to its maxim u m value of +1 0 V

(i) the curr e n t in the resis to r s R 1 and R 2 is 0.08 mA.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) V in mus t rise to 5.8 V.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1305


(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1306


79 8 . This ques tion is abou t the mobile phone syste m .

(a) Sugg e s t why mobile phon e s are some ti m e s refe r r e d to as cell phon e s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Explain, bas e d on your answ e r to (a), why mobile phon e s can be ma d e
small in size.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) Stat e a mor al or ethical issue tha t you consid e r to arise from the use
of mobile phon e s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

79 9 . This ques tion is abou t the nat u r e of elect r o m a g n e t i c waves.

Explain why the dayti m e sky of the Eart h is blue but the daytim e sky of the
Moon is black.

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1307


.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 3 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1308


80 0 . This ques tion is abou t interf e r e n c e and lase r s .

(a) Two overla p pi n g bea m s of light from two flashligh t s (torc h e s ) fall on a
scre e n.
Explain why no interfe r e n c e patt e r n is obse rv e d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(b) Light from a laser that pass e s throu g h a double slit is incide n t on a
scre e n and produ c e s obse rv a bl e inte rf e r e n c e .

(i) Outline how the laser prod u c e s light.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Stat e the nam e of the prop e r t y that ena bl e s the lase r light to
produ c e obser v a bl e inte rf e r e n c e .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1309


(c) Outline how a laser can be use d to rea d a bar- code.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(d) A plane is flying at 100 m s –1 in a direc tio n par allel to the line joining
two identic al radio towe r s as shown in the diagr a m .

(not to scale)

The two tower s each emit a cohe r e n t radio signal of wavele n g t h of 5.0
m. The sepa r a t i o n of the towe r s is 200 m. To an obse rv e r on the plan e
the intensi ty of the receive d signal goes thro u g h a maxim u m every 5.0
s. Deter m i n e the dista n c e from the plan e to the line joining the radio
tower s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1310


IB Questionbank Physics 1311
80 1 . This ques tion is abou t optical inst r u m e n t s .

(a) Define linear mag nification .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) An object is place d a dist a n c e x from a conve r gi n g (convex) lens of


focal lengt h 10 cm.
An image of the object is form e d on a scre e n at a dista n c e 45 cm from
the lens.
Calcula t e the

(i) dist a n c e x .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) mag ni t u d e of the linea r magnific a tion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1312


(c) Stat e what is mea n t by sphe ric al abe r r a t i o n for a lens and sugg e s t
how this may be redu c e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1313


80 2 . This ques tion is abou t thin- film inte rf e r e n c e .

The diagr a m shows a soap film susp e n d e d on a wire fra m e which is align e d
vertically.

The film is viewed in reflect e d white light. The lower part of the film
exhibits a num b e r of colour s. The section ma rk e d B is 260 nm thick. The
refra ctiv e index of wat e r is n = 1.33.
The table gives the wavele n g t h rang e for the colour s of the visible
spect r u m . Deduc e the colour of the section B of the film.

Colo ur Wave l e n g t h Ran g e


Violet 380 to 450 nm
Blue 450 to 495 nm
Gree n 495 to 570 nm
Yellow 570 to 590 nm
Ora n g
590 to 620 nm
e
Red 620 to 750 nm

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

IB Questionbank Physics 1314


.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

80 3 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.

X-rays may be used to analys e the str uc t u r e and prop e r t i e s of mat e ri al s.

(a) Draw a labelled diag r a m showing a typic al appa r a t u s for the


prod u c tio n of X-rays.

(3)

(b) The X-ray spect r u m for eac h elem e n t show s both a cha r a c t e r i s tic and
continu o u s spect r u m .
Descri b e the origin of the char a c t e r i s tic spec t r u m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1315


(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

80 4 . This ques tion is abou t simult a n e i ty and lengt h mea s u r e m e n t .

(a) One of the two post ul a t e s of special rela tivity sta t e s that “the laws of
physics are the sam e for all iner tial obse rv e r s ”. Sta t e the othe r
post ul a t e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Tom and Barb a r a are two obse rv e r s eac h in a sepa r a t e refe r e n c e
fram e. The refer e n c e fram e s are moving rela tive to eac h othe r in the
sam e str ai g h t line with cons t a n t velocity.
Two lamps L 1 and L 2 are ope r a t e d by the sam e switc h. Tom is at the
mid- point betw e e n the lamps as me a s u r e d in his fram e of refer e n c e .

The lam ps and the switch are at rest rela tive to Tom.

Tom switch e s on the lamps and to him they light simult a n e o u s ly.
Explain, bas e d on your answ e r to (a), why the lamps will not light
simult a n e o u s ly, accor di n g to Barb a r a .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1316


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Tom meas u r e s the sepa r a t io n of L 1 and L 2 to be 1.5 m whe r e a s


Barb a r a meas u r e s the sepa r a t i o n to be 0.5 m.

(i) Stat e and explain which obse rv e r me a s u r e s the prop e r lengt h


betw e e n L 1 and L 2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1317


(ii) Calculat e, in ter m s of the free spac e spee d of light c , the relative
spee d betw e e n Tom and Barb a r a .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) Sketc h a gra p h to show how the relative spee d v betw e e n Tom
and Barb a r a varies with the lengt h L betw e e n L 1 and L 2 as
meas u r e d by Barb a r a . The dat a point (1.5, 0) is shown. On the v
axis, label the point v = c .

(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1318


(d) In anot h e r situatio n, Tom is at rest on the surfa c e of Eart h. Barb a r a is
in a space s hi p travelling at cons t a n t velocity, with res p e c t to Ear t h,
towar d s a dist an t plan e t a r y syste m . After reac hi n g the syste m she
ret u r n s to Eart h. Outline how this situa tio n leads to the so- calle d twin
par a d ox.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

80 5 . This ques tion is abou t som e cons e q u e n c e s of special relativity.

A proton is accel e r a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differe n c e V . After


accele r a ti o n its spee d is close to tha t of the spe e d of light in free spac e c .

(a) On the axes sketc h a grap h to show the varia tio n with spe e d v of the
mas s m of the proto n.

(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1319


8
(b) The poten t i al differ e n c e V is 8.50 ×1 0 V. As mea s u r e d in the
labor a t o r y fram e of refer e n c e ,

(i) calcula t e the total ene r gy of the proton afte r acc el e r a t io n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) show that the final spe e d of the proto n is 0.852c .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) After accel e r a t i o n the proto n appr o a c h e s an antip r o t o n (proto n with a


nega tive char g e ) that is moving along the sam e str aig h t line but in the
opposit e direction. The rela tive spe e d of appr o a c h of the par ticle s, as
mea s u r e d in the labor a t o r y fra m e of refe r e n c e , is 0.987 c.
Deduc e that the spee d of the antip r o t o n is about the sam e as the
spee d of the proton in (b)(ii).

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics 1320
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1321


80 6 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l red- shift and black holes.

The conce p t of gravit a tion al red- shift indic at e s that clocks run slowe r as
they appr o a c h a black hole.

(a) Descri b e what is mean t by

(i) gravit a tion al red- shift.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) spac e ti m e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) a black hole with refe r e n c e to the conc e p t of spa c e ti m e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1322


(b) A particul a r black hole has a Schw a r z s c hil d radius R . A pers o n at a
dista n c e of 2 R from the event horizon of the black hole mea s u r e s the
time betw e e n two event s to be 10 s.
Deduc e that for a per s o n a very long way from the black hole the time
betw e e n the event s will be mea s u r e d as 12 s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

80 7 . This ques tion is abou t the mech a ni s m of hea rin g.

Sound that is incide n t on the ear d r u m (tymp a ni c me m b r a n e ) in the middle


ear, sets the mem b r a n e oscillatin g. Thes e oscillation s pass, via thre e small
bones that act as a lever syste m , to the oval window. The pre s s u r e
res ulti ng from the vibra tio n s at the oval window is gre a t e r tha n that
crea t e d at the ear d r u m .

(a) Stat e the nam e of the thre e small bone s tha t form the lever syste m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Explain how the pres s u r e at the oval window is incre a s e d by

(i) the lever syste m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1323


(ii) a par ticul a r physical differ e n c e betw e e n the ear d r u m and oval
window.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Stat e how reflection of soun d at the inne r ear is minimiz e d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) A pers o n can just hear a soun d of a partic ul a r freq u e n c y that is


inciden t on an area of their ear d r u m equ al to 2.0 mm 2 . The inte nsity
level of the sound is 20 dB. Calcula t e the powe r tha t the sound cre a t e s
at the ear d r u m .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1324


80 8 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays and ultr a s o u n d imagin g tech ni q u e s .

(a) Define the ter m atten u a tio n coefficie n t as use d in X-ray imagin g.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) An X-ray bea m that consis t s of photo n s of the sam e ene r gy is used to
imag e a possible bone fract u r e in the leg of a patie n t. At this photon
ener gy

att en u a t i o n coefficie nt of bone = 0.62 cm –1


att en u a t i o n coefficie nt of tissu e = 0.12 cm –1 .

In pas sin g thro u g h the leg, the X-rays effectively encou n t e r a


thickn e s s of tissu e equal to 14 cm and thickn e s s of bone equal to 8.0
cm.

Use the above dat a to explain why X-rays of this ene r gy are suita bl e
for imagin g a possible leg fract u r e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(c) Stat e two reas o n s why it is prefe r a b l e to use ultr a s o u n d rath e r tha n
X-rays for imagin g a fetus.

1. .............................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1325


.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1326


(d) The table gives som e dat a about air and hum a n soft tissu e.

Spe e d of sou n d / De n s i t y / kg m –3
m s –1
Air 330 1.3
Tissue 1.5 × 10 3 1.1 × 10 3

With refer e n c e to the conc e p t of acous tic impe d a n c e , use the dat a to
explain why a layer of gel is plac e d betw e e n the skin and the end of
the ultr a s o u n d gene r a t o r .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

80 9 . This ques tion is abou t radio- isotop e s.

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n physic al half- life and biologic al half- life.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1327


(b) A pers o n is involved in an accide n t that caus e s seve r e blood loss.
Befor e a blood tran sf u sio n can be given it is nec e s s a r y to me a s u r e
how much blood has been lost. This can be done by me a s u ri n g the
total volum e of blood rem a i ni n g using an isotop e of iodine.
Data for two differe n t isotop e s of iodine are given in the table.

Iodi n e - 13 1 Iodi n e - 12 3
Phys i c a l half-
8 days 13 hour s
life
Biol o g i c a l
12 days 12 days
half- life
Radi a t i o n
beta gam m a
emi t t e d

Sugg e s t , bas ed on the dat a given in the table, why iodine- 123 is a
bett e r choice for use in mea s u ri n g the total volum e of blood in the
body.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The per so n in (b) is given an injection of 5.0 ml of a solution


cont ai nin g iodine- 123.
The initial activity of the solution is 2.5 ×1 0 5 Bq. After 0.50 hour s it is
ass u m e d that the 5.0 ml sam pl e will be dist rib u t e d evenly throu g h o u t
the blood syste m .

The activity of a 5.0 ml sam pl e of the blood afte r 0.50 hour s has an
activity of 2.1 × 10 2 Bq. Deduc e tha t the total blood volum e is about 6
litres.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1328


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1329


81 0 . This ques tion is abou t funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s and elem e n t a r y particle s.

(a) In the table identify the excha n g e par ticle(s) associa t e d with the two
funda m e n t a l inter a c tio n s given.

Int er a c t i o Exc h a n g e parti c l e ( s )


n
Elect r o-
weak
Stron g
(2)

(b) Stat e why the exch a n g e par ticle s are known as elem e n t a r y particl e s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) An exch a n g e particle associ a t e d with the weak inte r a c ti o n has a mas s
of about 90 GeVc –2 .

Estim a t e

(i) the life- time of the particle.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) its rang e.

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1330


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1331


(d) The diagr a m is a Feyn m a n diagr a m tha t repr e s e n t s the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n qua r k s.

(i) Identify the excha n g e par ticl e X.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Explain why the quar k s have a colour associa t e d with the m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

81 1 . This ques tion is abou t particle acc el e r a t o r s .

Particle accel e r a t o r s may be use d to accel e r a t e proto n s. If the ene r gy of


the accel e r a t e d proton s is high enou g h the n, whe n thes e proto n s collide
with station a r y proto n s, differe n t type s of particle s of large mas s may be
produ c e d .

(a) Explain why high ener gi es are req ui r e d to produ c e particle s of large
mas s.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1332


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The diagr a m shows the basic struc t u r e of a cyclot ro n in which proto n s
are accel e r a t e d .

Add labels to the diag r a m above to show the

(i) mag n e t s and their polarity.


(1)

(ii) point s wher e the alter n a t i n g elec t ric pote n ti al differ e n c e is


applied.
(1)

(c) Outline why the frequ e n c y of the alte r n a t i n g elect ric pote n ti al
differ e n c e is mad e equal to the frequ e n c y of orbit of the proton s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1333


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1334


(d) Explain the effect of the incr e a si n g ene r gy of the proto n s on their
frequ e n c y of orbit and stat e how this effect is dealt with in the
cyclotr o n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(e) Proton s of much highe r ene r gy than thos e produ c e d in a cyclot ro n can
be produ c e d in a synch r o t r o n . In a partic ul a r expe ri m e n t proto n s
leave a synch r o t r o n with ene r gy 28 GeV. They ente r a bubbl e cha m b e r
whe r e som e of the m collide with sta tion a r y proto n s. Deduc e that the
ener gy availabl e to produ c e othe r particle s from thes e collisions is
abou t 7 GeV.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(f) Sugg e s t , bas ed on the answ e r to (e) and cons e r v a ti o n of mom e n t u m ,


why it is bett e r to arr a n g e for two proto n s of total ene r gy 28 GeV,
moving in opposit e directio n s, to collide.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1335


.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1336


81 2 . This ques tion is abou t elect r o n s and positr o n s .

The Feyn m a n diagr a m repr e s e n t s the elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c tio n betw e e n


two elect r o n s .

Anoth e r possible inter a c ti o n betw e e n the elect r o n s involves a neut r a l


curr e n t .

(a) Descri b e

(i) with refer e n c e to the inte r a c t i o n bet w e e n the elect r o n s , what is


mea n t by a neut r al cur r e n t .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) with refer e n c e to your ans w e r in (a)(i), how expe ri m e n t a l


evide nc e suppo r t s the stan d a r d model.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1337


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1338


(b) Draw a Feyn m a n diagr a m to show the produ c tio n of an elect r o n
positr o n pair.

(1)

(c) Accordi n g to the Big Bang theo ry, the prod u c tio n of elect r o n positr o n
pairs beca m e possible whe n the univer s e had coole d to a tem p e r a t u r e
T . Dete r mi n e , to the near e s t powe r of ten, the value of T .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

81 3 . The time elaps e d since the beginni n g of the unive r s e is of the orde r of

A. 10 8 s.

B. 10 18 s.

C. 10 28 s.

D. 10 38 s.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1339


81 4 . In an experi m e n t to mea s u r e the accel e r a ti o n of free fall at the surfa c e of
the Eart h the following res ults wer e obtain e d .

Acc el e r a t i o n of fre e fall / m


s –2
7.69
7.70
7.69
7.68
7.70

The res ult s are

A. accu r a t e and precis e.

B. inacc u r a t e but precis e.

C. accu r a t e but impr e ci s e.

D. inacc u r a t e and impr e cis e.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

81 5 . Two balls of differ e n t mas s are drop p e d from the top of a tall building one
after the other. The dista n c e betw e e n the balls

A. incr e a s e s with time.

B. dep e n d s on the initial velocity only.

C. rem ai n s const a n t .

D. dep e n d s on the mas s of the balls.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1340


81 6 . The gra p h shows how the velocity of a particle varies with time.

Which of the following grap h s corr e c tly shows how the accel e r a ti o n of the
par ticl e varies with time?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1341


81 7 . An aircr aft is flying at cons t a n t spe e d in a horizont a l circle. Which of the
following diagr a m s best illust r a t e s the forc es acting on the airc r aft in the
vertical plan e?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

81 8 . For a par ticle moving at const a n t spee d in a horizon t al circle, the work
done by the cent ri p e t al force is

A. zero.

B. directly propo r tio n al to the particle mass.

C. directly propo r tio n al to the particle spe e d.

D. directly propo r tio n al to the (par ticl e spe e d) 2 .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1342


81 9 . A vehicle is driven up a hill at const a n t spe e d. Which of the following best
descri b e s the ener gy chan g e s involved?

A. Chemic al ener gy is conver t e d into gravit a tio n a l pote n ti al ene r gy.

B. Chemic al ener gy is conver t e d into gravit a tio n a l pote n ti al ene r gy,


sound and ther m al ener gy.

C. Gravit ation al poten ti al ene r gy is conve r t e d into che mic al ene r gy.

D. Gravit ation al poten ti al ene r gy is conve r t e d into che mic al ene r gy,
sound and ther m al ener gy.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

82 0 . A rubb e r ball, travelling in a horizon t a l dire c tion, strike s a vertic al wall. It


rebou n d s at right angles to the wall. The gra p h below illust r a t e s the
variation of the ball’s mom e n t u m p with time t whe n the ball is in cont a c t
with the wall.

Which of the following stat e m e n t s is true ?

A. The shad e d are a is equ al to the force exer t e d by the wall on the ball.

B. The shad e d are a is equ al to the force exer t e d by the ball on the wall.

C. The gradi e n t is equal to the force exert e d by the wall on the ball.

D. The gradi e n t is equal to the force exert e d by the ball on the wall.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1343


82 1 . In the tabl e below, which row shows the corr e c t conve r sio n betw e e n the
Kelvin and Celsius tem p e r a t u r e scales ?

Kelvi n te m p e r a t u r e / K Cel s i u s te m p e r a t u r e /
°C
A. 0 373
B. 100 –173
C. 173 100
D. 373 –100
(Tot al 1 mar k )

82 2 . Carbo n has a relative atomic mas s of 12 and oxyge n has a rela tive atomic
mas s of 16. A sam pl e of 6 g of carbo n has twice as many atom s as

A. 32 g of oxygen.

B. 8 g of oxygen.

C. 4 g of oxygen.

D. 3 g of oxygen.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

82 3 . Tanya heat s 100 g of a liquid with an elect ric heat e r which has a const a n t
powe r outpu t of 60 W. After 100 s the rise in tem p e r a t u r e is 40 K. The
specific heat capacity of the liquid in J kg –1 K–1 is calcul a t e d from which of
the following?

6 01 0 0
A. 0.14 0

6 00.1
B. 40

0.14 0
C. 60

60
D. 40
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1344


82 4 . A ray of light is incide n t on a boun d a r y betw e e n glass and air.

Which of the following is the refr a c tive index of glass?

s inθ 1
A. s inθ 3

s inθ 1
B. s inθ 4

s inθ 3
C. s inθ 2

s inθ 4
D. s inθ 1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1345


82 5 . The gra p h below shows how the displac e m e n t x of a particl e und e r g oi n g
simpl e har m o ni c motion varies with time t . The motion is unda m p e d .

Which of the following grap h s corr e c tly shows how the velocity v of the
par ticl e varies with t?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1346


82 6 . The gra p h below shows how the displac e m e n t x of a particl e und e r g oi n g
simpl e har m o ni c motion varies with time t . The motion is unda m p e d .

Which of the following grap h s shows how the total ene r gy E of the par ticle
varies with time t?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1347


82 7 . An orch e s t r a playing on boat X can be hea r d by touris t s on boat Y, which is
situat e d out of sight of boat X arou n d a hea dl a n d .

The sound from X can be hea r d on Y due to

A. refr ac ti o n.

B. reflection.

C. diffraction.

D. tran s m i s sio n.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

82 8 . A cell of em f ε and inter n al re sista n c e r deliver s cur r e n t to a small elect ric


motor.

450 C of char g e flows thro u g h the motor and 9000 J of ene r gy are
conver t e d in the motor. 1800 J are dissipa t e d in the cell. The emf of the cell
is

A. 4.0 V.

B. 16 V.

C. 20 V.

D. 24 V.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1348


82 9 . A cylindrical condu c t o r of lengt h l, diam e t e r D and resis tivity ρ ha s
resis t a n c e R . A differe n t cylindric al cond u c t o r of resis tivity 2 ρ, lengt h 2 l
and diam e t e r 2 D has a resist a n c e

A. 2R.

B. R.

R
C. 2.

R
D. 4.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

83 0 . In the circuits below the cells have the sam e emf and zero inte r n a l
resis t a n c e . The resist o r s all have the sam e resist a n c e .

p o w e rd is s ip a t eind X
Which of the following gives the ratio p o w e rd is s ip a t eind Y ?

1
A. 4

1
B. 2

C. 2

D. 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1349


83 1 . A small sphe r e X of mas s M is plac e d a dista n c e d from a point mas s. The
gravit a tion al force on sphe r e X is 90 N. Sphe r e X is re move d and a secon d
sphe r e Y of mass 4 M is place d a dista n c e 3 d from the sam e point mas s. The
gravit a tion al force on sphe r e Y is

A. 480 N.

B. 160 N.

C. 120 N.

D. 40 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

83 2 . Which of the following diag r a m s illustr a t e s the elect ric field patt e r n of a
neg a tively char g e d sphe r e ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1350


83 3 . A positively char g e d par ticle ente r s the spac e betw e e n two cha r g e d
condu c ti n g plat es, with a cons t a n t velocity direc t e d par allel to the plat e s,
as show n.

The top plat e is positively char g e d and the botto m plat e is neg a tively
char g e d . Ther e is a magn e t i c field in the shad e d region PQRS. The particl e
contin u e s to move in a horizont a l str ai g h t line betw e e n the plat e s . Which of
the following corr e c t ly describ e s the ma g n e ti c field dire c tion?

A. Into plane of pap e r

B. Out of plan e of pape r

C. Up

D. Down
(Tot al 1 mar k )

83 4 . The relation s hi p betw e e n proton num b e r Z , neut r o n num b e r N and nucleon


num b e r A is

A. A = Z – N.

B. Z = A + N.

C. N = A – Z.

D. N = A + Z.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1351


83 5 . In the Geige r–M a r s d e n experi m ent α-par ticl e s are scatt e r e d by gold nuclei.
The expe ri m e n t a l res ults provide evide n c e that

A. α-par ticle s have discr e t e amou n t s of kinetic ene r gy.

B. most of the mas s and positive cha r g e of an atom is conc e n t r a t e d in a


small volum e.

C. the nucleu s cont ai n s proto n s and neut r o n s .

D. gold atom s have a high bindin g ene r gy per nucle on.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

83 6 . A radio- isotop e has an activity of 400 Bq and a half- life of 8 days. After 32
days the activity of the sam pl e is

A. 200 Bq.

B. 100 Bq.

C. 50 Bq.

D. 25 Bq.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

83 7 . Which of the following ene r gy sourc e s res ults from the solar ene r gy
incide n t on Ear t h?

A. Nucle a r fission

B. Wind ener gy

C. Nucle a r fusion

D. Geoth e r m a l ener gy
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1352


83 8 . Which of the following is a ren e w a b l e and non- ren e w a b l e ene r gy sour c e ?

Ren e w a b l e No n- ren e w a b l e
A. urani u m coal
B. tidal ura ni u m
C. urani u m bioga s
D. natu r al gas bioga s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

83 9 . A ther m al powe r station is 20 % efficien t and gene r a t e s useful elect ric al


powe r at 1000 MW. The fossil fuel use d has an ene r gy density of 50 MJ kg –
1
. The mas s of fuel in kg cons u m e d every secon d is given by which of the
following?

A. 0.01

B. 0.25

C. 4

D. 100
(Tot al 1 mar k )

84 0 . Which of the following is likely to incr e a s e gre e n h o u s e gas conc e n t r a t i o n s


in the atm os p h e r e ?

A. Using nat u r al gas inste a d of coal to gene r a t e elec t ric a l ene r gy

B. Inciner a t i o n of wast e to gene r a t e elect ric al ene r gy

C. Incr e a s e d use of wind tur bi n e s to gen e r a t e elect ric al ene r gy

D. Carbo n dioxide capt u r e and stor a g e at the powe r station


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1353


84 1 . Venus and Ear t h may be reg a r d e d as beha vin g as black bodies. The me a n
tem p e r a t u r e at the surfac e of Venus is about 600 K and at the surfa c e of
Eart h is about 300 K. Which of the following is the best estim a t e for the
ratio

p o w e r a d ia t epde ru n ita r e ao n E a r t h
p o w e r a d ia t epde ru n ita r e ao n Ve n u s?

1
A. 2

1
B. 4

1
C. 8

1
D. 16
(Tot al 1 mar k )

84 2 . In a nuclea r powe r station, a mode r a t o r is requir e d to

A. contr ol the rat e of fission.

B. red uc e heat losses to the sur r o u n di n g s .

C. red uc e the ene r gy of high ene r gy neut r o n s .

D. incr e a s e the ener gy of low ene r gy neut r o n s .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1354


84 3 . Data analysis ques tion.

The frequ e n cy f of the funda m e n t a l vibra tion of a sta n di n g wave of fixed


lengt h is mea s u r e d for differ e n t value s of the tension T in the string, using
the app a r a t u s show n.

In orde r to find the relation s hi p betw e e n the spee d v of the wave and the
tension T in the string, the spee d v is calcul a t e d from the relation

v = 2 f L

wher e L is the lengt h of the string.

The dat a points are show n plott e d on the axes below. The unce r t a i n t y in v
is ±5 m s –1 and the uncer t ai n t y in T is negligible.

(a) Draw error bar s on the first and last dat a points to show the
unce r t a i n t y in speed v .
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1355


(b) The origin al hypot h e si s is tha t the spe e d is dire c tly propo r tio n a l to the
tension T .
Explain why the dat a do not suppo r t this hypot h e s i s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n spee d and tension is of
the form

v = k T

whe r e k is a const a n t .

To test whet h e r the data suppo r t this rela tion s hi p, a gra p h of v 2


agains t T is plott e d as show n below.

The bes t- fit line show n take s into accou n t the unce r t a i n t i e s for eac h
dat a point.
The unce r t ai n t y in v 2 for T = 3.5 N is show n as an error bar on the
grap h.

(i) Stat e the value of the unc e r t ai n t y in v 2 for T = 3.5 N.

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1356


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1357


(ii) At T = 1.0 N the spee d v = 27 ± 5 m s –1 . Calcula t e the
unce r t ai n t y in v 2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(d) Use the grap h in (c) to dete r m i n e k withou t its unc e r t a i n t y.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

84 4 . This ques tion is abou t ther m al ene r gy tra n sf e r .

(a) A piece of coppe r is held in a flame until it reac h e s the r m a l


equilibri u m . The time it takes to reac h the r m a l equilibri u m will

IB Questionbank Physics 1358


dep e n d on the ther m al capa city of the piece of coppe r .

(i) Define ther m al capacity .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1359


(ii) Outline what is mea n t by the r m a l equilibriu m in this cont ext.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The piece of coppe r is tran sf e r r e d quickly to a plas tic cup cont ai nin g
wat e r. The ther m a l capacity of the cup is negligible. The following
dat a are availabl e.

Mass of copp e r = 0.12 kg


Mass of wat e r = 0.45 kg
Rise in tem p e r a t u r e of wate r = 30 K
Final tem p e r a t u r e of copp e r = 308 K
Specific heat capa ci ty of copp e r = 390 J kg
K–1
Specific heat capa ci ty of wat e r = 4200 J kg
K–1

(i) Use the dat a to calcula t e the tem p e r a t u r e of the flame.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Explain whet h e r the tem p e r a t u r e of the flame is likely to be


grea t e r or less than your ans w e r to (b)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1360


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1361


84 5 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l and elect ric fields.

(a) The equa tio n for the mag ni t u d e of the gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h due
to a point mas s may be writt e n as below.

KX
Y = s2

The equa tio n for the mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h can also
be writt e n in the sam e form.

In the table identify the symbols used in the equ a tio n.

Sy m b o l Gravit a t i o n a l fiel d Ele c t r i c a l fiel d


qua n t i t y qua n t i t y
Y
K
X
s
(4)

(b) The mag ni t u d e of the elec t r o s t a t i c forc e betw e e n the proto n and
elect r o n in a hydro g e n atom is F E . The mag nit u d e of the gravit a tio n al
force betw e e n them is F G .

FE
Deter m i n e the ratio FG .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1362


84 6 . This ques tion is abou t a pum p e d- stor a g e powe r sta tion.

(a) The diagr a m , not to scale, shows a pum p e d- stor a g e powe r sta tion
used for the gen e r a t io n of elect ric a l ene r gy.

Water stor e d in the tank is allowe d to fall thro u g h a pipe to a lake via
a tur bi n e. The tur bi n e is conne c t e d to an elect ric al gene r a t o r . The
pum p e d- stor a g e ac gene r a t o r syste m is reve r si bl e so that wate r can
be pum p e d from the lake to the tank.

The tank is 50 m deep and has a unifor m are a of 5.0 × 10 4 m 2 . The


heigh t from the botto m of the tank to the turbi n e is 310 m. The
density of wate r is 1.0 × 10 3 kg m –3 .

(i) Show that the maxim u m ene r gy that can be deliver e d to the
turbin e by the falling wate r is about 8 × 10 12 J.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The flow rat e of wat e r in the pipe is 400 m 3 s –1 . Calcula t e the
powe r deliver e d by the falling wat e r.

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1363


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The ene r gy losses in the powe r station are shown in the following
tabl e.

Per c e n t a g e los s of
So ur c e of en er g y los s
en e r g y
friction and turb ul e n c e of wat e r
27
in pipe
friction in tur bin e and ac
15
gene r a t o r
elect ric al heatin g losses 5

(i) Calculat e the overall efficiency of the conve r sio n of the


gravit a tion al poten t i al ene r gy of wate r in the tank into elect ric al
ene r gy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Sketc h a Sank ey diag r a m to rep r e s e n t the ene r gy conve r sio n in


the powe r station.

(2)

(c) The elect ric al power prod u c e d at the powe r station is tra n s m i t t e d by

IB Questionbank Physics 1364


cables to the cons u m e r .

(i) Outline how the ene r gy losse s in tra n s m i s sio n are minimize d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1365


(ii) Stat e on e advan t a g e and on e disa dv a n t a g e that a pum p e d-
stor a g e syste m has comp a r e d to a tidal wat e r stor a g e syste m .

Advant a g e : ......................................................................................
.................

.........................................................................................................
..................

Disadva n t a g e : .................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

84 7 . This ques tion is abou t force and ene r gi e s .

(a) A syste m consis t s of a bicycle and cyclist travelling at a const a n t


velocity along a horizont al road.

(i) Stat e the value of the net force acting on the cyclist.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1366


(ii) On the diagr a m draw labelled arro w s to repr e s e n t the vertic al
forces acting on the bicycle.
(2)

(iii) With refer e n c e to the horizon t al force s acting on the syste m ,


explain why the syste m is travelling at const a n t velocity.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The total resis tive force acting on the syste m is 40 N and its spe e d is
8.0 m s –1 . Calculat e the useful powe r outp u t of the cyclist.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(c) The cyclist stops ped alling and the syste m com e s to rest. The total
mas s of the syste m is 70 kg.

(i) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the initial accel e r a ti o n of the syste m .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Estim a t e the dista n c e take n by the syste m to com e to rest from
the time the cyclist stops pedalling.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1367


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Stat e and explain on e rea s o n why your answ e r to (c)(ii) is only
an estim a t e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

84 8 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion.

(a) In ter m s of the accel e r a t i o n, stat e two conditions nec e s s a r y for a


syste m to perfor m simpl e har m o ni c motion.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A tuning fork is sound e d and it is assu m e d that eac h tip vibra t e s with
simple har m o ni c motion.

IB Questionbank Physics 1368


The extr e m e positions of the oscillatin g tip of one fork are sepa r a t e d
by a dista n c e d .

(i) Stat e, in ter m s of d , the amplit u d e of vibra tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1369


(ii) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the displac e m e n t
of one tip of the tunin g fork varies with time.

(1)

(iii) On your grap h, label the time period T and the amplit u d e a.
(2)

(c) The frequ e n c y of oscillation of the tips is 440 Hz and the amplit u d e of
oscillation of each tip is 1.2 mm. Dete r m i n e the maxim u m

(i) linea r speed of a tip.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) accele r a ti o n of a tip.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1370


84 9 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c circ uit s

The compo n e n t s show n below are to be conn e c t e d in a circuit to


inves tig a t e how the cur r e n t I in a tungs t e n filame n t lamp varies with the
poten ti al differ e n c e V acros s it.

(a) Cons t r u c t a circuit diagr a m to show how the s e compo n e n t s should be


conn e c t e d toget h e r in orde r to obtain as larg e a ran g e as possible for
values of poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the lamp.

(4)

(b) On the axes, sketc h a grap h of I agains t V for a filame n t lamp in the
ran g e V = 0 to its nor m al working volta g e .

(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1371


(c) The lam p is mar k e d with the symbols “1.25 V, 300 mW”. Calcula t e the
cur r e n t in the filame n t whe n it is workin g nor m ally.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) The resis tivity of tung s t e n at the lamp’s workin g tem p e r a t u r e is 4 ×


10 –7 Ωm. The total lengt h of the tungs t e n filam e n t is 0.80 m. Estim a t e
the radius of the filam e n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

(e) The cell is conn e c t e d to two identic al lamps conn e c t e d in par allel. The
lamps are rat e d at 1.25 V, 300 mW. The cell has an emf of 1.5 V and
an inter n al resist a n c e of 1.2 Ω.
Deter m i n e whet h e r the lam ps will light nor m ally.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics 1372
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1373


85 0 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r fission and fusion.

(a) The grap h shows the variatio n of binding ene r gy per nucle on for
nuclides with a nucleon num b e r gre a t e r tha n 40.

(i) Define bindin g ener g y .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) On the grap h, label with the lette r S the position of the most
stable nuclide.
(1)

(iii) Stat e why the nuclide you have labelle d is the most sta bl e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1374


(b) In a nucle a r react o r , a nucle u s of ura ni u m ( U)- 235 fissions into
bariu m(B a)- 141 and krypto n(Kr)- 92. The equa tio n for this fission is

235 141 92 1
9 2 U  5 6 Ba3 6 Kr x 0 n .

(i) Use the grap h to show that the fission of one nucle u s of ura ni u m-
235 will releas e abou t 200 MeV of ene r gy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(ii) Stat e the value of x in the equa tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) The mas s defect in this rea c tion is 3.1 × 10 –28 kg. Calcula t e the
num b e r of ura ni u m- 235 nuclei that mus t fission in orde r to
relea s e 1.0 kJ of ener gy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1375


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1376


(iv) Outline how this fission reac tio n can lead to a chain reac tion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Inten sive scientific effort is devot e d to developi n g nucle a r fusion as a


futur e ener gy sourc e. Discus s wha t could be the social and
enviro n m e n t a l benefits of using nucle a r fusion as com p a r e d with
nuclea r fission as an ener gy sourc e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1377


85 1 . This ques tion is abou t global war mi n g.

(a) One reaso n often sugg e s t e d for global war mi n g is the enha n c e d
gree n h o u s e effect.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by the enha n c e d gre e n h o u s e effect.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Stat e two other possible caus e s of global war mi n g.

1. .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

2. .....................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) One effect of global war mi n g is to melt the Antar c tic ice she e t. The
following data are availabl e for the Antar c ti c ice she e t and the Eart h’s
ocea n s .

Area of ice shee t = 1.4 × 10 7 km 2


Averag e thickn e s s of ice = 1.5 × 10 3 m
Density of ice = 920 kg m –3
Density of wat e r = 1000 kg m –3
Area of Eart h’s ocea n s = 3.8 × 10 8 km 2

Using the dat a, det e r m i n e the

(i) mas s of the Antar ctic ice.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1378


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1379


(ii) chan g e in mean sea level if all the Antar c tic ice she e t wer e to
melt and flow into the oce a n s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Outline the differ e n c e , if any, that the meltin g of ocea nic ice she e t s
makes to the mea n sea level of the Eart h.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

85 2 . This ques tion is abou t the hum a n eye.

(a) (i) Label the diagr a m of the hum a n eye to show the lens,
retin a and optic nerve.

IB Questionbank Physics 1380


(1)

(ii) Outline the function of the rods and the cone s in the retin a .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) Outline what is mean t by acco m m o d a t i o n in the eye.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1381


(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1382


85 3 . This ques tion is abou t the Dopple r effect.

The wavelen g t h diag r a m show n rep r e s e n t s thre e lines in the emission


spect r u m sam pl e of calciu m in a labor a t o r y.

A dista n t star is know n to be moving dire c tly away from the Eart h at a
spee d of 0.1c. The light emitt e d from the sta r cont ai n s the emission spec t r a
of calciu m. On the diagr a m sketc h the emission spec t r u m of the sta r as
obse rv e d in the labor a t o r y. Label the lines tha t corr e s p o n d to A, B, and C
with the lette r s A*, B*, and C*. Num e ri c al values of the wavele n g t h s are
not req ui r e d .
(Tota l 3 mark s )

85 4 . This ques tion is abou t optical resolution.

(a) The sepa r a t io n of two object s on the surfa c e of Eart h is d . The objec ts
are photo g r a p h e d by a cam e r a in a spy sat ellite orbiting Ear t h. The
photog r a p h i c image s of the objects are just resolve d. Use the
following data to det e r m i n e d .

Wavelen g t h of light emitt e d by the objec t s =


500 nm
Dista nc e of sat ellite above surfa c e of Eart h =
4.0 × 10 5 m
Diam e t e r of cam e r a lens =
0.10 m

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1383


(b) Stat e on e way in which the resolution of the cam e r a could be
improv e d.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

85 5 . This ques tion is abou t polarizin g filter s and sour c e s .

You are given two unlab ell ed light sour c e s , one of which emits pola riz e d
light and the other does not. You are also given two unla b elle d tra n s p a r e n t
plastic shee t s , one of which is a polariz e r and the othe r is not.

(a) Descri b e how you would dete r m i n e which one of the sourc e s emits
polarize d light and which shee t is a polarizing filter.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1384


(b) You are given a glass tube that cont ai n s an optically active solution.
Explain how you would use the app a r a t u s in (a) to mea s u r e the
conce n t r a t i o n of the solution.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

85 6 . This ques tion is abou t qua n t u m physics and elect r o n s .

(a) Photo n s of frequ e n cy 2.1 × 10 15 Hz strike the surfa c e of ura niu m and
elect r o n s are emitt e d from the surfa c e . The work function of ura ni u m
is 3.6 eV.

(i) Show that the maxim u m kine tic ene r gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s

IB Questionbank Physics 1385


is abou t 5.0 eV.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1386


(ii) Explain what chan g e to this ene r gy would occur if the light
inten si ty was double d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The de Broglie wavel en g t h of an elect r o n with ene r gy 5.0 keV is λ.

(i) Dete r m ine λ.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(ii) A stud e n t makes the stat e m e n t “The elect r o n wavele n g t h is not


real, it is just a mat h e m a t i c a l cons t r u c ti o n. Elect r o n s are
par ticl es and never waves.” Outline evide n c e which sugg e s t s that
the stud e n t’s stat e m e n t is not corr e c t.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1387


..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1388


(c) Outline how the

(i) “elect r o n in a box” model accou n t s for the existe n c e of disc r e t e


ene r gy levels in the hydrog e n atom.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) line spect r a of atomic hydro g e n provide evide n c e for elect r o n


ene r gy levels in the atom.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

85 7 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.

A nucle u s of the isotop e iodine- 124 (I-124) (proto n num b e r 53) may
unde r g o positive beta decay to a nucle u s of an isotop e X.

(a) Stat e the nuclea r reac tion equa tio n for this dec ay.

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1389


.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1390


(b) The half- life of iodine- 124 is 4.2 days. A freshly pre p a r e d sam pl e of the
isotop e has an activity of 810 Bq. Dete r m i n e the activity of the sa m pl e
after 6.0 days.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

85 8 . This ques tion is abou t storin g infor m a t io n on a CD.

The gra p h shows how the voltag e V of par t of an analog u e signal varies
with a time t .

In orde r to conver t this signal to a digital signal that can be stor e d on a CD,
the signal voltag e is mea s u r e d at regul a r time interv al s. The me a s u r e d
value is then conve r t e d into four- bit bina ry num b e r by dividing the signal
into 1 V levels.

(a) Stat e

(i) the value of the volta g e at 0.30 ms.

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1391


..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1392


(ii) the four- bit binary num b e r corr e s p o n d i n g to the value of the
voltag e at 0.30 ms.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) and explain the value of the least significa n t bit of the four- bit
binary num b e r in (a)(ii).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The binary num b e r in (a) is encod e d onto the surfa c e of a CD as a


series of pits. Outline, with the use of an appr o p ri a t e diagr a m , how
light from a laser is used to disting ui s h bet w e e n a bina ry 0 and a
binar y 1.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1393


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1394


(c) As a result of noise in elect ric circuits, digital pulse s can often lose
their shap e and henc e distor t the infor m a ti o n that they car ry. The
pulses can be re- shap e d using a circ uit calle d a Sch mit t trigg e r .

In the situatio n show n the outp u t volta g e V 0 of the amplifier is at its


minim u m value of
–6.0 V. The voltag e at the non- inverti n g input to the amplifier is equ al
to 1.0 V and at the inverti n g input it is V X. The outp u t volta g e will
switch to its maxim u m value + 6.0 V if the voltag e V X just exce e d s
+1. 0 V.

Deter m i n e the minim u m volta g e V in that will resul t in an outpu t


voltag e of + 6. 0 V.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

85 9 . This ques tion is abou t CCDs.

(a) Define capacita nc e .

IB Questionbank Physics 1395


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1396


(b) Light of a particul a r frequ e n c y and inte nsi ty 1.2 mW m –2 is reflec t e d
from an object on to a pixel of a CCD. The are a of the pixel is 5.5 ×
10 –10 m 2 and its capa cit a n c e is 2.2 pF.
The ene r gy of a photon of the light is 4.6 × 10 –19 J.

(i) Deduc e that the rate at which photo n s are incide n t on the pixel is
1.4 × 10 6 s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Using the answ e r to (b)(i), det e r m i n e the time it take s the
poten ti al acros s the pixel to cha n g e by 40 µV.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(iii) Stat e on e assu m p ti o n tha t you have mad e in arriving at your


answ e r in (b)(ii).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1397


..................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1398


86 0 . This ques tion is abou t special rela tivity.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an inerti al fram e of refe r e n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) Aibhe is at rest in an inerti al fram e of refe r e n c e A and Eua n is at rest


in an inertial fram e of refe r e n c e B. B is moving in the x -dire c tio n, with
spee d v, relative to A. The table T is at res t with res p e c t to Aibhe.

Aibhe meas u r e s the lengt h of T to be 1.5 m and Eua n me a s u r e s it to


be 1.2 m.

(i) Explain which observ e r me a s u r e s the prop e r lengt h of T.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1399


(ii) Dete r mi n e the spee d v .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(c) Two insect s land at the sam e point on T. Accordi n g to a clock at rest
with resp e c t to Aibhe, one of the insect s lands 2.4 secon d s afte r the
other . Calculat e, accor di n g to Eua n, the time interv al betw e e n the
landing s of each insect.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) Two other insect s land at eithe r end of the table. Thes e two event s
may occur at the sam e time as me a s u r e d by one of the obse r v e r s
(Aibhe or Euan) but not to the othe r. Outline, with refe r e n c e to the
post ul a t e s of relativity, why the s e time s differ.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1400


.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1401


86 1 . This ques tion is abou t fermion s and bosons .

(a) Disting ui s h, with refer e n c e to the Pauli exclusion principle, the


differ e n c e betw e e n fermion s and bosons.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Identify the boson that media t e s the

(i) elect r o m a g n e t i c inter a c ti o n betw e e n elect r o n s .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) The stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucle on s has a ran g e of the orde r of
10 –15 m. Show that the mass of the boson in (b)(ii) is about 100 MeV c –
2
.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1402


(d) The Feyn m a n diagr a m shows the dec ay of a meso n into an anti- muon
and a neut ri n o.

(i) Stat e the char g e on the meso n and on the anti- muon and explain
your answ e r s .

Meso n: ............................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

Anti-
muon: ......................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Identify the particle labelle d X.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

86 2 . This ques tion is abou t the star Becr ux and Ceph ei d variabl e s .

(a) Descri b e what is mean t by

(i) the app a r e n t mag nit u d e scale.

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1403


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1404


(ii) absolut e mag nit u d e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Becr ux is a main sequ e n c e sta r and is one of the sta r s tha t mak e up
the Sout h e r n Cross.
The following data are availa ble for Becr ux.

Appar e n t magni t u d e = 1.25


Absolut e mag nit u d e = –3.92
Appar e n t bright n e s s = 7.00 × 10 –12 b Sun

b Sun is the appa r e n t bright n e s s of the Sun. Use the data to dedu c e
that the

(i) dist a n c e of Becrux from Eart h is 108 pc.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) luminosity of Becr ux is 3.43 × 10 3 L Sun whe r e L Sun is the


luminosity of the Sun.
(1 pc = 2.05 × 10 5 AU)

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1405


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1406


(c) Becr ux is a spect r al class B star. On the axes of the Hertz s p r u n g–
Russell diagr a m label with the lette r B the appr oxi m a t e position of
Becr ux.

(1)

(d) On the axes of the Her tzs p r u n g–R u s s e ll diagr a m above, dra w the
appr oxi m a t e region in which Ceph ei d variable sta r s are locat e d.
(1)

(e) Stat e the reas o n for the periodic varia tio n in luminosity of a Ceph ei d
variabl e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1407


(f) Stat e the two quan ti tie s that nee d to be mea s u r e d in orde r to use a
Ceph ei d variabl e as a “sta n d a r d candle” to det e r m i n e the dista n c e to
the galaxy in which the Ceph ei d is locat e d.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

86 3 . This ques tion is abou t cosmology.

(a) The diagr a m below repr e s e n t s a sphe ri c a l region of spac e base d on


Newt o n’s model of the unive r s e . Eart h is at the cent r e of the region.
The dark line repr e s e n t s a very thin sphe ric al shell of spa c e dista n c e
R from Ear t h.

With refer e n c e to the diag r a m and Newto n’s model of the unive r s e
explain qua n t i t a t i v e l y Olbe r s’ par a d ox.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1408


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1409


(b) Outline how the Big Bang theor y provide s a resolution to Olbe r s’
par a d ox.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

86 4 . Two cars, X and Y, are travelling towa r d s a junction. The velocity of car X is
V X and car Y is V Y.

Which of the following vector s repr e s e n t the velocity of Y relative to X?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1410


86 5 . If a moving object is subject to a const a n t force, which of the following can
be corr e c tly ded uc e d from Newt o n’s first law?

A. The object contin u e s to move with a cha n gi n g velocity.

B. The object contin u e s to move with a cons t a n t velocity.

C. The object contin u e s to move with a cha n gi n g dire c tion.

D. The object contin u e s to move in the sam e dire c tion.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

86 6 . A vehicle is driven up a hill at const a n t spe e d. Which of the following best


descri b e s the ener gy chan g e s involved?

A. Chemic al ener gy is conver t e d into gravit a tio n a l pote n ti al ene r gy.

B. Chemic al ener gy is conver t e d into gravit a tio n a l pote n ti al ene r gy,


sound and ther m al ener gy.

C. Gravit ation al poten ti al ene r gy is conve r t e d into che mic al ene r gy.

D. Gravit ation al poten ti al ene r gy is conve r t e d into che mic al ene r gy,
sound and ther m al ener gy.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

86 7 . Which of the following repr e s e n t s a scala r and a vector qua n ti ty?

Scal a r Vect o r
A. elect ric pote n ti al elect ric pote n ti al
gra di e n t
B. elect ric pote n ti al elect ric pote n ti al
gradi e n t
C. elect ric pote n ti al elect ric pote n ti al
differ e n c e
D. elect ric pote n ti al elect ric field
gradi e n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1411


86 8 . A football is kicked with an initial velocity u at an angle θ to the horizon t al
and reach e s the grou n d t secon d s late r.

Ignorin g air resist a n c e what is the rang e R of the football?

A. ut

B. ut cos θ

C. ut sin θ

D. ut tan θ
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1412


86 9 . Four point char g e s of magni t u d e s + q , + q , –q , and –q are held in plac e at
the corne r s of a squa r e of side r.

The Coulom b const a n t is k . Which of the following is the elect ric al pote n ti al
at the cent r e of the squa r e O?

A. 0

4k q
B. r

4k q 2
C. r

 4k q 2
D. r2
(Tot al 1 mar k )

87 0 . The beh aviou r of real gas es is differ e n t from that pre dic t e d for ideal gas e s.
Which of the following stat e m e n t s about real gase s is not corr e c t ?

A. Gas molecul e s have pote n ti al ene r gy.

B. Forc es betw e e n gas molec ul e s are always negligible.

C. Gas molecul e s have volum e.

D. Real gas es can liquefy.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1413


87 1 . The gra p h below shows the varia tion of the pres s u r e p with volum e V of an
ideal gas during one cycle of an engin e.

Which of the following cor r e c tly nam e s the the r m o d y n a m i c proc e s s


associ at e d with the par t s Y→Z and Z→X of the cycle?

Y→Z Z →X
A. isoba ric isochoric
B. isoba ric isoth e r m a l
C. isocho ric isoba ric
D. isocho ric isoth e r m a l
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1414


87 2 . Diagr a m 1 repr e s e n t s equally spac e d bea d s on a sprin g. The bea d s are 1
cm apar t.

Dia gr a m 1

A longit u di n al wave prop a g a t e s along the spring. Diagr a m 2 shows the


position of the bea ds at a partic ul a r insta n t .

Dia gr a m 2

Which of the following is the best estim a t e of the wavele n g t h ?

A. 2 cm

B. 4 cm

C. 8 cm

D. 16 cm
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1415


87 3 . Diagr a m 1 repr e s e n t s equally spac e d bea d s on a sprin g. The bea d s are 1
cm apar t.

Dia gr a m 1

A longit u di n al wave prop a g a t e s along the spring. Diagr a m 2 shows the


position of the bea ds at a partic ul a r insta n t .

Dia gr a m 2

Which of the following is the best estim a t e of the amplit u d e ?

A. 0.4 cm

B. 0.8 cm

C. 1.6 cm

D. 3.2 cm
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1416


87 4 . Which of the following is a corr e c t comp a r i s o n betw e e n sta n di n g waves
and travelling waves?

Sta n d i n g wav e s Trave l li n g wave s


A. wave amplitu d e is cons t a n t wave am plit u d e dep e n d s
at all points along the wave upon the position along the
wave
B. ene r gy is always tran sf e r r e d ene r gy is not tra n sf e r r e d
C. the wavele n g t h is twice the the wavele n g t h is the
dist a n c e betw e e n dista n c e betw e e n
cons ec u t iv e nodes cons e c u tive cre st s
D. phas e varies continu o u sly phas e is const a n t betw e e n
along the wave cons e c u tive cre st s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

87 5 . Two galaxies with an ang ul a r sepa r a ti o n at the obs e rv e r of 5.0 × 10 –4


radi an s are obse rv e d with a radio teles c o p e . Both galaxie s emit radio
waves of wavelen g t h 2.5 × 10 –2 m.

The imag e s of the galaxies are just resolve d by the teles c o p e . The diam e t e r
of the circul ar collectin g dish of the teles c o p e is

A. 61 m.

B. 50 m.

C. 30 m.

D. 25 m.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1417


87 6 . The diagr a m shows sunligh t reflect e d from a lake surfa c e. The reflec t e d
sunligh t is plan e- polarize d.

The plan e of polariza tion of the reflect e d sunlight is

A. par allel to the lake surface .

B. perp e n d i c ul a r to the lake surfa c e .

C. par allel to the direc tio n of the reflect e d sunligh t.

D. in the plan e of the diag r a m .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

87 7 . The diagr a m below show s a particle with positive cha r g e q acc el e r a t i n g


betw e e n two cond u c ti n g plate s at pote n ti al s V 1 and V 2 .

Which of the following is the kinetic ene r gy gaine d by the char g e in moving
betw e e n the plat es ?

A. V2q

B. V1q

C. (V 1 – V 2 )q

D. (V 2 – V 1 )q
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1418


87 8 . A cylindrical condu c t o r of lengt h l, diam e t e r D and resistivity ρ has
resis t a n c e R . A differe n t cylindric al cond u c t o r of resis tivity 2 ρ, lengt h 2 l
and diam e t e r 2 D has a resist a n c e

A. 2R.

B. R.

R
C. 2.

R
D. 4.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

87 9 . A test char g e is a

A. char g e d object with a very small mass.

B. char g e d object with a very small cha r g e .

C. point char g e which has no effect on the elect ric field in which it is
place d.

D. point char g e which slightly chan g e s the elect ric field in which it is
place d.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1419


88 0 . A magn e t i c field of stre n g t h B links a coil. The direc tion of the field is
nor m al to the plan e of the coil.
The gra p h shows how B varies with time t .

Which of the following grap h s shows how the induc e d em f ε in the coil
varie s with t?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1420


88 1 . Raoul sugg e s t s that powe r losse s in a tra n sfo r m e r may be redu c e d by the
following.

I. Const r u c ti n g the core from a solid block of steel.

II. Using larg e diam e t e r wire in the coils.

III. Using wire of low resis tivity.

Which of the above sugg e s ti o n s would red uc e powe r loss?

A. I only

B. II only

C. II and III only

D. I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )

88 2 . Proto n s and neut r o n s are held toge t h e r in the nucle u s by the

A. elect r o s t a t i c force.

B. gravit atio n al force.

C. weak nuclea r force.

D. stron g nuclea r force.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1421


88 3 . A radioac tive isotop e has an initial activity A 0 and a half- life of 1 day. The
grap h shows how the activity A varies with time.

A0
The ratio A2 is equ al to which of the following?

A1
A. A3

A0
B. A3

A0
C. 2

A3
D. 3
(Tot al 1 mar k )

88 4 . The squa r e of the amplitu d e of the elect r o n wave function in a hydrog e n


atom is a meas u r e of the

A. unce r t a i n t y in position of the elect r o n.

B. mom e n t u m of the elect r o n.

C. prob a bility of finding an elect r o n at a par tic ul a r point.

D. unce r t a i n t y in the velocity.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1422


88 5 . A particle is accel er a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e V . Which
of the following gra p h s best show s how the de Broglie wavele n g t h λ
associ at e d with the par ticle varies with V?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

88 6 . Which of the following is a corr e c t stat e m e n t associ a t e d with the


photo el e c t r i c effect?

A. Elect r o n emission is insta n t a n e o u s .

B. Elect r o n s are only emitt e d if the incide n t light is above a cert ai n


minim u m wavelen g t h .

C. The ene r gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s dep e n d s on the light inte n si ty.

D. The ene r gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s does not depe n d on the frequ e n c y
of the inciden t light.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1423


88 7 . Which of the following ene r gy sourc e s res ults from the solar ene r gy
incide n t on Ear t h?

A. Nucle a r fission

B. Wind ener gy

C. Nucle a r fusion

D. Geoth e r m a l ener gy
(Tot al 1 mar k )

88 8 . A ther m al powe r station is 20 % efficien t and gene r a t e s useful elect ric al


powe r at 1000 MW. The fossil fuel use d has an ene r gy density of 50 MJ kg –
1
. The mas s of fuel in kg cons u m e d every secon d is given by which of the
following?

A. 0.01

B. 0.25

C. 4

D. 100
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1424


88 9 . Venus and Ear t h may be reg a r d e d as beha vin g as black bodies. The me a n
tem p e r a t u r e at the surfac e of Venus is about 600 K and at the surfa c e of
Eart h is about 300 K. Which of the following is the best estim a t e for the
ratio

p o w e r a d ia t epde ru n ita r e ao n E a r t h
p o w e r a d ia t epde ru n ita r e ao n Ve n u s?

1
A. 2

1
B. 4

1
C. 8

1
D. 16
(Tot al 1 mar k )

89 0 . The volum e of the Pacific Ocean is V and the volum e expa n s ivity of
seaw a t e r is γ. If the aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the Pacific Oce a n incr e a s e s by
∆T , wha t would be the fraction a l incre a s e in volum e of the Pacific Oce a n ?

A. γV ∆T

γV
B. ΔT

C. γ∆T

γ
D. ΔT
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1425


89 1 . A laser of wavelen g t h λ is used in a comp u t e r to rea d dat a from a CD.
Which of the following is the appr o p r i a t e dept h of a pit on the CD?

λ
A. 2

λ
B. 4

C. 2λ

D. 4λ
(Tot al 1 mar k )

89 2 . Incr e a s i n g the quan t u m efficiency of a CCD will incr e a s e the

A. signal stre n g t h .

B. magnificatio n.

C. pixel size.

D. resolutio n.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1426


89 3 . Data analysis ques tion.

The frequ e n cy f of the funda m e n t a l vibra tion of a sta n di n g wave of fixed


lengt h is mea s u r e d for differ e n t value s of the tension T in the string, using
the app a r a t u s show n.

In orde r to find the relation s hi p betw e e n the spee d v of the wave and the
tension T in the string, the spee d v is calcul a t e d from the relation

v = 2 f L

wher e L is the lengt h of the string.

The dat a points are show n plott e d on the axes below. The unce r t a i n t y in v
is ±5 m s –1 and the uncer t ai n t y in T is negligible.

(a) Draw error bar s on the first and last dat a points to show the
unce r t a i n t y in speed v .
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1427


(b) The origin al hypot h e si s is tha t the spe e d is dire c tly propo r tio n a l to the
tension T .
Explain why the dat a do not suppo r t this hypot h e s i s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n spee d and tension is of
the form

v = k T

whe r e k is a const a n t .

To test whet h e r the data suppo r t this rela tion s hi p, a gra p h of v 2


agains t T is plott e d as show n below.

The bes t- fit line show n take s into accou n t the unce r t a i n t i e s for eac h
dat a point.
The unce r t ai n t y in v 2 for T = 3.5 N is show n as an error bar on the
grap h.

(i) Stat e the value of the unc e r t ai n t y in v 2 for T = 3.5 N.

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1428


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1429


(ii) At T = 1.0 N the spee d v = 27 ± 5 m s –1 . Calcula t e the
unce r t ai n t y in v 2 .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(d) Use the grap h in (c) to dete r m i n e k withou t its unc e r t a i n t y.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

89 4 . This ques tion is abou t ther m al ene r gy tra n sf e r .

(a) A piece of coppe r is held in a flame until it reac h e s the r m a l


equilibri u m . The time it takes to reac h the r m a l equilibri u m will

IB Questionbank Physics 1430


dep e n d on the ther m al capa city of the piece of coppe r .

(i) Define ther m al capacity .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1431


(ii) Outline what is mea n t by the r m a l equilibriu m in this cont ext.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The piece of coppe r is tran sf e r r e d quickly to a plas tic cup cont ai nin g
wat e r. The ther m a l capacity of the cup is negligible. The following
dat a are availabl e.

Mass of copp e r = 0.12 kg


Mass of wat e r = 0.45 kg
Rise in tem p e r a t u r e of wate r = 30 K
Final tem p e r a t u r e of copp e r = 308 K
Specific heat capa ci ty of copp e r = 390 J kg
K–1
Specific heat capa ci ty of wat e r = 4200 J kg
K–1

(i) Use the dat a to calcula t e the tem p e r a t u r e of the flame.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Explain whet h e r the tem p e r a t u r e of the flame is likely to be


grea t e r or less than your ans w e r to (b)(i).

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1432


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1433


89 5 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l and elect ric fields.

(a) The equa tio n for the mag ni t u d e of the gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h due
to a point mas s may be writt e n as below.

KX
2
Y = s

The equa tio n for the mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h can also
be writt e n in the sam e form.

In the table identify the symbols used in the equ a tio n.

Sy m b o l Gravit a t i o n a l fiel d Ele c t r i c a l fiel d


qua n t i t y qua n t i t y
Y
K
X
s
(4)

(b) The mag ni t u d e of the elec t r o s t a t i c forc e betw e e n the proto n and
elect r o n in a hydro g e n atom is F E . The mag nit u d e of the gravit a tio n al
force betw e e n them is F G .

FE
Deter m i n e the ratio FG .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1434


89 6 . This ques tion is abou t microw a v e s .

(a) Radiatio n from a microw av e tra n s m i t t e r pass e s throu g h a single


nar r o w slit. A receive r is plac e d seve r a l met r e s beyon d the slit. The
receive r can be moved betw e e n point A and point B along a line
par allel to the slit.

(i) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show the variation of


inten si ty of the microw a v e radia tion with dista n c e along line AB.
The gra p h has bee n sta r t e d for you.

(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1435


(ii) The width of the nar r o w slit is red uc e d . Stat e and explain two
effect s on the inten si ty distrib u tio n you have show n in (a)(i).

Effect: .............................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

Explan a t io n: ....................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

Effect: .............................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

Explan a t io n: ....................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(b) Stan di n g waves are form e d in microw a v e ovens. Sugg e s t why it is


desir a bl e that food is rotat e d while being cooke d in the microw a v e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1436


.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1437


89 7 . This ques tion is abou t forces.

A solid iron ball of mass 770 kg is use d on a building site. The ball is
sus p e n d e d by a rope from a cra n e . The dista n c e from the point of
sus p e n s i o n to the cent r e of mas s of the ball is 12 m.

(a) Calcula t e the tension in the rope whe n the ball hang s vertic al and
station a r y.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The ball is pulled back from the vertic al and the n relea s e d . It falls
throu g h a vertical height of 1.6 m and strike s a wall.

(i) Calculat e the speed of the ball just befor e impa c t.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Calculat e the tension in the rope just befor e impa c t.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1438


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1439


(c) The ball is broug h t to rest in 0.15 s. The sketc h gra p h below shows
how the force the ball exer t s on the wall varie s with time.

(i) Stat e what qua n ti ty is repr e s e n t e d by the are a und e r the gra p h.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the maxim u m force F max exer t e d by the ball on the
wall.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1440


89 8 . This ques tion is abou t the gene r a t i o n of elect ric a l ene r gy and global
war mi n g.

(a) The diagr a m , not to scale, shows a pum p e d- stor a g e powe r sta tion
used for the gen e r a t io n of elect ric a l ene r gy.

Water stor e d in the tank is allowe d to fall thro u g h a pipe to a lake via
a tur bi n e. The tur bi n e is conne c t e d to an elect ric al gene r a t o r . The
pum p e d- stor a g e ac gene r a t o r syste m is reve r si bl e so that wate r can
be pum p e d from the lake to the tank.

The tank is 50 m deep and has a unifor m are a of 5.0 × 10 4 m 2 . The


heigh t from the botto m of the tank to the turbi n e is 310 m. The
density of wate r is 1.0 × 10 3 kg m –3 .

(i) Show that the maxim u m ene r gy that can be deliver e d to the
turbin e by the falling wate r is about 8 × 10 12 J.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The flow rat e of wat e r in the pipe is 400 m 3 s –1 . Calcula t e the
powe r deliver e d by the falling wat e r.

IB Questionbank Physics 1441


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The ene r gy losses in the powe r station are shown in the following
tabl e.

Per c e n t a g e los s of
So ur c e of en er g y los s
en e r g y
friction and turb ul e n c e of wat e r
27
in pipe
friction in tur bin e and ac
15
gene r a t o r
elect ric al heatin g losses 5

(i) Calculat e the overall efficiency of the conve r sio n of the


gravit a tion al poten t i al ene r gy of wate r in the tank into elect ric al
ene r gy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Sketc h a Sank ey diag r a m to rep r e s e n t the ene r gy conve r sio n in


the powe r station.

IB Questionbank Physics 1442


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1443


(c) An ac gen e r a t o r is conn e c t e d to the tur bi n e use d in the pum p e d- wate r
powe r station.
The diagr a m s show two positions of one winding of the coil in the
gene r a t o r . The magn e t i c field acts horizon t a lly in the direc tio n show n.
The coil rotat e s clockwis e.

(i) By consid e r i n g the motion of XY, explain why the emf induc e d
betw e e n X and Y has a maxim u m value in position 2.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) In position 2 the vertic al spe e d of XY is 160 m s –1 . The mag n e t i c


field str en g t h is 0.015 T and XY = 1.5 m. Dete r m i n e the induc e d
emf betw e e n X and Y at this position.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1444


..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1445


(iii) Side XY is par t of the rect a n g u l a r gene r a t o r coil that has 1500
windin g s conn e c t e d in serie s. Calcul a t e the total emf acros s the
ends of the coil at the mom e n t whe n XY move s vertic ally
down w a r d s at 90° to the mag n e t i c field direc tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(d) The elect ric al power prod u c e d at the powe r station is tra n s m i t t e d by
cables to the cons u m e r .

(i) Outline how the ene r gy losse s in tra n s m i s sio n are minimize d.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) Stat e on e advan t a g e and on e disa dv a n t a g e that a pum p e d-


stor a g e syste m has comp a r e d to a tidal wat e r stor a g e syste m .

Advant a g e : ......................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

Disadva n t a g e : .................................................................................
...................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1446


(e) One effect of global war mi n g is to melt the Antar c tic ice she e t. The
following data are availabl e for the Antar c ti c ice she e t and the Eart h’s
ocea n s .

Area of ice shee t = 1.4 × 10 7 km 2


Averag e thickn e s s of ice = 1.5 × 10 3 m
Density of ice = 920 kg m –3
Density of wat e r = 1000 kg m –3
Area of Eart h’s ocea n s = 3.8 × 10 8
km 2

Using the dat a, det e r m i n e the

(i) mas s of the Antar ctic ice.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) chan g e in mean sea level if all the Antar c tic ice she e t wer e to
melt and flow into the oce a n s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 25 mark s )

89 9 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r fission and fusion.

(a) The grap h shows the variatio n of binding ene r gy per nucle on for
nuclides with a nucleon num b e r gre a t e r tha n 40.

IB Questionbank Physics 1447


IB Questionbank Physics 1448
(i) Define bindin g ener g y .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) On the grap h, label with the lette r S the position of the most
stable nuclide.
(1)

(iii) Stat e why the nuclide you have labelle d is the most sta bl e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) In a nucle a r react o r , a nucle u s of ura ni u m ( U)- 235 fissions into


bariu m(B a)- 141 and krypto n(Kr)- 92. The equa tio n for this fission is

235 141 92 1
9 2 U  5 6 Ba3 6 Kr x 0 n .

(i) Use the grap h to show that the fission of one nucle u s of ura ni u m-
235 will releas e abou t 200 MeV of ene r gy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1449


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1450


(ii) Stat e the value of x in the equa tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) The mas s defect in this rea c tion is 3.1 × 10 –28 kg. Calcula t e the
num b e r of ura ni u m- 235 nuclei that mus t fission in orde r to
relea s e 1.0 kJ of ener gy.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iv) Outline how this fission reac tio n can lead to a chain reac tion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1451


(c) Inten sive scientific effort is devot e d to developi n g nucle a r fusion as a
futur e ener gy sourc e. Discus s wha t could be the social and
enviro n m e n t a l benefits of using nucle a r fusion as com p a r e d with
nuclea r fission as an ener gy sourc e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

90 0 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCD).

(a) Stat e the condition neces s a r y for two points on an imag e to be


resolved by a CCD.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) The following data are for a CCD in a cam e r a .

Dimen sion s of CCD = 24 mm × 16 mm


Num b e r of pixels = 10.2 × 10 6

(i) Each pixel on the CCD is squa r e and they all have the sam e
dime n sio n s . Show tha t the lengt h of one side of a pixel is about 6
μm.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1452


..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1453


(ii) The pixels have quan t u m efficiency of 80 % and a capa ci t a n c e of
35 pF. Photo n s are incide n t on a pixel at a rat e of 1.6 × 10 8 s –1 .
Calculat e the poten ti al differ e n c e acros s a pixel after 12 ms.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(iii) A photog r a p h is take n of a dist a n t building using the cam e r a . The


mag nification of the CCD is 2.2 × 10 –6 . Two window s on the
building are sepa r a t e d by 2.5 m.
Dete r mi n e whet h e r the imag e s of the window s can be resolve d
by the CCD.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) In ter m s of dat a stor a g e , sta t e two adva n t a g e s of using a digital


cam e r a as comp a r e d to an analog u e cam e r a that uses film.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1454


(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1455


90 1 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion.

(a) In ter m s of the accel e r a t i o n, stat e two conditions nec e s s a r y for a


syste m to perfor m simpl e har m o ni c motion.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A tuning fork is sound e d and it is assu m e d that eac h tip vibra t e s with
simple har m o ni c motion.

The extr e m e positions of the oscillatin g tip of one fork are sepa r a t e d
by a dista n c e d .

(i) Stat e, in ter m s of d , the amplit u d e of vibra tio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the displac e m e n t
of one tip of the tunin g fork varies with time.

IB Questionbank Physics 1456


(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1457


(iii) On your grap h, label the time period T and the amplit u d e a.
(2)

(c) The frequ e n c y of oscillation of the tips is 440 Hz and the amplit u d e of
oscillation of each tip is 1.2 mm. Dete r m i n e the maxim u m

(i) linea r speed of a tip.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) accele r a ti o n of a tip.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(d) The sketc h gra p h below show s how the velocity of a tip varies with
time.

On the axes, sketc h a grap h to show how the acc ele r a t io n of the tip
varies with time.
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1458


(e) In practice, the motion of the tips of the tuning fork is da m p e d .

(i) Describ e what is mea n t by da m p e d motion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Sugg e s t on e reas o n why the motion of the tips is dam p e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

90 2 . This ques tion is abou t ther m o dy n a m i c s .

(a) The first law of ther m o dy n a m i c s can be writt e n as the following


equa tio n.

Q = ∆U + W

Identify the symbols in this equ a tio n.

Q ..............................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

∆U ...........................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

W .............................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1459


.....................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1460


(b) A fixed mas s of an ideal gas is cont ai n e d in a cylinde r by a piston. The
friction betw e e n the piston and cylinde r wall is negligible.

Two proc e d u r e s are carri e d out on the gas. The ther m a l ene r gy input
to the gas is the sam e in both proc e d u r e s .

Pro c e d u r e 1 The gas is hea t e d and expa n d s at const a n t pres s u r e


with the piston free to move. The tem p e r a t u r e of the gas
incr e a s e s by 21 K.

Pro c e d u r e 2 The gas is now brou g h t back to its initial stat e and
again heat e d with the piston fixed in position. The
tem p e r a t u r e of the gas incr e a s e s by 35 K.

(i) Stat e the nam e of the proc e s s in proc e d u r e 2.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Explain why the tem p e r a t u r e cha n g e is gre a t e r in proc e d u r e 2


than in proce d u r e 1.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(iii) In proc e d u r e 1, ∆U cha n g e s by 120 J. Use the first law of


ther m o d y n a m i c s to calcul a t e the missing value s in the table
below.

∆U / J W / J Q / J
Proc e d u r +1 2 0 +2 0 0

IB Questionbank Physics 1461


e 1
Proc e d u r +2 0 0
e 2
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1462


90 3 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c circ uit s.

The compo n e n t s show n below are to be conn e c t e d in a circuit to


inves tig a t e how the cur r e n t I in a tungs t e n filame n t lamp varies with the
poten ti al differ e n c e V acros s it.

(a) Cons t r u c t a circuit diagr a m to show how the s e compo n e n t s should be


conn e c t e d toget h e r in orde r to obtain as larg e a ran g e as possible for
values of poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the lamp.

(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1463


(b) On the axes, sketc h a grap h of I agains t V for a filame n t lamp in the
ran g e V = 0 to its nor m al working volta g e .

(2)

(c) The lam p is mar k e d with the symbols “1.25 V, 300 mW”. Calcula t e the
cur r e n t in the filame n t whe n it is workin g nor m ally.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) The resis tivity of tung s t e n at the lamp’s workin g tem p e r a t u r e is 4 ×


10 –7 Ωm. The total lengt h of the tungs t e n filam e n t is 0.80 m. Estim a t e
the radius of the filam e n t .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1464


(e) The cell is conn e c t e d to two identic al lamps conn e c t e d in par allel. The
lamps are rat e d at 1.25 V, 300 mW. The cell has an emf of 1.5 V and
an inter n al resist a n c e of 1.2 Ω.
Deter m i n e whet h e r the lam ps will light nor m ally.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

90 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect r o n s .

(a) In 1924, Davisson and Ger m e r car rie d out an expe ri m e n t in which
elect r o n s wer e accele r a t e d throu g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e of 54 V. The
elect r o n s wer e scat t e r e d at the surfa c e of a nickel cryst al.

(i) Outline how the res ults of the expe ri m e n t sugg e s t e d tha t
elect r o n s exhibit wave prop e r ti e s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Calculat e the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the elect r o n s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1465


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1466


(b) Explain how the de Broglie hypot h e s i s is used with the “elect r o n in a
box” model to und e r s t a n d the origin of atomic ene r gy levels in the
atom.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

90 5 . This ques tion is abou t the star Becr ux and Ceph ei d variabl e s .

(a) Descri b e what is mean t by

(i) the app a r e n t mag nit u d e scale.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1467


(ii) absolut e mag nit u d e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1468


(b) Becr ux is a main sequ e n c e sta r and is one of the sta r s tha t mak e up
the Sout h e r n Cross.
The following data are availa ble for Becr ux.

Appar e n t magni t u d e = 1.25


Absolut e mag nit u d e = –3.92
Appar e n t bright n e s s = 7.00 × 10 –12 b Sun

b Sun is the appa r e n t bright n e s s of the Sun. Use the data to dedu c e
that the

(i) dist a n c e of Becrux from Eart h is 108 pc.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) luminosity of Becr ux is 3.43 × 10 3 L Sun whe r e L Sun is the


luminosity of the Sun.
(1 pc = 2.05 ×1 0 5 AU)

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(c) Given that the powe r in the mass–lumi no si ty relations hi p is 3.5, show

IB Questionbank Physics 1469


that the mas s of Becruz is abou t 10 M Sun whe r e M Sun is the mas s of the
Sun.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1470


(d) Stat e the differ e n c e s betw e e n the event u a l fate of the Sun and Becrux
after they leave the main sequ e n c e .

Sun: .........................................................................................................
....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Becr ux: ....................................................................................................


....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(e) Becr ux is a spect r al class B star. On the axes of the Hertz s p r u n g–


Russell diagr a m

(i) label, with the lette r B, the app r oxi m a t e position of Becrux.
(1)

(ii) draw the evolution a r y pat h of Becr ux afte r it leave s the main
sequ e n c e .

(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1471


(f) On the axes of the Her tzs p r u n g–R u s s e ll diagr a m above, dra w the
appr oxi m a t e region in which Ceph ei d variable sta r s are locat e d.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1472


(g) Stat e the reas o n for the periodic varia tio n in luminosity of a Ceph ei d
variabl e.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(h) Stat e the two quan ti tie s that nee d to be mea s u r e d in orde r to use a
Ceph ei d variabl e as a “sta n d a r d candle” to det e r m i n e the dista n c e to
the galaxy in which the Ceph ei d is locat e d.

1. .............................................................................................................
.....................

2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 19 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1473


90 6 . This ques tion is abou t cosmology.

(a) The diagr a m below repr e s e n t s a sphe ri c a l region of spac e base d on


Newt o n’s model of the unive r s e . Eart h is at the cent r e of the region.
The dark line repr e s e n t s a very thin sphe ric al shell of spa c e dista n c e
R from Ear t h.

With refer e n c e to the diag r a m and Newto n’s model of the unive r s e
explain qua n t i t a t i v e l y Olbe r s’ par a d ox.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1474


(b) The Big Bang theory provide s a resolutio n to Olber s’ par a d ox. Two
pieces of evide nc e to suppo r t the theor y are the exist e n c e of cosmic
microw av e backg r o u n d radia tion (CMB) and the red- shifte d light from
dista n t galaxies.

(i) Outline how CMB is consist e n t with the Big Bang theo ry.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The following dat a are availa bl e for the red- shift of light from a
dist a n t galaxy.

Wavelen g t h of light from galaxy = 130


nm
Wavelen g t h mea s u r e d in labor a t o r y = 120
nm
Hubbl e const a n t = 74 km s –1 Mpc –1

Use the dat a to dete r m i n e the dista n c e of the galaxy from Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1475


IB Questionbank Physics 1476
90 7 . This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n a signal wave and car rie r wave.

Signal
wave: ...............................................................................................
.................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Car ri e r
wave: ...............................................................................................
................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) With refer e n c e to a car ri e r wave, disting uis h betw e e n amplitu d e


modul a tion and frequ e n cy modul a tio n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1477


(c) The diagr a m is a sketc h of an audio frequ e n c y signal.

A radio wave is frequ e n c y modula t e d by the audio frequ e n c y sign al.


Stat e the chan g e s , if any, in the frequ e n c y of the modul a t e d signal in
the following time interv als.

A→
B ......................................................................................................
...................

B→
C ......................................................................................................
...................

C →
D ......................................................................................................
...................
(3)

(d) For a partic ul a r frequ e n cy modul a t e d carri e r wave, the maxim u m


frequ e n c y occur s every 1.2 ms. Ther e are 2.2 × 10 5 oscillation s
betw e e n each maxim u m frequ e n c y.

Deter m i n e the frequ e n cy of the

(i) signal wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1478


.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1479


(ii) carri e r wave.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

90 8 . This ques tion is abou t digital signals.

(a) The grap h shows the variatio n with time of an analog u e signal.

In orde r to conver t the analog u e signal into a 3- bit digital signal it is


sam pl e d every 100 µs. The possible outpu t volta g e s of the analog u e to
digital conver t e r that is use d are show n below.

Anal o g u e si g n a l / V Bin ary out p u t


0 – < 0.5 000
0.5 – < 1.0 001
1.0 – < 1.5 010
1.5 – < 2.0 011
2.0 – < 2.5 100
2.5 – < 3.0 101

IB Questionbank Physics 1480


3.0 – < 3.5 110
3.5 – < 4.0 111

IB Questionbank Physics 1481


Deter m i n e , explaining your answ e r , the

(i) bit- rate (dat a tran sf e r rat e).

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) digital outp u t of the signal for the sixth sam pl e sta r ti n g from t =
0 s.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Explain the effect s that incre a si n g the sam pling frequ e n c y and
num b e r of bits will have on the quality of the repr e s e n t a t i o n of the
analog u e signal.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1482


(3)

(c) The digital signal in (a) is to be tra n s m i t t e d along an optic fibre tha t
has a powe r loss of 2.0 dB km –1 .

(i) Stat e, in watt s, how powe r loss is define d on the decibel scale.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Calculat e the dista n c e travelle d by the signal that will result in a
powe r loss of 75 %.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(d) As a result of noise in elect ric circuits, digital pulse s can often lose
their shap e and henc e distor t the infor m a ti o n that they car ry. The
pulses can be re- shap e d using a circ uit calle d a Sch mit t trigg e r . The
diagr a m show s a Schmit t trigg e r tha t incor po r a t e s an oper a ti o n a l
amplifier.

(i) Stat e two esse n ti al prop e r t i e s of an ope r a tio n a l amplifier.

IB Questionbank Physics 1483


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1484


(ii) In the situation show n the outpu t volta g e V 0 of the amplifie r is at
its minim u m value of – 6.0 V. The volta g e at the non- inver ti n g
input to the amplifier is equal to 1.0 V and at the inver tin g input
it is V X. The outpu t volta g e will switch to its maxim u m value +
6.0 V if the voltag e V X just exce e d s +1. 0 V. Dete r mi n e the
minim u m voltag e V in that will resul t in an outpu t volta g e of + 6.0
V.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 16 mark s )

90 9 . Outline on e mor al or ethical issue and on e enviro n m e n t a l issue that arise


from the use of mobile phon e s .

Moral or ethical
issue: .......................................................................................................
...

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

Environ m e n t a l
issue: .......................................................................................................
......

.........................................................................................................................
.......................

IB Questionbank Physics 1485


.........................................................................................................................
.......................

.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1486


91 0 . This ques tion is abou t the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m .

(a) The tran s m i s sio n from a television station has a frequ e n c y of 100
MHz. It is known that the elect r o m a g n e t i c waves associa t e d with this
tran s m i s sio n prod u c e a ma gn e t i c field.
Stat e on e reas o n why a comp a s s does not res po n d to this field.

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(b) It is propos e d that inste a d of using radio wave s for television


tran s m i s sio n gam m a- rays are use d.

(i) Stat e a typical gam m a - ray frequ e n c y.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Sugg e s t on e disadv a n t a g e of using ga m m a- rays for television


tran s mi s s io n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 3 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1487


91 1 . This ques tion is abou t chro m a ti c abe r r a t i o n and a lens.

(a) Two par allel rays of white light are incide n t on a convex lens.

On the diag r a m , after refr a c tio n in the lens, dra w the path s for the
rays of red light and blue light pre s e n t in the white light.
(2)

(b) Use your diagr a m in (a) to explain chro m a ti c abe r r a t io n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) Stat e on e way in which chro m a t i c abe r r a t i o n may be redu c e d .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1488


.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1489


(d) An object is place d 5.0 cm from the lens and is illumin a t e d with red
light. The focal lengt h of the lens for red light is 8.0 cm. Calcula t e the

(i) position of the imag e.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) linea r magnificatio n.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

91 2 . This ques tion is abou t two- sour c e inte rfe r e n c e .

(a) Light from a laser is incide n t on two identic al par allel slits whos e
width is small comp a r e d to their sepa r a t i o n.

(diagra m not to scale)

After pas sin g thro u g h the slits the light is incide n t on a scre e n. The

IB Questionbank Physics 1490


sepa r a t i o n of the slits is 0.50 mm and the dista n c e betw e e n slits and
scre e n is 2.0 m. The wavele n g t h of the light is 700 nm.

IB Questionbank Physics 1491


(i) Stat e why a laser is used as the light sourc e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the sepa r a ti o n of points of maxim u m inte nsi ty on the


scre e n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Describ e the effect that incr e a s i n g the num b e r of slits would
have on the inten sity patt e r n on the scre e n .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The slits in (a) are replac e d with a diffrac tion gra tin g that has 3.5 ×
10 5 lines per met r e.
Deter m i n e the num b e r of positions of maxim u m inte n si ty that will be
obse rv e d on the scre e n .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1492


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

91 3 . This ques tion is abou t thin film inte rf e r e n c e .

A tran s p a r e n t thin film is som eti m e s use d to coat spec t a c l e lens e s as shown
in the diag r a m below.

(a) Stat e the phas e chan g e which occur s to light tha t

(i) is tran s m i t t e d at boun d a r y A into the film.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) is reflect e d at boun d a r y B.

IB Questionbank Physics 1493


.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(iii) is tran s m i t t e d at boun d a r y A from the film into the air.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1494


(b) Light of wavele n g t h 570 nm in air is incide n t on the coating.
Deter m i n e the smalles t thickn e s s of the coating requi r e d so that the
reflection is minimize d for nor m a l incide n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

91 4 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.

(a) The diagr a m below is a sketc h that shows the X-ray spec t r a prod u c e d
by elect r o n s of ener gy 25 keV and of ene r gy 20 keV striking a
molybd e n u m targ e t .

Sugg e s t why no char a c t e r i s ti c spec t r a are produ c e d by the 20 keV


elect r o n s .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1495


.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1496


(b) Show that the minim u m X-ray wavele n g t h prod u c e d by the 25 keV
elect r o n s in (a) is 0.050 nm.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(c) The wavele n g t h s of the X-rays in (a) are me a s u r e d by scat t e ri n g the m


from the surfac e of a cryst al that has a cubic lattic e stru c t u r e . The
spaci n g of the lattice ions is 0.28 nm.
Calcula t e the wavel en g t h of the X-rays that prod u c e a first orde r
Brag g angle of 21°.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

91 5 . This ques tion is abou t special rela tivity.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an inerti al fram e of refe r e n c e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1497


(b) Aibhe is at rest in an inerti al fram e of refe r e n c e A and Eua n is at rest
in an inertial fram e of refe r e n c e B. B is moving in the x -dire c tio n, with
spee d v , relative to A. The table T is at res t with res p e c t to Aibhe.

Aibhe meas u r e s the lengt h of T to be 1.5 m and Eua n me a s u r e s it to


be 1.2 m.

(i) Explain which observ e r me a s u r e s the prop e r lengt h of T.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the spee d v .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1498


..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1499


(c) Two insect s land at the sam e point on T. Accordi n g to a clock at rest
with resp e c t to Aibhe, one of the insect s lands 2.4 secon d s afte r the
other . Calculat e, accor di n g to Eua n, the time interv al betw e e n the
landing s of each insect.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)

(d) Two other insect s land at eithe r end of the table. Thes e two event s
may occ u r at the sam e time as mea s u r e d by one of the obse rv e r s
(Aibhe or Euan) but not to the othe r. Outline, with refe r e n c e to the
post ul a t e s of relativity, why the s e time s differ.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(e) Muons are produ c e d in the uppe r atmos p h e r e by the bomb a r d m e n t of


cosmic rays. The muons travel close to the spe e d of light and are
unst a bl e. They have a very shor t half- life as me a s u r e d in a muon’s
fram e of refer e n c e . Explain how the dete c tio n of muons at the surfa c e
of the Eart h provides evide n c e for the speci al theory of rela tivity.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1500


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1501


91 6 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic ene r gy and mom e n t u m .

(a) Particle A is at rest with resp e c t to an obse rv e r . Anoth e r identic al


particl e B is moving with resp e c t to the obse rv e r . Disting uis h betw e e n
the total ene r gy of particle A and the total ene r gy of par ticle B as
mea s u r e d by the obse rv e r .

Particle
A: .....................................................................................................
...............

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Particle
B: .....................................................................................................
...............

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Two proto n s are travelling towa r d s eac h othe r along the sam e straig h t
line in a vacuu m .

The spee d of each proto n, as mea s u r e d in the labor a t o r y fram e of


refer e n c e , is 0.960c.

(i) Calculat e the relative spee d of one proton with res p e c t to the
othe r proton.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1502


(ii) Show that the total ene r gy of one of the proto n s, accor di n g to an
obse rv e r at rest in the labor a t o r y, is 3.35 GeV.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The collision of the two proto n s res ult s in the following reac tio n

p + + p + = p + + n 0 + π+

whe r e π + is a particle calle d a pion and has a rest mas s of 140 MeV c –
2
. The total ene r gy of the pion is 502 MeV. Dete r mi n e , accor di n g to an
obse rv e r at rest in the labor a t o r y, the

(i) total ener gy of the proton form e d plus the total ene r gy of the
neut r o n form e d by the collision.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) mom e n t u m of the pion.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1503


(2)

(d) The diagr a m shows the path s followe d by the neut r o n and pion in (c).

The dott e d line shows the path of the original collision of the proton s
in (b). On the diag r a m , dra w the direc tio n of the proton form e d in the
collision.
(1)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1504


91 7 . This ques tion is abou t spac e ti m e and black holes.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by the conc e p t of spac e ti m e .

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Outline, with refer e n c e to the motion of photon s in spac e ti m e , what is


mea n t by the Schw a r z s c hil d radius.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(c) The mas s of the Sun is about 2 × 10 30 kg. Show that, if the Sun wer e
to beco m e a black hole, its radius would be about 3 km.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1505


91 8 . This ques tion is abou t heari n g.

(a) Outline how variation s in sound pre s s u r e in the air are amplifie d in
the middle ear.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) A sound of intensi ty I = 2.0 × 10 –6 W m –2 is incide n t on the ear. The


loudn e s s det ec t e d by the ear due to this soun d is L .

(i) Sugg e s t why the loudn e s s of a soun d of inte nsity 4.0 × 10 –6 W m –


2
det ec t e d by the ear is not 2 L .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Use the decibel scale to det e r m i n e to wha t value the inte nsity I
must be incre a s e d in orde r that the loudn e s s dete c t e d by the ear
is 2 L .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1506


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1507


(iii) In light of your answ e r to (b)(ii), outline possible effects of long-
ter m expos u r e of soun d at this loudn e s s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1508


91 9 . This ques tion is abou t the use of X-rays and the use of lase r light in clinic al
diag no sis.

(a) A par allel beam of X-rays of inte nsity I 0 is incide n t on a block of


mat e ri al of thickn e s s x .

The inten sity of the X-rays eme r gi n g from the block is I and the half-
x1
value thickn e s s of the mat e ri a l is 2 .

Using the axes below, sketc h a gra p h showin g four data points, to
show how I varies with x for blocks of the sa m e mat e r i al but differin g
x1
thickn e s s e s . The position of I 0 and of 2 are show n mar k e d on the
res p e c t ive axes.

(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1509


(b) The att e n u a t i o n coefficien t for bone is µ b and for tissu e µ t . The tabl e
μb
shows the ratio μ t for X-rays of thre e differ e n t photon ene r gi e s.

Phot o n en e r g y / MeV μb
μt
0.08 3.0
0.01 8.0
1.00 1.0

(i) Explain why X-rays of photo n ene r gy 0.01 MeV are the most
suita bl e for use in det e c ti n g a bone fract u r e .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(ii) The att en u a t i o n coefficie nt of bone for X-rays with photo n ene r gy
0.01 MeV is 0.60 cm –1 . X-rays of this ene r gy use d to imag e a
sus p ec t e d leg bone fract u r e pass thro u g h bone thickn e s s of 6.0
cm and tissu e thickn e s s 9.6 cm. Dete r m i n e the following ratio.

fin a lin t e n s itof


y x - r a ysa ft e rp a s s in gt h r o u gbhon e
fin a lin t e n s itof
y x - r a ysa ft e rp a s s in gt h r o u g his ts u e

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1510


.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(c) Regions of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m othe r tha n the X-ray region,
can also be used in clinical diagno si s. In this res p e c t , light from two
laser s is used in pulse oxime t r y.

(i) Identify the two region s of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m in


which the wavele n g t h of the light emitt e d by eac h lase r is found.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) Outline how the laser light is use d to mea s u r e hemo glo bi n
satu r a ti o n in the blood.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )

92 0 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive isotop e s use d as trac e r s .

(a) Define biological half- life and physical half- life .

Biological half-
life: ..................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1511


...

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Physical half-
life: ..................................................................................................
......

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) Radioa ctive isotop e s can be use d as “trac e r s ” in orde r to study cer t ai n
physiological proce s s e s in the body. Stat e, for thes e isotop e s , on e
reas o n why

(i) it is impor t a n t that such isotop e s have a shor t biologic al half- life.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) the physical half- life is gre a t e r tha n the biologic al half- life.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) The physical half- life of a partic ul a r isotop e use d as a trac e r is 4.0
days and its biological half- life is 2.0 days. Calcula t e the perc e n t a g e
decr e a s e in the activity of the isotop e 4.0 days afte r it is introd u c e d
into the body.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

IB Questionbank Physics 1512


.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

92 1 . This ques tion is abou t fermion s and bosons .

(a) Disting ui s h, with refer e n c e to the Pauli exclusion principle, the


differ e n c e betw e e n fermion s and bosons.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1513


(b) Identify the boson that media t e s the

(i) elect r o m a g n e t i c inter a c ti o n betw e e n elect r o n s .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(ii) stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s .

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) The stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucle on s has a ran g e of the orde r of
10 –15 m. Show that the mass of the boson in (b)(ii) is about 100 MeV c –
2
.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) The Feyn m a n diagr a m shows the dec ay of a meso n into an anti- muon
and a neut ri n o.

(i) Stat e the char g e on the meso n and on the anti- muon and explain
your answ e r .

IB Questionbank Physics 1514


Meso n: ............................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

Anti-
muon: ......................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Identify the particle labelle d X.

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

92 2 . This ques tion is abou t particle acc el e r a t o r s .

(a) Differ e n t types of particles may be prod u c e d by the collision of


accel e r a t e d proto n s with station a r y proton s . Explain why the
accel e r a t e d proto n s must have high ene r gy.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)

(b) The diagr a m shows some of the feat u r e s of a linea r par ticle
accel e r a t o r used to accel e r a t e proton s .

IB Questionbank Physics 1515


The vacuu m cham b e r cont ai n s a succ e s sio n of cylindric al anod e s of
which only four are show n, anod e s 1, 2, 3 and 4.

(i) Stat e why the proton s are not acc el e r a t e d whilst travelling
inside the anod e s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1516


(ii) Describ e the mech a ni s m by which the proton s are acc el e r a t e d by
the anod e s .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(c) The minim u m ene r gy requir e d to prod u c e a K – meson in the collision


betw e e n a high ener gy proto n and a station a r y proto n is 1890 MeV.
Deter m i n e the minim u m kine tic ene r gy E K that the high ene r gy proton
mus t have in orde r to prod u c e a K – meso n.

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)

(d) In par ticle accel e r a t o r s such as sync h r o t r o n s , it can be arr a n g e d to


have collisions betw e e n proton s and antip r o t o n s travelling in opposit e
directio n s. Stat e on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dv a n t a g e of this
arr a n g e m e n t in ter m s of particle produ c tio n as comp a r e d with that
describ e d in (c).

Advant a g e : ..............................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1517


....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................

Disadv a n t a g e : .........................................................................................
.....................

.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1518


92 3 . This ques tion is abou t qua r k s.

3

(a) –
The str a n g e n e s s of the Ω had r o n is –3 and its spin is 2.

(i) Explain how it is know n tha t the qua r k s truc t u r e of the Ω– had r o n
is sss.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii) Explain, with refer e n c e to the qua r k s truc t u r e of the Ω– hadr o n,


why the concep t of the colour of qua r k s was introd u c e d .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(iii) Stat e why the Ω– hadr o n has no colour.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) As well as providin g evide nc e for the existe n c e of qua r k s, dee p


inelas tic scat t e r i n g experi m e n t s also provide evide n c e for the

IB Questionbank Physics 1519


existe n c e of gluons.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by dee p inela sti c scat t e ri n g .

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1520


(ii) Outline how the expe ri m e n t s provide evide nc e for the exist e n c e
of gluons.

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................

.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

92 4 . The orde r of mag ni t u d e of the weight of an appl e is

A. 10 –4 N.

B. 10 –2 N.

C. 1 N.

D. 10 2 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1521


M
ρ
92 5 . The density of a met al cube is given by the expr e s sio n V whe r e M is the
mas s and V is the volum e of the cube. The perc e n t a g e unc e r t a i n ti e s in M
and V are as show n below.

M 12 %

V 4.0 %

The per ce n t a g e unce r t a i n t y in the calcul a t e d value of the density is

A. 3.0 %.

B. 8.0 %.

C. 16 %.

D. 48 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

92 6 . A ball is throw n vertically upwa r d s from the grou n d. The gra p h shows the
variation with time t of the vertic al displa c e m e n t d of the ball.

IB Questionbank Physics 1522


Which of the following gives the final displa c e m e n t afte r time T and the
aver a g e speed betw e e n time t = 0 and time t = T ?

Dis pl a c e m e n t Aver a g e spe e d

A. 0 0

0 2D
B.
T

2D 2D
C.
T

D. 2D 0

(Tot al 1 mar k )

92 7 . A gene r al expr es sio n for Newto n’s secon d law of motion is

Δp
F .
Δt

What condition is applied so that the law may be expr e s s e d in the form F =
ma ?

A. The mas s m is cons t a n t .

B. The accele r a ti o n a is cons t a n t .

C. The force F is const a n t .

D. The directio n of the force F is cons t a n t .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1523


92 8 . Mandy stan d s on a weighin g scale inside a lift (eleva t o r) that accele r a t e s
vertically upwa r d s as show n in the diagr a m below. The force s on Mandy
are her weigh t W and the reaction force from the scale R .

The readi n g of the scale is

A. R + W.

B. W.

C. R.

D. R – W.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

92 9 . Two sphe r e s of mas s e s m 1 and m 2 are moving towa r d s eac h othe r along the
sam e str aig h t- line with spee d s v 1 and v 2 as show n.

The sphe r e s collide. Which of the following gives the total chan g e in line a r
mom e n t u m of the sphe r e s as a res ult of the collision?

A. 0

B. m 1v1 + m 2v2

C. m 1v1 − m 2v2

D. m 2v2 − m 1v1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1524


93 0 . A brick is place d on the surfac e of a flat horizont a l disc as show n in the
diagr a m below. The disc is rota ti n g at const a n t spe e d abou t a vertic al axis
thro u g h its cent r e. The brick does not move rela tive to the disc.

Which of the diag r a m s below corr e c tly rep r e s e n t s the hori z o n t a l force or
forces acting on the brick?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1525


93 1 . A frictionle s s trolley of mas s m moves down a slope with a cons t a n t
accele r a ti o n a. A secon d simila r frictionle s s trolley has mas s 2 m . The
accele r a ti o n of the secon d trolley as it moves down the slope is

1
a.
A. 2

B. a.

C. 2 a.

D. 4 a.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

93 2 . The inter n al ener gy of a solid subs t a n c e is equal to the

A. aver a g e kinetic ene r gy of the molec ul e s.

B. total kinetic ener gy of the molec ul e s.

C. total pote n ti al ener gy of the molec ul e s.

D. total pote n ti al and total kinetic ene r gy of the molec ul e s.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

93 3 . A gas is cont ai n e d in a cylinde r fitted with a piston as show n below.

When the gas is com p r e s s e d rapidly by the piston its tem p e r a t u r e rises
bec a u s e the molec ul e s of the gas

A. are sque ez e d close r toget h e r .

B. collide with each other more frequ e n t ly.

C. collide with the walls of the cont ai n e r more freq u e n t ly.

D. gain ene r gy from the moving piston.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1526


93 4 . The specific heat capacity c of a solid block of mas s m is dete r m i n e d by
heati n g the block and meas u r i n g its tem p e r a t u r e . The gra p h below shows
the variation of the tem p e r a t u r e T of the block with the ther m a l ene r gy Q
tran sf e r r e d to the block.

The gra di e n t of the line is equal to

c
.
A. m

m
.
B. c

C. mc .

1
.
D. mc
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1527


93 5 . The gra p h below shows the varia tion with time t of the displa c e m e n t x of a
par ticl e unde r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion.

Which gra p h corr e c tly shows the variation with time t of the accele r a ti o n a
of the par ticle?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1528


93 6 . A woode n block is at res t on a horizont a l frictionl e s s surfa c e . A horizon t al
sprin g is att ac h e d betw e e n the block and a rigid suppo r t .

The block is displace d to the right by an amou n t X and is the n rele a s e d .


The period of oscillation s is T and the total ene r gy of the syste m is E .

X
For an initial displac e m e n t of 2 which of the following shows the best
estim a t e for the period of oscillations and the total ene r gy of the syst e m ?

Peri o d Tot al en e r g y
E
A. T
2
E
B. T
4
T E
C.
2 2
T E
D.
2 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )

93 7 . Which of the following cor r e c tly desc ri b e s the cha n g e , if any, in the spe e d,
wavele n g t h and frequ e n cy of a light wave as it pass e s from air into glas s?

Sp e e d Wave l e n g t h Freq u e n c y

A. decr e a s e s dec r e a s e s unc h a n g e d

B. decr e a s e s unc h a n g e d dec r e a s e s

C. unch a n g e d incr e a s e s dec r e a s e s

D. incr e a s e s incr e a s e s unc h a n g e d


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1529


93 8 . The diagr a m below show s a puls e travelling along a rope from X to Y. The
end Y of the rope is tied to a fixed suppo r t.

When the pulse reach e s end Y it will

A. disap p e a r .

B. caus e the end of the rope at Y to oscillat e up and down.

C. be reflect e d and be inver t e d.

D. be reflect e d and not be inver t e d.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

93 9 . In the circuit below, the batt e r y has negligible inte r n a l resis t a n c e . Thre e
identic al lamps L, M and N of cons t a n t resis t a n c e are conn e c t e d as shown.

The filame n t of lamp N brea k s. Which of the following show s the


subs e q u e n t chan g e s to the bright n e s s of lamp L and lamp M?

Lam p L Lam p M

A. stays the sam e dec r e a s e s

B. incr e a s e s stays the sam e

C. incr e a s e s dec r e a s e s

D. decr e a s e s incr e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1530


94 0 . In the circuit below, the voltm e t e r has a resis t a n c e 100 k Ω. The batt e r y has
negligible inter n al resist a n c e and emf 6 V.

The readi n g on the voltm et e r is

A. 0 V.

B. 2 V.

C. 3 V.

D. 4 V.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1531


94 1 . In the circuit show n below, the cell has negligible inte r n a l resist a n c e .

Which of the following equa tio n s is corr e c t ?

A. I1 = 2 I2

B. I1 = 2 I3

C. I2 = 2 I3

D. I3 = 2 I1
(Tot al 1 mar k )

94 2 . In Newt o n’s univer s al law of gravit a tion the mas s e s are assu m e d to be

A. exten d e d mas s e s .

B. mas s e s of plane t s .

C. point mas s e s .

D. sphe ric al mas s e s .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1532


94 3 . The elect ric field stre n g t h at a point may be define d as

A. the force exer t e d on unit positive cha r g e plac e d at tha t point.

B. the force per unit positive cha r g e on a small test cha r g e plac e d at that
point.

C. the work done on unit positive cha r g e to move the cha r g e to tha t point
from infinity.

D. the work done per unit positive cha r g e to move a small test cha r g e to
that point from infinity.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

94 4 . An elect r o n is moving in air at right angle s to a unifor m magn e t i c field. The


diagr a m below shows the pat h of the elect r o n . The elect r o n is slowing
down.

Which of the following cor r e c tly gives the dire c tion of motion of the
elect r o n and the direction of the mag n e t i c field?

Dire c t i o n of mot i o n Dire c t i o n of ma g n e t i c


fiel d

A. clockwis e into plane of pap e r

B. clockwis e out of plane of pap e r

C. anti- clockwis e into plane of pap e r

D. anti- clockwis e out of plane of pap e r


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1533


7
94 5 . The binding ener gy per nucleon of the nucle u s 3
Liis app r oxim a t e ly 5 MeV.
The total ener gy requi r e d to compl e t e ly sepa r a t e the nucleon s of this
nucle u s is appr oxim a t ely

A. 15 MeV.

B. 20 MeV.

C. 35 MeV.

D. 50 MeV.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

94 6 . The initial activity of a sam pl e of a radioa c tive isotop e of half- life 10 hour s
A
?
is A . What is the age of the sam pl e whe n its activity is 3 2

A. 30 hour s

B. 40 hour s

C. 50 hour s

D. 320 hour s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1534


94 7 . When the isotop e alumini u m- 27 is bom b a r d e d with alph a particle s, the
following nucle a r reac tion can take plac e.

4
2 H e 21 73Al  X n e u t r o n

Which of the following cor r e c tly gives the atomic (proto n) num b e r and
mas s (nucleo n) num b e r of the nucle u s X?

Prot o n nu m b e r Nu c l e o n nu m b e r

A. 15 30

B. 16 31

C. 30 15

D. 31 16
(Tot al 1 mar k )

94 8 . The volum e of a given mas s of wate r at a tem p e r a t u r e of T 1 is V 1 . The


volum e incr e a s e s to V 2 at tem p e r a t u r e T 2 . The coefficie n t of volum e
expa n sio n of wat e r may be calcula t e d from

V2 V1
 .
A. T2 T1

V2  V1
.
B. T2  T1

V2  V1
.
C. V1 T2  T1 

V2  V1
.
D. V2 T2  T1 
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1535


94 9 . The com m e r ci al produ c tio n of ene r gy by nucle a r fusion is not yet possible
mainly due to difficulties with

A. obtaini n g plentiful supplie s of a suita bl e fuel.

B. reac hi n g the high tem p e r a t u r e s requir e d .

C. confining the hot plas m a.

D. disposin g of the radioa c tive was t e prod u c t s .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

95 0 . A wind gen e r a t o r prod u c e s 5.0 kW of powe r for a wind spe e d of 6.0 m s –1 .


The best esti m a t e for the powe r prod u c e d for a wind spe e d of 12.0 m s –1 is

A. 10 kW.

B. 25 kW.

C. 40 kW.

D. 125 kW.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

95 1 . It is hypot h e siz e d that global war mi n g may lead to significa n t chan g e s in


the aver a g e sea- level. This hypot h e s i s assu m e s that

A. aver a g e rainfall will incre a s e .

B. icebe r g s will melt.

C. glacier s will melt.

D. the rat e of evapo r a ti o n of sea w a t e r will incre a s e .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1536


95 2 . Two black bodies X and Y are at differ e n t tem p e r a t u r e s . The tem p e r a t u r e
of body Y is high e r than that of body X. Which of the following shows the
black body spect r a for the two bodies ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1537


95 3 . The diagr a m below show s a simplified model of the ene r gy bala nc e for
Eart h.

The albedo of the Eart h accor di n g to this model is equ al to

2
.
A. 340

100
.
B. 340

238
.
C. 340

240
.
D. 340
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1538


95 4 . This ques tion is abou t the elect ric a l powe r availa bl e from a wind tur bi n e .

The maxim u m elect rical powe r gene r a t e d by a wind tur bi n e , P out , was
meas u r e d over a ran g e of incide n t wind spe e d s , v in .

The gra p h below shows the varia tion with v in of P out . Unc e r t a i n ti e s for the
dat a are not show n.

vin .
(a) It is sugg e s t e d that P out is propo r tio n a l to

(i) Draw the line of best- fit for the data points.
(1)

(ii) Stat e on e reas o n why the line you have dra w n does not suppo r t
this hypot h e s i s .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(iii) The unce r t a i n t y in the powe r at 15 m s –1 is 5 %. Draw an erro r


bar on the grap h to repr e s e n t this unc e r t a i n t y.
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1539


(b) The theo r e ti c al relations hi p betw e e n the available powe r in the wind,
P in , and incide n t wind spe e d is show n in the gra p h below.

4000

3500

3000

2500

2000
P m / kW

1500

1000

500

0
0 5 10 15 20 25
–1
V m / m s

Using both grap h s ,

IB Questionbank Physics 1540


(i) det e r m i n e the efficie ncy of the turbin e for an incide n t wind spe e d
of 14 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(ii) sugg e s t , withou t calcula tion, how the efficiency of the turbin e
chan g e s with incr e a si n g wind spe e d.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(c) Outline on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dva n t a g e of using wind tur bin e s
to gen e r a t e elect ri cal ener gy.

Advant a g e : .................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1541


..................

Disadv a n t a g e : .................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

95 5 . This ques tion is abou t an elect ric circuit.

A particul a r filame n t lamp is rat e d at 12 V, 6.0 mA. It just lights whe n the
poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the filame n t is 6.0 V.

A stud e n t sets up an elect ric circuit to mea s u r e the I-V cha r a c t e r i s ti c of the
filame n t lamp.

In the circuit, show n below, the stud e n t has conne c t e d the voltm e t e r and
the am m e t e r into the circuit inc or r e c t l y .

The batt e r y has emf 12 V and negligible inte r n a l resis t a n c e . The am m e t e r


has negligible resis t a n c e and the resist a n c e of the voltm e t e r is 100 k Ω. The
maxim u m resist a n c e of the varia bl e resisto r is 15 Ω.

(a) Explain, witho u t doing any calcul a tion s , whet h e r the r e is a position of
the slide S at which the lamp will be lit.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1542


.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) Estim a t e the maxim u m rea din g of the amm e t e r .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1543


(c) Complet e the circuit diagr a m below showin g the corr e c t position of
the voltm e t e r and of the am m e t e r in orde r to det e r m i n e the I-V
char a c t e r i s ti c of the filam e n t lamp.

(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

95 6 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l fields.

(a) Define gravitational field stre n g t h .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1544


(b) The gravit a tio n al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Jupite r is 25 N kg –1
and the radius of Jupiter is 7.1  10 7 m.

(i) Derive an expr e s s io n for the gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h at the
surfac e of a plan e t in ter m s of its mas s M , its radius R and the
gravit a tion al cons t a n t G.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) Use your expr e s s io n in (b)(i) above to estim a t e the mas s of


Jupite r.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

95 7 . Simple har m o ni c motion and the gre e n h o u s e effect

(a) A body is displace d from equilibriu m . Sta t e the two conditions


neces s a r y for the body to execu t e simple har m o nic motion.

1. .........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

2. .........................................................................................................
................

IB Questionbank Physics 1545


.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1546


(b) In a simple model of a meth a n e molec ul e , a hydro g e n atom and the
car bo n atom can be reg a r d e d as two mas s e s att a c h e d by a sprin g. A
hydrog e n atom is much less mas sive tha n the car bo n atom such that
any displace m e n t of the carbo n atom may be ignor e d .

The grap h below show s the variatio n with time t of the displ ac e m e n t x
from its equilibri u m position of a hydrog e n atom in a molec ul e of
met h a n e .

The mas s of hydrog e n atom is 1.7  10 –27 kg. Use dat a from the gra p h
above

(i) to det e r m i n e its amplitu d e of oscillation.

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) to show that the frequ e n c y of its oscillation is 9.1  10 13 Hz.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1547


(iii) to show that the maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of the hydrog e n atom
is 6.2  10 –18 J.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(c) On the grid below, sketch a gra p h to show the variation with time t of
the velocity v of the hydrog e n atom for one period of oscillation
sta r ti n g at t = 0. (Ther e is no nee d to add values to the velocity axis.)

(3)

(d) Assumin g that the motion of the hydrog e n atom is simple har m o ni c,
its frequ e n cy of oscillation f is given by the expr e s si o n

1 k
f ,
2π mp

whe r e k is the force per unit displa c e m e n t betw e e n a hydrog e n atom


and the car bo n atom and m p is the mas s of a proton.

(i) Show that the value of k is appr oxi m a t e ly 560 N m –1 .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1548


................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1549


(ii) Estim a t e , using your answ e r to (d)(i), the maxim u m accel e r a ti o n
of the hydro g e n atom.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(e) Met h a n e is classified as a gre e n h o u s e gas.

(i) Describ e what is mea n t by a gre e n h o u s e gas.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) Elect r o m a g n e t i c radia tio n of frequ e n c y 9.1  10 13 Hz is in the


infrar e d region of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m . Sugg e s t , bas e d
on the infor m a ti o n given in (b)(ii), why met h a n e is classified as a
gree n h o u s e gas.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(Tot al 17 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1550


IB Questionbank Physics 1551
95 8 . Specific heat and a dom es tic show e r

(a) Define specific heat capacity .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Equal mass e s of two differ e n t solid subs t a n c e s A and B are at the
sam e tem p e r a t u r e . The specific hea t capa city of subs t a n c e A is
grea t e r than the specific hea t capa ci ty of subs t a n c e B. The two
subs t a n c e s now have their tem p e r a t u r e s raise d by the sam e amou n t .

Explain which subs t a n c e will have the gre a t e r incr e a s e in inte r n a l


ener gy ass u mi n g both rem ai n in the solid phas e.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The diagr a m below shows part of the heati n g circuit of a


dome s ti c show e r.

IB Questionbank Physics 1552


Cold wat e r ente r s the show e r unit and flows over an insula t e d hea ti n g
ele m e n t . The heati n g elem e n t is rate d at 7.2 kW, 240 V. The wat e r
ent e r s at a tem p e r a t u r e of 14 C and leave s at a tem p e r a t u r e of 40 C.
The specific heat cap acity of wate r is
4.2  10 3 J kg –1 K–1 .

IB Questionbank Physics 1553


(i) Estim a t e the flow rat e of the wate r.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(4)

(ii) Sugg e s t on e reas o n why your answ e r to (c)(i) is only an estim a t e .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

95 9 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r powe r produ c tio n.

(a) The purp o s e of a nucle a r powe r sta tion is to produ c e elect ric al ene r gy
from nucle a r ene r gy. The diagr a m below is a repr e s e n t a t i o n of the
princip al compo n e n t s of a nucle a r rea c t o r pile used in a cer t ai n type
of nuclea r powe r station tha t use s ura ni u m as a fuel.

The function of the mode r a t o r is to slow down the neut r o n s prod u c e d


in a reactio n such as that desc ri b e d above.

IB Questionbank Physics 1554


Explain,

(i) why it is neces s a r y to slow down the neut r o n s .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(ii) the function of the cont r ol rods.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(b) With refer e n c e to the conc e p t of fuel enric h m e n t in a nucle a r reac t o r


explain,

(i) the adva n t a g e of enric hi n g the ura ni u m use d in a nucle a r


react o r .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1555


................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1556


(ii) from an inter n a t io n a l point of view, a possible risk to which fuel
enrich m e n t could lead.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(c) A particul a r nuclea r react o r use s ura ni u m- 235 as its fuel sourc e .
When a nucle u s of urani u m- 235 abso r b s a neut r o n, the following
reac tio n can take place.

235
92 U  01 n  144
Xe  93 08S r 2 01 n
54

The following data are availa ble.

235
rest mas s of 92 U = 2.189 5  10 5 MeV
c –2
144
rest mas s of 54 Xe = 1.340 8  10 5 MeV
c –2
90
rest mas s of 38 S r = 8.374 9  10 4 MeV
c –2
1
n
rest mas s of 0 = 939.5 6 MeV c –2

(i) Show that the ener gy rele a s e d in the rea c tio n is app roxi m a t e ly
180 MeV.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) Stat e the form in which the ene r gy app e a r s .

IB Questionbank Physics 1557


.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1558


(d) The ene r gy relea s e d by 1 atom of carbo n- 12 during comb u s ti o n is
appr oxi m a t ely 4 eV.

(i) Using the answ e r to (c)(i), estim a t e the ratio

e n e r g dy e n s it oy f u r a n iu -m23 5
e n e r g dy e n s it of
y c a r b on -1 2 .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(ii) Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to your answ e r in (d)(i), on e adva n t a g e


of ura ni u m- 235 comp a r e d with fossil fuels.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(e) When a urani u m- 238 nucle u s abso r b s a neut r o n the following reac tio n
can take place.

238
92 U  01 n  239
92U

The isotop e urani u m- 239 is radioa c tive and dec ays with a half- life of
23 minut e s to form an isotop e of nept u ni u m- 239 (Np- 239).

(i) Define radioactiv e half- life and explain what is mea n t by an


isotop e.

Radioactive half- life:

.........................................................................................................
................

IB Questionbank Physics 1559


.........................................................................................................
................

Isotop e:

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) Compl et e the reaction equ a tio n for this dec ay.

239
92 U
(3)


(iii) The isotop e nept u ni u m- 239 unde r g o e s radioa c tive β dec ay to
form an isotop e of plutoniu m . Outline on e adva n t a g e and on e
disadv a n t a g e of this dec ay in relation to nucle a r powe r
produ c t io n.

Advant a g e :

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

Disadva n t a g e :

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(4)
(Tot al 25 mark s )

96 0 . Mech a ni c al power

(a) Define power .

IB Questionbank Physics 1560


.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1561


(b) A car is travelling with const a n t spe e d v along a horizont a l str ai g h t
road. Ther e is a total resistive forc e F acting on the car.

Deduc e that the powe r P to over co m e the force F is P = Fv .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) A car drives up a str aig h t incline tha t is 4.8 km long. The total heigh t
of the incline is 0.30 km.

The car moves up the incline at a ste a dy spe e d of 16 m s –1 . During the


climb, the aver a g e friction force acting on the car is 5.0  10 2 N. The
total weigh t of the car and the drive r is 1.2  10 4 N.

(i) Dete r mi n e the time it take s the car to travel from the botto m to
the top of the incline.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the work done agains t the gravit a tion a l force in
travelling from the botto m to the top of the incline.

IB Questionbank Physics 1562


.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1563


(iii) Using your ans w e r s to (c)(i) and (c)(ii), calcula t e a value for the
minim u m powe r outpu t of the car engine nee d e d to move the car
from the botto m to the top of the incline.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(4)

(d) From the top of the incline, the roa d continu e s downw a r d s in a
str aig h t line. At the point whe r e the roa d sta r t s to go down w a r d s , the
driver of the car in (c), stops the car to look at the view. In continui n g
his jour n ey, the driver decid e s to save fuel. He switc h e s off the engine
and allows the car to move freely down the hill. The car desc e n d s a
heigh t of 0.30 km in a dist a n c e of 6.4 km befor e levelling out.

The aver a g e resistive force acting on the car is 5.0  10 2 N.

IB Questionbank Physics 1564


Estim a t e

(i) the accel e r a t io n of the car down the incline.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(5)

(ii) the spee d of the car at the botto m of the incline.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(e) In fact, for the last few hund r e d met r e s of its journ e y down the hill,
the car travels at const a n t spe e d. Stat e the value of the friction al forc e
acting on the car whilst it is moving at cons t a n t spe e d.

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 18 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1565


96 1 . Radioactive decay

(a) Carbo n- 14 is a radioac tive isotop e with a half- life of 5500 yea rs. It is
prod u c e d in the atmos p h e r e by neut r o n bom b a r d m e n t of nitrog e n .
The equa tio n for this reactio n is

14
7 N  01 n  14
6 C X.

(i) Explain what is mea n t by isotop e s .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) Identify the particle X.

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(b) Each gra m of a living tree cont ai n s app r oxi m a t e ly 4  10 10 atom s of


car bo n- 14.

On the axes below, draw a gra p h to show the variation with time of
the num b e r of carbo n- 14 atom s in one gra m of wood from a tre e. Your
grap h should indicat e the num b e r of atom s for a period of 1.8  10 4
years after the tree has died. (Half- life of car bo n- 14 = 5500 yea rs)

IB Questionbank Physics 1566


(3)

(c) The activity of a radioac tive sam pl e is propo r tio n a l to the num b e r of
atom s in the sam pl e. The activity per gra m of carbo n from a living
tree is 9.6 disint e g r a t i o n s per minut e . The activity per gra m of car bo n
in burn t wood found at an ancie n t cam p si t e is 1.9 disint e g r a t i o n s per
minut e.

(i) Estim a t e the num b e r of atom s of car bo n- 14 in the bur n t wood.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) From the gra p h you have draw n in (b), estim a t e the age of the
bur n t wood.

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

96 2 . The gra p h below shows the overall relative light absor p tio n curve for the
light- sensitive cells involved in scotopic vision. The rela tive light absor p ti o n
is expr e s s e d as a perc e n t a g e of the maxim u m .

IB Questionbank Physics 1567


re la tiv e lig h t a b s o rp tio n

100

60

80

40

20

0
400 500 600 700
wavelen g t h / nm

(a) Stat e the nam e of the cells involved in sc o t o p i c vision.

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1568


(b) (i) On the axes above, sketc h a rela tive light abso r p ti o n
curve for a cell involved in pho t o p i c vision.
(2)

(ii) Stat e the colour to which the cell is most sensitive.

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(c) Outline how colour blindn e s s may arise from defec t s in the retin a’s
light sensitive cells.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1569


96 3 . This ques tion is abou t the Rayleigh crite rion.

(a) Light from two monoc h r o m a t i c dista n t point sourc e s , S 1 and S 2 , is


inciden t on a nar r o w slit. After pas sin g throu g h the slit, the light is
inciden t on a scre e n.

On the axes below, draw the inte nsi ty distrib u tio n of the diffrac t e d
light on the scre e n from each sourc e whe n the image s of S 1 and S 2 are
just resolve d accor di n g to the Rayleigh crite rio n.

(3)

(b) A wom a n views an appr o a c h i n g car at night. The ape r t u r e s of her eyes
are each of diam e t e r 3.0 mm. The hea dl a m p s of the car are sepa r a t e d
by a dista n c e of 1.2 m and emit light of wavele n g t h 400 nm.

Calcula t e the dista n c e of the car from the wom a n at which the imag e s
of the two hea dl a m p s are just resolve d.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1570


(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1571


96 4 . This ques tion is abou t polarizatio n.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by polariz e d light.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Polarized light of intensi ty I 0 is incide n t on an analys e r. The


tran s m i s sio n axis of the analys e r make s an angle θ with the direc tio n
of the elect ric field of the light.

(i) Calculat e, in ter m s of I 0 , the inte nsi ty of light tra n s m i t t e d


thro u g h the analys e r whe n θ = 60 .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show the variation with
angle θ of the intensity of the tra n s m i t t e d light.

(2)

(c) Outline how polarizin g sungl a s s e s redu c e glar e from a reflectin g


surfac e.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1572


.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1573


96 5 . This ques tion is abou t wave- particle duality.

(a) Descri b e the de Broglie hypot h e si s .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) An elect r o n is accel e r a t e d from rest throu g h a pote n t i al differ e n c e of


1250 V. Deter m i n e the associa t e d de Broglie wavele n g t h of the
accel e r a t e d elect r o n.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

96 6 . This ques tion is abou t line spec t r a .

(a) Light is emitt e d from a gas disc h a r g e tube. Outline briefly how the
visible line spect r u m of this light may be obtain e d .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1574


(b) The table below gives infor m a t io n relatin g to thr e e of the wavele n g t h s
in the line spect r u m of atomic hydrog e n .

Pho t o n en e r g y /  10 − 19
Wavel e n g t h /  10 − 9 m
J

1880 1.06

656 3.03

486 4.09

Deduc e that the photon ene r gy for the wavele n g t h of 486  10 − 9 m is


4.09  10 − 19 J.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The diagr a m below shows two of the ene r gy levels of the hydr og e n
atom, using dat a from the table above. An elect r o n tra n si tio n betw e e n
thes e levels is also shown.

(i) On the diagr a m above, cons t r u c t the othe r ene r gy level nee d e d
to prod u c e the ener gy cha n g e s show n in the table above.
(1)

(ii) Draw labelled arrow s to rep r e s e n t the ene r gy cha n g e s for the
two other wavelen g t h s show n in the table above.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1575


(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1576


96 7 . This ques tion is abou t the photo el e c t r i c effect.

In an experi m e n t to inves tig a t e the photoel e c t ri c effect, light of freq u e n c y f


is inciden t on the met al surface A show n in the diagr a m below. A pote n t i al
differ e n c e is applied betw e e n A and elect r o d e B. The photoel e c t r i c curr e n t
is meas u r e d by the micro a m m e t e r . (No t e : the com pl e t e electrical circuit is
not sho w n.)

(a) Indicat e on the diag r a m the pola rity of A and of B.


(1)

(b) The frequ e n c y f of the light is red uc e d and it is found tha t the r e is a
frequ e n c y f 0 , the thr es h ol d frequ e n c y, below which the microa m m e t e r
does not indicat e a cur r e n t . Explain how Einst ei n’s photo el e c t ri c
theor y accou n t s for this obse rv a tio n.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1577


(c) The poten t i al differ e n c e betw e e n A and B is now reve r s e d . For a
particul a r frequ e n cy of the light, the pote n ti al differe n c e is cha n g e d
until ther e is zero curr e n t in the circuit. The gra p h below shows the
variation of frequ e n cy f of the light with the pote n ti al differ e n c e , V s ,
for zero cur r e n t .

Explainin g your working, use the gra p h to det e r m i n e the

(i) thre s h ol d frequ e n c y.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) work function, in eV, of the met al.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1578


96 8 . In a comp u t e r code, text (lett e r s , spa c e s and punc t u a t i o n mark s) is
repr e s e n t e d by binary num b e r s . The lett e r “E” is rep r e s e n t e d by the two
four bit binary num b e r s below.

0100 and 0101

(a) Define least significan t bit .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Calcula t e the decim al equivale n t for the two four bit bina ry num b e r s .

0100 .........................................................................................................
................

0101 .........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(c) Using this comp u t e r code stat e how many sepa r a t e bits would be
need e d to repr e s e n t the following phr a s e .

IBO Physics is easy!

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1579


(d) Discus s , in ter m s of repr o d u c i bilty and port a bility, the disa dva n t a g e s
of storin g text in analog u e rat h e r tha n digit al form.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(5)

(e) Stat e on e enviro n m e n t a l implica tion of storin g text in analog u e form.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

96 9 . A digital cam e r a is used to photo g r a p h an object. Two points on the objec t


are sepa r a t e d by 0.002 0 cm. The cha r g e d couple d device (CCD) in the
cam e r a has a collectin g area of 16 cm 2 and cont ai n s 4.0 meg a pixels. The
mag nification of the cam e r a is 1.5.

(a) Define magnificatio n .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1580


(b) Deduc e that the imag e s of the points can be resolve d.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

97 0 . The diagr a m below show s an inverti n g amplifier circuit.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an invertin g am plifie r circ uit.

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1581


(b) The input voltag e is 12 mV. Calcula t e

(i) the curr e n t in the 150 k Ω resisto r .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) the pot en ti al differ e n c e betw e e n A and B.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(c) Outline any ass u m p ti o n s tha t you have mad e in (b).

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

97 1 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic kine m a t i c s .

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an inerti al fram e of refe r e n c e .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1582


(b) A space c r a f t is moving with a spe e d of 0.80c with res p e c t to obse r v e r s
on Eart h. After 6.0 year s of travel, accor di n g to the spac e c r a f t clocks,
the space c r af t arrives at a dista n t solar syste m .

(i) Calculat e the time the journ e y has take n accor di n g to an


obse rv e r on Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(ii) Calculat e the dista n c e betw e e n the Eart h and the sola r syste m
accor di n g to an obse rv e r on Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(iii) The spac ec r af t obse rv e r s send a signal to Eart h to anno u n c e that


they have arrive d at the solar syste m . The spa c e c r a f t continu e s
to move. Dete r m i n e how long it will take the signal to arrive on
Eart h accor di n g to the spa c e c r a f t obse rv e r s .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1583


97 2 . This ques tion is abou t funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s .

(a) The Feyn m a n diagr a m below repr e s e n t s a β– dec ay via the weak
inter a c ti o n proce s s .

The excha n g e particle in this weak inter a c t io n is a virtual particle.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by a virtu al par ticl e.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) Dete r mi n e whet h e r the virtu al particle in the proc e s s


repr e s e n t e d by the Feyn m a n diag r a m is a W + , a W – or a Z 0
boson.

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)


(b) The orde r of mag nit u d e of the mas s of the W and Z 0 boson s is 100
GeV c –2 . Estim a t e the rang e of the weak inter a c ti o n.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1584


97 3 . This ques tion is abou t a proto n.

The proto n is mad e out of thre e qua r k s.

(a) Explain why the thr e e qua r k s in the proton do not violat e the Pauli
exclusion principle.

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

1
(b) Quark s have spin 2 . Explain how it is possible for the proton to also
1
have spin 2 .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

97 4 . This ques tion is abou t star s.

Betelg e u s e and Rigel are two supe r giant s in the const ell a tion of Orion.

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n a const ellation and a stellar clust e r .

Cons t ella tio n: .................................................................................


.........................

.................................................................................
.........................

Stellar clust e r:
.................................................................................
.........................

.................................................................................
.........................
(2)

(b) The star Betelg e u s e has a par all ax of 0.007 7 arc secon d. Deduc e tha t
its dista n c e from Eart h is appr oxi m a t e ly 130 pc.

.................................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1585


.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) Stat e why the Hippa r c o s satellite which orbits Eart h is able to
mea s u r e stellar par allaxe s for sta r s at conside r a b ly gre a t e r dist a n c e s
than 130 pc.

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1586


(d) The table below gives som e infor m a ti o n abou t the type s and
magni t u d e s of Betelg e u s e and Rigel.

Appar e n t Appar e n t
Star Type Colo ur
ma g n i t u d e bri g h t n e s s

Betelge u 2.0  10 − 7 W
M −0.04
se m −2

3.4  10 − 8 W
Rigel B 0.12
m −2

(i) Compl et e the above table for the colour s of the sta r s.
(2)

(ii) Stat e why Betelg e u s e has a lower appa r e n t mag nit u d e tha n
Rigel.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(iii) Given that the dista n c e of Betelg e u s e from Eart h is 130 pc,
calcula t e the luminosity of Betelg e u s e .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(4)

(iv) The luminosity of Rigel is 2.3  10 31 W. Without any furt h e r


calcula tion, explain whe t h e r Rigel is close r or furt h e r tha n
Betelg e u s e from Eart h.

IB Questionbank Physics 1587


.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

97 5 . This ques tion is abou t Olber s’ par a d ox.

(a) Newt o n ass u m e d that the univer s e is sta tic and that the sta r s are
unifor mly distrib u t e d . Stat e on e furt h e r assu m p t i o n of the Newt o ni a n
univer s e .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Explain how Newt o n’s ass u m p t io n s led to Olbe r s’ par a d ox.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(5)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1588


97 6 . This ques tion is abou t amplit u d e- modula t e d radio waves.

The diagr a m below show s a sketc h gra p h of signal volta g e agains t time for
an amplit u d e- modulat e d radio wave.

(a) The inform a t io n signal consist s of a contin uo u s single frequ e n c y sine


wave. The freq u e n cy of the car ri e r wave is 18 kHz.

(i) Dete r mi n e the freq u e n c y of the infor m a ti o n signal.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(ii) On the axes below, dra w the powe r spec t r u m for the amplit u d e-
modula t e d wave.
(Nu m e ri cal values are not requir e d on the powe r axis.)

(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1589


(b) The block diagr a m below shows the princip al syste m s in a radio tha t
receive s an amplitu d e- modul a t e d signal. The unla b ell e d boxes
repr e s e n t amplifier s.

(i) Label the blank boxes with the type of amplifier use d.
(1)

(ii) Stat e the function of the demo d ul a t o r .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1590


97 7 . The gra p h below shows the varia tion with time t of the volta g e V of an
analog u e signal.

The signal is sam pl e d at a frequ e n c y of 200 Hz and digitize d using a thr e e-


bit analog u e to digital conver t e r (ADC). The first sam pl e is take n at t = 0.

The possible outpu t s of the ADC are given below.

(a) Calcula t e the time at which the fourt h sam pl e is take n.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Deter m i n e the binary outp u t of the fourt h sam pl e.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1591


..................
(2)

(c) The ADC outpu t is fed into a thre e- bit digital to analog u e conve r t e r
(DAC). Stat e, and explain, whet h e r the outpu t of the DAC will be a
faithful repr o d u c t io n of the original analog u e signal.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

97 8 . This ques tion is abou t com m u ni c a t i o n cha n n e l s.

(a) Stat e the order of mag nit u d e of the frequ e n ci e s use d for
com m u ni c a t io n with geost a ti o n a r y satellit e s.

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) A voice com m u ni c a t io n cha n n e l is to be est a blis h e d betw e e n a


scientific base in the nort h e r n hemis p h e r e and its hea d q u a r t e r s in the
sout h e r n hemis p h e r e .

For this com m u ni c a t io n cha n n e l, stat e and explain on e adva n t a g e of


using

(i) a geos t a ti o n a r y satellite.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) a polar orbiting sat ellite.

.........................................................................................................
................

IB Questionbank Physics 1592


.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1593


(c) Stat e on e reas o n why the up- link frequ e n c y and the down- link
frequ e n c y for com m u ni c a t io n satellite s are differ e n t .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

97 9 . This ques tion is abou t laser light.

(a) Stat e two differ e n c e s bet w e e n the light emitt e d by a lase r and tha t
emitt e d by a filam e n t lamp.

1. .........................................................................................................
................

2. .........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(b) The produ c tio n of laser light relies on popul a tio n inver sion. Outline
the mea ni n g of the ter m popul a tion inver sio n.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1594


98 0 . This ques tion is abou t an astr o n o m i c a l telesc o p e .

(a) The diagr a m below shows two rays of light from a dist a n t sta r incide n t
on the objective of an astr o n o m i c a l teles co p e . The pat hs of the rays
are also show n after they pass thro u g h the objective lens and are
inciden t on the eyepiec e lens of the teles co p e .

The princip al focus of the objec tive lens is F O .

On the diag r a m above, mar k the position of the

(i) princip al focus of the eyepie c e lens (label this F E ).


(1)

(ii) imag e of the star form e d by the objec tive lens (label this I).
(1)

(b) Stat e wher e the final imag e is form e d whe n the teles c o p e is in nor m a l
adjus t m e n t .

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) Complet e the diagr a m in (a) to show the direc tio n in which the final
imag e of the star is form e d for the teles c o p e in nor m al adjus t m e n t .
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1595


(d) The eye ring of an astro n o m i c a l teles c o p e is a device tha t is place d
outsid e the eyepiec e lens of the telesc o p e at the position whe r e the
imag e of the objective lens is form e d by the eyepiec e lens. The
diam e t e r of the eye ring is the sam e as the dia m e t e r of the image of
the objective lens. This ens u r e s that all the light pas si n g thro u g h the
teles co p e pass e s throu g h the eye ring.

A particul a r astro n o m i c al teles c o p e has an objec tive lens of focal


lengt h 98.0 cm and an eyepie c e lens of focal lengt h 2.00 cm ( ie f O =
98.0 cm, f E = 2.00 cm). Dete r mi n e the position of the eye ring.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1596


98 1 . This ques tion is abou t interf e r e n c e and diffrac tio n.

Light from a laser is inciden t on two slits of equal width. After pas sin g
thro u g h the slits, the light is incide n t on a scr e e n . The diagr a m below
shows the inten sity distri b u tio n of the light on the scre e n .

(a) The wavele n g t h of the light from the lase r is 633 nm and the angul a r
sepa r a t i o n of the bright fringe s on the scr e e n is 4.00  10 –4 rad.
Calcula t e the sepa r a t io n of the slits.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)

(b) Light from the laser is incide n t on many slits of the sam e widt h as the
width s of the slits above. Draw, on the above diag r a m , a possible new
intensity distrib u tio n of the light on the scre e n .
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1597


(c) The laser is replac e d by a sourc e of white light. Desc ri b e , if any, the
chan g e s to the fringe s on the scre e n.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

98 2 . The volum e V of a cylinde r of height h and radius r is given by the


expr e s si o n

V = πr 2 h .

In a particul a r experi m e n t , r is to be dete r m i n e d from mea s u r e m e n t s of V


and h . The unce r t a i n ti e s in V and in h are as show n below.

V 7 %

h 3 %

The app r oxi m a t e unce r t ai n t y in r is

A. 10 %.

B. 5 %.

C. 4 %.

D. 2 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1598


98 3 . The gra p h below shows the varia tion with time t of the velocity v of an
object moving on a str ai g h t- line.

Which of the gra p h s below bes t repr e s e n t s the variatio n with time t of the
accele r a ti o n a of the object?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1599


98 4 . The variation with time of the vertic al spe e d of a ball falling in air is show n
below.

During the time from 0 to T , the ball gains kinetic ene r gy and loses
gravit a tion al poten t i al ener gy ΔE p . Which of the following sta t e m e n t s is
true?

A. ΔE p is equ al to the gain in kinetic ene r gy.

B. ΔE p is grea t e r than the gain in kinetic ene r gy.

C. ΔE p is equ al to the work done agains t air resist a n c e .

D. ΔE p is less than the work done agains t air resist a n c e .


(Tot al 1 mar k )

98 5 . A satellite is in orbit abou t Eart h. The sat ellite move s to an orbit close r to
Eart h. Which of the following corr e c tly gives the cha n g e in the pot e n ti al
ene r gy and the kinetic ene r gy of the sat ellite ?

cha n g e in pot e n t i a l en e r g y ch a n g e in kin e t i c en e r g y

A. decr e a s e s incr e a s e s

B. decr e a s e s dec r e a s e s

C. incr e a s e s incr e a s e s

D. incr e a s e s dec r e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1600


98 6 . A space c r af t orbit s Eart h. An astro n a u t inside the spac e c r a f t feels
“weigh tl e s s ” beca u s e

A. the gravit a tio n al field in the spac e c r a f t is negligible.

B. the Ear t h exert s equal force s on the spac e c r a f t and the astr o n a u t .

C. the space c r af t and the astr o n a u t have the sam e accel e r a ti o n towa r d s
the Ear t h.

D. the space c r af t and the astr o n a u t exer t equal and opposit e forc es on
each other .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

98 7 . Which of the following diag r a m s best rep r e s e n t s the gravit a tion a l


equipot e n ti al surfac e s due to two equ al sphe ri c al mass e s ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

98 8 . The inter n al ener gy of a solid subs t a n c e is equal to the

A. aver a g e kinetic ene r gy of the molec ul e s.

B. total kinetic ener gy of the molec ul e s.

C. total pote n ti al ener gy of the molec ul e s.

D. total pote n ti al and total kinetic ene r gy of the molec ul e s.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1601


98 9 . A gas is cont ai n e d in a cylinde r fitted with a piston as show n below.

When the gas is com p r e s s e d rapidly by the piston its tem p e r a t u r e rises
bec a u s e the molec ul e s of the gas

A. are sque ez e d close r toget h e r .

B. collide with each other more frequ e n t ly.

C. collide with the walls of the cont ai n e r more freq u e n t ly.

D. gain ene r gy from the moving piston.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

99 0 . An oper a ti n g refrig e r a t o r with its door ope n is plac e d in a the r m a lly


insulat e d room.

The refrig e r a t o r oper a t e s for a long period of time. Which of the following
corr e c tly gives the chan g e in tem p e r a t u r e and the entr o py of the air in the
room?

Tem p e r a t u r e Entr o py

A. incr e a s e s incr e a s e s

B. incr e a s e s decr e a s e s

C. decr e a s e s decr e a s e s

D. decr e a s e s incr e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1602


99 1 . The diagr a m shows the pres s u r e / volu m e (p /V ) diag r a m for one cycle PQRS
of an engin e.

In which sections of the cycle is work done on the engine ?

A. SP only

B. PQ only

C. SP and PQ only

D. RS and SP only
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1603


99 2 . The gra p h below shows the varia tion with time t of the displa c e m e n t x of a
par ticl e unde r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion.

Which gra p h corr e c tly shows the variation with time t of the accele r a ti o n a
of the par ticle?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1604


99 3 . The two grap h s show the variatio n with time of the individu al
displac e m e n t s of two waves as they pass thro u g h the sam e point.

The displac e m e n t of the res ult a n t wave at the point at time T is equal to

A. x1 + x2.

B. x1 – x2 .

C. A1 + A2.

D. A1 – A2.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1605


99 4 . A tube is filled with wat e r and a vibra ti n g tunin g fork is held above its open
end.

The tap at the bas e of the tube is open e d . As the wate r runs out, the sound
is loude s t when the wate r level is a dista n c e x below the top of the tube. A
secon d loud sound is hear d whe n the wat e r level is a dist a n c e y below the
top. Which of the following is a corr e c t expr e s si o n for the wavele n g t h λ of
the sound produ c e d by the tuning fork?

A. λ= y

B. λ = 2x

C. λ= y −x

D. λ = 2( y − x )
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1606


99 5 . A sour c e S, moving at const a n t spe e d, emits a sound of const a n t frequ e n c y.
The sourc e pass e s by a station a r y obse rv e r O, as show n below.

Which of the following shows the variatio n with time t of the freq u e n c y f
obse rv e d at O as the sour c e S appr o a c h e s and pass e s by the obs e rv e r ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1607


99 6 . Unpol arize d light of inten sity I 0 is incide n t on a pola riz e r . The tra n s m i t t e d
light is then incide n t on a secon d pola riz e r. The axis of the secon d polarize r
make s an angle of 60  to the axis of the first polariz e r.

1
.
The cosine of 60  is 2 The intensity of the light tra ns m i t t e d throu g h the
secon d polarize r is

A. I0 .

I0
.
B. 2

I0
.
C. 4

I0
.
D. 8
(Tot al 1 mar k )

99 7 . Two binary star s emit radio wave s of wavele n g t h 6.0  10 − 2 m. The wave s
are receive d by a radio teles co p e whos e collectin g dish has a dia m e t e r of
120 m. The two star s are just resolve d if their mi n i m u m ang ul a r
sepa r a t i o n in radia n s is of the orde r of

A. 2  10 4 .

B. 2  10 2 .

C. 5  10 –2 .

D. 5  10 –4 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1608


99 8 . An AC gene r a t o r prod u c e s a volta g e of pe a k value V . The freq u e n c y of
rota tio n of the coil of the gen e r a t o r is doubl e d. The rm s value of the
voltag e produ c e d is

V
.
A. 2 2

V
.
B. 2

C. V 2.

D. 2V 2 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

99 9 . A powe r station gene r a t e s elect ric a l ene r gy at a pote n ti al differ e n c e V and


curr e n t I. The resis t a n c e of the tra n s m i s sio n lines betw e e n the powe r
station and the cons u m e r is R .

The powe r lost in the tran s m i s si o n lines is

A. 0.

V2
.
B. R

C. RI 2 .

D. VI .
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1609


10 0 0 . Which of the following provide s evide nc e for de Broglie’s hypot h e s i s
conce r ni n g matt e r waves ?

A. Elect r o n diffraction

B. Atomic ener gy levels

C. Nucle a r ener gy levels

D. The photo el ec t r i c effect


(Tot al 1 mar k )

10 0 1 . Which of the following corr e c tly identifie s the mas s and mom e n t u m of
a photon ?

Mas s Mo m e n t u m

A. zero zero

B. zero non- zero

C. non- zero zero

D. non- zero non- zero


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1610


10 0 2 . Light of wavele n g t h λ is incide n t on a met al surf ac e in a vacuu m .
Photoel e ct r o n s are emitt e d from the surfa c e of the met al.

Which of the following bes t shows the varia tio n with λ of the maxim u m
kinetic ene r gy E K of the emitt e d elect r o n s ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

10 0 3 . A radioa c tive isotop e has a half- life of five minut e s . A partic ul a r


nucle u s of this isotop e has not dec ay e d within a time interv al of five
minut e s . A corr e c t stat e m e n t about the next five minut e inte rval is that
this nucleu s

A. has a lower than 50 % cha nc e of dec ayin g.

B. will cert ai nly decay.

C. has a 50 % chan c e of decaying.

D. has a bett e r than 50 % cha n c e of dec aying.


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1611


10 0 4 . A bea m of elect r o n s of uniqu ely define d wavele n g t h λ is incide n t on an
ape r t u r e of heigh t d . The bea m is travelling along the x direc tio n. The
height d is of the sam e order as λ.

After passin g throu g h the aper t u r e , the compo n e n t of mom e n t u m in the x


direction is p x and the compo n e n t in the z direc tio n is p z . Which of the
following shows the uncer t ai n t y in p x and the unc e r t a i n t y in p z ?

Δp x Δp z

A. 0 0

h
B. 0
4πd
h
C. 0
4πd
h h
D.
4πd 4πd
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1612


10 0 5 . A free elect r o n is confined within a one dime n sio n al region of fixed
lengt h. Which of the diag r a m s below show s the four lowes t ene r gy levels of
the elect r o n ?

(Tot al 1 mar k )

10 0 6 . Which of the following corr e c tly desc rib e s the natu r e of the ene r gy
spect r a of alpha (α), bet a (β), and ga m m a (γ) radia tio n?

α β γ

A. discr e t e contin uo u s disc r e t e

B. continu o u s disc r e t e disc r e t e

C. discr e t e disc r e t e contin uo u s

D. continu o u s contin uo u s disc r e t e


(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1613


10 0 7 . The binary equivale n t of the num b e r 12 is

A. 1010.

B. 1100.

C. 0011.

D. 0101.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

10 0 8 . The dept h of a “pit” on a CD is 150 nm. The wavele n g t h of the lase r


used to rea d the infor m a ti o n on the CD must be

A. 600 nm.

B. 450 nm.

C. 300 nm.

D. 150 nm.
(Tot al 1 mar k )

10 0 9 . The amou n t of char g e that builds on a pixel in a cha r g e d couple d


device (CCD) is propo r tio n al to which prop e r t y of the incide n t light?

A. Inten sity

B. Wavelen g t h

C. Freq u e n c y

D. Amplitud e
(Tot al 1 mar k )

IB Questionbank Physics 1614


10 1 0 . This ques tio n is about the elect ric al powe r available from a wind
turbin e.

The maxim u m elect rical powe r gene r a t e d by a wind tur bi n e , P out , was
meas u r e d over a ran g e of incide n t wind spe e d s , v in .

The gra p h below shows the varia tion with v in of P out . Unc e r t a i n ti e s for the
dat a are not show n.

vin .
(a) It is sugg e s t e d that P out is propo r tio n a l to

(i) Draw the line of best- fit for the data points.
(1)

(ii) Stat e on e reas o n why the line you have dra w n does not suppo r t
this hypot h e s i s .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(iii) The unce r t a i n t y in the powe r at 15 m s –1 is 5 %. Draw an erro r

IB Questionbank Physics 1615


bar on the grap h to repr e s e n t this unc e r t a i n t y.
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1616


(b) The theo r e ti c al relations hi p betw e e n the available powe r in the wind,
P in , and incide n t wind spe e d is show n in the gra p h below.

Using both grap h s ,

(i) det e r m i n e the efficie ncy of the turbin e for an incide n t wind spe e d
of 14 m s –1 .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1617


(ii) sugg e s t , withou t calcula tion, how the efficiency of the turbin e
chan g e s with incr e a si n g wind spe e d.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(c) Outline on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dva n t a g e of using wind tur bin e s
to gen e r a t e elect ri cal ener gy.

Advant a g e : .................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................
..................

Disadv a n t a g e : .................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1618


10 1 1 . This ques tio n is about optical resolutio n.

The two point sour c e s show n in the diagr a m below (not to scale) emit light
of the sam e frequ e n c y. The light is incide n t on a rect a n g u l a r nar r o w slit
and, after passin g throu g h the slit, is brou g h t to a focus on the scre e n .

(a) Point sourc e B is cover e d. Using the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to
show how the intensity I of the light from point sour c e A varies with
dista n c e along the scr e e n. Label the curve you have dra w n A.

(2)

(b) Point sourc e B is now uncove r e d . The imag e s of A and B on the scre e n
are just resolved. Using the axes above, sket c h a gra p h to show how
the intensi ty I of the light from point sour c e B varie s with dista n c e
along the scr ee n . Label this curve B.
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1619


(c) The bright star Sirius A is accom p a n i e d by a muc h faint e r sta r, Sirius
B. The mea n dista n c e of the star s from Eart h is 8.1  10 16 m. Unde r
ideal atmos p h e r i c condition s, a telesc o p e with an objec tive lens of
diam e t e r 25 cm can just resolve the sta r s as two sepa r a t e image s.

Assumin g that the aver a g e wavele n g t h emitt e d by the sta r s is 500 nm,
estim a t e the appa r e n t , linea r sepa r a ti o n of the two sta r s .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

10 1 2 . This ques tio n is about polariz a tion and liquid cryst als.

(a) A liquid cryst al has the prop e r t y of being able to rota t e the plane of
polariza tio n of light. Explain wha t is mea n t by the expr e s si o n “able to
rotat e the plan e of polariz a tio n of light”.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1620


(b) The diagr a m below is a repr e s e n t a t i o n of a liquid cryst al display.

P 1 is a polarize r and P 2 is an analys e r . The tra ns m i s sio n axis of P 2 is at


right angles to that of P 1 . E is an elect r o d e . G is a glass plat e upon
which a shap e d elect r o d e is etch e d . Unpola riz e d light is incide n t on
P1.

(i) Stat e, and explain, what the obse rv e r would see if the liquid
cryst al wer e not pres e n t .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) Outline how the applica tion of a pote n ti al differ e n c e betw e e n E


and the elect r o d e etc h e d on G ena bl e s the obs e rv e r to see the
shap e of the elect r o d e .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1621


10 1 3 . This ques tio n is about an ideal gas.

(a) The pres s u r e P of a fixed mas s of an ideal gas is direc tly propo r tio n a l
to the kelvin tem p e r a t u r e T of the gas. That is,

P  T.

Stat e the relation betw e e n the

(i) pres s u r e P and the volum e V for a cha n g e at const a n t


tem p e r a t u r e .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) volum e V and kelvin tem p e r a t u r e T for a cha n g e at a cons t a n t


pres s u r e .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(b) The ideal gas is held in a cylinde r by a move a bl e piston. The pre s s u r e
of the gas is P 1 , its volum e is V 1 and its kelvin tem p e r a t u r e is T 1 . The
pres s u r e , volum e and tem p e r a t u r e are cha n g e d to P 2 , V 2 and T 2
res p e c t ively. The chan g e is broug h t about as illust r a t e d below.

heat e d at const a n t volum e to hea t e d at const a n t pre s s u r e to


pres s u r e P 2 and tem p e r a t u r e T ′volum e V 2 and tem p e r a t u r e
T2

Stat e the relation betw e e n

IB Questionbank Physics 1622


(i) P 1 , P 2 , T 1 and T .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) V 1 , V 2 , T and T 2 .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1623


(c) Use your answ e r s to (b) to ded uc e , that for an ideal gas

PV = KT ,

whe r e K is a const a n t .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tota l 8 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1624


10 1 4 . This ques tio n is about throwin g a stone from a cliff.

Antonia stan d s at the edge of a vertic al cliff and throw s a stone vertic ally
upw a r d s .

The stone leaves Antonia’s hand with a spe e d v =8. 0 m s –1 . Ignor e air
resis t a n c e , the accel er a ti o n of free fall g is 10 m s –2 and all dista n c e
meas u r e m e n t s are taken from the point whe r e the ston e leaves Antonia’s
han d.

(a) Deter m i n e ,

(i) the maxim u m height rea c h e d by the ston e.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) the time take n by the ston e to rea c h its maxim u m heigh t.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1625


(b) The time betw e e n the stone leaving Antonia’s hand and hitting the sea
is 3.0 s. Deter m i n e the heigh t of the cliff.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

10 1 5 . This ques tio n is about gravit a tion a l fields.

(a) Define gravitational field stre n g t h .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The gravit a tio n al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Jupite r is 25 N kg –1


and the radius of Jupiter is 7.1  10 7 m.

(i) Derive an expr e s s io n for the gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h at the
surfac e of a plan e t in ter m s of its mas s M , its radius R and the
gravit a tion al cons t a n t G.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1626


................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1627


(ii) Use your expr e s s io n in (b)(i) above to estim a t e the mas s of
Jupite r.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

10 1 6 . Simple har m o nic motion and the gre e n h o u s e effect

(a) A body is displace d from equilibriu m . Sta t e the two conditions


neces s a r y for the body to execu t e simple har m o nic motion.

1. .........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

2. .........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1628


(b) In a simple model of a meth a n e molec ul e , a hydro g e n atom and the
car bo n atom can be reg a r d e d as two mas s e s att a c h e d by a sprin g. A
hydrog e n atom is much less mas sive tha n the car bo n atom such that
any displace m e n t of the carbo n atom may be ignor e d .

The grap h below show s the variatio n with time t of the displ ac e m e n t x
from its equilibri u m position of a hydrog e n atom in a molec ul e of
met h a n e .

The mas s of hydrog e n atom is 1.7  10 –27 kg. Use dat a from the gra p h
above

(i) to det e r m i n e its amplitu d e of oscillation.

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) to show that the frequ e n c y of its oscillation is 9.1  10 13 Hz.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(iii) to show that the maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of the hydrog e n atom
is 6.2  10 –18 J.

.........................................................................................................
................

IB Questionbank Physics 1629


.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1630


(c) Assumin g that the motion of the hydrog e n atom is simple har m o ni c,
its frequ e n cy of oscillation f is given by the expr e s si o n

1 k
f ,
2π mp

whe r e k is the force per unit displa c e m e n t betw e e n a hydrog e n atom


and the car bo n atom and m p is the mas s of a proton.

(i) Show that the value of k is appr oxi m a t e ly 560 N m –1 .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) Estim a t e , using your answ e r to (c)(i), the maxim u m accel e r a ti o n


of the hydro g e n atom.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1631


(d) Met h a n e is classified as a gre e n h o u s e gas.

(i) Describ e what is mea n t by a gre e n h o u s e gas.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) Elect r o m a g n e t i c radia tio n of frequ e n c y 9.1  10 13 Hz is in the


infrar e d region of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m . Sugg e s t , bas e d
on the infor m a ti o n given in (b)(ii), why met h a n e is classified as a
gree n h o u s e gas.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

10 1 7 . Char g e coupled device (CCD)

(a) A digital cam e r a is used to take a photog r a p h of a plant. The CCD in


the cam e r a has 1.6  10 7 squa r e pixels. Eac h pixel has an are a of 2.3
 10 –10 m 2 . A particul a r leaf of the plant has an are a of 2.5  10 –2 m 2 .
The imag e of the leaf form e d on the CCD is 1.0  10 –3 m 2 . Two
inden t a ti o n s on the leaf are sepa r a t e d by 0.50 mm. Deduc e that it is
unlikely that the imag e s of the two inde n t a t io n s will be resolve d.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1632


.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1633


(b) Light is incide n t on the imag e collec tion are a for a time of 100 ms.
The num b e r of photo n s incide n t on one pixel is 5.5  10 4 . Each pixel
has a qua n t u m efficiency of 80 % and a capa cit a n c e 40 pF.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by qua n t u m efficiency.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) Estim a t e the chan g e in pote n t i al differ e n c e acros s eac h pixel.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(4)

(c) Outline how the variation in pote n ti al differ e n c e acros s individu al


pixels enabl e s a black and white imag e to be produ c e d by a digital
cam e r a .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1634


.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1635


10 1 8 . Nucle a r powe r produ c tio n

(a) With refer e n c e to the conc e p t of fuel enric h m e n t in a nucle a r reac t o r


explain,

(i) the adva n t a g e of enric hi n g the ura ni u m use d in a nucle a r


react o r .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(ii) from an inter n a t io n a l point of view, a possible risk to which fuel


enrich m e n t could lead.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1636


(b) A particul a r nuclea r react o r use s ura ni u m- 235 as its fuel sourc e .
When a nucle u s of urani u m- 235 abso r b s a neut r o n, the following
reac tio n can take place.

235
92 U  01 n  144
Xe  93 08S r 2 01 n
54

The following data are availa ble.

235
U
rest mas s of 92 = 2.189 5  10 5 MeV
c –2
144
rest mas s of 54 Xe = 1.340 8  10 5 MeV
c –2
90
rest mas s of 38 S r = 8.374 9  10 4 MeV
c –2
1
rest mas s of 0 n = 939.5 6 MeV c –2

(i) Show that the ener gy rele a s e d in the rea c tio n is app roxi m a t e ly
180 MeV.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) Stat e the form in which the ene r gy app e a r s .

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(c) The ene r gy relea s e d by one atom of car bo n- 12 during comb u s tio n is
appr oxi m a t ely 4 eV.

(i) Using the answ e r to (b)(i), estim a t e the ratio

e n e r g dy e n s it oy f u r a n iu -m2 3 5
e n e r g dy e n s it of
y c a r b on -1 2 .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1637


................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1638


(ii) Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to your answ e r in (c)(i), on e adva n t a g e
of ura ni u m- 235 comp a r e d with fossil fuels.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(d) A sam pl e of was t e prod u c e d by the reac t o r cont ai n s 1.0 kg of


stron ti u m- 90 (Sr- 90). Sr- 90 has a half- life of 9.1  10 8 s.

For the stronti u m in the sam pl e,

(i) show that its initial activity is 5.1  10 15 Bq.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(ii) calcula t e its activity afte r a period of 70 yea rs. (1 yr =3. 2  10 7


s)

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1639


(e) Based on your answ e r s to (d), com m e n t on a proble m associ a t e d with
using urani u m- 235 as an ene r gy sourc e .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 20 mark s )

10 1 9 . Elect r o m a g n e t i c induction

(a) Stat e Lenz’s law.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1640


(b) A long solenoid is conn ec t e d in seri es with a batt e r y and a switch S.
Sever al loops of wire are wra p p e d arou n d the solenoid close to its
midpoin t as show n below.

The ends of the wire are conne c t e d to a high resis t a n c e voltm e t e r V


that has a cent r e zero scale (as show n in the inset diag r a m ). The
switch S is closed and it is obse rv e d that the nee dl e on V move s to the
right and then drops back to zero.

Descri b e and explain, the deflec tion on the voltm e t e r whe n the switc h
S is re- open e d .

Descri ptio n: .................................................................................


..........................

.................................................................................
..........................

.................................................................................
..........................

.................................................................................
..........................

Explan a ti o n: .................................................................................
..........................

.................................................................................
..........................

.................................................................................
..........................

.................................................................................
..........................
(4)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1641


10 2 0 . Mech a ni c al powe r

(a) A car drives up a str aig h t incline tha t is 4.8 km long. The total heigh t
of the incline is 0.30 km.

The car moves up the incline at a ste a dy spe e d of 16 m s –1 . During the


climb, the aver a g e friction force acting on the car is 5.0  10 2 N. The
total weigh t of the car and the drive r is 1.2  10 4 N.

(i) Dete r mi n e the time it take s the car to travel from the botto m to
the top of the incline.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) Dete r mi n e the work done agains t the gravit a tion a l force in
travelling from the botto m to the top of the incline.

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1642


(iii) Using your ans w e r s to (a)(i) and (a)(ii), calcula t e a value for the
minim u m powe r outpu t of the car engine nee d e d to move the car
from the botto m to the top of the incline.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1643


(b) From the top of the incline, the roa d continu e s downw a r d s in a
str aig h t line. At the point whe r e the roa d sta r t s to go down w a r d s , the
driver of the car in (a), stops the car to look at the view. In continui n g
his jour n ey, the driver decid e s to save fuel. He switc h e s off the engine
and allows the car to move freely down the hill. The car desc e n d s a
heigh t of 0.30 km in a dist a n c e of 6.4 km befor e levelling out.

The aver a g e resistive force acting on the car is 5.0  10 2 N.

Estim a t e

(i) the accel e r a t io n of the car down the incline.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(5)

(ii) the spee d of the car at the botto m of the incline.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(c) In fact, for the last few hund r e d met r e s of its journ e y down the hill,

IB Questionbank Physics 1644


the car travels at const a n t spe e d. Stat e the value of the friction al forc e
acting on the car whilst it is moving at cons t a n t spe e d.

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )

10 2 1 . Gravit ation al poten ti al

(a) Define gravitational poten tial at a point in a gravit a tio n a l field.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1645


(b) The grap h below show s the variatio n with dista n c e R from the cent r e
of a plane t of the gravit a tion a l pote n ti al V . The radius R 0 of the plan e t
= 5.0  10 6 m. Values of V are not show n for R  R 0 .

Use the grap h to det e r m i n e the mag nit u d e of the gravit a tio n a l field
str en g t h at the surfac e of the plane t.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1646


(c) A satellite of mass 3.2  10 3 kg is launc h e d from the surfa c e of the
plan e t. Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the minim u m launc h spe e d tha t
the satellite mus t have in orde r to rea c h a heigh t of 2.0  10 7 m above
the surfac e of the plan e t. (You may ass u m e that it rea c h e s its
maxim u m spee d imme di a t e ly afte r launc h.)

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

10 2 2 . Domes tic show e r

(a) The diagr a m below shows part of the hea ti n g circ uit of a dom e s ti c
show e r .

Cold wat e r ente r s the show e r unit and flows over an insula t e d hea ti n g
ele m e n t . The heati n g elem e n t is rate d at 7.2 kW, 240 V. The wat e r
ent e r s at a tem p e r a t u r e of 14 C and leave s at a tem p e r a t u r e of 40 C.
The specific heat cap acity of wate r is 4.2  10 3 J kg –1 K–1 .

(i) Define specific heat capacity .

.........................................................................................................
................

IB Questionbank Physics 1647


.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1648


(ii) Estim a t e the flow rat e of the wate r.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(4)

(iii) Sugg e s t two reas o n s why your answ e r to (a)(ii) is only an


estim a t e .

1. .................................................................................................
..............

.................................................................................................
..............

2. .................................................................................................
..............

.................................................................................................
..............
(2)

(iv) Calculat e the cur r e n t in the hea tin g ele m e n t whe n the elem e n t is
oper a ti n g at 7.2 kW.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1649


(v) Explain why, when the show e r unit is switc h e d on, the initial
curr e n t in the heati n g elem e n t is gre a t e r tha n the curr e n t
calcula t e d in (a)(iv).

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1650


(b) In som e count ri e s , show e r units are oper a t e d from a 110 V supply. A
heatin g elem e n t oper a ti n g with a 240 V supply has resist a n c e R 240
and an elem e n t oper a ti n g from a 110 V supply has resis t a n c e R 110 .

Show that for heati n g elem e n t s to have identic al powe r outpu t s

R1 1 0
0.2 1.
R2 4 0

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )

10 2 3 . Photo el ec t r i c effect

A met al is place d in a vacuu m and light of frequ e n c y f is incide n t on its


surfac e. As a result, elect r o n s are emitt e d from the surfa c e . The gra p h
below shows the variation with frequ e n c y f of the maxim u m kine tic ene r gy
E K of the emitt e d elect r o n s .

IB Questionbank Physics 1651


IB Questionbank Physics 1652
(a) The grap h above shows that the r e is a thr e s h ol d freq u e n c y of the
inciden t light below which no elect r o n s are emitt e d from the surfa c e .
With refer e n c e to the Planc k cons t a n t and the photoel e c t ri c work
function, explain how Einst ei n’s photo el e c t r i c theory accou n t s for this
thr e s h ol d frequ e n cy.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(b) Use the grap h in (a) to calcula t e the

(i) thre s h ol d frequ e n c y.

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) Planck cons t a n t .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(4)

IB Questionbank Physics 1653


(iii) work function of the met al.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )

10 2 4 . This ques tio n is about star s.

Describ e the final nucle a r reaction in the core, and the final evolution a r y
stat e, of

(a) a low- mas s star (of the orde r of 1 solar mas s).

nuclea r reactio n:
.................................................................................
...................

.................................................................................
...................

evolution a r y stat e:
.................................................................................
...................

.................................................................................
...................
(2)

(b) a high- mas s star (of appr oxi m a t e ly 15 solar mas s e s ).

nuclea r reactio n:
.................................................................................
...................

.................................................................................
...................

evolution a r y stat e:
.................................................................................
...................

.................................................................................

IB Questionbank Physics 1654


...................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1655


10 2 5 . This ques tio n is about extr a g a l a c ti c astro p h y sic s.

(a) In an observ a tio n of a dist a n t galaxy, spec t r a l lines are recor d e d .


Spect r al lines at thes e wavele n g t h s canno t be produ c e d in the
labor a t o r y. Explain this phe no m e n o n .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Descri b e how Hubble’s law is use d to dete r m i n e the dista n c e from the
Eart h to dista n t galaxies.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Explain why Hubbl e’s law is not use d to me a s u r e dista n c e s to nea r by
sta r s or near by galaxies (such as Andro m e d a ).

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1656


10 2 6 . The diagr a m below shows an inver tin g amplifie r circ uit.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an invertin g am plifie r circ uit.

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) The input voltag e is 12 mV. Calcula t e

(i) the curr e n t in the 150 k Ω resisto r .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) the pot en ti al differ e n c e betw e e n A and B.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(c) Outline any ass u m p ti o n s tha t you have mad e in (b).

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1657


.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

10 2 7 . In a mobile phon e syst e m an are a is divide d into a large num b e r of


cells.

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by a cell.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) Sugg e s t two advan t a g e s of orga nizing the mobile phon e syste m in this
way.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

10 2 8 . This ques tio n is about X-ray diffrac tio n.

The diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s an arr a n g e m e n t for mea s u r i n g the inte nsi ty
of X-rays scat t e r e d from the surfa c e of a cubic cryst al. The angle betw e e n
the surfac e of the cryst al and the reflect e d ray is θ.

IB Questionbank Physics 1658


IB Questionbank Physics 1659
The diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s two lattice plan e s of the cryst al. The lattic e
ions are repr e s e n t e d by the black dots.

(a) Add lines to the diag r a m above to repr e s e n t the incide n t and
scat t e r e d X-rays, explain why, as the dete c t o r of the scatt e r e d X-rays
is rotat e d , it regist e r s a maxim u m of inte n sity at various value s of the
angle θ.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(b) The wavele n g t h of the incide n t X-rays is 1.2  10 –10 m. The first
maxim u m value of inten si ty is recor d e d at θ = 12 . Show that the
lattice spacin g d in the diagr a m above is 2.9  10 –10 m.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1660


10 2 9 . This ques tio n is about a wedg e film.

In an experi m e n t to mea s u r e the thickn e s s d of a piece of adh e sive tape,


the tape is used to sepa r a t e two flat plat e s of glass as show n below. This
forms a wedg e shap e d air film.

A bea m of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t on the wedg e film. The light that
is reflect e d at right angles to the wedg e , is viewe d using the micros c o p e . A
syste m of par allel fringes of equal spacin g is obse rv e d in the field of view of
the micros c o p e .

(a) Outline how the fringe syste m is form e d.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1661


(b) The spacin g bet w e e n the fringe s is 1.2  10 –4 m. The dista n c e from
whe r e the two plat es of glass touc h and the edg e of the adh e sive tape
is 5.0  10 –2 m. The wavele n g t h of the light is 480 nm. Estim a t e the
thickn e s s d of the adh e sive tape.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

10 3 0 . This ques tio n is about relativistic kine m a t i c s .

(a) Stat e what is mea n t by an inerti al fram e of refe r e n c e .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) A space c r a f t is moving with a spe e d of 0.80c with res p e c t to obse r v e r s


on Eart h. After 6.0 year s of travel, accor di n g to the spac e c r a f t clocks,
the space c r af t arrives at a dista n t solar syste m .

(i) Calculat e the time the journ e y has take n accor di n g to an


obse rv e r on Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

IB Questionbank Physics 1662


.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1663


(ii) Calculat e the dista n c e betw e e n the Eart h and the sola r syste m
accor di n g to an obse rv e r on Eart h.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(iii) The spac ec r af t obse rv e r s send a signal to Eart h to anno u n c e that


they have arrive d at the solar syste m . The spa c e c r a f t continu e s
to move. Dete r m i n e how long it will take the signal to arrive on
Eart h accor di n g to the spa c e c r a f t obse rv e r s .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

10 3 1 . Two elect r o n s are travelling dire c tly towa r d s one anot h e r . Eac h has a
spee d of 0.80c relative to a station a r y obse rv e r . Calcula t e the rela tive
velocity of appr o a c h , as mea s u r e d in the fram e of refe r e n c e of one of the
elect r o n s .

.........................................................................................................................
.....................

.........................................................................................................................
.....................

.........................................................................................................................
.....................

.........................................................................................................................
.....................
(Tota l 3 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1664


IB Questionbank Physics 1665
10 3 2 . This ques tio n is about mas s- ene r gy.

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n the res t mas s- ene r gy of a particl e and its total
ener gy.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(b) The rest mas s of a proton is 938 MeV c –2 . Sta t e the value of its res t
mas s- ener gy.

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(c) A proto n is accele r a t e d from res t throu g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e V


until it reac h e s a speed of 0.980 c. Dete r mi n e the pote n ti al differ e n c e
V as meas u r e d by an obse rv e r at rest in the labor a t o r y fra m e of
refer e n c e .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1666


10 3 3 . The diagr a m below illust r a t e s the distor tion of spa c e by the
gravit a tion al field of a black hole.

(a) (i) Describ e wha t is mea n t by the centr e and the surfac e
of a black hole.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(ii) With refer e n c e to your answ e r in (a)(i), define the Sch w a r z s c hil d
radius .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(iii) Calculat e the Schw a r z s c hild radius for an object having a mas s of
2.0  10 31 kg (ten solar mas s e s ).

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

IB Questionbank Physics 1667


.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1668


(iv) Scienc e fiction freq u e n tly port r a y s black holes as objec ts that
“swallow” everyt hi n g in the unive r s e .

A space c r af t is travelling towa r d s the objec t in (a)(iii) suc h that,


if it contin u e s in a straig h t- line, its dista n c e of close s t app ro a c h
would be about 10 7 m. By refe r e n c e to the diagr a m and your
answ e r in (a)(iii), sugg e s t whet h e r the fate of the spac e c r a f t is
consist e n t with the fate as port r a y e d in scienc e fiction.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(b) In 1979, Wahl, Cars w ell and Weym a n n discove r e d “two” very dist a n t
quas a r s sepa r a t e d by a small angle. Spec t r o s c o pi c exa mi n a tio n of the
imag e s show e d that they wer e identic al.

Outline how thes e obse rv a ti o n s give suppo r t to the theo ry of Gene r a l


Relativity.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

10 3 4 . This ques tio n is about sound inten sity levels.

(a) Disting ui s h betw e e n sound inte nsi ty and loudn e s s .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

IB Questionbank Physics 1669


(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1670


(b) An engin e gen e r a t e s 2.4 W of sound powe r tha t is emitt e d unifor mly
in all direction s . The intensity level at the ear mus t not exce e d 82 dB.
Calcula t e the minim u m dista n c e that any per s o n mus t be from the
engin e unless weari n g ear prot e c tio n. (The surfa c e are a of a sphe r e of
radius r is 4 πr 2 )

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(5)
(Tota l 7 mark s )

10 3 5 . Nucle a r mag n e t i c reson a n c e (NMR) imagin g is a tech ni q u e in which


proton s inside the patie n t are mad e to emit an elect r o m a g n e t i c signal.

(a) Outline the mech a ni s m by which the signal is emitt e d by the proton s .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(4)

(b) Stat e on e adva n t a g e to the patie n t of using NMR imagi ng comp a r e d


to X-ray radiog r a p h y.

IB Questionbank Physics 1671


.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1672


10 3 6 . This ques tio n is about X-rays.

A par allel bea m of X-rays is use d to investi g a t e a broke n bone. The


att e n u a t i o n coefficien t for soft tiss ue (muscle) is 0.035 cm –1 . The X-ray half-
value thickn e s s for bone is about 150 time s less than tha t for soft tissue .

(a) Define the ter m half- value thick n e s s .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)

(b) Deduc e that the atte n u a t i o n coefficie nt for bone is 5.3 cm –1 .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1673


(c) The par all el bea m of X-rays is incide n t on a hum a n leg. The leg has a
bone of diam e t e r 5.0 cm, surr o u n d e d by muscle on eac h side of
thickn e s s 5.0 cm. A section throu g h the leg is show n in the diagr a m
below.

The inten sity of the X-ray bea m at the surfa c e A of the leg is I A. At the
surfac e B of the bone, the inte n sity is I B and the inte n sity of the bea m
eme r gi n g at surfac e C of the bone is I C .

Deter m i n e the ratio

IB
.
(i) IA

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IC
.
(ii) IB

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

IB Questionbank Physics 1674


(d) Use your answ e r s in (c) to explain how it is possible to obtain a
shado w imag e of the leg and bone.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )

10 3 7 . This ques tio n is about dosim e t r y.

(a) Explain what is mea n t by quality factor (rela tive biologic al


effectiven e s s ).

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1675


(b) The radioac tive isotop e potas si u m- 40 occur s natu r ally in the body.
Use the data below to calcula t e the ann u a l dos e equivale n t tha t the
body receives from the dec ay of pota s si u m- 40 within the body.

num b e r of atom s of potas si u m- 40 per kilogr a m of the body = 8.0 


10 18

decay const a n t of potas si u m- 40 = 5.3 


10 –10 year –1

ener gy absor b e d by the body from the dec ay of one atom


of potas si u m- 40 = 4.0  10 –14 J

quality factor of the radiation from dec ay of pota s si u m- 40 = 1

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

10 3 8 . This ques tio n is about radioa c tive isotop e s of iodine.

The isotop e iodine- 131 is used to tre a t malign a n t growt h s in the thyroid
gland. The isotop e has a physic al half- life of 8 days and a biologic al half- life
of 21 days.

(a) Explain the ter m biological half- life.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1676


(b) Calcula t e the effective half- life of the isotop e.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) The isotop e iodine- 123 has a physic al half- life of 13 hour s.

Sugg e s t why it is prefe r a b l e to use this isotop e for ima g i n g the


thyroid rath e r than iodine- 131.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )

(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

10 3 9 . This ques tio n is about funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s.

(a) The Feyn m a n diagr a m below repr e s e n t s a β– dec ay via the weak
inter a c ti o n proce s s .

The excha n g e particle in this weak inter a c t io n is a virtual particle.

(i) Stat e what is mean t by a virtu al par ticl e.

IB Questionbank Physics 1677


.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) Dete mi n e whet h e r the virtu al particle in the proc e s s repr e s e n t e d


by the Feyn m a n diag r a m is a W + , a W – or a Z 0 boson.

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

IB Questionbank Physics 1678



(b) The orde r of mag nit u d e of the mas s of the W and Z 0 boson s is 100
GeV c –2 . Estim a t e the rang e of the weak inter a c ti o n.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )

10 4 0 . This ques tio n is about a proton.

The proto n particle is mad e out of thr e e qua r k s .

(a) Explain why the thr e e qua r k s in the proton do not violat e the Pauli
exclusion principle.

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

1
(b) Quark s have spin 2 . Explain how it is possible for the proton to also
1
have spin 2 .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1679


10 4 1 . This ques tio n is about the synch r o t r o n and par ticle prod u c tio n.

(a) In a synch r o t r o n ring, a bea m of proto n s and anot h e r bea m of


antipr o t o n s move in opposit e direc tio n s thro u g h regions of elect ric
and magn e t i c fields as they circle the ring.

Descri b e the pur po s e of the

(i) elect ric fields.

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) mag n e ti c fields.

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(b) Explain why the mag ni t u d e s of the ma g n e ti c fields in a synch r o t r o n


mus t be incr e a s e d as the ene r gy of the accel e r a t e d particle s
incr e a s e s .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(3)

IB Questionbank Physics 1680


(c) The neut r al lambd a baryo n Λ and its antip a r t i cl e may be prod u c e d in
proto n- antip r o t o n collisions accor di n g to the following rea c tio n.

p p  Λ Λ

The minim u m ene r gy requir e d to prod u c e the Λ and the Λ is 2240


MeV. The rest mas s of the proto n is 938 MeV c –2 .

Calcula t e the mi n i m u m kinetic ene r gy, E K, of the antipr o t o n, in orde r


to produ c e the Λ and Λ par ticl e s when

(i) the proto n and the antipr o t o n are eac h accel e r a t e d to a kinetic
ene r gy E K;

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(1)

(ii) the antip r o t o n is accele r a t e d to a kine tic ene r gy E K and collide s


with a station a r y proton.

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(3)

(d) By refer e n c e to your answ e r s to (c), stat e an adva n t a g e of collisions


betw e e n proto n s and antip r o t o n s in a synch r o t r o n comp a r e d with
collisions betw e e n station a r y proton s and moving antipr o t o n s .

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1681


10 4 2 . (a) Outline

(i) what is mean t by a dee p inelas tic scat t e r i n g expe ri m e n t .

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................

.........................................................................................................
................
(2)

(ii) how deep inelas tic scat t e ri n g expe ri m e n t s give evide n c e in


suppo r t of the existe n c e of qua r k s and gluons.

quar k s : ................................................................
.......................................

................................................................
.......................................

gluons: ................................................................
.......................................

................................................................
.......................................
(4)

(b) Deep inelas tic scat t e ri n g expe ri m e n t s indic at e tha t the qua r k s inside
hadr o n s behav e as free particle s. Sugg e s t a rea so n for this.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(c) Stat e two fund a m e n t a l differ e n c e s betw e e n the sta n d a r d model for
quar k s and lepton s and the theory of string s.

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................

.................................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )

IB Questionbank Physics 1682


IB Questionbank Physics 1683

You might also like